Owner's Manual

OWNER'S MANUAL

VÄLKOMMEN!

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas- you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's sengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com). requirements. TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION SAFETY This is how you find owner's information 14 Safety 60 Integrated booster cushion* 88 Digital owner's manual in the car 15 Safety during pregnancy 60 Folding up the integrated booster 88 cushion* Navigating in the digital owner's manual 16 Whiplash Protection System 61 Folding down the integrated booster Owner's Manual in mobile devices Seatbelt 89 18 62 cushion* Volvo Cars support site 19 Seatbelt tensioner 63 Reading the owner's manual 19 Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt 64 Recording data 22 Door and seatbelt reminder 65 Important information on accesso- 23 Airbags 66 ries, extra equipment and diagnostic socket Driver and passenger airbags 67 Volvo ID 23 Activating/deactivating the passen- 69 ger airbag* Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure 25 Side airbag 71 IntelliSafe-driver support 28 Inflatable curtain 72 Sensus - connection and maintenance 29 Safety mode 72 The owner's manual and the environment 32 Starting/moving the car after safety 73 Windows, glass and mirrors 32 mode Overview of the centre display 33 Child safety 74 Operating the centre display 36 Child seats 74 Navigating in the centre display's views 40 Upper mounting points for child seats 77 Symbols in the centre display's status bar 45 Lower mounting points for child seats 78 Change settings for the centre display 45 Table for location of child seats 79 using the car's seatbelts Function view with buttons for car 47 functions i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 82 Using the keyboard in the centre display 49 Table for location of ISOFIX child seats 83 General information about XC90 54 Table for location of i-Size child seats 87 Twin Engine

2 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Instruments and controls, left-hand 92 Voice recognition control of radio 121 Steering wheel 138 drive car and media Adjusting the steering wheel 139 Instruments and controls, right-hand 93 Voice recognition control of climate 121 drive car control Headlamp control 139 Driver display 95 Voice recognition and map navigation 122 Headlamp levelling 141 Hybrid related information in the 97 Manual front seat 123 Position lamps 142 driver display Power front seat* 124 Daytime running lights 143 Indicator symbols in the driver display 99 Dipped beam Adjusting the power front seat* 124 143 Warning symbols in the driver display 101 Activating/deactivating main beam Using the memory function in the 125 144 Outside temperature gauge 102 power front seat* Active bending lights 147 Clock 103 Multi-functional front seat* 126 Adapting the beam pattern from the 147 headlamps License agreement for the driver display 103 Adjusting functions in the multi-func- 127 tional front seat Application menu in the driver display 109 * Rear fog lamp 148 Easy entry to and exit from the driv- Using the application menu in the 109 130 Brake lights 148 er's seat* driver display Hazard warning flashers 149 Adjusting the passenger seat from 131 Messages in the driver display and 110 Using direction indicators 149 the centre display the driver's seat* Passenger compartment lighting 150 Managing messages in the driver 112 Rear seat 131 Home safe light duration display and the centre display Adjusting the head restraints in the 132 153 Managing messages saved from the 113 second seat row Approach light duration 153 driver display and centre display Adjusting the seat longitudinally in 133 Using windscreen wipers 154 Head-up display* the second seat row 115 Activating/deactivating the rain sensor 154 Voice recognition 118 Adjusting the backrest rake in the 134 second seat row Windscreen and headlamp washers 155 Using voice recognition 119 Lowering backrests in the second 135 Rear window wiper and washer 156 Settings for voice recognition 120 seat row Power windows 157 Voice recognition control of the phone 120 Entry/exit for third seat row 136 Operating power windows 157 Lowering backrests in the third seat row 137 Using the sun blind 158

3 CLIMATE CONTROL Adjusting the door mirrors 159 Resetting user data for change of 184 Climate control 186 ownership Interior rearview mirror 160 Climate control - sensors 186 Compass* 161 Perceived temperature 187 Calibrating the compass* 162 Air quality 187 Panorama roof* 163 Passenger compartment filter 188 Operating the panorama roof* 164 Clean Zone Interior Package* 189 HomeLink®* 167 Interior Air Quality System* 189 Programming HomeLink®* 168 Climate controls 190 Trip computer 170 Climate controls in the centre display 190 Show trip data in the driver display 172 Climate controls at the rear of the 192 tunnel console Show trip statistics in the centre display 173 Auto-regulating the climate 192 Settings view 174 Activating/deactivating air conditioning 193 Categories in the settings view 176 Regulating the temperature 194 Changing system settings in the set- 177 tings view Regulating the fan level 196 Resetting settings in the settings view 178 Activating/deactivating defrost of 198 windows and door mirrors Driver profiles 179 Activating/deactivating air recirculation 200 Selecting driver profile 180 Air distribution 200 Editing a driver profile 180 Changing the air distribution 201 Linking remote control key to driver 181 profile Opening/closing and aiming the air vents 202 Importing/exporting a driver profile 182 Table of air distribution options 203 from/to USB Activating/deactivating heating of 205 Changing settings for apps 183 the seats* Activating/deactivating ventilation of 206 the seats*

4 LOADING AND STORAGE LOCKS AND ALARM Activating/deactivating heating of 207 Passenger compartment interior 222 Remote control key 240 steering wheel* Tunnel console 223 Remote control key range 242 Parking climate 208 Electrical sockets 224 Red Key - Restricted remote control key* 243 Starting/stopping preconditioning 209 Using the cigarette lighter* 228 Antenna locations for the start and 244 Timer for preconditioning 211 lock system Emptying ashtrays* 228 Setting the timer for preconditioning 211 Locking/unlocking from the outside 245 Using the glovebox 229 Activating/deactivating the timer for 213 Indication on locking/unlocking the car 247 preconditioning Sun visors 230 Locking/unlocking from the inside 248 Starting/switching off climate com- 213 Cargo area 230 Deadlocks 250 fort retention Loading 230 Locking/unlocking the tailgate 251 Symbols and messages for parking 215 Load retaining eyelets 232 climate control Activate/deactivate private locking 253 Bag hooks 232 Heater 216 Detachable key blade 254 Cargo cover* 233 Parking heater 217 Locking/unlocking with the detacha- 255 Safety net* 235 Additional heater 218 ble key blade Safety grille* 237 Power operated tailgate* 257 Opening/closing the tailgate with 259 foot movement* Replacing the battery in the remote 261 control key Immobiliser 265 Child safety locks 265 Alarm 267 Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm 268 Disarming the alarm without working 269 remote control key

5 DRIVER SUPPORT Type approval for the remote control 270 Speed-dependent steering force 278 Limitations of Distance Warning* 295 key system Electronic stability control 278 Adaptive cruise control* 296 Sport mode for electronic stability control 279 Activating and starting the adaptive 299 cruise control* Symbols and messages for elec- 280 tronic stability control Managing the speed of the adaptive 300 cruise control* Roll Stability Control 282 Setting the time interval for the Speed limiter* 282 300 adaptive cruise control* Activating and starting the speed limiter 283 Deactivating/activating the adaptive 301 Managing speed for the speed limiter 284 cruise control* Deactivating/reactivating the speed 284 Overtaking assistance with the adap- 303 limiter tive cruise control* or Pilot Assist-2* Switching off the speed limiter 285 Change of target and automatic 304 braking with the Adaptive Cruise Control Automatic speed limiter* 286 Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* 305 Activating/deactivating the automatic 287 speed limiter Change between Cruise control and 305 adaptive cruise control* Changing the tolerance for the Auto- 288 matic speed limiter Symbols and messages for the 307 adaptive cruise control* Cruise control 289 Pilot Assist* 309 Activating and starting the Cruise control 290 Pilot Assist-1* Managing speed for the Cruise control 290 309 Deactivating/reactivating the cruise 291 Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-1* 312 control Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-1 313 Deactivating Cruise Control 292 Deactivating/activating the 314 Distance Warning* 293 Pilot Assist-1* Activating and setting the time inter- 294 Automatic braking with Pilot Assist-1 315 val for Distance warning* Limitations of Pilot Assist-1 316

Pilot Assist-2* 318 Rear Collision Warning 354 Park Assist* 377 Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-2* 321 Blind Spot Information* 354 Activating/deactivating Parking 379 assistance* Managing the speed for Pilot Assist-2* 323 Activate/deactivate Blind Spot 356 Information* Limitations of Parking assistance* 379 Setting the time interval for 324 Pilot Assist-2* Limitations of Blind Spot Information* 357 Messages for Park Assist* 381 Deactivating/activating the 325 Cross Traffic Alert* 357 Park Assist Camera* 382 Pilot Assist-2* Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* 358 Park assist lines and fields for the 384 Change of target and automatic 327 Park Assist Camera* braking with Pilot Assist-2* Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert 359 Starting the Park Assist Camera* Messages for Blind Spot 386 Limitations of Pilot Assist-2* 328 361 Information* and Cross Traffic Alert* Limitations of the Park Assist Camera* 387 Symbols and messages for 330 Pilot Assist-2* Road sign information* 362 Park Assist Pilot* 388 Sign display with Road Sign Information Radar unit 332 362 Parking with Active parking assistance* 390 Speed camera information Limitations of the radar unit 333 364 Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 393 Type approval for radar units Activating/deactivating Road sign 365 Messages for Park Assist Pilot* 395 337 information Camera unit 340 Limitations for Road Sign Information* 366 Limitations of the camera unit 341 Driver Alert Control 366 City Safety 344 Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control 367 Setting the warning distance for City 346 Safety Limitations of Driver Alert Control 368 Detection of obstacles with City Safety™ 347 Lane Keeping Aid 368 Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid City Safety in cross traffic 349 370 Symbols and messages for lane City Safety when evasive manoeu- 350 372 vres are prevented assistance Run-off Mitigation Run-off Mitigation Limitations of City Safety 351 374 Messages for City Safety Symbols and messages for Run-off 376 353 Mitigation

7 STARTING AND DRIVING Alcohol lock* 398 Auto braking after a collision 419 Driving with a trailer under special 440 conditions Bypass of the alcohol lock* 398 Parking brake 419 Trailer Stability Assist* 440 Before starting the engine with the 398 Using the parking brake 420 alcohol lock Towing eye 442 In the event of a fault in the parking 422 Ignition positions 399 brake Towing 442 Starting the car 400 Hill start assist 422 Recovering the car 443 Switching off the car 401 Automatic braking when stationary 423 Charging the hybrid battery 444 Steering lock 402 Low speed control 424 Charging current 445 Using jump starting with another battery 402 Hill descent control 425 Charging cable 446 Gearbox 404 Driving in water 426 Status indication in the charging 449 cable's control unit Gear positions for automatic gearbox 405 Overheating in the engine and drive 426 system Ground fault breaker in the charging 451 Gear shift indicator 407 cable Overloading the starter battery 427 Gear selector inhibitor 408 Temperature monitoring of the 451 Preparations for a long trip 428 Changing gear with steering wheel 408 charging cable Winter driving paddles* 428 Preparation for charging the hybrid 452 Drive systems 409 Opening/closing the fuel filler flap 429 battery and refuelling Drive modes 410 Start charging the hybrid battery 453 Handling of fuel 430 Maintain or increase the hybrid bat- 414 Charge status 454 Petrol tery's state of charge while driving. 431 Stop charging of hybrid battery 456 Driving economically Level control* and shock absorption 414 432 Long-term storage of vehicles with 457 All-wheel drive 416 Electric operation range in urban 433 hybrid batteries environment Brake functions 416 Hybrid-related symbols and messages 458 Towing bracket* 434 Foot brake 416 Extendable/retractable towing brackets* 435 Emergency brake lights 418 Towing bracket specifications* 437 Brake assistance 419 Driving with a trailer 438

8 AUDIO AND MEDIA WHEELS AND TYRES Audio and media 462 Settings for Apple CarPlay* 480 Tyres 508 Apps 462 Technical specifications for media 481 Tyres' rotation direction 509 Audio settings 463 Phone 482 Tread wear indicators on the tyres 510 Radio 464 Connect phone 483 Checking the tyre pressures 510 Changing and searching radio stations 464 Connecting/disconnecting the phone 484 Tyre pressure monitoring 511 RDS radio 467 Managing phone calls 485 Check tyre pressure with the tyre 513 pressure monitoring system Digital radio 468 Managing text messages 486 Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre 514 Linking between different radio 468 Settings for phone 487 pressure monitoring bands FM and DAB Settings for text messages 488 Calibrating the tyre pressure moni- 515 Settings for radio 469 Bluetooth settings 488 toring system Media player 470 Online car* 488 Emergency puncture repair kit 516 Media playback 471 Connecting the car 489 Using the emergency puncture repair kit 517 Gracenote® 473 Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot 491 Inflate tyres with the compressor 521 Searching media 474 from the emergency puncture repair kit No or poor connection 492 CD player* 474 When changing wheels 521 Remove Wi-Fi network 492 Media via Bluetooth 475 Removing a wheel 522 Wi-Fi technologies and security 493 Connecting media via Bluetooth 475 Fitting the wheels 523 Settings for car modem* 493 Media via AUX/USB input 475 Wheel bolts 524 Downloading, updating and uninstal- 494 Connecting media via AUX/USB input 476 ling apps Spare wheel* 524 video 476 License agreement for audio and media 495 Winter wheels 525 Audio settings for media 476 Terms and conditions for services 505 Tool kit 525 and Customer Privacy Policy TV* 477 Warning triangle 526 Settings for TV* 478 Jack* 526 Apple CarPlay* 478 First aid kit 527 Dimension designation for wheel rim 527

9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Dimension designation for tyre 528 Volvo service programme 530 Filling washer fluid 553 Car status 530 Starter battery 554 Book service and repair 531 Symbols on the batteries 557 Remote updates 534 Hybrid battery 557 System updates 534 Fuses 558 Data transmission between car and 535 Replacing a fuse 559 workshop Fuses in engine compartment 560 Raise the car 537 Fuses under glovebox 564 Opening and closing the bonnet 539 Fuses in cargo area 568 Engine compartment overview 540 Cleaning the exterior 572 Engine oil 541 Polishing and waxing 574 Checking and filling with engine oil 542 Rustproofing 575 Topping up coolant 543 Cleaning the interior 575 Servicing the climate control system 545 Cleaning the centre display 576 Bulb replacement 545 Paint damage 577 Replacing the dipped beam bulb 547 Repairing paint damage 578 Removing the headlamp's oval cover 548 Replacing the main beam lamp 549 Replacing daytime running light 549 bulb/position lamp bulb, front Replacing the front direction indica- 550 tor bulb Bulb specifications 550 Wiper blades in service position 551 Replacing a wiper blade 552

10 SPECIFICATIONS ALPHABETICAL INDEX Type designations 580 Alphabetical Index 599 Dimensions 583 Weights 585 Towing capacity and towball load 586 Engine specifications 588 Engine oil — specifications 589 Adverse driving conditions for engine oil 590 Coolant — specifications 591 Transmission fluid — specifications 591 Brake fluid — specifications 591 Fuel tank — volume 592 Air conditioning — specifications 592 Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 594 Approved tyre pressures 596 Hybrid battery — specifications 597

INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION

This is how you find owner's The car's centre display1 Volvo Cars support site information In the centre display, drag down Go to support.volvocars.com Owner's information is available in several differ- the top view and tap on and select your country. Here ent product formats, both digital and printed. Owner's manual. Available you can find owner's manuals, The owner's manual is available in the car's cen- here are options for visual navi- both online and in PDF format. tre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo gation with exterior and interior On the Volvo Cars support site Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a images of the car. The informa- there are also video tutorials supplement to the owner's manual available in tion is searchable and is also and further information and the glovebox, with specifications and fuse infor- divided into categories. help regarding your Volvo and your car owner- mation, amongst other things. A printed owner's ship. The page is available for most markets. manual can be ordered. Mobile app In App Store or Google Play, Printed information search for "Volvo Manual", There is a supplement to the download the app to your owner's manual2 in the glove- smartphone or tablet and select box that contains information the car. Available in the app are on fuses and specifications, as video tutorials and options for well as a summary of important visual navigation with exterior and practical information. and interior images of the car. It is easy to navi- There is also a Quick Guide available in printed gate between the different sections in the format that helps you to get started with the most owner's manual and the content is searchable. commonly used functions in the car. Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner's information may also be available in printed format in the car. A printed owner's manual and associated supplement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to order.

1 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display. 2 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.

14 INTRODUCTION

Changing the language in the car's Digital owner's manual in the car the owner's manual. One way is from the top centre display A digital3 version of the owner's manual is availa- menu, with a tap on . Changing the language in the centre display may ble in the car's centre display. mean that some owner's information does not Symbols and their meaning in the owner's correspond to national or local laws and regula- manual menu tions. Don't change to a language that's difficult to understand, it may then be difficult to find your Leads to the start page of way back in the structure on the screen. the Owner's Manual.

IMPORTANT The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is Articles grouped by cate- also important that the car is maintained and gory. The same article may handled in accordance with Volvo's recom- appear in several categories. mendations in the owner's information. The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top If there should be a difference between the view. information in the centre display and the prin- To open the digital owner's manual - drag down ted information then it is always the printed the top view in the centre display and tap on Leads to a Quick Guide information that applies. Owner's manual. page with links for a selection of articles that can be Related information NOTE particularly useful to read. Provides answers to com- • Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15) The digital owner's manual is not available mon questions about the Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18) while driving. • car. • Volvo Cars support site (p. 19) • Reading the owner's manual (p. 19) There is a range of different options for finding information in the digital owner's manual. The options can be reached from the start page of

3 Applies for most markets. }}

15 INTRODUCTION

|| Symbols and their meaning in the owner's Symbols and their meaning in the owner's Navigating in the digital owner's manual menu manual menu manual The digital owner's manual can be accessed Exterior and interior over- Leads to short video tutori- from the centre display in the car. The content is view images of the car. Dif- als for different functions in searchable and it is easy to navigate between ferent parts are designated the car. different sections. with hotspots that lead to articles about those parts of the car.

Indicates what version of the Owner's Manual is available in the car and provides other useful information.

All articles that have been Related information favourited are compiled here. • Navigating in the digital owner's manual (p. 16) The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top view. Open the digital owner's manual – To open the digital owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual. There is a range of different options for finding information in the digital owner's manual. To access the owner's manual menu – press in the upper bar of the owner's manual.

16 INTRODUCTION

Searching using categories 1. Press and then select Exterior/ Favourites The articles in the owner's Interior. Located here are the articles manual are structured into > Exterior/interior images are shown with that have been saved as main categories and subcate- so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot favourites. Tap on an article in gories. The same article can be leads to articles about the corresponding order to read it in its entirety. found in several appropriate part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the categories in order to be found screen to browse among the images. more easily. 2. Tap on a hotspot. Saving/deleting articles as favourites 1. Categories Press and then select . > The title of the article about the area is Save an article as favourite by pressing at the > The main categories are shown in a list. shown. top right when an article is open. When an article has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in: 2. Tap on a main category ( ). 3. Tap on the title to open the article. To go back, press the back arrow. . > A list of subcategories ( ) and articles To remove an article as a favourite, press the star ( ) is shown. Learn about the car's most common again in the current article. 3. Tap on an article to open it. To go back, functions with the Quick Guide press the back arrow. Leads to a page with links for a Video selection of articles that can be Leads to short video tutorials Hotspots for exterior and interior particularly useful to read in for different functions in the Exterior and interior overview order to get to know the most car. images of the car. Different common functions of the car. parts are designated with hot- The articles can also be spots that lead to articles about accessed via categories, but those parts of the car. are collected here for quick access. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety. Information Tap on the symbol to obtain information about which version of the owner's manual is available in the car as well as other useful information.

}}

17 INTRODUCTION

|| Start page Owner's Manual in mobile devices Tap on the symbol to go back The owner's manual is available as a mobile app to the start page in the owner's from both the App Store and Google Play. The manual. app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.

Using the search function 1. Tap on in the top menu of the owner's manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part of the screen. 2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt". > Suggestions for articles and categories are shown while letters are being entered. 3. Tap on the article/category to access it. Related information The owner's manual can be downloaded as a mobile app • Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15) The mobile app is available from both the App Store and from the App Store or Google Google Play. • Using the keyboard in the centre display Play. The QR code provided (p. 49) here takes you directly to the Related information app. Alternatively, you can • Reading the owner's manual (p. 19) search for "Volvo manual" in • Volvo Cars support site (p. 19) the App Store or Google Play. The app contains a video along with exterior and interior images where different parts of the car are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which lead to articles about the area in question. It is easy to navigate between the different sections in the owner's manual and the content is searchable.

18 INTRODUCTION

Volvo Cars support site Mobile apps Reading the owner's manual More information on your car is available on The owner's manual is available in the form of an A good way of getting to know your new car is Volvo Cars' website and support site. From the app for selected Volvo models from model years to read the owner's manual, ideally before your website, you can also navigate to My Volvo4, a 2014 and 2015. The VOC* app can also be first journey. personalised website for you and your car. accessed from here. Reading the owner's manual is a good way to Owner's manuals from earlier model years Support on the Internet become familiar with new functions, get advice Owner's manuals from earlier model years are on how best to handle the car in different situa- Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code available here in PDF format. The Quick Guide tions and learn how to make the best use of all below to visit the site. The support site is availa- and supplements can also be accessed from the the car's features. Please pay attention to the ble for most markets. support page. Select car model and model year safety instructions contained in the owner's man- to download the required publication. ual. Contact Development work is constantly underway in The support site contains contact details to cus- order to improve our product. Modifications may tomer support and your nearest Volvo dealer. mean that information, descriptions and illustrations in the owner's manual differ from the equip- 4 My Volvo on the Internet ment in the car. We reserve the right to make QR code that leads to the support site. From www.volvocars.com it is possible to navigate modifications without prior notice. The information on the support site is searchable through to My Volvo Web which is a personal Do not remove this manual from the car - if prob- and is divided into different categories. It contains Web page for you and your car. lems should arise then the necessary information support for functions such as web-based services Create a personal Volvo ID, log in to My Volvo about where and how to seek professional help and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC)*, the naviga- Web and get an overview of service, agreements will be missing. tion system* and apps. Videos and step-by-step and warranties, amongst other things. At My instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how Volvo Web there is also information about acces- © Volvo Car Corporation to connect the car to the Internet via a mobile sories and software adapted for your car model. phone. Options/accessories Related information In addition to standard equipment, the owner's Downloadable information • Volvo ID (p. 23) manual also describes options (factory fitted Maps equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment). For cars with the Sensus Navigation option, maps can be downloaded from the support site.

4 Applies to certain markets. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 19 INTRODUCTION

|| All types of option/accessory are marked with an to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a cate the presence of danger which, if the warning asterisk: *. table then letters are used instead of numbers is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or for referral. fatality. The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different Message texts Risk of property damage equipment depending on adaptations for the There are displays in the car that show menu and needs of different markets and national or local message texts. In the owner's manual the laws and regulations. appearance of these texts differs from the normal In the event of uncertainty over what is standard text. Examples of menu texts and message texts: or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer. Phone, New message. Special texts Decals The car contains different types of decal which WARNING are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car Warning texts appear if there is a risk of have the following descending degree of impor- injury. tance for the warning/information. Warning of personal injury White ISO symbols and white text/image on IMPORTANT black or blue warning field and message field. "Important" texts appear if there is a risk of Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if damage. the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property. NOTE NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions.

Footnote The owner's manual contains information in certain locations in the form of a footnote at the bottom of the page or at the end of a table. This Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white information is an addition to the text that it refers text/image on black message field. Used to indi-

20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION

Information When there is a series of illustrations for Related information step-by-step instructions each step is num- Related information refers to other articles con- bered in the same way as the corresponding taining closely associated information. illustration. Images Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series The manual's images are sometimes schematic of illustrations where the order of the instruc- and may deviate from the car's appearance tions is not significant. depending on equipment level and market. Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement. To be continued Arrows with letters are used to clarify a }} This symbol is located furthest down to the movement when the relative order is of no right when an article continues on the following relevance. page. If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- Continued from previous page White ISO symbols and white text/image on step instructions then the different steps are black message field. || This symbol is located furthest up to the left numbered with normal numbers. when an article continues from the previous NOTE Position lists page. It is not intended that the decals illustrated in Red circles containing a number are used in Related information the owner's manual should be exact replicas overview images where different components • Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15) are pointed out. The number recurs in the of those in the car. They are included to show • Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18) their approximate appearance and location in position list featured in connection with the the car. The information that applies to your illustration that describes the item. • Volvo Cars support site (p. 19) particular car is available on the respective Bulleted lists decals for your car. A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual. Procedure lists Example: Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's man- • Coolant ual: • Engine oil

21 INTRODUCTION

Recording data driving conditions. Similarly, the system never Volvo will not contribute to the above-described As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo- information being disclosed to third parties with- certain information about the vehicle's operation, graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit- out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with functionality and incidents are recorded in the uation. However, other parties, such as the police, national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be car. could use the recorded data in combination with forced to disclose information of this nature to the type of personally identifiable information the police or other authorities who may assert a This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special legal right to access such. Special technical Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis- equipment and access to either the vehicle or the equipment which Volvo and workshops that have ter and record data related to traffic accidents or EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis- entered into agreements with Volvo have access collision-like situations, such as times when the tered data. to is required to be able to read and interpret the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor- In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a in the road. The data is recorded in order to mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv- number of computers designed to continually increase understanding of how vehicle systems icing and maintenance, is securely stored and check and monitor the function of the car. They work in these types of situations. The EDR is managed and that its management complies with can record data during normal driving conditions, designed to record data related to vehicle relevant legal requirements. For further informa- but in particular register faults affecting the vehi- dynamics and safety systems for a short time, tion - contact a Volvo dealer. cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa- usually 30 seconds or less. tion of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record City Safety and the auto brake function). data related to the following in the event of traffic Some of the recorded data is required to enable accidents or collision-like situations: service and maintenance technicians to diagnose • How the various systems in the car worked and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi- • Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts cle. The registered information is also needed to were fastened/tensioned enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Informa- The driver's use of the accelerator or brake • tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com- pedal puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired. • The travel speed of the vehicle In addition to the above, the registered informa- This information can help us better understand tion can be used in aggregate form for research the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju- and product development with the aim of contin- ries and damage occur. The EDR only records uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. cars. The EDR does not record any data during normal

22 INTRODUCTION

Important information on Volvo ID accessories, extra equipment and Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of per- diagnostic socket sonalized Volvo services5 online. Incorrect connection and installation of accessories, extra equipment or software/diagnostic It is possible to create a Volvo ID from the car, My 6 7 tools may have a negative effect on the car's Volvo or the Volvo On Call mobile app . Certain electronic system. functions and services require that the car is registered to a personalVolvo ID. Registering the Certain accessories only function when associ- Volvo ID to the car makes a wide range of Volvo ated software is installed in the car's computer services available directly from the car. system. Volvo therefore recommends always Examples of services: making contact with an authorised Volvo workshop before the installation of accessories or The diagnostic socket is located under the instrument • My Volvo - A personal web page for you and extra equipment that are connected to or affect panel and on the same side as the steering wheel. your car. the electrical system. • Volvo On Call, VOC* - A Volvo ID is used Connection of equipment to the car's when logging in to the Volvo On Call mobile diagnostic socket app. • Send to Car - Makes it possible to send an WARNING address from an Internet map service directly to the car. Volvo Cars accepts no responsibility for the consequences of cases where non-authorised • Book Service and Repair - Register your pre- equipment is connected to the car's data link ferred workshop/dealer in My Volvo to be connector (On-Board-Diagnostics (OBD-II)). able to book service directly from the car. Creating a Volvo ID If there is already an existing Volvo ID, e.g. created in another car, please refer to the section "Registering your Volvo ID to the car".

5 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market. 6 Available in certain markets. 7 If you have the Volvo On Call*, VOC option. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 23 INTRODUCTION

|| It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different Registering your Volvo ID to the car 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically ways. If the Volvo ID is created with My Volvo or If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the sent to the specified email address. the Volvo On Call mobile app, the Volvo ID must VOC app, register it to your car as follows: > A Volvo ID has now been created and also be registered to the car to enable use of the 1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download automatically registered to the car. various Volvo ID services. Centre in the centre display's app view. Volvo ID services can now be used. 6 In My Volvo Read "Downloading, updating and uninstal- Advantages of Volvo ID 1. Go to www.volvocars.com and navigate ling apps" for more information about the • One user name and one password to access through to My Volvo. download process. online services, i.e. only one username and 2. Enter a personal email address. one password to remember. NOTE 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically • If the username/password for a service (e.g. sent to the specified email address. To download apps, the car must be con- VOC) is changed, then it is also changed nected to the Internet. automatically for other services (e.g. My > A Volvo ID has now been created. Read Volvo). below to learn how to register the ID to the car. 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your Related information email address. With Volvo On Call (VOC) mobile app7 • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps 1. Download the latest version of the VOC app 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically (p. 494) from a smartphone, via e.g. App Store, Win- sent to the email address linked to your • Connecting the car (p. 489) dows Phone or Google Play. Volvo ID. 2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's > Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car. start page and enter a personal email Volvo ID services can now be used. address. Creating and registering a Volvo ID for 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically the car sent to the specified email address. 1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID > A Volvo ID has now been created. Read app from Download Centre. below to learn how to register the ID to 2. Start the app and register a personal email the car. address.

6 Available in certain markets. 7 If you have the Volvo On Call*, VOC option.

24 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION

Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure products and solutions in order to reduce the Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on negative impact on the environment. the development of safer and more efficient

Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core val- inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air Fuel consumption ues and influences all operations. The environ- outside thanks to the climate control system. Since a large part of a car's total environmental mental work is based on the whole life cycle of Your Volvo complies with stringent international impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo the car and takes into account the environmental environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur- Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con- impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy- ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new supports a systematic approach to the opera- pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con- product developed must have less impact on the tion's environmental issues, which leads to consumption in each of their respective classes. environment than the product it replaces. tinuous improvement with reduced environmental Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower Volvo's environmental management work has impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide. resulted in the development of more effective that environmental laws and regulations in force and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal are complied with. Volvo also requires that its environment is also important to Volvo - the air partners must also meet these requirements.

}}

25 INTRODUCTION

|| Contributing to a better environment Efficient emission control are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer- An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is contributes to a reduced impact on the environ- "Clean inside and out" – a concept that encom- monitored in order not to emit strong odours or ment, but also means reduced costs for the passes a clean interior environment as well as substances that cause discomfort in the event of owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to highly efficient emission control. In many cases e.g. high heat and bright light. reduce fuel consumption and thereby save the exhaust emissions are well below the applica- money and contribute to a better environment - ble standards. Volvo workshops and the environment here is some advice: Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a Clean air in the passenger long service life and low fuel consumption for • Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds compartment your car. In this way you also contribute to a above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph) A passenger compartment filter prevents dust cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to and pollen from entering the passenger compart- are entrusted with the service and maintenance increased energy consumption. ment via the air intake. of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system. • Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in recommended intervals for service and main- The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures which workshop premises shall be designed in tenance of the car. that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the order to prevent spills and discharges into the traffic outside. • Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the environment. The workshop staff have the knowl- engine when stationary for longer periods. The system cleans the air in the passenger com- edge and the tools required to guarantee good Pay attention to local regulations. partment from contaminants such as particles, environmental care. hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level • Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the Recycling and uneven speed contribute to increased air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it fuel consumption. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, is also important that the car is recycled in an • Use preconditioning - it improves the range queues and tunnels for example. environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the of the hybrid battery and reduces the energy car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack- requirement while driving. therefore requested to contact a dealer for refer- age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that ral to a certified/approved recycling facility. Also remember to always dispose of environmen- allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in with the remote control key. Related information an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work- • Drive modes (p. 410) shop in the event of uncertainty about how this Interior The owner's manual and the environment type of waste should be discarded - an author- The material used in the interior of a Volvo is • (p. 32) ised Volvo workshop is recommended. carefully selected and has been tested in order to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details • Driving economically (p. 432)

26 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION

• Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 594) • Air quality (p. 187)

27 INTRODUCTION

IntelliSafe-driver support ing the driver and giving corrective steering inter- IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept concerning ventions if the car is about to cross a lane side car safety. It comprises a number of systems line. that contribute to making a car journey safe, to Protection the prevention of injuries and to the protection of The car is fitted with a seatbelt tensioner that can passengers from other road users. tension the seatbelts in critical situations and col- Support lisions to provide an even better protection. It is There are systems incorporated in IntelliSafe that also fitted with airbags and an inflatable curtain help the driver to drive the car in a safe manner. for the driver and passengers. The driver support functions incorporated in the Related information car include e.g. the adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) (Adaptive Cruise Control)* that ensures that a • constant distance is held between the car and • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 388) the vehicle in front. • Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 144) Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver park the car by • Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* sensing the area around it. (p. 358) Other examples of systems that help the driver • Blind Spot Information* (p. 354) are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic Alert • City Safety (p. 344) (CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* sys- Lane Keeping Aid (p. 368) tems. • • Roll Stability Control (p. 282) Prevention • Seatbelt (p. 62) An example of a function that helps to prevent accidents is City Safety. The function warns the • Safety (p. 60) driver of risks of collision with another vehicle, • Airbags (p. 66) pedestrians or cyclists. If the driver does not react to the warning and the risk of collision is imminent then City Safety can automatically brake the car. Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* is another example of a function that helps to prevent accidents by warn-

28 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION

Sensus - connection and Information when it is needed, where it maintenance is needed Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet, The different displays in the car provide informa- use different types of apps and make the car a tion at the right time. The information is shown in Wi-Fi hotspot. different locations based on how it should be prioritised by the driver. This is Sensus

Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible to receive relevant support, information and entertainment when it is necessary, without distracting the driver. Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are connected with entertainment, online connectivity, navigation* and the user interface between driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communication possible between you, the car and the outside world.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 29 INTRODUCTION

Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised. Head-up display* speed information and navigation* information. Driver display Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls are also shown in the head-up display. The display is operated via the right-hand steering wheel keypad and via the centre display.

The head-up display shows selected information The driver display shows information on speed that the driver should deal with as soon as possi- and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being ble. Such information includes traffic warnings,

30 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION played. The display is operated via the two steer- Voice recognition system ing wheel keypads. The voice recognition system Centre display can be used without the driver needing to take his/her hands off the steering wheel. The system can understand natural speech. Use voice recognition to play back a song, call someone, increase the temperature or read out a text message.

For more information about all functions/ systems, see the relevant section in the owner's manual or its supplement. Related information • Operating the centre display (p. 36) Many of the main functions of the car are controlled from the centre display, a touch screen • Navigating in the centre display's views which reacts to touch. The number of physical (p. 40) buttons and controls in the car is therefore mini- • Head-up display* (p. 115) mal. The screen can even be operated while • Driver display (p. 95) wearing gloves. • Voice recognition (p. 118) The climate control system, the entertainment system and seat position are controlled from • Online car* (p. 488) here, for example. The information that is shown • Audio and media (p. 462) in the centre display can be acted on by the driver or someone else in the car when the opportunity arises.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 31 INTRODUCTION

The owner's manual and the Windows, glass and mirrors • Using windscreen wipers (p. 154) environment The car contains controls for windows, glass • Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 155) The Owner's Manual is printed on paper origi- and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are nating from controlled forests. reinforced with lamination, which makes the passenger compartment more soundproof, amongst The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol other things. shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC®-certified forests or Laminated glass other controlled sources. The windscreen and panorama* roof have laminated glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. Laminated glass is available as an option for certain other glass surfaces.

The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is laminated9. Related information • Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25) Related information • Panorama roof* (p. 163) • Power windows (p. 157) • Activating/deactivating defrost of windows and door mirrors (p. 198) • Using the sun blind (p. 158) • Interior rearview mirror (p. 160) • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 159) • Head-up display* (p. 115)

9 Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.

32 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION

Overview of the centre display Many of the car's functions are controlled from the centre display. Get an overview of the centre display and its features.

}}

33 INTRODUCTION

Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively10. Function view - car functions that are acti- tions are also so-called trigger functions, vated/deactivated with a press. Certain func- which means they open a window with set-

10 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.

34 INTRODUCTION ting options. Examples of such are Camera Extra subview - recently used apps/car func- and parking functions. tions that do not belong in any of the other Home view - the first view that is shown subviews. Tap on the subview to expand it. when the screen is started. Climate row - information and direct interac- Application view (app view) - apps that have tion to set temperature, seat heating level been downloaded (third-party apps) and and fan level. Tap on the symbol in the cen- apps for embedded functions, such as FM tre of the climate row in order to open the radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app. climate view with more setting options. Status bar - the activities in the car are Related information shown right at the top of the screen. Net- • Operating the centre display (p. 36) work/connection information is shown on the Navigating in the centre display's views left-hand side of the status bar, while media- • (p. 40) related information, the clock and indication about on-going background activity are • Function view with buttons for car functions shown on the right. (p. 47) Top view - drag the tab down in order to • Changing settings for apps (p. 183) access the top view. Settings, Owner's • Symbols in the centre display's status bar manual, Profile and the car's saved mes- (p. 45) sages are accessed from here. • Settings view (p. 174) Navigation - leads to map navigation, with • Media player (p. 470) e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview to expand it. • Phone (p. 482) Media - recently used apps associated with • Climate controls in the centre display media. Tap on the subview to expand it. (p. 190) Phone - the phone function can be reached • Cleaning the centre display (p. 576) from here. Tap on the subview to expand it.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 35 INTRODUCTION

Operating the centre display views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and mov- IMPORTANT Many of the car's functions are controlled and ing apps can be performed by touching the Do not use sharp objects on the screen as regulated from the centre display. The centre screen in different ways. they may scratch it. display is a touch screen that reacts to touch. An infrared film enables the screen to detect a finger that is just in front of the screen. This technology makes it possible to use the screen even Using the touch screen functionality in The table below presents the different proce- with gloves on. the centre display dures for operating the screen: The screen reacts differently depending on Two people can interact with the screen at the whether you press, drag or swipe across it. same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver Actions such as browsing between different and passenger side respectively.

Procedure Execution Result Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function. Press twice in quick suc- Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map*. cession. Press and hold. Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map*. Press and hold your finger against the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location. Tap once with two fingers. Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map*.

36 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION

Procedure Execution Result Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps or map points on the map*. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.

Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.

Drag apart Zooms in.

Drag together Zooms out.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 37 INTRODUCTION

|| Turn off the screen and reactivate it 2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the NOTE home button. In home view standard mode - briefly press > The view that was displayed before the the home button. An animation that describes screen was switched off will be shown access to the different views is shown on the again. screen. NOTE Moving apps and buttons for car The screen cannot be deactivated when a functions prompt to perform an action is shown on the The apps and buttons for car functions in the app screen. view and function view respectively can be moved and organised as desired. NOTE 1. Tap on an app/button and hold depressed. Home button for the centre display. The centre display deactivates automatically > The app/button changes size and When the centre display is switched off, the when the engine is off and the driver's door is becomes slightly transparent. It is then screen is dimmed so as not to be disruptive opened. possible to move it. whilst driving. The climate row will still be visible, and apps and other functions connected to the 2. Drag the app/button to a vacant space in the screen will continue to run. Returning to home view from another view. view 1. Give a long press on the physical home but- The maximum number of rows available for use in 1. Briefly press the home button. ton below the screen. order to position apps/buttons is 48. To move an > The last position of the home view is app/button outside the visible view, drag it to the > The screen goes dark except for the cli- shown. bottom of the view. New rows are then added, mate row, which continues to be shown. where the app/button can be located. All functions continue to run, such as cli- 2. Briefly press again. mate control, audio, guiding* and apps. In > All subviews of the home view are set to An app/button can thus be located further down this mode, the screen can be cleaned with their default mode. and is then not visible in the normal mode for the the cloth supplied; see the section view. "Cleaning the centre display". Swipe across the screen to scroll upward/downward in the view.

38 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION

NOTE Using the controls in the centre display • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 494) Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by Using the keyboard in the centre display moving them to the bottom, off the visible • (p. 49) screen. This way it will be easier to find the apps you use more often. • Change settings for the centre display (p. 45) Scrolling in a list, article or view When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it is possible to scroll downward or upward in the view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the view.

Temperature control. The control is used for many of the car's functions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one of the following: • drag the control to the desired temperature, • tap on +/− in order to raise/lower the temperature gradually, or • tap on the desired temperature on the control.

The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it Related information is possible to scroll in the view. • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 40) • Settings view (p. 174) • Sensus - connection and maintenance (p. 29) • Remote control key range (p. 242)

39 INTRODUCTION

Navigating in the centre display's An app/car function selected from the app/func- NOTE views tion view starts in the respective subview of the The first time the car is used, some of the There are five different basic views in the centre home view. For example FM radio starts in the home view's subviews have no content. display: home view, top view, climate view, appli- Media subview. cation view (app view) and function view. The The extra subview contains the last used app/car screen is started automatically when the driver's function that is not associated with any of the NOTE door is opened. other three areas. In home view standard mode - briefly press The subviews show brief information about each the home button. An animation that describes Home view different app. access to the different views is shown on the Home view is the view that is shown when the screen. screen is started. It consists of four subviews: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview.

40 INTRODUCTION

Expanding a subview from default mode

Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.

}}

41 INTRODUCTION

|| Expanding a subview: In expanded mode, open the Status bar app in full screen - press on – Press anywhere on the subview. When a The activities in the car are shown at the top of the symbol. subview is expanded, the fourth subview in the screen. Network/connection information is the home view is temporarily forced away. shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, The other two are minimised and only certain while media-related information, the clock and information is shown. indication that background activity is in progress are shown on the right. The expanded view provides access to the Press on the symbol to go back basic functions of the app. to the expanded mode, or press Top view the home button at the bottom Closing an expanded subview: of the screen. – The subview can be closed in three different ways. • Tap on the upper part of the expanded subview. • Tap on another subview (that subview will then open in expanded mode instead). • Briefly press the physical home button below the centre display. Opening/closing a subview in full screen mode Top view dragged down. The extra subview and the subview for A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at Navigation can be opened out in full screen the top of the screen. Open the top view by mode, with even more information and more set- pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from ting options. Home button for the centre display. the top downwards across the screen. When a new subview is opened in full-screen There is always the option to go back to home In the top view, access is available to: mode, no information from the other subviews is view by pressing the home button. Go back to the • Settings shown. home view's standard view from full screen mode - press twice on the home button. • Owner's manual • Profile • The car's saved messages.

42 INTRODUCTION

Leave the top view - press outside the top view Press the symbol in the centre of the Application view or press at the bottom of the top view and drag climate row to open the climate view upward. The underlying view is then visible and and gain access to more climate set- available for use again. tings. Press the symbol to close the climate NOTE view and return to the previous view. The top view is not available during starting/ shutdown or when a message is shown on the screen. It is also not available when climate view is shown.

Go into the top view from an app Drag down the top view when an app is running, e.g. FM radio: • Press FM Radio Settings - settings that are associated with FM radio are shown. • Press FM Radio Manual - an article that is associated with FM radio is opened. This only applies to some of the apps in the car. For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not possible to access app-specific articles or set- Application view with the car's apps. tings, for example. Swipe from right to left11 across the screen in Climate view order to access the application view (app view) The climate row is always visible at the bottom of from the home view. Apps that have been down- the screen. The most common climate settings loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded can be made directly there, such as setting tem- functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Cer- perature, seat heating and fan. tain apps show brief information directly in the

11 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. }}

43 INTRODUCTION

|| app view, such as the number of unread text Function view Depending on the amount of functions, it is also messages for Messages. possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up. Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the subview to which it belongs, such as Media. Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with a press, a function is activated/deactivated by Depending on the amount of apps, it is possible pressing the relevant function button. Some func- to scroll downward in the app view. Do this by tions (trigger functions) open in a new window swiping/dragging from the bottom and up. when pressed. To move an app: Just as in app view, it is possible to move the 1. Tap on the app and hold depressed. function buttons around and arrange them in the > The app becomes slightly transparent and desired order. larger when it is ready to be moved. Related information 2. Drag the app to the desired location. • Operating the centre display (p. 36) • Overview of the centre display (p. 33) NOTE • Function view with buttons for car functions Apps and car function buttons cannot be (p. 47) added to locations that are already occupied. • Changing settings for apps (p. 183) • Symbols in the centre display's status bar Go back to the home view again by swiping from (p. 45) left to right11 across the screen, or by pressing The function view with buttons for different car func- the home button. • Climate controls in the centre display tions. (p. 190) Swipe from left to right11 across the screen in order to access the function view from the home view. From here you can activate/deactivate different car functions, e.g. Lane Departure Warning, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.

11 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.

44 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION

Symbols in the centre display's Symbol Specification Change settings for the centre status bar display Overview of the symbols that can be shown in Remote diagnostics active. The centre display is started automatically when the centre display's status bar. the driver's door is opened. The settings can be Process in progress. changed for the centre display to personalise The status bar shows activities in progress and, in sound and themes. The screen can be switched some cases, their status. Not all symbols are Preconditioning in progress. off so as not to be disruptive whilst driving. shown all the time due to the limited space in the status bar. Audio source being played back. Switching off/changing the system sounds volume in the centre display Symbol Specification Audio source stopped. The system sounds volume in the centre display can be adjusted or switched off: Roaming activated. Phone call in progress. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre Signal strength in mobile phone net- display. Audio source muted. work. 2. Press Sound System Volumes. Bluetooth device connected. News is received from the radio 3. Under Screen Touch, drag the control to channel. change the volume/switch off screen touch Bluetooth activated but no device sounds and Keypad Touch in order to connected. Traffic information is received. adjust the volume/switch off screen keyboard touch sounds. Drag the control to the Connected to Wi-Fi network. Clock. desired volume.

Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). Changing the appearance of the screen The car then shares the available Related information 1. Press Settings in the top view. connection. • Messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 110) 2. Press My Car Displays Themes. Car modem activated. • Navigating in the centre display's views 3. Then select theme, e.g. Minimalistic or (p. 40) Chrome Rings. Connected to the Internet via USB. As a supplement to these appearances, it is pos- Connection type to mobile phone sible to choose between Normal and Bright. network (2G, 3G). With Normal, the screen background is dark and }}

45 INTRODUCTION

|| the text is light. This alternative is the default for all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in which the background is light and the text is dark. This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong daylight. This alternative is always available for the user and is not affected by the surrounding lighting. Related information • Settings view (p. 174) • Sensus - connection and maintenance (p. 29) • Cleaning the centre display (p. 576) • Operating the centre display (p. 36)

46 INTRODUCTION

Function view with buttons for car basic views. Navigate to the function view from Different types of buttons functions home view by swiping from left to right across There are three different types of buttons for car All the buttons for car functions are located in the screen12. functions; see below: the function view, one of the centre display's

Type of button Property Affects car function Function buttons Have on/off positions. Most buttons in function view are function buttons. When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button. Press the button to activate/deactivate a function. Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions. • Camera When a trigger button is pressed, a window for the function opens. For example, it may be a • Headrest fold window for changing a seat's position. • Functions for folding seats • Head-up display adjustments Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes. • Park In Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning. • Park Out

12 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. }}

47 INTRODUCTION

|| The buttons' different modes

The function is deactivated when the LED indica- When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a tor is extinguished. function or parking button, the function is activated. When a function is activated, extra text with an explanation for certain functions is shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and then the button is shown with the LED indicator illuminated. For Lane Keeping Aid, for example, the extra text Works only at certain speeds is shown when the button is pressed. Briefly tap on the button once in order to acti- When a warning triangle is shown in the right- vate/deactivate the function. hand section of the button there is something not working as intended. Related information • Overview of the centre display (p. 33) • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 40) • Categories in the settings view (p. 176)

48 INTRODUCTION

Using the keyboard in the centre display The centre display keyboard makes it possible make entries using keys. It is also possible to "draw in" letters and characters on the screen by hand. Making entries with the keyboard The keyboard can be used to enter characters, letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages from the car, enter passwords or search for articles in the digital owner's manual. The keyboard is only shown when entries can be made on the screen.

}}

49 INTRODUCTION

The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the keyboard is being used.

50 INTRODUCTION

Row of suggested words or characters13. password, web address or email address Changing the keyboard language The suggested words are adjusted as new entry, all letters are automatically lower case To make it possible to switch between different letters are being entered. Browse among the unless otherwise set with the button. languages for the keyboard, the languages must suggestions by pressing on the right and left Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then first be added under Settings. arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note shown with numbers. Press , which in Adding/deleting languages in settings that this function is not supported by all lan- The keyboard is automatically set to the same guage selections. If not available, the row will number mode is shown instead of , to languages as the system language. The keyboard not be shown on the keyboard. return to the letter keyboard, or to open the keyboard with special characters. language can be manually adapted without The characters available on the keyboard affecting the system language. depend on which language was selected Changes text input language, e.g. UK. The (see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it. available characters and word suggestions 1. Press Settings in the top view. (1) vary depending on the selected language. The button works in different ways depend- 2. Press System Keyboard Layouts. Press to open a list of languages and then ing on the context in which the keyboard is tap on the language to be used. To add addi- 3. Select one or more languages from the list. used - either to enter @ (when email tional languages in the keyboard - see the address is entered), .com (when web > It is now possible to switch between the heading "Changing keyboard language" address is entered) or to create a new row selected languages directly from the key- below. (for normal text input). board for text input. Space. Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the If no languages have been actively selected Settings button is not shown. Undoes entered text. Press briefly to delete under , the keyboard uses the same language as the car's system language; see the Used to enter capital letters. Press again to one character at a time. Hold the button section "Changing system settings in the set- enter one capital letter and then continue depressed to delete characters more quickly. tings view". with lower-case letters. Another press makes Changes keyboard mode to write letters and all letters capital letters. The next press characters by hand instead. Read more restores the keyboard to lower-case letters. under the heading "Writing characters/ In this mode, the first letter after a full stop, letters by hand on the screen". exclamation mark or question mark is a capi- Press the confirmation button above the key- tal letter. The first letter in the text field is board (not visible in the image) to confirm the also a capital letter. In text fields intended for entered text. The appearance of the button dif- names or addresses, each word automatically fers depending on context. starts with a capital letter. In text fields for

13 Applies to Asiatic languages. }}

51 INTRODUCTION

|| Switching between different languages in Variants of a letter or character Writing characters/letters by hand on the keyboard the screen When a number of languages have been selected in Settings, the keyboard button (shown in context as number 7 in the illustration above) is used to switch between different languages. To change keyboard language: 1. Press and hold the button (see image above). > A list opens. To enter a variant of a letter/character, e.g. é or 2. Select the required language. If more than è: Area for writing letters/characters. four languages have been selected under 1. Press and hold the letter/character. Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list Text field where letters/characters are from the keyboard. > A box with possible variants of the letter/ entered as they are drawn out on the screen. character opens. > The keyboard is adapted to the selected Suggested letters/characters. The list is language and other word suggestions are 2. Press the required variant. If none of the vari- scrollable. given. ants are selected, the original letter/charac- Space. ter is entered. Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete one letter/character at a time. Wait a moment before pressing again to delete the next letter/character, etc. Return to the keyboard with regular character input. Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown. Change text input language.

52 INTRODUCTION

Writing characters/letters by hand – There are several options for deleting/ • Managing text messages (p. 486) 1. Write a character/letter in the area for hand- changing characters/letters: • Changing system settings in the settings written letters (1). • Press the intended letter in the list (3). view (p. 177) > A number of suggested characters or let- Press the text undo button (5) to delete ters is shown (3). The most likely choice is • the letter and begin again. found at the top of the list. • Swipe horizontally from right to left14 over 2. Enter the character/letter by waiting a the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete moment. multiple letters by swiping over the area > The character/letter at the top of the list several times. is entered. It is also possible to select a Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes different character by pressing the • all of the entered text. required character/letter in the list. Changing row in the free text field with Deleting/changing characters/letters written handwriting by hand

Change row by hand by drawing the above character in Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping the handwriting field15. across the handwriting field (1). Related information • Settings view (p. 174) • Operating the centre display (p. 36)

14 For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space. 15 For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.

53 INTRODUCTION

General information about XC90 on petrol or diesel. The electric motor drives the Twin Engine car mostly at low speeds, the petrol engine at XC90 Twin Engine runs like a regular car, but higher speeds, as well as during more active certain functions differ from a car that only runs driving.

54 INTRODUCTION

Overview

}}

55 INTRODUCTION

|| Charging the hybrid battery, see section Exterior engine noise combination of driveability, driving experience, "Preparation for charging the hybrid battery". environmental impact and fuel economy accord- Electric motor with rear-wheel drive, see sec- WARNING ing to the drive mode selected. Read more in the section "Drive modes". tion "Starting the engine". Remember that the car does not emit any Hybrid battery, see section "Hybrid battery". engine noise when it is only powered by the Driver display electric motor and may therefore be difficult The driver display shows some information that is Drive modes, change with the drive mode to notice by children, pedestrians, cyclists and unique to the Twin Engine - charging information, control in the tunnel console and in the cen- animals. This applies in particular at low selected drive mode, distance to empty battery as tre display, see section "Drive modes". speeds, such as in car parks. well as the hybrid battery's charge level. Read Driver display with information unique to the more in the sections "Hybrid related information Twin Engine, see section "Hybrid related High-voltage current in the driver display" and "Drive modes". symbols and messages" and "Hybrid related Several components in the car Preconditioning information in the driver display". work with high-voltage current In order that the car should have optimal function that could be dangerous in the it is important that the hybrid battery with associ- Important to know event of incorrect intervention. ated electrical drive systems, as well as the petrol Car without power Do not touch anything that is engine and its drive systems, have the correct Bear in mind that important functions such as the not clearly described in the operating temperature. Battery capacity is brakes and power steering are inoperable when owner's manual, see section reduced considerably if the battery is too cold or the car is without power. "Engine compartment overview" for an overview too hot. Preconditioning prepares the car's drive of the engine compartment's components. systems and the passenger compartment before WARNING departure so that both wear and energy needs WARNING during the journey are reduced. The range for the In a de-energised car with the electric motor hybrid battery increases. Read more in the sec- and fuel-driven engine switched off it is not Orange-coloured cables must only be handled possible to brake the car. by qualified personnel. tion "Starting/stopping preconditioning". Charging the hybrid battery Towing not permitted Unique functions Towing the XC90 Twin Engine is not permitted Drive modes IMPORTANT since this damages the electric motor. When It is possible to set the car in different drive Never connect the charging cable when there moving the car it must be transported raised up modes while driving, e.g. electric operation only is a risk of lightning. with all the wheels on a recovery vehicle's plat- or, when power is required, both electric motor form. and petrol engine. The car calculates an optimal

56 INTRODUCTION

The hybrid battery is the Lithium-ion type and can • Gear positions for automatic gearbox be recharged in different ways. A charging cable (p. 405) with control unit can be connected between the car and a 230 VAC socket16. Charging time depends on charging current. Read more in the section "Charging the hybrid battery". The hybrid battery can also be charged by the car's engine. The hybrid battery is recharged during gentle braking with the brake pedal. The hybrid battery is also recharged during engine braking in gear position B when e.g. travelling downhill. Read more in the sections "Gear positions for automatic gearbox" and "Hybrid related information in the driver display". Related information • Preparation for charging the hybrid battery (p. 452) • Starting the car (p. 400) • Hybrid battery (p. 557) • Drive modes (p. 410) • Hybrid-related symbols and messages (p. 458) • Hybrid related information in the driver display (p. 97) • Engine compartment overview (p. 540) • Starting/stopping preconditioning (p. 209) • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 444)

16 The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.

SAFETY SAFETY

Safety WARNING Safety during pregnancy The vehicle is equipped with several safety sys- It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly If the warning symbol remains illuminated or tems that work together to protect the vehicle's is switched on during driving and the mes- during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers driver and passengers in the event of an acci- sage SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to adjust their seating position. dent. workshop is shown in the driver display, it means that part of one of the safety systems Seatbelt The car is equipped with a number of sensors does not have full functionality. Volvo recom- that react in the event of an accident and activate mends that an authorised Volvo workshop different safety systems, such as different types should be contacted as soon as possible. of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on the specific accident situation, such as collisions If the specific warning symbol is broken at different angles, rollover or driving off the road, then the general warning symbol is illu- the systems react in different ways to provide the minated instead and the driver display best protection. shows the same message. There are also mechanical safety systems such Related information as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also constructed so that a large part of the force of a • Safety during pregnancy (p. 60) collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof • Seatbelt (p. 62) and other parts of the body. • Airbags (p. 66) The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul- The car's safety mode may be activated after a • Whiplash Protection System (p. 61) der then be routed between the breasts and to collision if an important function in the car has the side of the abdomen. • Safety mode (p. 72) been damaged. • Child safety (p. 74) The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and Warning symbol in driver display as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must The warning symbol is illuminated in never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the the driver display when the car's elec- slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as trical system is set in ignition position close to the body as possible. In addition, check II. The symbol is extinguished after that there are no twists in the seatbelt. approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is Seating position fault-free. As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-

60 SAFETY cle as they drive (which means that they must be Whiplash Protection System able to easily operate the foot pedals and steer- Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) is a pro- ing wheel). The aim should be to position the tection against whiplash injuries. The system seat with as large a distance as possible between consists of energy-absorbing backrests and seat abdomen and steering wheel. cushions, and specially designed head restraints Related information in the front seats. • Safety (p. 60) WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end • Seatbelt (p. 62) collision, where the angle and speed of the collision and the nature of the colliding vehicle all Manual front seat (p. 123) • have an influence. • Power front seat* (p. 124) When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward and the seat cush- Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under ions move downward to change the seating posi- the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent WHIPS from functioning. tion of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury. WARNING WARNING Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat's back- WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts. rest. Always use a seatbelt.

WARNING WARNING If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the cor- Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS responding front seat must be moved forward yourself. Volvo recommends that an author- so that it does not make contact with the ised Volvo workshop should be contacted. folded backrest. If the front seats have been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a colli- Seating position sion, the seats must be replaced. Some of the For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver seats' protective properties may have been lost even if they do not appear damaged. and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61 SAFETY

|| Set the correct seating position in the front seat Seatbelt WARNING before driving starts. Heavy braking can have serious consequences Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the if the seatbelts are not used. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo centre of the seat with as little space as possible workshop should be contacted. It is important that the seatbelt lies against the between the head and the head restraint. body so it can provide maximum protection. Do If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major WHIPS and child seats not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is load, such as in conjunction with a collision, designed to protect in a normal seating position. the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of The protection provided by the car to children the seatbelt's protective properties may have seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear not diminished by WHIPS. WARNING damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new Related information Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre- seatbelt must be type-approved and designed • Safety (p. 60) vents the belt from tightening properly. for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt. • Manual front seat (p. 123) • Power front seat* (p. 124) WARNING Related information • Rear Collision Warning (p. 354) The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- • Safety (p. 60) • Child seats (p. 74) belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 63) diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. • Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 64) • Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 65)

62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY

Seatbelt tensioner IMPORTANT Related information The car is fitted with pyrotechnic and electric • Seatbelt (p. 62) If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seat- electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger • Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 64) belts in critical situations and collisions. side will also be deactivated. • Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 65) Seatbelt tensioner during collision • City Safety (p. 344) All the seatbelts are equipped with a pyrotechnic Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner • Rear Collision Warning (p. 354) seatbelt tensioner. Once the critical situation has passed, the seat- • Activating/deactivating the passenger air- belt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset The pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioner tensions the bag* (p. 69) seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient automatically. force in order to more effectively restrain the If the belt still remains tensioned: occupant. 1. Stop the car at a safe place. Seatbelt tensioner during critical 2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it. situations > The seatbelt and electric seatbelt ten- The driver and front passenger seatbelts are sioner are reset. equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner. The seatbelt tensioners work together and can WARNING be activated together with the driver support systems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo critical situations, such as panic braking, sharp workshop should be contacted. evasive action, driving off the road (e.g. the car rolls over into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, some off-road object), skidding, or risk of colli- the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of sion, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the seat- the seatbelt's protective properties may have belt tensioner's electric motor. been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear The electric seatbelt tensioner adjusts the occu- damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new pant to a better position, reducing the risk of seatbelt must be type-approved and designed striking the car's interior and improving the effect for installation at the same location as the of safety systems, such as the car's airbags. replaced seatbelt.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63 SAFETY

Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt 3. In the front seats and in the outer seats in Make sure that all passengers have fastened the second seat row the seatbelt can be their seatbelts before starting to drive. adjusted for height. Fastening a seatbelt 1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it is not twisted or damaged. Make sure that the seatbelt is correctly in the belt guide available for the second seat row's centre seat.

NOTE The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn: the arm). • if it is pulled out too quickly 4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the • during braking and acceleration Press together the seat mounting and move shoulder. if the car leans heavily. • the seatbelt up or down. Position the belt as high as possible without 2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in it chafing against your throat. the intended buckle. > A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.

WARNING Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts and buckles would otherwise possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury. The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).

64 SAFETY

WARNING Door and seatbelt reminder Seatbelt reminder The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear Each seatbelt is designed for only one person. a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door, bonnet, tailgate or fuel filler flap. WARNING Driver display graphics Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly.

WARNING Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not Visual reminder in the roof console. function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury. A visual reminder is given in the roof console and by means of the warning symbol in the driver display. Unfastening a seatbelt 1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle Graphics in the driver display with different types of The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed, and then let the belt retract. warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is driving time and distance. dependent on the vehicle's speed. 2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in The belt status of the driver and passengers is The driver display's graphics show which seats in by hand so that it does not hang loose. shown in the driver display graphics when a belt the car are occupied by belted and unbelted pas- is buckled or unbuckled. Make sure that the seatbelt is correctly in the sengers. belt guide available for the second seat row's Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tail- centre seat. reminder system. gate, fuel filler flap or any door is open. Front seat Related information The graphics are cleared automatically after A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver Seatbelt (p. 62) • approximately 30 seconds of driving, or by press- and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 63) ing on the right-hand the steering wheel keypad's either of them is not wearing one. O button. • Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 65)

}}

65 SAFETY

|| Rear seat Related information Airbags The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two • Seatbelt (p. 62) The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable subfunctions: • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 63) curtains for driver and passengers. • Provides information on which seatbelts are • Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 64) being used in the rear seat. The driver dis- WARNING play's graphics are shown when the seatbelts The airbag system's control module is located are in use. in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is • nect the cables to the starter battery. Do not unfastened during a journey by means of a attempt to start the car since the airbags may visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recom- stops when the seatbelt is refastened, or it mends that it is transported to an authorised can be acknowledged manually by pressing Volvo workshop. the O button on the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Deployed airbags Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate If any of the airbags have deployed, the following and fuel filler flap is recommended: If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is • Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it not closed properly, the driver display's graphics is transported to an authorised Volvo work- show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place shop. Do not drive with deployed airbags. as soon as possible and close the source of the • Volvo recommends engaging an authorised warning. Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of If the car is driven at a speed lower components in the car's safety systems. than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the • Always contact a doctor. driver display's information symbol illuminates. If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's warning symbol illuminates.

66 SAFETY

WARNING Driver and passenger airbags NOTE As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is Never drive with deployed airbags. They can The detectors react differently depending on equipped with airbags on the driver and passen- make steering difficult. Other safety systems the nature of the collision and whether or not ger sides in the front seat. may also be damaged. The smoke and dust the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt created when the airbags are deployed can positions. cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten- sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with It is therefore possible that only one (or none) cold water. The rapid deployment sequence of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin detectors sense the force of the collision on burns. the vehicle and the action is adapted accord- ingly so that none, one or more airbags are Related information deployed. • Safety (p. 60) • Driver and passenger airbags (p. 67) WARNING Side airbag (p. 71) • The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt • Inflatable curtain (p. 72) is not used or is used incorrectly, this may Driver and passenger airbags. diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help to protect the head, face and chest of the driver To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag and passenger as well as the knees and legs of deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs the driver. against the backrest. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occu- WARNING pant. The airbag deflates when compressed by Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes workshop should be contacted for repair. into the car. This is completely normal. The entire Defective work in the airbag system could process, including inflation and deflation of the cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.

}}

67 SAFETY

|| Driver airbags Label for passenger airbag WARNING Airbag in the steering wheel If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti- This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air- wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG. bag will always be activated. Knee airbag The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the WARNING instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG. Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. Do not place or attach any object on the top Front-facing passengers (children and adults) or front of the panel where the knee airbag is must never sit on the front passenger seat if stowed. Label on the passenger side's sun visor. the passenger airbag is deactivated. Failure to follow the advice given above can Passenger airbag endanger life or lead to serious personal The airbag is folded up into a compartment injury. above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG. Related information • Airbags (p. 66) WARNING • Activating/deactivating the passenger air- Do not put objects in front of or above the bag* (p. 69) dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened. The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY

Activating/deactivating the WARNING Activating the passenger airbag passenger airbag* If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti- The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air- car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag bag will always be activated. Cut Off Switch (PACOS). Switch The switch for the passenger airbag is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open.

Check that the switch is in the required position. Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF (B) to ON (A). > The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag on Please acknowledge.

NOTE If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition ON - the airbag is activated and all front-fac- position II. ing passengers (children and adults) can sit safely on the passenger seat. OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the passenger seat.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69 SAFETY

|| 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- Deactivating the passenger airbag 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- hand steering wheel keypad's O button. hand steering wheel keypad's O button.

Pull the switch outward and turn from ON (A) to OFF (B). > The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag off Please > A text message and a warning symbol in acknowledge. > A text message and a symbol in the roof the roof console indicate that the airbag console indicate that the airbag for the for the front passenger seat is activated. front passenger seat is deactivated. NOTE WARNING If the passenger airbag has been activated/ WARNING deactivated with the car in ignition position I Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front Front-facing passengers (children and adults) passenger seat when the airbag is activated. or lower, a message is shown in the driver must never sit on the passenger seat when display and the following indicator in the roof the airbag is deactivated. The passenger airbag must always be acti- console approx. 6 seconds after the car's vated when front-facing passengers (children electrical system has been set in ignition Failure to follow the advice given above can and adults) are sitting in the front passenger endanger life or lead to serious personal II seat. position . injury. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal IMPORTANT injury. If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.

70 SAFETY

Related information Side airbag WARNING • Driver and passenger airbags (p. 67) The side airbags on the driver and passenger Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 63) seats protect the chest and hip in the event of a workshop should be contacted for repair. collision. • Child seats (p. 74) Defective work in the side airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

WARNING Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag. Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

WARNING The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. frames of the front seats and help to protect the Always use a seatbelt. driver and passengers in the front seat. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors Side airbag and child seats and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag The protection provided by the car to children inflates between the occupant and the door seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The not diminished by the side airbag. airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the Related information side of the collision. • Airbags (p. 66) • Child seats (p. 74)

71 SAFETY

Inflatable curtain WARNING Safety mode The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC), Safety mode is a protective state that is trig- Never hang or attach heavy items onto the helps to prevent the driver and passengers from handles in the roof. The hooks are only gered when a collision may have damaged any striking their heads on the inside of the car dur- designed for light coats and jackets (not for of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, ing a collision. solid objects such as umbrellas). sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system. Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This If the car has been involved in a collision, the text could compromise the intended protection. Safety mode See Owner's manual Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine is shown parts that are approved for fitting within these in the driver display together with the warning areas. symbol. This means that the car has reduced functionality. WARNING If the car is set in safety mode, it is possible to try to reset the system and then start and move the Leave 10 cm space between the load and the car from a dangerous position. side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, WARNING which is concealed in the headlining, may be Never attempt to repair your car or reset the The inflatable curtain is mounted along both compromised. electronics yourself if the car has been in sides of the headlining and helps protect the safety mode. This could result in personal driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The WARNING injury or the car not functioning as normal. panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG. Volvo recommends that engaging an author- The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the ised Volvo workshop to check and restore the A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. car to normal status after Safety mode See and the inflatable curtain is inflated. Owner's manual has been shown. Related information • Airbags (p. 66) WARNING If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

72 SAFETY

Related information Starting/moving the car after safety 4. Then try to start the car again when the mes- • Safety (p. 60) mode sage Car start System check, wait is no • Starting/moving the car after safety mode If the car is set in safety mode, it is possible to longer shown in the driver's display. (p. 73) try to start and then move the car from a dangerous position. IMPORTANT Starting the car after safety mode If the message Safety mode See Owner's 1. First, check that no fuel is leaking from the manual is still shown on the display the car car. There must be no smell of fuel either. must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service must then be used instead. If everything seems normal and you have Even if the car appears to be driveable, hid- checked for indications of fuel leakage, you den damage may make the car impossible to may attempt to start the car. control once moving.

WARNING Never, under any circumstances, attempt to Moving the car after safety mode restart the car if it smells of fuel when the 1. If the message Normal mode The car is Safety mode See Owner's manual mes- now in normal mode is shown in the driver sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the display after a start attempt, the car can be car at once. moved carefully out of a dangerous position.

2. Turn the start knob to STOP and release it. 2. Do not move the car further than necessary. 3. Then try to start the car. WARNING > The driver's display shows the message Car start System check, wait If the car is in safety mode it must not be while the towed. It must be transported from its loca- car's electronics carry out a systems tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported check and then try to resume normal sta- to an authorised Volvo workshop. tus. This can take up to one minute. Related information • Safety mode (p. 72)

73 SAFETY

Child safety Related information Child seats Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, • Safety (p. 60) The position of a child in the car and the choice booster cushions and attachment devices) • Child seats (p. 74) of equipment are dictated by the child's weight which is designed for fitting in this particular car. and size. • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 88) Using Volvo's child safety equipment, the opti- Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make mum conditions are obtained for the child to sure that the child seat is being used correctly. travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety Look in the installation instructions for the child equipment fits well and is simple to use. seat for the correct fitting. Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to NOTE sit on the knee of a passenger. When using child safety products it is impor- Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- tant to read the installation instructions facing child seats until as late an age as possible, included. at least up to 3-4 years of age, and then in front- facing booster cushions/child seats until the child is 140 cm tall. Location of child seats

NOTE Legal provisions about the type of child seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country to country. Check what does apply.

NOTE In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions. Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible. Always fit rear-facing child seats in the second or third* seat row if the passenger airbag is acti-

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY vated. If a child is sitting on the front passenger Child seat installation • ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the The following points are important to consider the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console1 airbag deploys. when a child seat is being fitted in the car. accessory. If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear- • If the child seat is equipped with lower facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas- WARNING straps, Volvo recommends that the lower 1 senger seat. Booster cushions/child seats with steel mounting points are used with these . braces or some other design that could rest • The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to NOTE on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must facilitate child seat installation. not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt Regulations regarding the placement of chil- buckle to open accidentally. dren in cars vary from country to country. Do not secure the straps for the child seat Check what does apply. into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps. WARNING Do not allow the upper section of the child Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of seat to rest against the windscreen. the front passenger seat. Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front Installation in the front seat passenger seat if the airbag is activated. • When fitting rear-facing child seats, check Front-facing passengers (children and adults) that the passenger airbag is deactivated. must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated. • When fitting front-facing child seats, check that the passenger airbag is activated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal • Only use child seats that are recommended injury. by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.

1 The accessory range varies depending on market. }}

75 SAFETY

|| Installation in the second seat row to remove the lower straps when the child Label for passenger airbag • Only use child seats that are recommended seat is not installed. by Volvo, are universally approved2 or are • The ISOFIX guide must not be used when fit- semi-universal, and where the car is included ting child seats. on the manufacturer's vehicle list. Installation in the third seat row • A child seat with support legs must not be • Only use child seats that are recommended fitted in the centre seat. by Volvo, are universally approved or are • The outer seats are equipped with the semi-universal, and where the car is included ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i- on the manufacturer's vehicle list. Size3. • Child seats with support legs must not be fit- • The outer seats are equipped with upper ted in the third row of seats. mounting points. Volvo recommends that • If necessary, adjust the second seat row for- child seat's upper straps should be pulled ward in order to make enough space. If a Label on the passenger side's sun visor. through the hole in the head restraint before child seat is also fitted on the second seat being tensioned at the mounting point. If this row, check that the child seat is still fitted in is not possible, follow the recommendations accordance with the manufacturer's instruc- from the child seat manufacturer. tions. • In cars with a third seat row, the second seat row must be adjusted to its rearmost position. If a child seat is also used in the third row then an exception can be made. In which case, always check that the child seat is still fitted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. • If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, never adjust the position of the seat Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label in front after the straps have been fitted in becomes visible when the passenger door is opened. the lower mounting points. Always remember The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

2 Does not apply to the centre seat. 3 Varies depending on market.

76 SAFETY

Related information Upper mounting points for child WARNING • Child safety (p. 74) seats The child seat's upper straps must be routed • Upper mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with upper mounting points through the hole in the head restraint leg (p. 77) for child seats on the outer second row seats. before they are tensioned at the mounting Lower mounting points for child seats point. If this is not possible, follow the recom- • The upper mounting points are primarily intended mendations from the child seat manufacturer. (p. 78) for use with front-facing child seats. • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 82) Always follow the manufacturer's installation NOTE • Activating/deactivating the passenger air- instructions when connecting a child seat to the bag* (p. 69) upper mounting points. Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold- The location of the mounting points ing head restraints on the outer seats.

NOTE In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points.

Related information • Child seats (p. 74) • Lower mounting points for child seats Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on (p. 78) the rear of the backrest. • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 82) The mounting points are located on the rear of • Table for location of child seats using the the outer second row seats. car's seatbelts (p. 79)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77 SAFETY

Lower mounting points for child The mounting points in the front seat are only seats mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch The vehicle is equipped with lower mounting to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*. points for child seats in the front seat* and the second row of seats.

The lower mounting points are designed to be used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child seats. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the lower mounting points. The location of the mounting points

Mounting point locations in the second row of seats. The mounting points in the second row of seats are located on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails. Related information • Child seats (p. 74) • Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 77) • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 82) • Table for location of child seats using the Mounting point locations in the front seat. car's seatbelts (p. 79) The mounting points in the front seat are located • Activating/deactivating the passenger air- on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom. bag* (p. 69)

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY

Table for location of child seats NOTE using the car's seatbelts Always read the section "Child seats" before The table gives a recommendation for which fitting a child seat in the car. child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

Table for XC90 Twin Engine Weight Front seat (with deactivated Front seat (with activated air- Second row of seats, outer Second row of seats, centre Third seat row airbag, only rear-facing child bag, only front-facing child seat seat seats) seats) Group 0 UA, B X UB LB U max 10 kg Group 0+ UA, B X UB LB U max 13 kg Group 1 LC UFA, D U, LC L U 9-18 kg Group 2 LC UFA, E UE, LC B*, F, LE UE 15-25 kg

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 SAFETY

|| Weight Front seat (with deactivated Front seat (with activated air- Second row of seats, outer Second row of seats, centre Third seat row airbag, only rear-facing child bag, only front-facing child seat seat seats) seats) Group 3 X UFA, G UG B*, F, LG UG 22-36 kg U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group. UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats. L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. B: Built-in restraint approved for this mass group. X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.

A Adjust the backrest to a more upright position. B Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146). C Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the rear-facing position (type approval E5 04192); Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212). D Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. E Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the front-facing position (type approval E5 04192); booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312). F Volvo recommends: Integrated booster cushion (type approval E5 04218). G Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).

Table for XC90 Excellence Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats) Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats) Rear seat Group 0 UA, B, L X UA, B, L max 10 kg Group 0+ UA, B, L X UA, B, L max 13 kg

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats) Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats) Rear seat Group 1 LC UFA, D UA, LC 9-18 kg Group 2 LC UFA, E UA, E, LC 15-25 kg Group 3 X UFA, F UA, F, L 22-36 kg U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group. UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats. L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.

A Adjust the backrest to a more upright position. B Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146). C Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the rear-facing position (type approval E5 04192). D Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. E Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the front-facing position (type approval E5 04191); booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169). F Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169).

WARNING • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 83) Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is • Table for location of i-Size child seats activated. (p. 87)

Related information • Child seats (p. 74) • Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 77)

81 SAFETY

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points Press the seat cushion down to access the The vehicle is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX4 mounting points. mounting points for child seats in the second Related information row of seats. • Child seats (p. 74) i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child • Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 77) seats that is based on an international standard. • Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 78) Always follow the manufacturer's installation • Table for location of i-Size child seats instructions when connecting a child seat to the (p. 87) i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points. • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats The location of the mounting points (p. 83)

Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols4 on the upholstery of the backrest. The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are concealed behind the lower section of the second seat row's backrest, in the outer seats.

4 Name and symbol depending on market.

82 SAFETY

Table for location of ISOFIX child The child seat must be approved in accordance NOTE seats with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be Always read the section "Child seats" before The table gives a recommendation for which included in the manufacturer's vehicle list. fitting a child seat in the car. ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

Table for XC90 Twin Engine Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with Front seat (with acti- Second row of Second row of Third seat row deactivated airbag, vated airbag, only seats, outer seat seats, centre seat only rear-facing child front-facing child seats)B seats)B

Group 0 Rear-facing infant E ILB, C, XD X ILC X X max 10 kg seat Rear-facing infant E Group 0+ seat ILB, C, XD X ILC X X max 13 kg C Rear-facing child seat D Rear-facing child seat

}}

83 SAFETY

|| Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with Front seat (with acti- Second row of Second row of Third seat row deactivated airbag, vated airbag, only seats, outer seat seats, centre seat only rear-facing child front-facing child seats)B seats)B A Front-facing child seat B Front-facing child seat X ILB, E, XD ILE, IUFE X X Group 1 B1 Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg C Rear-facing child seat ILB, XD X ILF X X D Rear-facing child seat IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group. X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.

A For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label. B Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market). C Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146). D Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket. E Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. F Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X3 ISOfix (type approval E5 04200).

84 SAFETY

Table for XC90 Excellence Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only Front seat (with activated airbag, only front- Rear seat rear-facing child seats) facing child seats) Group 0 E Rear-facing infant seat X X ILB max 10 kg E Rear-facing infant seat Group 0+ C Rear-facing child seat X X ILB max 13 kg D Rear-facing child seat

}}

85 SAFETY

|| Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only Front seat (with activated airbag, only front- Rear seat rear-facing child seats) facing child seats) A Front-facing child seat B Front-facing child seat X X ILC, IUFC Group 1 B1 Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg C Rear-facing child seat X X IL D Rear-facing child seat IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group. X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.

A For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label. B Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146). C Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.

WARNING NOTE • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 79) Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front Volvo recommends contacting an authorised passenger seat if the passenger airbag is Volvo dealer for information about which i- activated. Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.

NOTE Related information If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size • Child seats (p. 74) classification, the car model must be included • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 82) on the vehicle list for the child seat. • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 87)

86 SAFETY

Table for location of i-Size child The child seat must be approved in accordance NOTE seats with UN Reg R129. Always read the section "Child seats" before The table gives a recommendation for which i- fitting a child seat in the car. Size child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

Table for XC90 Twin Engine Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated Front seat (with activated Second row of seats, Second row of seats, Third seat row airbag, only rear-facing child airbag, only front-facing outer seat centre seat seats) child seats)

i-Size child seats X X i-UA X X i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing. X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Table for XC90 Excellence Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child Rear seat seats) seats) i-Size child seats X X X X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.

Related information • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats • Child seats (p. 74) (p. 83) • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 82) • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 79)

87 SAFETY

Integrated booster cushion* • the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned Folding up the integrated booster The integrated booster cushion on the centre low over the pelvis to provide optimal protec- cushion* seat in the second seat row allows children to sit tion The integrated booster cushion on the centre comfortably and safely. • the head restraint is adjusted at the same seat in the second seat row folds up for use. height as the child's head, if possible, so that The booster cushion is specially designed to pro- it covers the entire back of the head. vide optimum safety. In combination with the seatbelt it is approved for children who weigh WARNING between 15 and 36 kg and who are at least 97 cm in height. Volvo recommends that repair or replacement is only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion. If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protection. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn. Pull the handle forward and up in order to release the booster cushion. WARNING If the instructions for the integrated booster Correct position, the seatbelt must pass over the shoul- cushion are not followed then the child could der. sustain serious injury in the event of an acci- Check before driving that: dent.

• the integrated booster cushion is in locked Related information mode • Child safety (p. 74) the seatbelt is in contact with the child's • Folding up the integrated booster cushion* body and is not slack or twisted • (p. 88) the seatbelt does not lie across the child's • Folding down the integrated booster cush- throat or below the shoulder • ion* (p. 89)

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY

Folding down the integrated booster cushion* The integrated booster cushion on the centre seat in the second seat row can be folded down when not in use.

Press the booster cushion backwards to lock. Press down with your hand in the centre of the cushion in order to lock it.

WARNING IMPORTANT If the instructions for the integrated booster cushion are not followed then the child could Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. sustain serious injury in the event of an acci- Pull the handle forwards to release the cush- toys) left behind in the space under the cush- dent. ion. ion before lowering.

Related information NOTE • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 88) Before the rear backrest is lowered, the • Folding down the integrated booster cush- booster cushion must be lowered first. ion* (p. 89) Related information • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 88) • Folding up the integrated booster cushion* (p. 88)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instruments and controls, left-hand Display/function/control Display/function/control drive car The overviews show where the displays and Right-hand steering wheel keypad Front reading lamps and interior lighting controls near the driver are located. Steering wheel adjustment Panorama roof*

Horn Display in roof console

Left-hand steering wheel keypad Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror Bonnet opening

Display lighting, tailgate unlocking, tailgate opening/closing*, halogen headlamp levelling

Display/function/control Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter Display/function/control Manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox* Centre display

Head-up display* Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/ heated windscreen*, media, glovebox Driver display door opening Wipers and washing, rain sensor* Gear selector

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Display/function/control Display/function/control Instruments and controls, right- hand drive car Start knob Power windows, door mirrors The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located. Drive modes* Adjusting front seat

Parking brake

Automatic braking when stationary

Display/function/control Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip Display/function/control meter Memory for setup of: Manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox* • power front seat* • Door mirrors Head-up display* • Head-up display* Driver display

Door opening, locking/unlocking of side Wipers and washing, rain sensor* doors and tailgate }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Display/function/control Display/function/control Display/function/control Right-hand steering wheel keypad Front reading lamps and interior lighting Start knob

Display lighting, unlocking the tailgate, Panorama roof* Drive modes* opening/closing the tailgate* Display in roof console Parking brake Bonnet opening Manual dimming of interior rearview mir- Automatic braking when stationary Horn ror Steering wheel adjustment

Left-hand steering wheel keypad

Display/function/control Display/function/control Memory for setup of: Centre display • power front seat* Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/ • Door mirrors heated windscreen*, media, glovebox Head-up display* door opening • Door opening, locking/unlocking of side Gear selector doors and tailgate

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Display/function/control Driver display Driver display The driver display shows information about the Power windows, door mirrors car and driving.

Adjusting front seat The driver display contains gauges, indicators and indicator and warning symbols. The content of the driver display depends on the car's equipment, settings and which functions are active at that time.

WARNING In the event of a fault in the driver display the information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other safety systems may not be shown. In which case, the driver cannot check the status of On the left the car's systems or receive current warnings • Speedometer and information. • Trip meter • Odometer WARNING • Cruise control and speed limiter information If the driver display should extinguish, not illu- • Road Sign Information minate on activation/start or be fully or partially illegible, the car must not be used. You should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.

}}

95 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| In the middle • Instantaneous fuel consumption media or Show navigation even if no • Indicator and warning symbols • Hybrid battery charge level route is set. • Outside temperature gauge • App menu (activated via steering wheel key- • Themes. Select a theme (appearance) for • Clock pad) the driver display (Glass, Minimalistic, Performance or Chrome Rings). • Messages, in some cases with graphics Activating the driver display The system language can be changed in Distance to empty tank The driver display is activated as soon as a door • Settings System Choose system is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver • Distance to empty battery language. A change will affect the language in display extinguishes after a while if it is not used. Door and seatbelt information all displays. • To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following: • Charge status • Depress the brake pedal Related information • Compass Indicator symbols in the driver display Turn the ignition knob to ignition position to I • • (p. 99) • Media player or Warning symbols in the driver display • Navigation map Open one of the doors. • • (p. 101) • Phone Driver display settings Application menu in the driver display • Voice recognition • Some settings for what is shown in the driver dis- (p. 109) On the right play can be set in the app menu; see section License agreement for the driver display Tachometer (depending on selected drive • • "Application menu in the driver display". (p. 103) mode). The following settings can be made in the • Fuel gauge Settings My Car Displays menu in the top • Battery meter view of the centre display: • Gear shift indicator • Driver Display Centre Area. Select what is • Selected drive mode. Selectable drive modes shown in the background of the driver display are Hybrid, Off Road, Pure, Power and AWD (Show no information in background, • Hybrid gauge (depending on drive mode Show information for current playing selected) • ECO gauge (depending on drive mode selected)

96 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Hybrid related information in the Indicates the power level when the in the current gear. The marking between the driver display internal combustion engine is due to lightning bolt and the drop indicates the transi- Depending on drive mode selected, different start. If the symbol is not filled in, it tion point where the electric motor stops working instruments and functions are shown in the means that the combustion engine is and the combustion engine takes over. driver display. The drive modes all consist of not in use. unique instruments that help the driver to drive An indicator that denotes that the the car with the optimum driving economy. hybrid battery is charging. The car also stores statistics of journeys made, which can be viewed in the form of a block diagram. An indicator that shows the current amount of available energy in the bat- Hybrid-unique symbols tery for the electric motor. The indicator The different instruments show in different ways is shown by the hybrid battery gauge in the relationship between how much power is the lower right-hand corner. being taken from the electric motor and how eDTE (Electrical Distance To Empty) much power is available. indicator. Shows the current distance Indicates current level for available to empty battery. electric motor power. If the symbol is filled in, it means that the electric Hybrid gauge motor is in use. Available electric motor power Indicates current level for available There is a battery gauge located between the electric motor power. If the symbol is hybrid gauge and the fuel gauge, in the lower not filled in, it means that the electric right-hand section of the instrument panel. The motor is not in use. gauge shows how much energy is left in the bat- Indicates the power level when the tery. This energy is used for the electric motor, combustion engine starts. If the symbol but also to cool or heat the car. is filled in, it means that the combus- Driver-requested power tion engine is in use. The pointer indicates the amount of engine power requested by the driver by regulating the accelerator pedal. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is requested by the driver }}

97 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Example the battery indicator. For further information about the "Hold" and "Charge" functions, see the section "Maintain or increase the hybrid battery's state of charge while driving" Related information • Show trip data in the driver display (p. 172) • Show trip statistics in the centre display (p. 173) • Driver display (p. 95) • Drive modes (p. 410) • Hybrid-related symbols and messages The car generates current to the battery, the bat- (p. 458) The car is started but stationary, no power is tery is charged, e.g. when the brake pedal is requested. pressed lightly or during engine braking down a hill. Functions "Hold" and "Charge"

The electric motor cannot supply the amount of engine power requested and the internal combustion engine starts. The "Hold" or "Charge" function is activated. This is indicated by the symbol that is shown by

98 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Indicator symbols in the driver Symbol Specification Symbol Specification display The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func- Automatic brake on Left and right-hand direction indicator tion is activated, that a system is operating, or The symbol illuminates when the that a fault or abnormal condition exists. function is activated and the foot The symbols flash when the direc- brake or parking brake is acting. tion indicators are used. Symbol Specification The brake holds the car stationary when it has stopped. Information, read display text Tyre pressure system When one of the car's systems Position lamps does not behave as intended, this The symbol illuminates when tyre information symbol illuminates and pressure is too low. If there is a The symbol lights up when the a text appears on the driver display. fault in the tyre pressure system, position lamps are switched on. The information symbol can also the symbol will flash for approx. 1 Fault in the headlamp system illuminate in conjunction with other minute and then illuminate with a symbols. constant glow. This may be The symbol illuminates if a fault because the system cannot detect has occurred in the ABL function Fault in brake system or warn of low tyre pressure as (Active Bending Lights) or if The symbol lights up when there is intended. another fault has occurred in the a fault in the parking brake. headlamp system. Emissions system ABS fault Active main beam on If the symbol illuminates after the If this symbol illuminates then the engine has been started then it The symbol lights up blue when the system is not working. The car's may be due to a fault in the car's automatic main beam is on. regular brake system continues to emissions system. Drive to a work- Active main beam off work, but without the ABS function. shop for checking. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo The symbol lights up white when workshop is contacted. the automatic main beam is off.

}}

99 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Symbol Specification Symbol Specification Symbol Specification Main beam On Preconditioning on Lane assistance The symbol illuminates when main The symbol illuminates when the White symbol: Lane assistance is beam is on and with main beam engine block and passenger com- on and road lines are detected. flash. partment heater/air conditioning Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on are preconditioning the car. Active main beam on but road lines are not detected. Stability system The symbol lights up blue when Yellow symbol: Lane assistance active main beam is on. Position A flashing symbol indicates that warns/intervenes. lamps are switched on. the stability system is operating. If Lane assistance and rain sensor the symbol illuminates with con- Active main beam off stant glow then there is a fault in White symbol: Lane assistance is The symbol lights up white when the system. on and road lines are detected. active main beam is off. Position Rain sensor is on. Stability system, sport mode lamps are switched on. Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on The symbol illuminates when the Main beam On but road lines are not detected. sport mode is activated. Sport Rain sensor is on. The symbol lights up when main mode allows for a more active driv- beam and the position lamps are ing experience. The system then Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate switched on. detects whether the accelerator and fuel filler flap pedal, steering wheel movements If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not Rear fog lamp on and cornering are more active than closed properly then the information or warning in normal driving and then allows This symbol illuminates when the symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis- controlled skidding of the rear sec- rear fog lamp is switched on. play. tion up to a certain level before it Rain sensor on intervenes and stabilises the car. Related information This symbol illuminates when the • Driver display (p. 95) rain sensor is on. • Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 101) • Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 65)

100 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Warning symbols in the driver Symbol Specification Symbol Specification display The warning symbols alert the driver that an Warning Fault in brake system important function is activated or that a serious The red warning symbol illuminates If this symbol illuminates, the brake fault or condition exists. when a fault has been indicated fluid level may be too low. Visit the which could affect the safety nearest authorised workshop to WARNING and/or driveability of the car. An have the brake fluid level checked If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the explanatory text is shown on the and rectified. driver display at the same time. The brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further Parking brake applied before topping up the brake fluid. warning symbol can also illuminate The loss of brake fluid must be investigated in conjunction with other symbols. This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake by a workshop. Volvo recommends contacting Seatbelt reminder an authorised Volvo workshop. is applied. This symbol flashes if someone in A flashing symbol means that a a front seat has not put on their fault has arisen. Read the message WARNING seatbelt or if someone in a rear in the driver display. If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the seat has taken off their seatbelt. same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking. Airbags If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, a fault has been detected in one of the car's safety systems. Read the message in the driver display. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.

}}

101 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Symbol Specification Outside temperature gauge – Select Settings System Units and The outside temperature gauge is shown in the select the required unit type, Metric, Low oil pressure driver display. Imperial or US. If this symbol illuminates during A sensor detects the temperature outside of the Related information driving then the engine's oil pres- car. sure is too low. Stop the engine • Driver display (p. 95) immediately and check the engine • Climate control - sensors (p. 186) oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. Starter battery not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. Outside temperature gauge location in the driver display. If the car has been stationary, the gauge may dis- Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate play a temperature reading that is too high. and fuel filler flap If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not When the outside temperature is within the range closed properly then the information or warning +2°C to -5°C, a snowflake symbol is shown in the symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis- driver display as a warning for potentially slippery play. conditions. The snowflake symbol is also illuminated briefly in the head-up display, if the car is Related information equipped with one. • Driver display (p. 95) Outside temperature gauge setting Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 99) • Change the unit for the temperature gauge via • Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 65) the centre display's top view. • Safety (p. 60)

102 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Clock Automatic time for cars with GPS License agreement for the driver The clock is shown in both the driver display and If the car is equipped with a navigation system display the centre display. then Automatic Time can be selected. The time A license is an agreement for the right to oper- zone is then adjusted automatically based on the ate a certain activity or the right to use someone Location location of the car. For certain types of navigation else's entitlement according to the terms and systems, the current location (country) must also conditions in the agreement. The following text is be set to obtain the right time zone. If Automatic Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/devel- Time is not selected, time and data are adjusted oper. with arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen. BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" Summer time License In certain countries, it is possible to select automatic setting of summer time with Auto. For Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All other countries, summer time can be set with On rights reserved. or Off. Redistribution and use in source and binary Related information forms, with or without modification, are permitted • Driver display (p. 95) provided that the following conditions are met: Clock location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display. • Settings view (p. 174) 1. Redistributions of source code must retain In the centre display, the clock is located at the the above copyright notice, this list of top right of the status bar. conditions and the following disclaimer. In certain situations, messages and information 2. Redistributions in binary form must may cover the clock in the driver display. reproduce the above copyright notice, this list Settings for time and date of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials Select Settings System Date & Time in provided with the distribution. the centre display's top view to change settings for time and date format. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the Adjust time and date by pressing the up or down following acknowledgement: This product arrow on the touch screen. includes software developed by the

}}

103 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| University of California, Berkeley and its Redistribution and use in source and binary WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, contributors. forms, with or without modification, are permitted OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR 4. Neither the name of the University nor the provided that the following conditions are met: OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF names of its contributors may be used to 1. Redistributions of source code must retain ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH endorse or promote products derived from the above copyright notice, this list of DAMAGE. this software without specific prior written conditions and the following disclaimer. permission. 2. Redistributions in binary form must BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE reproduce the above copyright notice, this list Copyright (c) , All rights REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND of conditions and the following disclaimer in reserved. ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, the documentation and/or other materials Redistribution and use in source and binary INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE provided with the distribution. IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY forms, with or without modification, are permitted 3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE provided that the following conditions are met: names of its contributors may be used to ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE endorse or promote products derive from this 1. Redistributions of source code must retain REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE software without specific prior written the above copyright notice, this list of FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, permission. conditions and the following disclaimer. SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL 2. Redistributions in binary form must DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS reproduce the above copyright notice, this list PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR of conditions and the following disclaimer in SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED the documentation and/or other materials OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER provided with the distribution. CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF DAMAGE. EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER License SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

104 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which license applies to all files distributed in the (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, all encourage inclusion and use of free original FreeType archive, including all source PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR software in commercial and freeware code, binaries and documentation, unless SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; products alike. As a consequence, its main otherwise stated in the file in its original, OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER points are that: o We don't promise that this unmodified form as distributed in the original CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, software works. However, we are be archive. If you are unsure whether or not a WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, interested in any kind of bug reports. (às is' particular file is covered by this license, you OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR distribution) o You can use this software for must contact us to verify this. The FreeType OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF whatever you want, in parts or full form, project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote Lemberg. All rights reserved except as DAMAGE. this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, specified below. 1. No Warranty THE in a program, you must acknowledge FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED ÀS IS' The views and conclusions contained in the somewhere in your documentation that WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, software and documentation are those of the you've used the FreeType code. (`credits') EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, authors and should not be interpreted as We specifically permit and encourage the INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, representing official policies, either expressed or inclusion of this software, with or without WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND implied, of the FreeBSD Project. modifications, in commercial products, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. FreeType Project License provided that all warranty or liability claims IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner, are assumed by the product vendor. Legal AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY Introduction The FreeType Project is the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF distributed in several archive packages; some `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not of them may contain, in addition to the originally distributed by the authors (David signed this license, you are not required to FreeType font engine, various tools and Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner accept it. However, as the FreeType project contributions which rely on, or relate to, the Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they is copyrighted material, only this license, or FreeType Project. This license applies to all named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' another one contracted with the authors, files found in such packages, and which do refers to the licensee, or person using the grants you the right to use, distribute, and not fall under their own explicit license. The project, where ùsing' is a generic term modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or license affects thus the FreeType font including compiling the project's source code modifying the FreeType project, you indicate engine, the test programs, documentation as well as linking it to form a `program' or and makefiles, at the very least. This license èxecutable'. This program is referred to as à was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG program using the FreeType engine'. This }}

105 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| that you understand and accept all the terms `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through of this license. `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. 1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in 4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are source and binary forms, with or without to FreeType: o [email protected] distributed according to the same disclaimer and modification, are permitted provided that the Discusses general use and applications of license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following following conditions are met: o Redistribution FreeType, as well as future and wanted individuals added to the list of Contributing of source code must retain this license file additions to the library and distribution. If you Authors (`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions, are looking for support, start in this list if you Simon-Pierre Cadieux deletions or changes to the original files haven't found anything to help you in the Eric S. Raymond must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. o [email protected] documentation. The copyright notices of the Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, Gilles Vollant unaltered, original files must be preserved in design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. and with the following additions to the disclaimer: all copies of source files. o Redistribution in o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current binary form must provide a disclaimer that FreeType web page, which will allow you to There is no warranty against interference with states that the software is based in part of download our latest development version and your enjoyment of the library or against the work of the FreeType Team, in the read online documentation. You can also infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts distribution documentation. We also contact us individually at: David Turner or the library will fulfill any of your particular encourage you to put an URL to the Robert Wilhelm purposes or needs. This library is provided with all FreeType web page in your documentation, Werner faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions Lemberg performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. apply to any software derived from or based Libpng License libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through on the FreeType code, not just the 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, This copy of the libpng notices is provided for unmodified files. If you use our work, you 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are your convenience. In case of any discrepancy must acknowledge us. However, no fee need distributed according to the same disclaimer and between this copy and the notices in the file be paid to us. license as libpng-0.96, with the following png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, 3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors individuals added to the list of Contributing the latter shall prevail. and contributors may not be used to endorse Authors: or promote products derived from this COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and Tom Lane software without specific prior written LICENSE: permission. We suggest, but do not require, If you modify libpng you may insert additional Glenn Randers-Pehrson that you use one or more of the following notices immediately following this sentence. Willem van Schaik phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials:

106 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31). disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the special, exemplary, or consequential damages, Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. following individuals added to the list of which may result from the use of the PNG OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark Contributing Authors: Reference Library, even if advised of the of the Open Source Initiative. possibility of such damage. John Bowler Glenn Randers-Pehrson [email protected] Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, Kevin Bracey April 15, 2002 modify, and distribute this source code, or Sam Bushell portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, MIT License Magnus Holmgren subject to the following restrictions: Copyright (c) Greg Roelofs 1. The origin of this source code must not be Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to misrepresented. any person obtaining a copy of this software and Tom Tanner 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as associated documentation files (the "Software"), libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, such and must not be misrepresented as to deal in the Software without restriction, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy being the original source. including without limitation the rights to use, Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, For the purposes of this copyright and license, altered from any source or altered source and to permit persons to whom the Software is "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following distribution. furnished to do so, subject to the following set of individuals: The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. conditions: Andreas Dilger specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to The above copyright notice and this permission Dave Martindale supporting the PNG file format in commercial notice shall be included in all copies or Guy Eric Schalnat products. If you use this source code in a product, substantial portions of the Software. acknowledgment is not required but would be Paul Schmidt THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", appreciated. WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, Tim Wegner A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". convenient use in "about" boxes and the like: LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND including, without limitation, the warranties of NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL }}

107 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE SGI Free Software B License Version OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR 2.0. SOFTWARE. OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Except as contained in this notice, the name of OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, Sept. 18, 2008) Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon or other dealings in this Software without prior OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc. zlib License obtaining a copy of this software and associated Related information The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) year documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in < > • Driver display (p. 95) the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, This software is provided 'as-is', without any publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies express or implied warranty. In no event will the of the Software, and to permit persons to whom authors be held liable for any damages arising the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the from the use of this software. following conditions: The above copyright notice Permission is granted to anyone to use this including the dates of first publication and either software for any purpose, including commercial this permission notice or a reference to http:// applications, and to alter it and redistribute it oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in freely, subject to the following restrictions: all copies or substantial portions of the Software. 1. The origin of this software must not be THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", misrepresented; you must not claim that you WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, wrote the original software. If you use this EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT software in a product, an acknowledgment in LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF the product documentation would be MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A appreciated but is not required. PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND 2. Altered source versions must be plainly NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL marked as such, and must not be SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY misrepresented as being the original CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, software. WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT 3. This notice may not be removed or altered OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE from any source distribution.

108 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Application menu in the driver App Functions Using the application menu in the display driver display Application menu (app menu) in the driver dis- Trip com- Selection of trip meter, selection The application menu (the app menu) in the play provides quick access to commonly used puter of what to show in the driver dis- driver display is operated with the steering functions for certain apps. play, etc. wheel's right-hand keypad. Media Selection of active source for player the media player. Phone Calling a contact from the call list. Navigation Pause guide, start guide to recently used destination, etc.

Related information • Driver display (p. 95) • Overview of the centre display (p. 33) • Using the application menu in the driver dis- The app menu in the driver display can be used instead play (p. 109) The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand key- of using the centre display. pad. The app menu is shown in the driver display and Open/close is controlled using the steering wheel's right- hand keypad. The app menu makes it easy to Left/right switch between different apps or functions within Up/down the apps without having to let go of the steering wheel and take your eyes off the road. Confirm App menu functions Different apps give access to different types of functions. The following apps and their associated functions can be controlled from the app menu:

}}

109 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Opening/closing the app menu Related information Messages in the driver display and – Press on open/close (1). • Application menu in the driver display the centre display (p. 109) (It is not possible to open the app menu The driver display and centre display can show while there is an unacknowledged message • Managing messages in the driver display and messages to inform or assist the driver in the in the driver display. The message must be the centre display (p. 112) event of different events. confirmed before the app menu can be Driver display opened.) > The app menu opens/closes. The app menu closes automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain options have been selected. Navigating and selecting in the app menu 1. Navigate between the different apps that are available by tapping on left or right (2). > Functions for previous/next app are shown in the app menu. Message in the driver display. 2. Browse through the functions for the selected app by tapping on up or down (3). The driver display shows messages that are of high priority for the driver. 3. Confirm or highlight an option for the function by pressing on confirm (4). The messages can be shown in different parts of > The function is activated and for some the driver display depending on what other infor- options the app menu then closes. mation is currently being displayed. After a while, or when the message has been acknowledged/ If the app menu is opened again, the functions of action taken if required, the message disappears the most recently selected app are shown first. from the driver display. If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display.

110 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Message composition may vary and they can be Message Specification Centre display shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a Regular main- Time for regular service - request, for example. tenance contact a workshopB. Service messages Time for main- Shown at the next service date. Shown below is a selection of important service tenance messages and their meanings. Regular main- Time for regular service - tenance contact a workshopB. Message Specification Maintenance Shown when the service Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the overdue date has passed. engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work- Temporarily A function has been tem- shopB. offA porarily switched off and is Message in the centre display. reset automatically while The centre display shows messages that are of Turn off Stop and switch off the driving or after starting lower priority for the driver. engineA engine. Serious risk of again. damage - consult a work- Most messages are shown above the centre dis- B A Part of message, shown together with information on where the shop . problem has arisen. play's status bar. After a while, or when any B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. required action related to the message has been B Service urgent Contact a workshop to taken, the message disappears from the status Drive to work- check the car immediately. bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is posi- shopA tioned in the top view in the centre display. Service Contact a workshopB to Message composition may vary and they can be requiredA check the car as soon as shown together with graphics, symbols or a but- possible. ton for activating/deactivating a function linked to the message. Regular main- Time for regular service - tenance contact a workshopB. Book time for Shown before the next maintenance service date.

}}

111 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Pop-up messages Managing messages in the driver Managing a new message In some cases, a message is shown in the form display and the centre display For messages with buttons: of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have Messages in the driver display and centre dis- 1. Navigate between the different buttons that higher priority than messages shown in the sta- play are managed with the steering wheel's are available by tapping on left or right (1). tus bar and require acknowledgement/action right-hand keypad and in the centre display's before they disappear. Messages that need to be views. 2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm saved are positioned in the top view in the centre (2). display. Driver display > The message disappears from the driver display. Related information • Driver display (p. 95) For messages without buttons: • Overview of the centre display (p. 33) – Close the message by pressing on confirm • Managing messages in the driver display and (2), or allow the message to close automati- the centre display (p. 112) cally after a while. > The message disappears from the driver Managing messages saved from the driver • display. display and centre display (p. 113) If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car status application is Message in the driver display and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. shown in the centre display in conjunction with this. Left/right

Confirm Some messages in the driver display contain one or more buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example.

112 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Centre display For messages without buttons: Managing messages saved from – Close the message by tapping on it, or allow the driver display and centre display the message to close automatically after a Whether saved from the driver display or the while. centre display, messages are managed in the > The message disappears from the status centre display. bar. Messages saved from the driver display If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display. Related information • Messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 110) Message in the centre display. • Managing messages saved from the driver display and centre display (p. 113) Some messages in the centre display have a button (or several buttons in the pop-up messages) for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.

Managing a new message Saved messages and possible options in the Car status For messages with buttons: app. – Press the button to perform the action or Messages that are shown in allow the message to close automatically the driver display and that need after a while. to be saved are added in the Car status > The message disappears from the status app in the centre Car bar. display. The message message stored in Car status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this.

}}

113 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Reading a saved message To book service for a saved message: Messages saved from the centre To read a saved message immediately: – In maximised mode for the message, press display – Press the button to the right of the Car Request appoint.Call to make message stored in Car status Appointment1 for help in booking service. application message in the centre display. > With Request appoint.: The > The saved message is shown in the Car Appointments tab opens in the app and status app. creates a request to book service and repair work. To read a saved message later: With Call to make Appointment: The 1. Open the Car status app from the app view phone app is initiated and calls a service in the centre display. centre to book service and repair work. > The app is opened in the bottom subview of the home view. To read the owner's manual for a saved message: 2. Select the Messages tab in the app. Saved messages and possible options in the top view. – In maximised mode for the message, press > A list of saved messages is shown. Messages that are shown in the centre display Owner's manual to read about the mes- that need to be saved are added in the top view 3. Press on the arrow to the right to maximise/ sage in the owner's manual. of the centre display. minimise a message. > The owner's manual opens in the centre > More information on the message is display and shows information linked to Reading a saved message shown in the list and the image to the left the message. 1. Open the top view in the centre display. in the app shows information about the Saved messages in the app are deleted automat- > A list of saved messages is shown. Mes- message graphically. ically each time the engine is started. sages with an arrow to the right can be Managing a saved message maximised. In maximised mode, some messages have two 2. Press on the arrow to maximise/minimise buttons available to book service or read the the message. owner's manual.

1 Depending on market.

114 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Managing a saved message Head-up display* IMPORTANT Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/ The head-up display shows warnings and infor- The display unit from which the information is deactivating a function linked to the message. mation relating to speed, cruise control func- projected is located in the instrument panel. tions, navigation, etc. in the driver's field of – Press the button to perform the action. To avoid damage to the display unit's cover vision. Road Sign Information and incoming glass - do not store any objects on the cover Saved messages in the top view are deleted phone calls are also shown in the head-up dis- glass and make sure that no objects fall down automatically when the car is switched off. play. onto it. Related information • Messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 110) • Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 112)

Incoming phone calls. The head-up display supplements the car's driver Examples of what can be shown in the display. display and projects information onto the wind- Speed screen. The projected image can only be seen from the driver position. Cruise control Navigation

Road signs A number of symbols, e.g. the following, may be shown temporarily in the head-up display:

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| If the warning symbol illuminates - read NOTE Via the function view the warning message in the driver dis- Press the Head-up display play. The driver's ability to see the information in button. the head-up display is impaired by the follow- If the information symbol illuminates - ing: read the message in the driver display. • use of polarising sunglasses • a driving position which means that the driver is not sitting centred in the seat Via settings NOTE • objects on the display unit's cover glass 1. Press Settings in the top view. When City Safety* is activated, the informa- • unfavourable light conditions. 2. Press My Car Displays. tion in the head-up display is replaced by a 3. Select/deselect Head-Up Display. graphic for City Safety. This graphic is illumi- NOTE nated even if the head-up display is switched The option can be saved as a personal setting in off. Certain visual defects may cause headaches the driver profile. and a feeling of stress during the use of the head-up display. Selecting display options 1. Press Settings in the top view. NOTE 2. Press My Car Displays Head-Up Display Options. Activation/deactivation and adjustment of the head-up-display can only be performed when 3. Select Show Navigation In Head-Up it shows a projected image. The car's engine Display, Road Sign Information In Head- must be running. Up Display, Show Driver Support In Head-Up Display or Show Phone In Head-Up Display Activating/deactivating the head-up . display The setting can be saved as a personal setting in This function can be activated/deactivated in two the driver profile. The graphic for City Safety flashes in order to catch the ways via the centre display: driver's attention.

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting brightness and vertical Calibrate the horizontal position position The head-up display's horizontal position may need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display unit is replaced. Calibration means that the projected image is rotated clockwise or anticlockwise. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 1. Press the Head-up display adjustments 2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up button in the function view in the centre dis- Display Calibration. play. 3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with 2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of Reducing the brightness the steering wheel's right keypad. the projected image in the driver's field of vision using the steering wheel's right-hand Increasing the brightness keypad. Raising the position

Lowering the position

Confirm

Adjusting the brightness The brightness of the graphics is automatically adapted to their background light conditions. The brightness is also affected by the adjustment of the brightness in the car's other displays. Memory function in power front seat* Rotate anticlockwise The vertical position can be stored in the memory function of the power front seat. Rotate clockwise Confirm

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Cleaning Voice recognition3 Voice recognition control takes place in dialogue Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a clean The voice recognition system allows the driver to form with spoken commands from the user and and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary, lightly mois- use voice recognition to control certain functions verbal response from the system. The voice rec- ten the microfibre cloth. of the media player, Bluetooth-connected phone, ognition system uses the same microphone as the Bluetooth handsfree system and the voice Never use strong stain removers. A special clean- the climate system and Volvo's navigation sys- recognition system's replies come via the car's ing agent available from Volvo dealers can be tem*. speakers. In some cases, a text message is also used for more difficult cleaning. Voice commands offer convenience and help the shown in the driver display. Functions are con- Replacing the windscreen driver to avoid being distracted, and instead controlled from the right-hand steering wheel key- Cars with head-up display are equipped with a centrate on driving and focus attention on the pad. Settings are made via the centre display. special type of windscreen that meets the road and the traffic conditions. System updating requirements for displaying the projected image. The voice recognition system is continuously WARNING When replacing the windscreen - contact an improved. Download updates for optimal perform- authorised workshop2. The correct version of the The driver always holds overall responsibility ance, see support.volvocars.com. for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and windscreen must be fitted in order that the head- Related information up display's graphics shall be displayed correctly. complying with all applicable rules of the road. • Using voice recognition (p. 119) Related information • Voice recognition control of the phone • Function view with buttons for car functions (p. 120) (p. 47) • Voice recognition control of radio and media • Settings view (p. 174) (p. 121) • Steering wheel (p. 138) • Voice recognition control of climate control • Using the memory function in the power (p. 121) front seat* (p. 125) • Voice recognition and map navigation • Driver display (p. 95) (p. 122) • Settings for voice recognition (p. 120)

2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 3 Applies to certain markets.

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using voice recognition10 Example of voice recognition control zero three one two two four four three Basic instructions for using voice recognition Press , say “Call [Forename] [Surname] (03122443). control. [number category]" - calls the selected contact • House numbers can be spoken individually from the phone book if the contact has more or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22). Depress the steering wheel than one phone number (e.g. home, mobile, For English and Dutch, several groups can button for voice recognition work), e.g.: be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twenty- to activate the system and two (22 22). For English, double or triple can initiate a dialogue using voice Press , say "Call Robin Smith Mobile". be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can commands. Commands/phrases be given within the range 0-2300. The following commands are always available for • Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight Remember the following during communication: use: point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point two or hundred four point two (104.2). • For a command - speak after the tone in a • "Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction normal voice at normal speed. in the ongoing dialogue. Related information • Do not speak while the system is replying • "Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue. • Voice recognition (p. 118) (the system cannot understand commands • "Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system • Voice recognition control of the phone during this time). replies with the commands available in the (p. 120) • Avoid background noise in the passenger current situation, a prompt or an example. • Voice recognition control of radio and media compartment by having the doors, windows Commands for specific functions are described in (p. 121) and tailgate closed. the corresponding sections, e.g. Voice recogni- • Voice recognition control of climate control Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows: tion control of the phone. (p. 121) • by saying "Cancel". Digits • Voice recognition and map navigation • with a long press on the voice recognition The number commands are stated differently (p. 122) button on the steering wheel . depending on the function to be controlled: • Settings for voice recognition (p. 120) To speed up communication and skip the • Phone numbers and postcodes must be prompts from the system, press the steering spoken individually, number by number, e.g. wheel button for voice recognition when the system voice is speaking and say the next command.

10 Applies to certain markets.

119 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Settings for voice recognition17 Related information Voice recognition control of the 24 Several settings for the voice recognition system • Voice recognition (p. 118) phone can be made. • Using voice recognition (p. 119) Command for voice recognition control of a Bluetooth-connected mobile phone to e.g. call a 1. Press Settings in top view. • Voice recognition control of the phone (p. 120) contact, a number, or to listen to a message. 2. System Voice Control Press and select • Voice recognition control of radio and media To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice settings. (p. 121) recognition command must include contact infor- • Repeat Mode • Voice recognition control of climate control mation that is entered in the phone book. If a • Gender (p. 121) contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers then the number category can also be Voice recognition and map navigation • Speech Rate • stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin (p. 122) Audio settings Smith Mobile". 1. Settings Press in top view. Tap on and say one of the following com- 2. Press Sound System Volumes Voice mands: Control and select settings. • "Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact Change language from the phone book. Voice recognition is not possible for all lan- • "Call [phone number]" - dials the phone guages. Languages available for voice recogni- number. tion are marked with an icon in the language list - • "Recent calls" - displays the call list. . • "Read message" - message is read out. If Changing the language also affects menu, mes- there are several messages - select which sage and help texts. message should be read out. 1. Press Settings in top view. Related information 2. Press System Language and select lan- • Voice recognition (p. 118) guage. • Using voice recognition (p. 119) • Settings for voice recognition (p. 120)

17 Applies to certain markets. 24 Applies to certain markets.

120 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Voice recognition control of radio • "Radio FM" - starts FM radio. Voice recognition control of climate 28 32 and media • "DAB " - starts DAB radio. control Command for voice recognition control of radio • "TV" - starts playback from TV*. Voice recognition commands for the climate and media player. control system to e.g. change temperature, acti- • "CD" - starts playback from CD*. vate a heated seat or change fan level. Tap on and say one of the following com- • "USB" - starts playback from USB. mands: • "iPod" - starts playback from iPod. Press and say one of the following commands: • "Media" - starts a dialogue for media and • "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Blue- radio and shows examples of commands. tooth-connected media source. • "Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate control and shows examples of commands. • "Play [artist]" - plays back music by the • "Similar music" — plays back music similar selected artist. to the music currently playing back from USB • "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets • "Play [song title]" - plays back the selected devices. the desired temperature. song. • "Raise temperature"/"Lower Related information Play [song title] from [album] temperature" - raise/lower the temperature • " " - plays • Voice recognition (p. 118) back the selected song from the selected setting one step. album. • Using voice recognition (p. 119) • "Sync temperature" - synchronises the • "Play [TV channel name]" - starts the • Settings for voice recognition (p. 120) temperature for all climate zones in the car selected TV channel. with the temperature set for the driver's side. • "Play [radio station]" - starts playing back • "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the the selected radio channel. desired air flow. • "Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected • "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes radio frequency in the current frequency the desired air flow. band. If no radio source is active, the FM • "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes band is started by default. the air flow to Max/Off. • "Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" - • "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" - starts the selected radio frequency in the raises/lowers the fan level one step. selected frequency band. • "Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate • "Radio" - starts FM radio. regulation.

28 Applies to certain markets. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" - • "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat Voice recognition and map activates/deactivates the air conditioning. ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat navigation36 • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" - ventilation*. Command for voice control of the navigation activates/deactivates the air circulation. • "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat system, e.g. set destination or pause guidance. • "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster" ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows the ventilated seat* one step. Tap on and say one of the following commands: and door mirrors. Related information • “Navigation” - Initiates a navigation dialogue • "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max • Voice recognition (p. 118) defroster off" - activates/deactivates the and shows examples of commands. • Using voice recognition (p. 119) max defroster. • "Take me home" - Guidance is given to the • Settings for voice recognition (p. 120) • "Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off Home position. electric defroster" - activates/deactivates • Climate control (p. 186) • "Go to [City]" - Specifies a city as a desti- the heated windscreen*. nation. Example "Drive to London". • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear • "Go to [Address]" - Specifies an address defroster" - activates/deactivates the as a destination. An address must contain heated rear window and door mirrors. city and street. Example "Drive to 5 King • "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn Street". steering wheel heat off" - activates/deac- • "Add intersection" - Starts a dialogue tivates the heated steering wheel*. where two streets must be specified. The • "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower intersection point of the specified streets steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the then becomes the destination. setting for the heated steering wheel* one • "Go to [Post code]" - Specifies a post step. code as a destination. Example "Drive to 1 2 3 4 5". • "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat" - activates/deactivates the heated seat*. • "Go to [contact]" - Specifies an address from the phone book as a destination. Exam- "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" - • ple "Drive to Robyn Smith". raises/lowers the setting for the heated seat* one step.

32 Applies to certain markets.

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

• "Search [POI category]" - Searches for • "Turn on voice guidance" - Starts the Manual front seat POI37 category (e.g. restaurant), which are switched-off voice guidance. The car's front seats have different setting always sorted "around the car". To sort the options for optimum seating comfort. list along the route - say "Along the route" Related information when the result list is shown. • Voice recognition (p. 118) • "Search [POI category] in [City]" - The • Using voice recognition (p. 119) results list is sorted around the centre point • Settings for voice recognition (p. 120) of the specified city. Example "Search for restaurant in London". • "Search [POI name]". Example "Search Hyde Park". • "Change country/Change state38, 39" - Changes the search area for navigation. • "Show favourites" - Shows favourited positions in the driver display. Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush- • "Clear itinerary" - Erases all the stored intermediate destinations and final destina- ion* by pumping up/down. tion in an itinerary. Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting • "Repeat voice guidance" - Repeats the the handle and adjusting the distance to the last spoken guidance. steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been • "Pause guidance" - Pauses the guidance adjusted. on the map. Change the lumbar support* by pressing the • "Resume guidance" - Resumes the button upward/downward/forward/back. paused guidance on the map. • "Turn off voice guidance" - Switches off voice guidance.

36 Applies to certain markets. 37 The user has the option of calling the POI or specifying it as a destination. 38 In European countries, “Country” is used instead of “State”. 39 For Brazil and India, the search area is changed via the centre display. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting Power front seat* Adjusting the power front seat* the control up/down. The car's front seats have different setting Set to desired sitting position using the control Change the backrest rake by turning the options for optimum seating comfort. The power on the front seat's seating section. control knob. seat can be moved forward/backward and up/ down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be WARNING raised/lowered and the backrest rake can be changed. The lumbar support can be adjusted Adjust the position of the driver's seat before upward/downward/forward/backward. setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid The power seats have overload protection which personal injury in the event of heavy braking is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this or an accident. happens, remove the object and then operate the seat again. Related information • Power front seat* (p. 124) The seat can be adjusted for a period of time after unlocking the door without the engine run- • Multi-functional front seat* (p. 126) ning. Seat adjustment can always be performed • Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* when the engine is running. Adjustment can also Change the lumbar support by pressing the (p. 205) be performed for a period of time after the button upward/downward/forward/back. • Seatbelt (p. 62) engine has been switched off. Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by Related information adjusting the control up/down. • Multi-functional front seat* (p. 126) Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down. • Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 124) Move the seat forward/backward by adjust- Using the memory function in the power • ing the control forward/backward. front seat* (p. 125) Change the backrest rake by adjusting the Manual front seat (p. 123) • control forward/backward. • Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) (p. 205) can be made at a time. Easy entry to and exit from the driver's seat* • The backrests of the front seats cannot be low- (p. 130) ered fully forward.

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Related information Using the memory function in the 2. Push the M button and release. The light • Power front seat* (p. 124) power front seat* indicator in the button illuminates. • Using the memory function in the power The memory function stores settings for the seat, 3. Within three seconds, depress the 1, 2 or 3 front seat* (p. 125) door mirrors, and head-up display*. button. • Multi-functional front seat* (p. 126) It is possible to store three different settings with > When the position has been stored in the selected memory button an acoustic sig- Seatbelt (p. 62) the memory function. The memory function key- • M pad is located either on one front door or both*. nal sounds and the light indicator in the button extinguishes. If none of the memory buttons is depressed within three seconds then the M button extinguishes and no storing takes place. The seat must be adjusted again before a new memory can be set. Using a stored setting A stored setting can be used with the front door either open or closed: Front door open – Press one of the memory buttons 1 - 3 with Memory button a brief touch. Seat, door mirrors and head-up display move and then stop at the positions Memory button stored in the selected memory button. Memory button

Button M for storing settings.

Store setting 1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display to the desired position.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Front door closed Multi-functional front seat* the screen. When it is possible to show setting – Hold one of the memory buttons 1 - 3 Enhance the seating comfort using the multi- options for both the front seats, the driver's set- depressed until seat, door mirrors and head- function control. ting options are shown in the upper half and the up display stop in the positions that are passenger's in the lower half. stored in the selected memory button. To stop showing the seat settings view in the If the memory button is released, the movement centre display, press the home button, which is of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will located under the centre display. be stopped. Related information WARNING • Power front seat* (p. 124) • Adjusting functions in the multi-functional Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do front seat* (p. 127) not play with the keypad. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the • Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* seat during adjustment. Make sure that none (p. 205) of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger of becoming trapped. Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's seating section. Related information The multi-function control can, in some variants, Power front seat* (p. 124) • be used to adjust the lumbar support*, side sup- • Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 124) port for the back*, cushion length and massage settings*. Settings made with the multi-function control are shown in the centre display*. Certain function selections can also be made directly in the centre display. Centre display The driver and the passenger seat settings that are made with the multi-function control are shown in the centre display. If the settings for only one of the front seats are shown in the centre display, the settings are positioned centred in

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting functions in the multi- 3. To choose between the different massage functional front seat* functions, select either directly in the touch Both the multi-function control on the seat and screen or by moving the cursor up/down the centre display can be used in order to using the multi-function control's upper/ change the settings. The range of settings is lower button. Change the setting in the shown in the centre display*. selected function by selecting directly in the touch screen or by pressing the arrows, or by using the multi-function control's front/rear button. Settings for massage The following setting options are available for massage: • On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch on/off the massage function. • Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage programs. Select between Swell, Tread, Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder. • Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's High seating section. . Speed Slow Normal To activate the multi-function control, turn the View for massage in the centre display. • : Select between , and Fast control upwards/downward. 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning . the control upward/downward. The seat set- Adjusting massage settings* in the tings view will be shown on the centre dis- front seat play. The front seat has massage in the backrest. The 2. Select Massage in the seat settings view. massage is performed by air cushions that can massage with different settings.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Restarting massage 2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings view. • Press the front seat button in order to increase the side support. • Press the rear seat button in order to reduce the side support. Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat The lumbar support can be adjusted upward/ downward/forward/backward.

Button for restarting massage in the centre display. The massage function is deactivated automatically after 20 minutes. The function is reactivated manually. – Tap on Restart in the centre display in order to restart the selected massage program. > The massage program restarts. If no action is taken, the message remains View for adjustable side support in the centre display. shown in the top view. To adjust the side support: It is not possible to use the massage function 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning when the engine is switched off. the control upward/downward. The seat set- Adjusting side support in the front seat tings view will be shown on the centre dis- * play. backrests The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to provide side support.

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view. • Press the seat button up/down to move the lumbar support up/down. • Press the front seat button in order to increase the lumbar support. • Press the rear seat button in order to decrease the lumbar support. Extending the seat cushion in the front seat Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the multi-function control on the seat.

View for lumbar support in the centre display. View for extension of the cushion in the centre display. To adjust the lumbar support: 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning the control upward/downward. The seat set- 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning tings view will be shown on the centre dis- the control upward/downward. The seat set- play. tings view will be shown on the centre display. 2. Select Cushion extension in the seat settings view. • Press the front seat button in order to extend the seat cushion. • Press the rear seat button in order to retract the seat cushion. }}

129 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Related information Easy entry to and exit from the Activating/deactivating easy entry and • Multi-functional front seat* (p. 126) driver's seat* exit • Managing messages saved from the driver The Easy Ingress & Egress function can be 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display and centre display (p. 113) used in order to make it easier for the driver to display. get in and out of the driver's seat. 2. Press My Car Seats. Easy exit 3. Select Easy Ingress & Egress to activate/ The function makes it easier for the driver to get deactivate. out of the driver's seat by simultaneously lowering the seat, reducing the side support, and Related information retracting the seat cushion. • Power front seat* (p. 124) For the seat to be set in easy exit position, the • Ignition positions (p. 399) function must be activated in the centre display. – Switch off the engine and open the driver's door. > The seat, side support and seat cushion move simultaneously to the easy exit position. Easy entry The seat remains in the exit position when the driver leaves the car. When the driver returns to the car, he/she will be able to enter and seat himself/herself easily and comfortably. When the driver has sat down in the seat and set the car's electrical system in at least ignition position I, the seat will be adjusted to the driver's personal setting.

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the passenger seat from Rear seat the driver's seat* The car has 7 seats which means that the rear The front passenger seat can be adjusted from seats consist of two rear seat rows. The second the driver's seat. seat row has three individual seats, while the third seat row has two individual seats. Activating the function The function can be activated in two ways via the Related information centre display: • Adjusting the head restraints in the second Via the function view seat row (p. 132) Adjust passenger Press the • Adjusting the seat longitudinally in the sec- seat button to activate. ond seat row (p. 133) Move the passenger seat forward/backward • Adjusting the backrest rake in the second by adjusting the control forward/backward. seat row (p. 134) Change the passenger seat's backrest rake • Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 135) Via settings by adjusting the control forward/backward. Entry/exit for third seat row (p. 136) 1. Press Settings in the top view. Related information • Lowering backrests in the third seat row 2. • Power front seat* (p. 124) • Press My Car Seats. (p. 137) • Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 124) 3. Select Adjust Passenger Seat From • Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* Driver Position to activate. • Seatbelt (p. 62) (p. 205) Adjust passenger seat From activation of the function, the driver must adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If no adjustment is made within this time the function is deactivated. The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the controls on the driver's seat:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the head restraints in the Electrical lowering of the rear seat's second seat row outer head restraints* Adjust the centre seat head restraint according to the height of the passenger. Fold down the outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward visibility. Adjusting the head restraint, centre seat

To lower the head restraint, the button (located in the centre between the backrest and head restraint, see illustration) must be pressed in The outer head restraints can be lowered in two while the head restraint is pressed down care- ways via the centre display: fully. Via the function view WARNING Press the Headrest fold but- The centre seat head restraint must be in its ton to activate/deactivate low- lowest position when the centre seat is not ering. The centre seat's head restraint must be used. When the centre seat is used, the head adjusted according to the passenger's height so restraint must be correctly adjusted to the height of the passenger so that it covers the that, if possible, the whole of the back of the whole of the back of the head if possible. head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Via settings Adjusting the seat longitudinally in WARNING The car's electrical system must be in the ignition the second seat row position II. Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away. The seats in the second seat row can be Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrol- 1. Press Settings in the top view. adjusted forward or back individually in order to led or careless adjustment can lead to trap- create optimal legroom for the second and third ping injuries. 2. Press My Car Seats. row passengers. 3. Select Fold Headrest On Second Row Related information Seats to lower the rear outer head • Rear seat (p. 131) restraints. • Adjusting the backrest rake in the second seat row (p. 134) WARNING Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are passengers in any of the outer seats.

Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard.

WARNING The head restraints must be in locked posi- Lift the handle that is located under the seat. tion after being raised. Slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. WARNING 3. Release the handle and slide the seat until The head restraints on the outer seats in the the catch engages. second seat row must always be raised when the third seat row is occupied by passengers. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted. Related information • Rear seat (p. 131) • Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 135)

133 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the backrest rake in the Outer seats Related information second seat row • Rear seat (p. 131) Backrest rake can be adjusted individually for • Adjusting the seat longitudinally in the sec- each seat in the second seat row. ond seat row (p. 133) Centre seat • Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 135) • Seatbelt (p. 62)

1. Pull the handle on the side of the seat upwards. 2. Adjust the backrest rake forward/backward by reducing/increasing the load against the backrest. 1. Pull the strap located on the centre seat's right-hand side. 3. Release the handle to lock the backrest position and slide the backrest until the 2. Adjust the backrest rake forward/backward catch engages. by reducing/increasing the load against the backrest. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted. 3. Release the strap to lock the backrest position and slide the backrest until the catch engages. WARNING Check that the seat is locked after the position Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away. Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrol- has been adjusted. led or careless adjustment can lead to trapping injuries.

134 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Lowering backrests in the second NOTE To raise the backrest to the upright position: seat row The front seats may need to be pushed for- 1. Pull the strap. The second seat row has three individual seats. wards, and/or the backrests adjusted The backrests can be lowered forward individu- 2. Raise the backrest and release the strap. upwards, in order that the rear backrests can ally. Slide the backrest until the catch engages. be fully folded forward. 3. If necessary, raise the head restraint. WARNING The rear seats may also need to be moved backwards. Outer seats Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away. Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrol- led or careless adjustment can lead to trap- Centre seat ping injuries.

IMPORTANT There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Oth- erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.

IMPORTANT To lower the backrest: The integrated booster cushion* on the cen- 1. Pull the handle on the side of the seat tre seat must be lowered before lowering the To lower the backrest: upwards and hold the handle in the raised position while lowering the backrest. seat. 1. Lower the head restraint manually. The armrest* for the centre seat must be 2. Pull the strap located on the centre seat's raised before lowering the seat. right-hand side. If the car has private locking*, the tailgate 3. Lower the backrest forward until it locks into must be closed before lowering the seat. position. The seat cushion folds down/ forward when the backrest is lowered in order to create a flat surface. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| 2. Make sure that the backrest with head WARNING Entry/exit for third seat row restraint does not come into contact with the In order to smoothly and easily be able to get in The head restraints on the outer seats in the front seat when lowered. Lower the backrest and out of the third seat row, the second seat forward until it locks into position. second seat row must always be raised when the third seat row is occupied by passengers. row can be adjusted. > The seat cushion folds down/forward when the backrest is lowered in order to Related information create a flat surface. The head restraint lowers automatically when the rear seat is • Rear seat (p. 131) lowered. • Adjusting the backrest rake in the second seat row (p. 134) WARNING • Lowering backrests in the third seat row Make sure the backrests are properly locked (p. 137) after they are lowered. • Adjusting the head restraints in the second seat row (p. 132) To raise the backrest to the upright position: 1. Pull the handle on the side of the seat upwards and hold the handle in the raised 1. Pull upward/forward on the handle located at position while raising the backrest. the top of the outer seats in the second seat 2. Make sure that the backrest with head row. restraint does not come into contact with the 2. Fold the backrest forward and slide the front seat when raised. Raise the backrest whole seat forward. and release the handle. To raise the seat to the upright position: 3. Slide the backrest until the catch engages. – Slide back the seat and raise the backrest 4. The head restraint is raised manually. until it locks.

WARNING WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up. being folded up.

136 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Related information Lowering backrests in the third seat 2. Make sure that the backrest with head • Adjusting the seat longitudinally in the sec- row restraint does not come into contact with the ond seat row (p. 133) The third seat row has two individual seats. seat in front when lowered. Fold the backrest • Adjusting the backrest rake in the second These can be lowered forward individually. forward. seat row (p. 134) > The seat cushion folds down/forward when the backrest is lowered in order to Lowering backrests in the second seat row IMPORTANT • create a flat surface. The head restraint (p. 135) To be able to lower the third seat row back- lowers automatically when the rear seat is rests, it may be necessary to change the posi- lowered. tion and angle of the seats in the second seat row. To raise the seat, raise the backrest manually until it locks. The head restraint is raised manually.

WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up.

Related information • Rear seat (p. 131) • Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 135) • Adjusting the backrest rake in the second 1. Pull upward/forward on the handle that is seat row (p. 134) located on the top of the backrest. • Adjusting the seat longitudinally in the second seat row (p. 133)

137 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Steering wheel Horn • Head-up display* (p. 115) The steering wheel has controls for horn, driver • Using the application menu in the driver dis- support systems and voice recognition, amongst play (p. 109) other things. • Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 112) • Phone (p. 482)

The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel. Related information Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel. • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 139) Controls for driver support systems43. • Activating/deactivating heating of steering Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in wheel* (p. 207) an automatic gearbox. • Speed limiter* (p. 282) Controls for voice recognition, head-up dis- • Cruise control (p. 289) play settings, and menu, message and phone Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) handling. • • Distance Warning* (p. 293) • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 318) • Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 408) • Voice recognition (p. 118)

43 Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*.

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the steering wheel Headlamp control The steering wheel can be adjusted in different Use the light controls in the left-hand stalk positions. switch to activate external lighting. Use the thumbwheel in the instrument panel to adjust headlamp levelling45 and the brightness of the interior lighting.

Rotating ring in the steering wheel stalk switch

Adjusting the steering wheel. 1. Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel.

The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that depth. suits you. 3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel WARNING in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before wheel lightly at the same time as you move driving away. the lever back. Related information With speed related power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is • Steering wheel (p. 138) regulated according to the car's speed in order to • Speed-dependent steering force (p. 278) give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.

45 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps. }}

139 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Position Specification Position Specification WARNING Daytime running lights when the Daytime running lights and position The car's audio system is not able to deter- car's electrical system is in ignition lamps in daylight when the car's mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations. position II or when the car is run- electrical system is in ignition posi- ning. tion II or when the car is running. The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit- Main beam flash can be used. Dipped beam and position lamps in able for the traffic situation and in accordance weak daylight or darkness, or when with applicable traffic regulations. Daytime running lights and position the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamps when the car's electrical sys- lamp are activated. tem is in ignition position II or when Thumbwheel in the instrument panel the car is running. The Active main beam function can be activated. Position lamps when the car is parkedA. Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on. Main beam flash can be used. Main beam flash can be used. Dipped beam and position lamps. Active main beam on/off. Main beam can be activated.

Main beam flash can be used. A Also at stationary when the car is running, provided that the rotating ring is moved to this position from another position.

Volvo recommends that mode is used when the vehicle is driven. Thumbwheel for adjusting interior brightness

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

A car with LED46 headlamps* has automatic headlamp levelling and therefore does not have the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.

46 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the interior brightness Headlamp levelling Load case Thumb- The lamps inside the car come on differently Beam alignment47 is adjusted using one of the wheel depending on the ignition position used. thumbwheels in the instrument panel. position The thumbwheel adjusts the brightness of display 1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's Only driver. 0 lighting, control lighting, ambient lighting and electrical system in ignition position I. ambience lighting. Driver and passenger in the front 0 Headlamp levelling 2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower passenger seat. beam alignment. The load in the car changes the vertical align- Driver and passenger in the front 1 ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle The position in which the thumbwheel should be passenger seat. oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the set for a number of load cases is shown below. height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is Three passengers in the second heavily laden. seat row. For different load cases and settings, see the Driver and passenger in the front 1 section "Headlamp levelling". passenger seat. Related information Three passengers in the second • Passenger compartment lighting (p. 150) seat row. • Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 144) 220 kg load in the cargo area. • Ignition positions (p. 399) Driver and maximum load in the 2 • Headlamp levelling (p. 141) cargo area. Driver and passenger in the front 1 Examples of thumbwheel position. passenger seat. Thumbwheel in position 0 Three passengers in the second seat row. Thumbwheel in position 1 Two passengers in the third seat row.

47 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps. }}

141 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Load case Thumb- Position lamps from behind. This takes place irrespective of the wheel The position lamps are switched on with the position of the rotating ring or the ignition posi- position rotating ring on the stalk switch. tion of the car's electrical system. Driver and passenger in the front 0 Related information passenger seat. • Headlamp control (p. 139) Two passengers in the third seat • Ignition positions (p. 399) row. Driver and passenger in the front 1 passenger seat. Three passengers in the second seat row. Two passengers in the third seat row. 70 kg load in the cargo area. Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position. Turn the rotating ring to the position - the Related information position lamps are switched on (number plate • Headlamp control (p. 139) lighting is switched on at the same time). If the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or the car is running then the daytime running lights are switched on instead of the front position lamps. However, this does not apply at stationary when the car is running, if the rotating ring is moved to position from another position. In this case, the position lamps are switched on. If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside, the rear position lamps come on (if not already switched on) to warn road users approaching

142 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Daytime running lights Changing to dipped beam also takes place if the Dipped beam The daytime running lights are switched on front fog lamp and/or rear fog lamp are activated. When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring when the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in At stationary when the car is running, the posi- in the position, dipped beam is activated position , or as well as when tion lamps are switched on instead of other light- automatically in weak daylight or darkness. the car's electrical system is in ignition position II ing, if the rotating ring is moved to the position Dipped beam or when the car is running. For the posi- for position lamps, , from another position. tion, this only applies in daylight. In weak daylight or darkness, dipped beam is switched on WARNING instead. This system help to save energy - it cannot Daytime running lights during the day. determine in all situations when daylight is too DRL weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain. The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct beam pattern for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.

Related information Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position. • Headlamp control (p. 139) With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the Dipped beam (p. 143) • position, dipped beam is activated automatically • Ignition positions (p. 399) in weak daylight or darkness, when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the car is running. Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position. With the stalk switch's rotating ring in If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the position, dipped beam is also activated automati- position, the daytime running lights (Daytime cally if the rear fog lamp is activated. Running Lights - DRL) are switched on when the car is driven in daylight. The car automatically Dipped beam is always switched on when the changes lighting from daytime running light to rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness.

}}

143 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| when the car's electrical system is in igni- Activating/deactivating main beam Main beam tion position II or when the car is running. Main beam is activated with the stalk switch. Main beam can be activated when the steering wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in position Tunnel detection Active main beam is activated with the rotating 48 or . Activate main beam by moving The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel ring on the stalk switch. the stalk switch forwards. Deactivate by moving and switches from daytime running lights to the stalk switch backwards. dipped beam. Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the driver display. switch must be in mode for tunnel detection to work. Active main beam Related information Active main beam is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen Daytime running lights (p. 143) • to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming • Headlamp control (p. 139) traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and • Ignition positions (p. 399) then switches from main beam to dipped beam. The function can also take streetlights into account. Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring. Main beam is reactivated when the camera sen- Position for main beam flash sor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or Position for main beam vehicles ahead. Car with halogen headlamps Main beam flash The lighting returns to main beam about a sec- Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main ond after the camera sensor no longer detects beam flash position. Main beam comes on until the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the the stalk switch is released. rear lights from vehicles in front.

48 When dipped beam is activated.

144 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Car with LED49 headlamps* The lighting returns to full main beam about a When main beam is activated, the symbol shines If the active main beam has the on/off functional- second after the camera sensor no longer blue. This also applies for LED headlamps if the ity50 then the lighting returns to main beam about detects the headlamp beams from oncoming main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. as soon as the a second after the camera sensor no longer traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. light beam shines with slightly more than dipped detects the headlamp beams from oncoming Activate/deactivate beam. traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. The function can start while driving in the dark If the active main beam has adaptive functional- when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (12 mph) or higher. ity50 then, unlike what happens during conventional dimming, the light beam continues to illu- Activate/deactivate active main beam by turning minate with main beam on both sides of oncom- the stalk switch's rotating ring to position ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the and release. If active main beam is deactivated light beam that points directly to the vehicle is while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately dimmed. reset to dipped beam.

Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both When active main beam is activated, the symbol sides of the vehicle. illuminates with a white glow in the driver display.

49 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 50 Depending on the car's equipment level. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Manual operation the message goes out and the symbol illu- IMPORTANT minates. Examples of when manual switching between NOTE main and dipped beam may be required: Keep the windscreen surface in front of the WARNING • In heavy rain or dense fog camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and Active main beam is an aid for using the opti- dirt. mum beam pattern when conditions are • In freezing rain favourable. Do not stick or attach anything to the wind- • In snow flurries or slush screen in front of the camera sensor as this The driver always bears responsibility for man- • In moonlight may reduce effectiveness or cause one or ually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather con- • When driving in poorly lit built-up areas more of the systems dependent on the cam- ditions so require. When the traffic ahead has weak lighting era to stop working. • • If there are pedestrians on or beside the road If this symbol is shown in the driver display, together with the message Active • If there are highly reflective objects such High Beam Temporarily as signs in the vicinity of the road unavailable, then switching between • When the lighting from oncoming traffic main and dipped beam must be performed man- is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier ually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still • When there is traffic on connecting roads be in the position. The symbol extin- On the brow of a hill or in a hollow guishes when these message are shown. • • In sharp bends. The same applies if this symbol is shown together with the message Windscreen sensor Sensor Read more about the camera sensor's limitations blocked, see Owner's manual. in the section "Limitations for City Safety". Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable Related information e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. • Headlamp control (p. 139) When active main beam becomes available again, • Limitations of City Safety (p. 351) or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,

146 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Active bending lights display at the same time as the driver display Adapting the beam pattern from the Active bending lights are designed to provide shows an explanatory text. headlamps maximum illumination in bends and junctions. The function is only active in weak daylight or If the car is equipped with LED headlamps with adaptive functionality, then the headlamp pattern Cars with LED51 headlamps* can have active darkness and only when the car is moving and should be reset when changing from right to left- bending lights, depending on the car's equip- dipped beam is switched on. hand traffic, and vice versa. ment level. Deactivating/activating the function The function is in activated mode when the car is Halogen headlamps delivered from the factory and can be deacti- The headlamp pattern does not need to be vated/activated via the centre display in two adjusted. The headlamp pattern is designed in ways: such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled. Via the function view LED headlamps* Press the Active Bending The headlamp pattern should be adjusted if the Lights button. active main beam has adaptive functionality; see the section "Activating/deactivating main beam". The car must remain stationary and be running when the headlamp pattern is changed between right and left-hand traffic.

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and Via settings 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre activated (right) respectively. 1. Press Settings in the top view. display. The LED headlamps can include the Active bend- 2. Press My Car Lights Exterior Lights. 2. Press My Car Lights Exterior Lights. ing lights function, depending on the car's equip- Active Bending Lights 3. Select Temporary Right Hand Traffic/ ment level. Active bending lights follow steering 3. Deselect/select . Temporary Left Hand Traffic. wheel movements to provide maximum illumina- Related information tion in bends and junctions and thereby increase • Settings view (p. 174) Related information safety. • Settings view (p. 174) The function is activated automatically when the • Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 144) car is started. In the event of a fault in the function, the symbol illuminates in the driver

51 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Rear fog lamp NOTE Brake lights When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog The brake light automatically comes on during Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary lamp can be used so that other road users can braking. from country to country. detect the vehicle in front at an early stage. The brake light is switched on when the brake Related information pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on • Headlamp control (p. 139) when one of driving support systems Adaptive cruise control, City Safety or Rear Collision Warn- • Ignition positions (p. 399) ing brakes the car. Related information • Emergency brake lights (p. 418) • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) • City Safety (p. 344) • Rear Collision Warning (p. 354)

Button for rear fog lamp. The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when ignition position II is active or the car is running and the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position or . Press the on/off button. The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on. The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the ignition knob is turned to STOP or when the stalk switch's rotating ring is turned to position or .

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Hazard warning flashers Related information Using direction indicators The hazard warning flashers warn other road • Using direction indicators (p. 149) The car's direction indicators are operated with users by means of all of the car's direction indi- • Emergency brake lights (p. 418) the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator cator lamps flashing simultaneously when this lamps flash three times or continuously, depend- function is activated. ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved.

Button for hazard warning flashers. Press the button to activate the hazard warning Direction indicators. flashers. Short flash sequence The hazard warning flashers are automatically Move the stalk switch up or down to the first activated when the car brakes so powerfully that position and release. The direction indicator the emergency brake lights are activated and the lamps flash three times. The function can be speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to activated/deactivated via the centre display. flash after the emergency brake lights have stopped flashing and are then deactivated automatically when the car drives away again or are deactivated if the button is depressed.

}}

149 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| NOTE Passenger compartment lighting Auto function for passenger compartment The passenger compartment lighting is acti- lighting This automatic flashing sequence can be • vated/deactivated with the buttons in the over- Reading lamp, right-hand side stopped by moving the stalk switch head controls above the front seats and the rear immediately in the opposite direction. seat/rear seats*. Front reading lamps • If the symbol for direction indicators in The reading lamps on the right and left-hand the driver display flashes more quickly All lighting in the passenger compartment can be sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing than normal - see the message in the switched on and off manually within 30 minutes the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is driver display. from when: adjusted by holding the button pressed in. • the car has been switched off and its electri- Passenger compartment lighting Continuous flash sequence cal system is in ignition position 0 The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are Move the stalk switch up or down to its end • the car has been unlocked but it has not switched on or off with a short press on the but- position. been started. ton in the roof console. The stalk switch remains in its position and is Front lighting moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement. Related information • Headlamp control (p. 139) • Hazard warning flashers (p. 149) • Settings view (p. 174)

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting. Reading lamp, left-hand side

Passenger compartment lighting

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Auto function for passenger compartment Glovebox lighting lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec- The automatic function is activated by a short tively when the lid is opened or closed. press on the AUTO button in the roof console. The light indicator in the button illuminates when Vanity mirror lighting the automatic function is activated. Press the The lighting for the vanity mirror in the sun visor AUTO button to switch the passenger compart- is switched on and off respectively when the ment lighting on and off in accordance with the cover is opened or closed. following. Ground lighting Passenger compartment lighting: The ground lighting is switched on and off when the corresponding door is opened or closed. • illuminates when the car is unlocked and when it is switched off Reading lamps above the second52 and third seat row*. Door sill lighting • extinguishes when the car is started and The door sill lighting is switched on and off when when it is locked the corresponding door is opened or closed. • comes on and goes off, respectively, when a Lighting in the cargo area side door is opened or closed The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and • remains on for two minutes if one of the side off respectively when the tailgate is opened or doors is open. closed. Rear lighting Ambient light The rear area of the car has reading lighting, 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre which is also used as passenger compartment display. lighting. 2. Press My Car Lights Interior Lighting The reading lamps are located in the interior roof. Reading lamp above the second seat row in cars with Ambient Lighting. panorama roof*. The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Bright- ness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.

52 In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| 3. Choose between the following settings: Changing the brightness of the lights Settings • Under Ambient Light Intensity, select 1. Press in the top view in the centre from Off, Low and High. display. • Under Ambient Light Level, select from 2. Press My Car Lights Interior Lighting Reduced and Full. Interior Mood Lighting. 3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High. Changing the colour of the light 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Lights Interior Lighting Controls located next to the steering wheel. Interior Mood Lighting. The intensity of the ambience light can be adjusted using the controls in the instrument By Temperature By 3. Choose between , panel: Theme and Theme Colours in order to change the colour of the light. – Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity. Controls located next to the steering wheel. With colour option By Temperature, the Lighting in storage compartments in The intensity of the ambient light can be adjusted colour of the light changes according to the doors using the control in the instrument panel: set passenger compartment temperature. The lighting in storage compartments in doors is switched on when the car is running. The bright- – Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity. ness can be finely adjusted using the control in Ambience lights* the instrument panel. The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel make it possible to change the colour of the light. console These lights are switched on when the car is running. The lighting in the front cup holders is switched on when the car is unlocked and is switched off The ambience lights can be changed via the cen- when the car is locked. The brightness can be tre display: finely adjusted using the control in the instrument panel.

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Related information Home safe light duration Approach light duration • Headlamp control (p. 139) Some of the exterior lighting can be kept Approach lighting is switched on when the car is • Ignition positions (p. 399) switched on to work as home safe lighting after unlocked and is used to switch on the car's the car has been locked. lighting at a distance. • Settings view (p. 174) To activate the function: When the function is activated with the remote control key during unlocking, the position lamps, 1. Switch off the car. lighting in outer handles*, number plate lighting, 2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward interior roof lighting and floor lighting will switch toward the instrument panel and release. on. If a door is opened within the activation time, 3. Get out of the car and lock the door. the time for the lighting in the outside handles* and the interior lighting will be extended. When the function is activated, dipped beam, position lamps, lighting in the outside handles* The function can be deactivated/activated via the and number plate lighting are switched on. centre display. The length of time that home safe lighting Related information remains on can be set via the centre display. • Home safe light duration (p. 153) Related information • Remote control key (p. 240) • Approach light duration (p. 153) • Settings view (p. 174) • Settings view (p. 174)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Using windscreen wipers Continuous wiping Activating/deactivating the rain The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen. Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to sensor Different settings for the windscreen wiper are sweep at normal speed. The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk Raise the stalk switch further for the wip- screen wipers based on how much water it switch. ers to sweep at high speed. detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitivity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the IMPORTANT right-hand stalk switch. Before activating the wipers - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear window) is scraped away.

IMPORTANT Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are Right-hand stalk switch. operating. Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency Related information Right-hand stalk switch. Single sweep • Activating/deactivating the rain sensor Rain sensor button Lower the stalk switch and release to (p. 154) Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency make one sweep. • Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 155) When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor Windscreen wipers off • Wiper blades in service position (p. 551) Move the stalk switch to position 0 to symbol is shown in the driver display. switch off the windscreen wipers. Activating the rain sensor Intermittent wiping When activating the rain sensor, the car must be Set the number of sweeps per time unit running or the electrical system in ignition posi- I II with the thumbwheel when intermittent tion or while the windscreen wiper stalk wiping is selected.

154 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS switch must be in position 0 or in the position for Activating/deactivating the memory Windscreen and headlamp washers a single sweep. function Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen- The memory function for the rain sensor can be windscreen and headlamps. Washing/wiping is activated in such a way that the rain sensor but- started by means of the right-hand stalk switch. sor button . ton does not need to be depressed each time the Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to car is started: Starting windscreen and headlamp make an extra sweep. washers 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv- display. ity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra 2. sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned Press My Car Wipers. upward. 3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/ Deactivating the rain sensor deactivate the memory function. Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain Related information sensor button or moving the stalk switch • Using windscreen wipers (p. 154) up to another wiper program. • Wiper blades in service position (p. 551) The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in • Rear window wiper and washer (p. 156) ignition position 0 or when the engine is switched off. Washing function, right-hand stalk switch. The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when – Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the wiper blades are set in service position. The rain steering wheel to start the windscreen and sensor is reactivated when service position has headlamp washers. been deactivated. > The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch has IMPORTANT been released. The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti- IMPORTANT vate the rain sensor while the car is running Avoid activating the washer system when it is or when the car's electrical system is in igni- frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, other- tion position I or II. The symbol in the driver wise there is a risk of damaging the pump. display extinguishes. }}

155 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Heated washer nozzles* Rear window wiper and washer – Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk The washer nozzles are heated automatically in Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear switch forward to start rear window washing cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from window. Washing/wiping is started and settings and wiping. freezing. are changed by means of the right-hand steering Activating/deactivating wiping when wheel stalk switch. Headlamp washing* reversing To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto- NOTE 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre matically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle. display. The rear window wiper is equipped with over- Reduced washing heating protection which means that the 2. Press My Car Wipers. If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear 3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti- the reservoir and the message Washer fluid window wiper works again after a cooling- vate wiping when reversing. Level low, refill, together with the symbol, down period. Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wip- is shown in the driver display, then the supply of ers are on initiates rear window wiping. The func- washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. Using the rear window wiper and tion stops when reverse gear is disengaged. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind- washer screen and the visibility through it. If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made. Related information • Using windscreen wipers (p. 154) Related information • Rear window wiper and washer (p. 156) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 154) • Filling washer fluid (p. 553) • Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 155) • Activating/deactivating the rain sensor (p. 154)

Select for intermittent wiping with the rear window wiper. Select for continuous speed with the rear window wiper.

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Power windows Operating power windows Operating All power windows can be operated using the All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the control control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors operate their respec- panels for the other doors operate their respective power window. tive power window.

WARNING Check that no children or other passengers are trapped when the windows are closed from the driver's door.

WARNING Check that no children or other passengers Operating the power windows. are trapped if/when the windows are closed Operating without auto using the remote control key. Operating with auto

Driver's door control panel. WARNING All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the control Electric child safety locks for deactivation of If there are children in the car - remember to panels for the other doors can only each operate opening of doors* and rear windows always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical their respective power window. Only one control Rear window controls system in ignition position 0 and then take panel can be operated at a time. the remote control key with you when leaving Front window controls the car. In order for the power windows to be used, the ignition position must be at least I. The power Related information windows can be operated for a few minutes after • Operating power windows (p. 157) the car has been switched off and after the ignition has been switched off - although not after a • Child safety locks (p. 265) door has been opened. Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its movement. It is possible to override the pinch protection }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if ice has see the section "Remote control key", "Locking/ Using the sun blind formed on the window. After two successive clos- unlocking from the outside" or "Locking/unlock- Sun blinds are built into each rear door. ing interruptions the pinch protection will be over- ing from the inside". ridden and the automatic function deactivated for Rear door a short while, now it is possible to close by hold- Resetting ing the button in its raised position. If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so that it NOTE can work correctly. 1. Gently raise the front section of the button to One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise raise the window to its end position and hold when the rear windows are open is to also it there for one second. open the front windows slightly. 2. Release the button briefly. NOTE 3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second. The windows cannot be opened at speeds above approx. 180 km/h (112 mph), but they WARNING can be closed. Hook with associated catch A reset must take place for pinch protection – Pull up the sun blind and attach it to the to work. Operating without auto hook in the upper door frame. Move one of the controls up/down gently. The Related information The window can still be opened and closed with power windows move up/down as long as the the sun blind up. control is held in position. • Power windows (p. 157) Operating with auto • Ignition positions (p. 399) Move one of the controls up/down to the end • Remote control key (p. 240) position and release it. The window runs auto- • Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 245) matically to its end position. • Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 248) Operating with the remote control key, door handle or central locking button To control the power windows from the outside with the remote control key or door handle, or from the inside with the central locking button,

158 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Adjusting the door mirrors WARNING Settings for this function are set via the centre The door mirror positions are adjusted with the display: Both mirrors are the wide-angle type to pro- joystick in the driver's door controls. vide optimal vision. Objects may appear fur- 1. Press Settings in the top view. ther away than they actually are. 2. Press My Car Mirrors. Memory function in power front seat* 3. Under Tilt Mirror in Reverse, select Off, Door mirror positions can be saved in the mem- Driver, Passenger or Both to activate/ ory function of the power front seat. deactivate and to select which review mirror should be angled. Angling the door mirror when parking53 53 The door mirror can be angled down for the Automatic retraction when locking driver to view the side of the road when parking When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote for example. control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended. – Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button. The function can be activated/deactivated via the Door mirror controls. centre display: When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror Adjusting automatically returns to its original position after 1. Press Settings in the top view. 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mir- approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the 2. Press My Car Mirrors. ror or the R button for the right-hand door button labelled L or R respectively. mirror. The light in the button illuminates. 3. Select Fold Mirrors When Locking to acti- Automatic angling of the door mirror vate/deactivate. 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the when parking53 Resetting to neutral centre. When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is Mirrors that have been moved out of position by 3. Press the L or R button again. The light automatically angled down so that the driver can an external force must be reset electrically to the should no longer be illuminated. see the side of the road when parking for example. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror neutral position for electric retracting/extending automatically returns to its original position after to work correctly: a short time. 1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.

53 Only in combination with power seat with memory. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| 2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- Retractable power door mirrors* Interior rearview mirror tons. The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. in narrow spaces: a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims automatically. The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. 1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (ignition position must be at least I). Automatic dimming* 2. Release them after approximately 1 second. Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed The mirrors automatically stop in the fully by the interior rearview and door mirrors. retracted position. For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and requires that the interior rearview mirror also has R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati- automatic dimming, see the section "Interior rear- cally stop in the fully extended position. view mirror". Automatic dimming is always active while driving, Related information apart from when gearbox reverse position is • Interior rearview mirror (p. 160) selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in • Settings view (p. 174) three levels and will affect the interior rearview Using the memory function in the power • Control for dimming and the door mirrors. front seat* (p. 125)

NOTE Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the When sensitivity is changed there is no imme- rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dim- diately noticeable change in dimming, but the ming with the dimming control when lights from change will be complete after a while. behind are distracting: 1. Use dimming by moving the control in Settings for this function are set via the centre towards the passenger compartment. display: 2. Return to normal mode by moving the control 1. Press Settings in the top view. towards the windscreen. 2. Press My Car Mirrors. 3. Under Auto Dim Mirrors, select Normal, Dark or Light.

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Automatic dimming* Settings for this function are set via the centre Compass* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed display: The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir- by the rearview mirror. The control for manual 1. Press Settings in the top view. ror has an integrated display that shows the dimming is not available on mirrors with auto- compass direction in which the front of the car is matic dimming. 2. Press My Car Mirrors. pointing. The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one 3. Under Auto Dim Mirrors, select Normal, forward facing and one rearward facing - that Dark or Light. work together to identify and eliminate dazzling Only the rearview mirror with automatic dimming light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient can be equipped with a compass. light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind. Related information • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 159) NOTE • Settings view (p. 174) If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the interior Rearview mirror with compass. rearview and door mirrors is reduced. Eight different compass directions are shown by their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north Automatic dimming is always active while driving, east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW apart from when gearbox reverse position is (south west), W (west) and NW (north west). selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in three levels and will affect the interior rearview Activating/deactivating the compass and the door mirrors. The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or when the car's electrical system NOTE is in position II. To deactivate/activate the compass: When sensitivity is changed there is no immediately noticeable change in dimming, but the – Depress the button on the underside of the change will be complete after a while. rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Related information Calibrating the compass* • Calibrating the compass* (p. 162) The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The • Ignition positions (p. 399) compass should be calibrated if the car is moved between several magnetic zones. • Activating/deactivating defrost of windows and door mirrors (p. 198) Proceed as follows to perform calibration: 1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines. 2. Start the car and switch off all electrical equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and ensure that all doors are closed. Magnetic zones. NOTE 4. Press the button repeatedly until the Calibration may fail or not start at all if electri- required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown. cal equipment is not switched off. See the map of magnetic zones for the compass. 3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear- 5. Wait until the display returns to showing the view mirror depressed (use a paper clip or character C, or hold the button on the under- similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The number of side of the rearview mirror depressed for the current magnetic zone is shown. approx. 6 seconds until the character C is shown. 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the char- Panorama roof* WARNING acter C is shown in the display when the The panorama roof is divided into two glass sec- heated windscreen is activated, perform the Children, other passengers or objects may be tions. The front section can be opened vertically trapped by the panorama roof's moving parts. calibration in accordance with point 6 above at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizon- with the heated windscreen activated. tally (open position). The rear section is fixed • Always operate the panorama roof with caution. roof glass. 8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. • Do not allow children to play with the The sunroof has a wind deflector. controls. Related information The panorama roof has a sun blind made of per- • Remember to always switch off the power • Compass* (p. 161) supply to the panorama roof by setting forated fabric and located under the glass roof to the car's electrical system in ignition posi- provide extra protection from factors such as tion 0, and then take the remote control strong sunlight. key with you when leaving the car.

IMPORTANT Do not open the panorama roof when load carriers are fitted.

Wind deflector

The panorama roof and curtain are operated with a control located in the roof. The control is activated when the car's electrical system is in ignition position I or II.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is Operating the panorama roof* raised when the panorama roof is in the open During automatic and manual operation, the sun position. blind/roof is first opened to comfort position and Related information then fully. • Operating the panorama roof* (p. 164) In ventilation position, the front glass cover in the • Ignition positions (p. 399) roof is raised at the rear. WARNING Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the panorama roof's moving parts. • Always operate the panorama roof with caution. Opening, manual • Do not allow children to play with the controls. Opening, automatic Remember to always switch off the power • Closing, manual supply to the panorama roof by setting the car's electrical system in ignition posi- Closing, automatic tion 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. In order for the panorama roof and blind to be operated, the car's electrical system must be in at IMPORTANT least ignition position I. Do not open the panorama roof when load Manual operation carriers are fitted. 1. To open the curtain - press the control backwards to the position for manual opening. The sun blind moves towards maximum opening as long as the button is depressed.

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2. Open the panorama roof - press the control 2. To open the panorama roof, press the control – To close - press the control forward/down- backwards a second time to the position for backwards a second time to the position for ward to the automatic operation position manual opening. The panorama roof first rea- automatic opening and release. The panor- twice and release. 54 54 ches comfort position . In order to open to ama roof first reaches comfort position . To The movement of the roof stops when it reaches maximum position - press the control a third open to maximum position, press the control the comfort or closing position. The movement is time backward. a third time backwards to the position for also stopped if the control is operated again in automatic opening and release. The movement of the panorama roof stops if the the opposite direction to the direction of move- control is released or when it reaches the com- Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding ment in progress. fort position or the maximum opening or closing procedure in reverse order - press the control The movement of the roof is not stopped when position. forward/downward to the automatic closing posi- the glass reaches the comfort position when tion instead. Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding closing from maximum opening position. The procedure in reverse order - press the control The movement of the roof is stopped when the blind's movement is never stopped when the roof forward/downward to the manual closing position glass reaches the comfort position or the maxi- is in comfort position. instead. mum opening or closing position. The movement is also stopped if the control is operated again in NOTE the opposite direction to the direction of movement in progress. For manual opening, the curtain must be fully open before the panorama roof can be The movement of the roof is not stopped when opened. For the reverse procedure, the panor- the glass reaches the comfort position when ama roof must be fully closed before the cur- closing from maximum opening position. tain can be closed. Rapid opening/closing The panorama roof and sun blind can be Automatic operation opened/closed simultaneously: 1. Open the sun blind to maximum position - – To open - press the control rearward to the press the control backward to the position automatic operation position twice and for automatic opening and release. release.

54 Comfort position is an open position for the glass cover, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving. }}

165 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Ventilation position The function is deactivated when the car is sup- Central locking button plied from the factory and can be activated/deactivated: 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Locking. Select Auto Close Sun Curtain to activate/deactivate. Closing using the remote control key, central locking button or door handles Remote control key Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge. Central locking button. – Give a long press on the remote control key's Open by pressing the control upward. lock button until the panorama roof and When the car's electrical system is put in at least ignition position I, the central locking button in Close by pressing the control forward/down- sun blind start moving towards the closed the driver's door or passenger door* can be used ward. position. Then release the lock button. to close the panorama roof. When the ventilation position is selected the front Movement stops if the remote control key's lock glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun button is pressed again or when the roof/blind – Give a long press on the central locking but- blind is fully closed when ventilation position is has reached the closed position. ton until the panorama roof and sun blind selected - then it opens automatically start moving towards the closed position. approx. 50 mm. Then release the button. Automatic closing of the sun blind Movement stops if the central locking button is pressed again or when the roof/blind has When the car is parked in sunny/hot weather, the reached the closed position. sun blind closes automatically 15 minutes after the car is locked. This is in order to lower the passenger compartment temperature and protect the car upholstery from being bleached by the sun.

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Door handle The pinch protection is also active when the HomeLink®*55 glass cover or sun blind is opened. Cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking* HomeLink® is a programmable remote control have a touch-sensitive recess on the outer part of If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still that is integrated into the car's electrical system. the outside door handle. possible to operate the glass cover and/or sun – Place your finger against the touch-sensitive blind once more in the same direction without General recess on the outside of one of the door pinch protection, if this is done within 10 seconds handles until the panorama roof and sun after pinch protection deployment. It is therefore blind start moving towards the closed posi- possible to override the pinch protection when tion. Then remove your finger from door han- closing has been interrupted e.g. if ice has dle's recess. formed around the glass cover, by continually pressing the control forward/downward until the Movement stops if you place your finger against glass cover and/or sun blind is closed. the door handle recess again or once the roof/ blind has reached the closed position. Related information • Panorama roof* (p. 163) WARNING • Ignition positions (p. 399) If the panorama roof is closed with the remote • Remote control key (p. 240) control key, the central locking button or door Button 1 handle, check that no one risks being trapped. • Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 248) • Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 245) Button 2 IMPORTANT Button 3 Check that the panoramic roof is properly Indicator lamp closed when closing. HomeLink®56 is a programmable remote control Pinch protection that can remotely control up to three different The panorama roof has pinch protection that is devices (e.g., garage door openers, alarm sys- triggered if the glass cover or the sun blind is tems, outdoor and indoor lighting, etc.) and thus blocked by an object during closing. In the event replace their remote controls. HomeLink® is sup- of blocking, the glass cover or sun blind is then plied built into the interior rearview mirror. The opened automatically to approx. 50 mm from the HomeLink® panel consists of three programma- blocked position (or to full ventilation position). }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| ble buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror Related information Programming HomeLink®*58 glass. ® • Programming HomeLink * (p. 168) Instructions for programming HomeLink®. For more information about HomeLink®, visit ® www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ Programming HomeLink HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number NOTE +49 6838 907 277). In certain vehicles the ignition must be switched on or in "accessory position" before WARNING HomeLink® can be programmed or used. For • If HomeLink® is used to control a garage quicker programming and better radio signal door or gate, ensure that nobody is near transmission, it is advisable to fit new batter- the door or gate while it is in motion. ies in the remote control that is to be • While programming HomeLink, the replaced by the HomeLink®. The HomeLink® garage door or gate being programmed buttons should be reset before programming, may activate. For this reason, make sure see section “Reset HomeLink® buttons” that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or ® gate while programming is in progress. below. After resetting, the HomeLink is set in “learn mode” and is ready for programming. • The car should be outside the garage while a garage door opener is being programmed. 1. Press the59 button on HomeLink® you want ® • Do not use HomeLink for any garage to program. The indicator lamp59 on door that does not have safety stop and ® safety reverse. HomeLink should flash yellow once per second. It is not necessary to hold the button depressed. Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. when changing to another car or for use in another vehicle). It is also recommended that the programming for the buttons is deleted when the car is sold; see the section "Programming HomeLink®".

55 Applies to certain markets. 56 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

2. Aim the remote control towards the 5. Depress the programmed HomeLink® button HomeLink® button to be programmed and and check the indicator lamp. hold it 2-8 cm from the button. Do not > Constant green glow: If the indicator obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink®. lamp illuminates in a constant green glow, Note: Some remote controls can program programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be acti- HomeLink® better at a distance of 15-20 vated when the programmed button is cm. Bear this in mind if you encounter prob- depressed. lems during programming. Flashes green 10 times per second: 3. Press and hold the button on the original Depress the button being programmed, 60 remote control to be programmed on 6. Locate programming button on the hold it depressed for 2 seconds and HomeLink® and keep an eye on the indicator receiver for the garage door or similar. It is then release it. Repeat the sequence of lamp. Do not release the button until the normally located near the antenna bracket on pressing/holding/releasing a second time indicator lamp has switched from flashing the receiver. and, depending on the receiver model, yellow once per second to either flashing 7. Depress and release the receiver's program- even a third time. Programming should green 10 times per second or illuminating in ming button. Step 8 must be completed now be complete and the garage door, a constant green glow. The button on the within 30 seconds of the button being gate or similar should now be activated remote control can be released once the depressed. when the programmed button is indicator lamp flashes or illuminates in green. depressed. 8. Depress the button being programmed, hold Note: For some receivers, programming step it depressed for 2 seconds and then If the receiver is still not activated: 3 may need to be replaced with the instruc- release it. Repeat the sequence of press- Continue with programming steps 6-8 to tions in step 4. ing/holding/releasing a second time and, complete programming. 4. Press and release the button on the original depending on the receiver model, even a Programming is now be com- remote control every other second until the third time. plete indicator lamp has changed from flashing and the garage door, gate or similar yellow once per second to either flashing should now be activated when the pro- green 10 times per second or illuminating in grammed button is depressed. a constant green glow.

58 Applies to certain markets. 59 See section "HomeLink®*" for the location of buttons and indicator lamp. 60 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer. }}

169 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Operation 1. Depress buttons 1 and 3 on HomeLink® and Trip computer When HomeLink® is fully programmed it can be hold them depressed until the indicator lamp The car's trip computer records and calculates used in place of the separate original remote begins flashing green (about 10 seconds). vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption controls. 2. Release the buttons. and average speed whilst driving. Depress the programmed button. The garage > HomeLink® is now set to "learn mode" In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, informa- door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated and is ready to be reprogrammed; see the tion is recorded about both instantaneous and (may take a few seconds). The indicator lamp illu- section "Programming HomeLink®" average fuel consumption. The information from minates or flashes when the button has been above. the trip computer can be shown in the driver dis- depressed. Naturally the original remote controls play. can still be used in parallel with HomeLink® if Programming individual buttons required. To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button, proceed as follows: NOTE 1. Depress the required button and do not If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink® will release. work for 30 minutes after the driver's door 2. After approx. 20 seconds when the indicator has been opened. lamp on HomeLink® starts to flash yellow, start with step 1 from the section "Program- In the event of programming problems, contact ming HomeLink®" above. HomeLink® at www.HomeLink.com, Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the not programmed with a new unit, it will toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the resume the previously saved programming. toll number +49 6838 907 277). The following meters are included in the trip For more information or to provide feedback computer: Resetting the HomeLink® buttons about HomeLink®, visit www.HomeLink.com, Trip meter It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink® www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the • buttons at the same time, not each button indi- toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the • Odometer vidually. However, individual buttons can be toll number +49 6838 907 277). • Instantaneous fuel consumption reprogrammed; see the section "Programming • Distance to empty tank individual buttons" below. Related information • HomeLink®* (p. 167) • Distance to empty battery • Tourist - alternative speedometer

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Trip meter No guaranteed range remains when the gauge Mileage for electric operation There are two trip meters, TM and TA. shows "----". In which case, refuel as soon as In order to achieve the longest possible mileage possible. for electric operation, the driver of an electric car TM can be reset manually and TA is reset auto- also has to think about energy conservation. The matically if the car is not used for at least four more consumers there are (stereo, electric heat- hours. NOTE ing in windows/mirrors/seats, very cold air from There may be a slight deviation if the driving The following information is registered while driv- the climate control system, etc.) that are active - style has been changed. ing: the shorter the potential mileage. • Mileage An economic driving style generally results in a NOTE • Driving time longer driving distance. • Average speed In addition to high current take-off in the pas- Distance to empty battery senger compartment, sudden acceleration Average fuel consumption. • The gauge shows the approximate distance that and braking, high speed, heavy loads, low out- The values apply from the trip meter's latest can be driven with the energy quantity remaining side temperature and uphill gradients also reset. in the hybrid battery. No guaranteed range reduce the possible driving distance. remains when the gauge shows "----". Odometer The odometer records the car's total mileage. The calculation is based on the average con- Tourist - alternative speedometer This value cannot be reset to zero. sumption of normally loaded vehicle, during nor- The alternative digital speedometer makes it eas- mal driving and taking into account whether the ier to drive in countries where speed limit signs Instantaneous fuel consumption air conditioning (AC) is switched on or off. are in a different unit than that shown in the car's This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the instruments. car has at the moment. The value is updated NOTE The digital speed is then shown in the opposite approximately every second. There may be a slight deviation if the driving unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer. Distance to empty tank style has been changed. If the analogue speedometer is graduated in The trip computer calculates the remaining mile- mph, the digital speedometer shows the corresponding speed in km/h and vice versa. age with the fuel available in the tank. An economic driving style generally results in a The calculation is based on the average fuel con- longer driving distance. sumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity.

}}

171 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Related information Show trip data in the driver display 1. Open the app menu in the driver display by • Show trip data in the driver display (p. 172) The trip computer's recorded and calculated val- pressing (1). • Show trip statistics in the centre display ues can be shown in the driver display. (It is not possible to open the app menu (p. 173) while there is an unacknowledged message The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via in the driver display. The message must be • Electric operation range in urban environ- the app menu, you can choose which information confirmed before the app menu can be ment (p. 433) is shown on the driver display. opened.) 2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or right with (2). > The top four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TM. The next four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with (3). 3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select which information to show in the driver display: • Instantaneous fuel consumption Open and navigate in the app menu using the right- hand steering wheel keypad. • Distance to empty tank App menu • Odometer Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no dis- Left/right • play of mileage Up/down • Tourist (alternative speedometer). Confirm • Distance to empty battery Select or deselect an option with the O button (4). The change is made immediately.

172 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Resetting the trip meter NOTE Show trip statistics in the centre display In addition to in the trip computer, these units Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis- are also changed in Volvo's navigation sys- played graphically in the centre display and pro- tem*. vide an overview that facilitates more fuel-efficient driving. Related information • Trip computer (p. 170) Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to Show trip statistics in the centre display • show the trip statistics. (p. 173) Each bar in the diagram sym- Using the application menu in the driver dis- • bolises a distance of 1, 10 or play (p. 109) 100 km, alternatively miles. The Reset the trip meter TM with one long press on bars are filled in from the right as driving pro- the RESET button on the left-hand stalk switch. gresses. The bar on the far right shows the value for the current distance. Trip meter TA only has automatic resetting. The meter is reset if the car is not used for four hours The average fuel consumption and total driving or more. time are calculated since the last time the trip statistics were reset. Change unit Fuel and electricity consumption are shown in Change the units for mileage, speed, etc. via the separate graphs. Electricity consumption is "net" centre display as follows: consumption, i.e. energy consumed minus regen- 1. Press Settings in the top view. erated energy created during braking. 2. Press System Units. 3. Under Units, select the required unit standard: Metric, Imperial or US.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Trip statistics, calculated average consumption Settings view and total driving time are always reset simultane- Settings and information for many of the car's ously. functions can be managed in the centre dis- Change unit play's settings view. Change the unit for mileage, fuel consumption, Opening/closing and navigating in the etc. via the centre display as follows: settings view 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press System Units. 3. Under Units, select the required unit standard: Metric, Imperial or US. Trip statistics from the trip computer62. Related information NOTE • Trip computer (p. 170) When driving with electric operation, fuel con- • Show trip data in the driver display (p. 172) sumption can be indicated in the trip statistics if the additional heater63 is running. Top view with button for Settings. Settings for trip statistics 1. Drag down the tab at the top of the centre Press Preferences to display to open the top view. • change graph scale. Select resolution 1, 10 2. Press Settings to open the settings view. or 100 km/miles for the bar. 3. Press one of the categories shown and navi- • reset data after every trip. Performed when gate to subcategories and Settings by the car has been stationary for more than 4 pressing again. hours. 4. Press Back to go back in the settings view. • reset data for the current trip. Press Close to close the settings view.

62 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on selected unit standard or updated software. 63 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.

174 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Changing a setting Setting Description Related information type • Overview of the centre display (p. 33) • Categories in the settings view (p. 176) Trigger Starts an app or separate view function for more advanced settings through a press on the text, e.g. to connect a device with Bluetooth. Radio but- Select a setting from several ton options by pressing the required radio button, e.g. to select a system language.

A subcategory in the settings view with different types of Multi- Select a level for something by settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio but- selector pressing the required part of the tons). button button, e.g. to select a sensitivity 1. Press on categories and subcategories to level for City Safety. navigate to the required setting. Checkbox Activate/deactivate a function by 2. Change one or more settings. Different types pressing on the box to select/ of settings are changed in different ways deselect it, e.g. to select auto- (see the table below for a description of each matic start of seat heating. type). Slider Select a level for something > The changes are saved immediately. within an interval by pressing and Types of settings dragging the slider, e.g. to select There are several different types of settings: volume level. Display of No actual setting. Shows infor- informa- mation about something, e.g. the tion car's identification number.

175 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Categories in the settings view Subcategories Settings Subcategories Settings The settings view has a number of main categories and subcategories where settings and infor- Drive Mode/Individual Drive Mixed Traffic Personal mation for many of the car's functions are collec- Mode* Guidance Personal ted. Lights Mixed System Personal The settings view has 7 main categories: My Car, Mirrors Personal Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication, Climate and System. Locking Mixed Media In turn, each category contains a number of sub- Electric Parking Brake Mixed Subcategories Settings categories and setting options. The tables below AM/FM radio Personal show the first level of subcategories. The setting Seats Mixed options for a function or area are described in Wipers Mixed DAB Personal more detail in the corresponding section of the owner's manual. For system settings not descri- Suspension Global Gracenote® Personal bed in the corresponding section, see the section Video Personal "Changing system settings in the settings view". Audio Some settings are personal, which means that Communication Driver Profile Subcategories Settings they can be saved to a . Other set- Subcategories Settings tings are global, which means they are not linked Sound Experience* Personal to a driver profile. The tables below provide an Phone – overview showing whether a category's settings Tone Personal are personal, global or a mixture of both. Text Messages – Balance Personal My Car Bluetooth – System Volumes Mixed Subcategories Settings Wi-Fi Global Navigation Displays Personal Car Wi-Fi Hotspot Global Subcategories Settings IntelliSafe Mixed Car Modem Internet Global Map Personal Park Assist Global Route Personal

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Subcategories Settings Related information Changing system settings in the • Settings view (p. 174) settings view Volvo On Call – • Changing system settings in the settings The System category in the settings view col- Volvo Service Networks Global view (p. 177) lects general settings and information for car systems, such as language and units.

Climate control The system settings under Driver Profile, Date The main category Climate has no subcatego- & Time, Keyboard Layouts, Voice Control, ries. Software Updates, Global Reset, Factory System reset and Services are described in the corresponding section of the owner's manual. Subcategories Settings Changing system language Driver Profile Personal 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre Date & Time – display. 2. Language Personal Press System Language. 3. Select system language. Languages that Keyboard Layouts Global support voice recognition have a voice recog- Voice Control Personal nition symbol. > The language in the driver display, centre Units Personal display and head-up display is changed.

Storage – Software Updates – Global Reset – Services –

}}

177 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| Changing system units 2. Press System Storage. Resetting settings in the settings Changing length and volume units > Storage information for the car's hard disk view 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre is shown, including total capacity, available It is possible to reset all modified settings in the display. capacity and how much space installed settings view to their default values at once. applications are using. 2. Press System Units Units. Types of resets See the car's vehicle identification There are three different types of resets for set- 3. Select from the following unit standards: number tings in the settings view: Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees • 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre Factory reset - clears all data and media Celsius. • display. and resets all settings to their default values. • Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees 2. Press System Car Identification Reset Car Settings - resets global settings Celsius. • Number. to their default values. US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren- • > The car's vehicle identification number Reset Personal Settings - clears personal heit. • (VIN64) is shown. data and resets personal settings to their > The units in the driver display, centre dis- default values. play and head-up display are changed. Related information Changing the tyre pressure unit • Categories in the settings view (p. 176) Resetting settings 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre • Driver profiles (p. 179) NOTE display. • Clock (p. 103) Global Reset 2. Press System Units Tyre Pressure. • Using the keyboard in the centre display is only possible when the car (p. 49) is stationary. 3. Select a tyre pressure unit. • Settings for voice recognition (p. 120) > The unit for tyre pressure in the Car 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre status app in the centre display is • System updates (p. 534) display. changed. • Resetting settings in the settings view 2. Press System Global Reset. See storage information (p. 178) 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre • Book service and repair (p. 531) 3. Select the required reset type. display. > A pop-up window is shown.

64 Vehicle Identification Number.

178 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

4. Press OK to confirm the reset. Driver profiles remain available for use even if driver profile Y is used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved For Reset Personal Settings, the reset Many of the settings made in the car can be to a specific driver profile - the settings are must be confirmed by pressing Reset for adapted according to the driver's personal pref- global. the active profile or Reset for all profiles. erences and can be saved in one or more driver profiles. Personal preferences > Selected settings are reset. If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre dis- The personal settings are automatically saved in Related information play brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X - • Changing system settings in the settings a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the the brightness setting is a personal setting. view (p. 177) car is adapted to the settings of that specific • Driver profiles (p. 179) driver profile. Refer to the section "Categories in the settings view" for more information on which settings are • Resetting user data for change of ownership What settings are saved in the driver (p. 184) personal and which are global. profiles? Many of the settings made in the car will be auto- Related information matically saved in the active driver profile if the • Editing a driver profile (p. 180) profile is not locked; see the section "Editing a • Categories in the settings view (p. 176) driver profile". Settings made in the car are either Selecting driver profile (p. 180) personal or global. Only personal settings are • saved in driver profiles. Some settings, referred to as global settings, can be changed but are not saved to a specific driver profile. Changes to global settings affect all profiles. Global settings The global settings and parameters are not changed when changing between driver profiles. They remain the same regardless of which driver profile is active. Keyboard layout settings are an example of global settings. If driver profile X is used to add additional languages to the keyboard, these

179 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Selecting driver profile 2. Press Profile. Editing a driver profile The last used driver profile is the one selected > The same list as for Option 1 is shown. The different driver profiles used in the car can when the car is next started. It is possible to be renamed and locked. 3. Select the driver profile required. change to another driver profile after the car has been started. 4. Press Confirm. > The driver profile is selected and the sys- When the car has been started, the selected tem loads the settings for the new driver driver profile is shown at the top of the screen. profile. The driver profile last used is the one that will be active next time the car is started. However, if the Related information remote control key has been linked to a driver • Driver profiles (p. 179) profile then this is what is selected when the car Editing a driver profile (p. 180) is started. See "Linking remote control key to • driver profile". • Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 181) There are two options for changing to another driver profile. Option 1: All types of changes to driver profiles are made from the top view in the centre display - Settings 1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown System Driver Profile in the top of the centre display when the car . has been started. Renaming a driver profile > A list of selectable driver profiles is shown. Rename a driver profile starting from the Driver 2. Select the driver profile required. Profile window: 3. Press Confirm. 1. Press Edit Profile. > The driver profile is selected and the sys- > A menu opens, where the profile can be tem loads the settings for the new driver edited. profile. 2. Tap in the box Profile Name. Option 2: > A keyboard appears, and it is possible to 1. Drag down the top view in the centre display. change the name. Tap on to close the keyboard.

180 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

3. Save the name change by tapping on Back/ NOTE Linking remote control key to driver Close. profile Global Reset is only possible when the car > The name has now been changed. It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. is stationary. The driver profile along with all of its settings will Locking/unlocking the driver profile then be automatically selected every time the car In some cases, it is preferable for different set- 1. Press Settings in the top view. is used with that specific remote control key. tings made in the car not to be saved to the 2. active driver profile. It is then possible to lock the Press System Global Reset Reset The first time the remote control key is used, it is driver profile. To lock/unlock a driver profile from Personal Settings. not linked to any specific driver profile. When the the Driver Profile window: 3. Select one of the options Reset for the car is started, the Guest profile will automatically be activated. 1. Press Edit Profile. active profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel > A menu opens, where the profile can be . A driver profile can be selected manually without edited. linking it to the key. When the car is started, the Related information last active driver profile is activated. Once the key 2. Select Protect My Profile to lock/unlock • Driver profiles (p. 179) has been linked to a driver profile, a driver profile the profile. • Resetting settings in the settings view does not need to be selected when that specific 3. Save the option to lock/unlock the profile by (p. 178) key is used. Back Close tapping on / . • Using the keyboard in the centre display Linking a remote control key to a driver > When the profile is locked, the settings (p. 49) profile made in the car are not automatically • Selecting driver profile (p. 180) First select the profile to be linked to the key, if saved to the profile. The changes must the profile to be linked is not already active. The instead be saved manually by tapping on active profile can then be linked to the key. Save changes. However, when the profile is unlocked, the settings are automati- 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre cally saved to the profile. display. Resetting settings in the driver profiles 2. Press System Driver Profile. Settings that have been saved to one or more 3. Select the desired profile. The Guest profile driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary. cannot be linked to a key. 4. Drag down the top view and tap on Settings System Driver Profile Edit Profile. }}

181 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

|| 5. Select Connect key to link the profile with Importing/exporting a driver profile 4. Select Import Profile From USB/Export the key. It is not possible to link a driver pro- from/to USB Profile To USB. file to a different key than the one currently The personal settings saved in the driver profiles being used in the car. If there are multiple can be exported/imported to other cars via USB. NOTE keys in the car, the message More than one key is found, put the key you want to Follow these steps in order to import/export a A number of profiles can be exported to a connect on backup reader will be dis- driver profile from/to a USB memory: USB memory, but only one profile can be played. imported at a time. When a profile is imported 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre it overwrites the car’s current profile. The pro- display. file name is also written over. 2. Press System Driver Profile. The guest profile cannot be exported or imported.

5. Select the profile to be imported or the profile(s) to be exported. > The current driver profile is overwritten when a new one is imported. Backup reader's location in the tunnel console. 6. Select OK. > When the message Profile connected to key is shown, the key and the driver If the export fails, it may be due to the following: profile are linked. • The USB memory is full. 6. Press OK. • The USB memory is incorrectly inserted or > This key is now linked to the driver profile USB socket in tunnel console. was pulled out during the export. and will remain linked as long as the If the import fails, it may be due to the following: Connect key box is not unticked. 3. Insert a USB memory in the tunnel console. • The USB memory is incorrectly inserted or Related information was pulled out during the import. • Driver profiles (p. 179) • There is no driver profile saved on the USB • Editing a driver profile (p. 180) memory. • Remote control key (p. 240) • The file for the driver profile on the USB memory is corrupt.

182 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Related information Changing settings for apps Third party apps • Driver profiles (p. 179) All of the car's apps are listed in the app view. Third party apps are not included in the car's sys- The app settings that relate to the car's embed- tem from the beginning, but are the type that can ded functions can be changed from the centre be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings display's top view. are always made inside the app and not from the top view. Apps for embedded functions - basic apps Related information The apps installed in the car from the beginning, • Navigating in the centre display's views e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and (p. 40) are part of the car's embedded functions. Set- • Settings view (p. 174) tings for these apps can be changed directly in • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps the top view in the centre display. (p. 494) Change the settings for a basic app • Categories in the settings view (p. 176) 1. Tap on the app, e.g. FM radio. 2. Drag down the top view. 3. Press FM Radio Settings. 4. Change settings as desired and confirm the selections. 5. Press either the physical home button or tap anywhere outside of the top view to exit the settings view. It is also possible to drag up the top view or tap on the tab at the bottom of the top view. Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all. Refer to the section "Categories in the settings view" for more information on how settings are changed.

183 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Resetting user data for change of ownership In the event of a change of ownership, user data and system settings should be restored to factory settings.

The settings in the car can be reset at different levels. Restore all user data and system settings to the original factory settings in the event of a change of ownership. In the event of a change of ownership it is also important to change the owner of the Volvo On Call* service. Related information • Resetting settings in the settings view (p. 178) • Volvo ID (p. 23)

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE CONTROL CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate control Related information Climate control - sensors The car is equipped with electronic climate con- • Climate control - sensors (p. 186) The climate control system has a number of sen- trol. The climate control system cools or heats as • Perceived temperature (p. 187) sors to help control the climate in the car. well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger Air quality (p. 187) compartment. • Sensor location • Climate controls (p. 190) 4-zone climate • Air distribution (p. 200) • Parking climate (p. 208) • Voice recognition control of climate control (p. 121)

Moisture sensor - in the casing by the interior rearview mirror. Climate zones with 4-zone climate. Outside temperature sensor - in the right- With 4-zone climate the temperature in the pas- hand door mirror. senger compartment can be set separately for Temperature sensor for the passenger com- the left and right-hand sides in both the front and partment - by the physical buttons in the rear seat. centre console. All climate control system functions are con- Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instru- trolled from the centre display and physical but- ment panel. tons in the centre console. The functions for the rear seat can also be controlled from the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console. NOTE Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

186 CLIMATE CONTROL

With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also Perceived temperature Air quality an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate The climate control system regulates the climate The materials selected for the passenger com- control system air intake. in the passenger compartment based on the partment and the air cleaning system ensure that Related information perceived temperature, not on actual tempera- the air quality in the passenger compartment is ture. high. • Climate control (p. 186) • Perceived temperature (p. 187) The temperature you select in the passenger Materials in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physically per- compartment • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 189) ceived temperature as affected by factors such The interior of the passenger compartment is as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity, designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the for people with contact allergies and for asthma time. sufferers. The system includes a sun sensor which detects Tested materials have been developed in order to on which side the sun is shining into the passen- minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger ger compartment. This means that the tempera- compartment and to contribute to making the ture can differ between the right and left-hand passenger compartment easier to keep clean. side's air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides. The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to Related information remove and clean. • Climate control (p. 186) Use cleaning agents and car care products rec- • Climate control - sensors (p. 186) ommended by Volvo to clean the interior. • Regulating the temperature (p. 194) Air cleaning system In addition to the passenger compartment filter, the modifications for Clean Zone Interior Package* and the air quality system Interior Air Quality System* also help to maintain high air quality in the passenger compartment.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Clean Zone • That the ventilation fan is activated. Passenger compartment filter The Clean Zone function checks whether or not • That the air recirculation is deactivated. All air entering the car's passenger compartment all conditions have been met for good air quality is cleaned with a filter. in the passenger compartment. NOTE Replacing the passenger compartment Clean Zone does not indicate that the air filter quality is good. It only indicates that the con- To maintain high climate system performance, ditions for good air quality have been met. the filter must be changed at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec- Related information ommended replacement intervals. If the car is • Climate control (p. 186) used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often. • Passenger compartment filter (p. 188) • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 189) NOTE • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 189) There are different types of passenger com- • Cleaning the interior (p. 575) partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil- The indicator is visible in the climate view in • Climate controls in the centre display ter is fitted. the centre display. (p. 190) The indicator is visible in the climate row Related information when the climate view is not open. • Air quality (p. 187) If the conditions have not been met then the • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 189) Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 189) have been met, this is indicated by the text changing colour to blue. • Volvo service programme (p. 530) Conditions that are checked: • That all doors and the tailgate are closed. • That all side windows and the panorama roof* are closed. • That the air quality system Interior Air Quality System* is activated.

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE CONTROL

Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System* 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto- display. a series of modifications that keep the passen- matic air quality system that separates gases 2. Press Climate. ger compartment even clearer from allergy and and particles to reduce the levels of odours and asthma-inducing substances. contaminants in the passenger compartment. 3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deactivate the air quality sensor. The following is included: IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passen- Related information An enhanced fan function that means that • ger compartment from contaminants such as par- • Air quality (p. 187) the fan starts when the car is unlocked with ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground- the remote control key. The fan fills the pas- • Passenger compartment filter (p. 188) level ozone. senger compartment with fresh air. The func- • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 189) tion starts when required and is disengaged If the air quality sensor senses that the outside • Activating/deactivating air recirculation automatically after a time or when one of the air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and (p. 200) passenger compartment doors is opened. air recirculation is activated. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the NOTE car is 4 years old. The air quality sensor must always be enabled • The fully automatic air quality system Interior to ensure the best air in the passenger com- Air Quality System (IAQS). partment. Related information In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as • Air quality (p. 187) to prevent misting. • Passenger compartment filter (p. 188) In the event of misting, the defrost functions • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 189) for windscreen, side windows and rear window should be used.

Activating/deactivating the air quality sensor It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor should be activated/deactivated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189 CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate controls • Activating/deactivating defrost of windows Climate controls in the centre The climate control system's functions are con- and door mirrors (p. 198) display trolled from the centre display, physical buttons All climate functions can be regulated from the in the centre console and the climate panel at climate row and the climate view in the centre the rear of the tunnel console. display. Overview of climate controls Climate row The most common climate functions can be regulated from the climate row.

Climate controls in the centre display.

Defrost buttons in the centre console. Temperature controls for driver and passen- Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel ger side. console. Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver Related information and front passenger seat, as well as heated • Climate control (p. 186) steering wheel*. • Climate controls in the centre display Button for access to the climate view. The (p. 190) graphic on the button shows activated climate settings. • Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console (p. 192)

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate view Rear climate control One tap on the centre button in the climate row All climate functions for the rear seat can be gives access to the climate view. The climate view regulated in the Rear climate tab. is divided into the tabs Main climate, Rear climate and Parking climate . Change between the tabs by swiping left/right or by pressing the respective heading. Main climate In addition to the climate row's functions, other main climate functions can also be controlled in the Main climate tab.

Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting the windows and door mirrors. AC - Controls for air conditioning. 2nd row climate - Controls for climate func- Recirc - Controls for air recirculation. tionality in the rear seat, second seat row. Controls for air distribution. Fan controls for rear seat, second seat row. 3rd row climate - Controls for climate func- Fan controls for front seat. tionality in the rear seat, third seat row. AUTO - Auto regulating the climate. Temperature controls for rear seat.

}}

191 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Controls for heated rear seat*. Climate controls at the rear of the Auto-regulating the climate tunnel console With an auto-regulated climate, several climate Parking climate The rear seat's climate functions are controlled functions are controlled automatically by the cli- The car's parking climate control can be regula- from the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel mate control system. ted in the Parking climate tab. console. Related information • Climate controls (p. 190) • Activating/deactivating defrost of windows and door mirrors (p. 198) • Activating/deactivating air conditioning (p. 193) • Activating/deactivating air recirculation (p. 200) • Changing the air distribution (p. 201) • Regulating the fan level (p. 196) • Auto-regulating the climate (p. 192) Auto-regulation button in the climate view. • Regulating the temperature (p. 194) Controls for heated rear seat*. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. • Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* Fan controls for rear seat. (p. 205) Temperature controls for rear seat. • Activating/deactivating ventilation of the seats* (p. 206) Related information • Activating/deactivating heating of steering • Climate controls (p. 190) wheel* (p. 207) • Activating/deactivating heating of the seats* • Parking climate (p. 208) (p. 205) • Regulating the fan level (p. 196) • Regulating the temperature (p. 194)

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE CONTROL

2. Give a short or long press on AUTO. Activating/deactivating air NOTE > Auto-regulation of the climate is acti- conditioning Close all side windows and the panorama vated/deactivated and the button illumi- The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies roof* for air conditioning to work optimally. nates/extinguishes. incoming air as required. Auto-regulation automatically controls the Activating/deactivating the main air NOTE air recirculation, air conditioning and air conditioning distribution. It is not possible to activate the air condition- Fan level and temperature are changed ing when the fan control is in Off position. depending on whether a short or long press is given: Activating/deactivating the third seat • Short press - resets to previous set- row's air conditioning tings for auto-regulated climate control. • Long press - changes to default settings (level 3 and 22 °C/72 °F). Related information • Climate controls in the centre display (p. 190) The air conditioning button in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Press AC. > The air conditioning is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extin- The air conditioning button in the tab Rear climate in guishes. the climate view. When the air conditioning is activated, the 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. climate control system automatically con- 2. Select the Rear climate tab. trols starting and switching off as required.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| 3. Press 3rd row climate. Regulating the temperature > The air conditioning is activated/deacti- The temperature can be set separately for the vated and the button illuminates/extin- left and right-hand sides and separately for the guishes. front and rear seats. Regulating temperature for front seat NOTE It is not possible to activate the third seat row's air conditioning if the main air conditioning is deactivated or the second seat row's climate control is deactivated.

Related information Temperature control. • Climate controls in the centre display 2. Regulate the temperature by either of the (p. 190) following: • drag the control to the desired temperature, or Temperature buttons in the climate row. • press +/− to raise/lower the temperature 1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature gradually. button in the centre display's climate row to > The temperature changes and the button open the controls. shows the set temperature.

194 CLIMATE CONTROL

Synchronising the temperature Regulating temperature for rear seat From the front seat

Temperature control. Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature 4. Regulate the temperature by means of the controls. Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the cli- following: 1. Press the driver's side temperature button in mate view. drag the control to the desired tempera- the centre display's climate row in order to • 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. ture open the controls. 2. Select the Rear climate tab. press +/− to raise/lower the temperature Synchronise temperature • 2. Press . gradually. > The temperature for all zones in the car is 3. Press the left or right-hand side temperature button to open the control. > The temperature changes and the button synchronised with the temperature set for shows the set temperature. the driver's side and the synchronisation symbol is shown adjacent to the temperature button. Synchronisation is stopped by a further press on Synchronise temperature or by changing the passenger side or rear seat temperature settings.

}}

195 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| From the rear seat Related information Regulating the fan level • Climate controls (p. 190) The fan can be set to five different automatic fan • Climate controls in the centre display levels as well as Off and Max. The fan level can (p. 190) be set separately for front and rear seats. • Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel Regulating fan level for front seat console (p. 192) • Perceived temperature (p. 187)

Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console. – Press the left or right-hand side buttons on the tunnel console's climate panel in order to lower/raise the temperature gradually. Fan control buttons in the climate view. > The temperature changes and the screen 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. in the climate panel shows the set tem- 2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max. perature. > Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate. NOTE Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by IMPORTANT selecting a higher or lower temperature than If the fan is fully switched off then the air con- the actual desired temperature. ditioning is not engaged, which results in a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

196 CLIMATE CONTROL

Regulating fan level for rear seat From the rear seat NOTE From the front seat The climate control system automatically adjusts the air flow within the selected fan level based on requirements. This means that the fan speed may change even though the fan level is the same.

Related information • Climate controls in the centre display (p. 190) • Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console (p. 192) Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console. The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the climate view. – Press the desired fan level, Off or 1-5 on the 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. tunnel console climate panel. > Fan level is changed and the buttons for Rear climate 2. Select the tab. the selected level illuminate. 3. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5. The fan level for the second and third seat NOTE row can be switched off by tapping on 2nd The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if row climate. the fan level for the front seat is in position Third seat row fan level follows the level for Off. the second seat row, but can be deactivated separately by tapping on 3rd row climate. > Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate.

197 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating/deactivating defrost of Cars without heated windscreen: From the climate view in the centre windows and door mirrors – Press the button (1). display The three functions max defroster, heated wind- > Max defroster is activated/deactivated Activating/deactivating max defroster screen*, and heated rear window and door mir- and the button illuminates/extinguishes. rors are used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windows and door mirrors. Cars with heated windscreen: From physical buttons in the centre – Press the button (1) repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels: console The centre console contains physical buttons for • Activated heated windscreen quick access to the defrost functions. • Activated heated windscreen and max With heated windscreen* the max defroster can defroster only be activated individually from the climate • Deactivated. view in the centre display. > Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Max defroster button in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. NOTE 2. Press Max. Max defroster starts with a certain delay in > Max defroster is activated/deactivated order to avoid a short increase in fan level if and the button illuminates/extinguishes. the heated windscreen is deactivated by two quick presses of the button. Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation of the climate and air recirculation, activates air conditioning and changes the Rear window and door mirror defrosters: fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI. – Press the button (2). When max defroster is deactivated, the Physical buttons in the centre console. > Heated rear window and door mirrors are climate control system returns to the pre- Button for heated windscreen* and max activated/deactivated and the button illu- vious settings. defroster. minates/extinguishes. Button for heated rear window and door mirrors.

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE CONTROL

NOTE NOTE 2. Press Rear. > Heated rear window and door mirrors are Changing the fan level to 5 increases the The heated windscreen may affect the per- activated/deactivated and the button illu- noise level. formance of transponders and other commu- minates/extinguishes. nication equipment. Activating/deactivating heated windscreen* Activating/deactivating automatic start NOTE of heated windows It is possible to set whether automatic start of If the heated windscreen is activated when heated windscreen* and heated rear window and the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the door mirrors should be activated/deactivated engine then the engine will be restarted. when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of Activating/deactivating heated rear window ice on the windscreen/window. The heating and door mirrors switches off automatically when the windscreen/ window is sufficiently warm and the ice is gone. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Climate The button for heated windscreen in the climate view. Press . 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 3. Select Auto Electric Front Defroster to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated 2. Press Electric. windscreen. > Heated windscreen is activated/deacti- Select Auto Electric Rear Defroster to vated and the button illuminates/extin- activate/deactivate automatic start of heated guishes. rear window and door mirrors. NOTE The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in Related information the climate view. A triangular area at the end of each side of • Climate controls (p. 190) the windscreen is not electrically heated, 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. • Climate controls in the centre display where de-icing may take longer. (p. 190)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating/deactivating air NOTE Air distribution recirculation The climate control system distributes the It is not possible to activate air recirculation The air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust incoming air via a number of different vents in when max defroster is activated. fumes, etc. from the passenger compartment, by the passenger compartment. means of no outside air being drawn into the car. Activating/deactivating the timer for air Overview of air distribution recirculation It is possible set whether the air recirculation timer should be activated/deactivated. When the timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically switched off after 20 minutes. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/ deactivate the air recirculation timer. Related information Air distribution in the passenger compartment with 4- The air recirculation button in the climate view. • Climate controls in the centre display zone climate. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. (p. 190) Automatic and manual air distribution 2. Press Recirc. With auto-regulated climate running the air distribution takes place automatically. If necessary, the > Air recirculation is activated/deactivated air distribution can be controlled manually. and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Adjustable air vents IMPORTANT There are 10 adjustable air vents in the passen- If the air in the car is recirculated for too long ger compartment. then there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

200 CLIMATE CONTROL

Changing the air distribution Related information The air distribution can be changed manually if • Air distribution (p. 200) required. • Opening/closing and aiming the air vents (p. 202) • Table of air distribution options (p. 203) • Climate controls in the centre display (p. 190)

Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger compartment. Four on the instrument panel, two at the rear of the tunnel console, one on each of the door pillars between the front and rear doors The air distribution buttons in the climate view. and one on each of the door pillars behind Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents the rear doors. Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel NOTE and centre console Air distribution - air vents in the floor Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Press one or more of the air distribution but- Related information tons in order to open/close the correspond- • Climate control (p. 186) ing air flow. • Changing the air distribution (p. 201) > The air distribution is changed and the • Opening/closing and aiming the air vents buttons illuminate/extinguish. (p. 202) • Table of air distribution options (p. 203) • Auto-regulating the climate (p. 192)

201 CLIMATE CONTROL

Opening/closing and aiming the air Opening/closing the air vents Aiming the air vents vents Some air vents in the passenger compartment can be opened, closed and aimed individually.

If the door pillar vents and instrument panel outer vents are aimed toward the side windows, then misting can be removed. If the door pillar vents are aimed inwards then, in a hot climate, a comfortable environment is obtained in the passenger compartment.

The air vent's thumbwheel2. The air vent's lever2. – Roll the thumbwheel in order to open/close – Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to the air flow from the nozzle. aim the air flow from the nozzle. The larger the number of the white lines on Related information the thumbwheel that are visible, the higher • Air distribution (p. 200) the air flow. • Changing the air distribution (p. 201) • Table of air distribution options (p. 203)

2 The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.

202 CLIMATE CONTROL

Table of air distribution options The air distribution can be changed manually if required. The following options are available for setting.

Air distribution Purpose If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.

Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this, fan level must not be low).

Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate. other air vents.

Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air Provides heat or cooling to the floor. vents.

}}

203 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Air distribution Purpose Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel. Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates. Some air flows from other air vents.

Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or flows from other air vents. humid climate.

Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor floor. Some air flows from other air vents. temperatures.

Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment. panel and air vents at the floor.

Related information • Opening/closing and aiming the air vents • Climate controls in the centre display • Air distribution (p. 200) (p. 202) (p. 190) • Changing the air distribution (p. 201)

204 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating/deactivating heating of 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats From the rear seat the seats* in order to change between the four levels: The seats can be heated in order to increase Off, High, Middle and Low. comfort for driver and passengers when it is > The level changes and the button shows cold. the set level. Activating/deactivating heating of the Activating/deactivating heating of the front seat* rear seat* From the front seat

Seat heating indication and controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console. – Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand side's buttons for heated seats on the tunnel console's climate panel to switch between the four levels: Off, High, Middle and Low. > The level changes and the screen in the Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row. climate panel shows the set level. 1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering Buttons for heated seats in the group Rear climate in wheel and seat button in the climate row in the climate view. NOTE the centre display in order to open the con- 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. trols for seat and steering wheel. Heating of the rear seat is deactivated auto- 2. Select the Rear climate tab. matically after 15 minutes. If the car is not equipped with ventilated seats or heated steering wheel, the button 3. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats for heated seats is immediately available in in order to change between the four levels: Off High Middle Low the climate row. , , and . > The level changes and the button shows the set level.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| WARNING Activating/deactivating ventilation of Activating/deactivating ventilation of the seats* the front seat Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in The seats can be ventilated, for example, to temperature due to a lack of sensation or who remove moisture from clothes. otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may The ventilation system consists of fans in the suffer burn injuries. seats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the Activating/deactivating automatic start cooler the passenger compartment air becomes. The system can be activated when the engine is of heated seats running and takes seat temperature, solar radia- It is possible to set whether automatic start of tion and outside temperature into consideration. heated seats should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature. Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre 1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering display. wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the con- 2. Press Climate. trols for seat and steering wheel. 3. Under Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and If the car is not equipped with heated seats Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level, or heated steering wheel, the button for ven- select Off,Low,Middle or High in order to tilated seats is immediately available in the activate/deactivate the automatic starting of climate row. the heating for the driver and passenger seats and to select the level. 2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated seats in order to change between the four Related information levels: Off, High, Middle and Low. • Climate controls (p. 190) > The level changes and the button shows • Climate controls in the centre display the set level. (p. 190) • Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console (p. 192)

206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE CONTROL

NOTE Activating/deactivating heating of 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated steering wheel* steering wheel in order to change between The seat ventilation should be used carefully The steering wheel can be heated in order to the four levels: Off, High, Middle and Low. by people sensitive to draughts. Level Low is increase comfort for the driver when it is cold. > The level changes and the button shows recommended for long-term use. the set level. Activating/deactivating heating of Activating/deactivating automatic start IMPORTANT steering wheel of heated steering wheel Seat ventilation cannot be started if the pas- It is possible to set whether automatic start of senger compartment temperature is too low. heated steering wheel should be activated/deac- This is in order to avoid cooling down the per- tivated when the engine is started. With auto- son sitting in the seat. matic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature. Related information 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre • Climate controls (p. 190) display. • Climate controls in the centre display 2. Press Climate. (p. 190) 3. Under Auto Steering Wheel Heating Level, select Off,Low,Middle or High in Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row. order to activate/deactivate the automatic 1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and starting of steering wheel heating and to seat button in the climate row of the centre select the level. display in order to open the controls for seat Related information and steering wheel. • Climate controls (p. 190) If the car is not equipped with heated seats • Climate controls in the centre display or ventilated seats, the button for heated (p. 190) steering wheel is immediately available in the climate row. • Steering wheel (p. 138)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207 CLIMATE CONTROL

Parking climate Preconditioning NOTE The climate of the car's passenger compartment Preconditioning of the car before driving reduces wear and energy needs during a journey. Preconditioning is available only when the car can be preconditioned or maintained while the 3 car is parked. is connected to an electrical socket . A Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via charging station which is not always active, the timer. e.g. on account of a timer, may cause precon- The function utilises several systems in different ditioning to malfunction. cases: If the car is not connected to an electrical • In a cold climate, the parking heater warms socket, it is still possible to cool the passen- up the passenger compartment to a comfort- ger compartment briefly in a warm climate by able temperature. starting preconditioning directly. • The ventilation, in a hot climate, cools the passenger compartment to the current outer NOTE temperature. During preconditioning of the passenger • The air conditioning, in a hot climate, cools compartment, the car works to reach comfort the passenger compartment to the comfort temperature and not the temperature set in temperature. the climate control system. • Activation of heated steering wheel and heated seats for driver and passengers can Climate comfort retention be selected. The climate in the car's passenger compartment • Heated windscreen, rear window and door can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if mirrors are automatically activated as the engine needs to be switched off but the required. driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car During preconditioning in a hot climate, conden- and maintain the level of climate comfort. Preconditioning and climate comfort retention are con- sation from the air conditioning may drip under Starting climate comfort retention is only possible trolled from the Parking climate tab in the centre dis- the car. This is normal. play's climate view. via direct start.

3 Applicable to electric heater.

208 CLIMATE CONTROL

The function utilises several systems in different Starting/stopping preconditioning cases: Preconditioning heats or cools the passenger • Residual heat from the engine, in a cold cli- compartment before driving. The function can mate, heats the passenger compartment to use direct start from the centre display or a comfort temperature. mobile phone. • The ventilation, in a hot climate, cools the passenger compartment to the current outer Starting/stopping from the centre temperature. display

NOTE Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to Boxes for seat heating and steering wheel heating in the Parking climate avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use tab in the climate view. of the function is intended to maintain climate 3. Select whether seat heating and steering comfort when driver or passengers remain wheel heating should be activated during inside the car. preconditioning by ticking/unticking the boxes. Related information 4. Press Preconditioning. • Climate control (p. 186) > Preconditioning is started/switched off • Starting/stopping preconditioning (p. 209) Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in and the button is illuminated/extin- the climate view. • Timer for preconditioning (p. 211) guished. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. • Starting/switching off climate comfort retention (p. 213) 2. Select the Parking climate tab. • Symbols and messages for parking climate control (p. 215) • Heater (p. 216) • Parking heater (p. 217)

}}

209 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| NOTE WARNING Related information • Parking climate (p. 208) Preconditioning is available only when the car Do not use preconditioning5: 4 • Timer for preconditioning (p. 211) is connected to an electrical socket . A • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust charging station which is not always active, gases are emitted if the heater starts. • Starting/switching off climate comfort retention (p. 213) e.g. on account of a timer, may cause precon- • In locations with combustible or flamma- ditioning to malfunction. ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, • Symbols and messages for parking climate If the car is not connected to an electrical sawdust, etc. may ignite. control (p. 215) socket, it is still possible to cool the passen- • When there is a risk that the heater’s • Heater (p. 216) ger compartment briefly in a warm climate by exhaust line may be blocked. For exam- starting preconditioning directly. ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. NOTE Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long The car's doors and windows should be time in advance. closed during the preconditioning of the passenger compartment. Starting from a mobile phone* Start of preconditioning and information about the selected settings can be managed from a mobile phone that has the Volvo On Call* mobile app. Preconditioning heats or cools the passenger compartment (using the car's air conditioning) to comfort temperature. The passenger compartment can also be preconditioned with the engine remote start function (Engine Remote Start - ERS)6 via Volvo On Call* mobile app.

4 Applicable to electric heater. 5 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 6 Certain car models and markets.

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE CONTROL

Timer for preconditioning • Symbols and messages for parking climate Setting the timer for The timer can be set so that the preconditioning control (p. 215) preconditioning is finished at a predetermined time. The timer for preconditioning can manage up to 8 time settings. The timer can handle up to 8 different settings for: Adding a time setting • A time on a single date • A time on one or more days of the week, with or without repetition.

NOTE Preconditioning is available only when the car is connected to an electrical socket7. A charging station which is not always active, e.g. on account of a timer, may cause preconditioning to malfunction.

If the car is not connected to an electrical The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate socket, it is still possible to cool the passen- tab in the climate view. ger compartment briefly in a warm climate by starting preconditioning directly. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. Related information • Parking climate (p. 208) • Setting the timer for preconditioning (p. 211) • Activating/deactivating the timer for preconditioning (p. 213) • Starting/stopping preconditioning (p. 209)

7 Applicable to electric heater. }}

211 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| 3. Press Add timer. 7. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time set- Deleting a time setting > A pop-up window is shown. ting. > The time setting is added to the list and is NOTE activated. It is not possible to add a time setting if there WARNING already are 8 settings entered for the timer. Delete a time setting in order to be able to Do not use preconditioning8: add a new one. • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. 4. Tap on Date to set the time for a single date. • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, Days Tap on to set the time for one or more sawdust, etc. may ignite. days of the week. • When there is a risk that the heater’s The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by exhaust line may be blocked. For exam- in the tab Parking climate in the climate view. ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand ticking/unticking the box for Repeat 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. weekly. wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 5. With Date: Select the date for precondition- Remember that the preconditioning can be 3. Press Edit list. ing by scrolling the date list with the arrows. started by a timer that has been set for a long With Days: Select the days of the week for time in advance. 4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list. preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for > The icon changes to the text Delete. Editing a time setting the days of the week. 5. Press Delete to confirm. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 6. Set the time when the preconditioning > The time setting is removed from the list. should be finished by scrolling with the 2. Select the Parking climate tab. arrows. Related information 3. Press the time setting that is to be changed. • Timer for preconditioning (p. 211) > A pop-up window is shown. • Activating/deactivating the timer for precon- 4. Edit the time setting in the same way as ditioning (p. 213) described in "Adding a time setting" above. • Heater (p. 216)

8 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.

212 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating/deactivating the timer for WARNING Starting/switching off climate preconditioning comfort retention Do not use preconditioning9: A time setting in the timer for preconditioning Climate comfort retention maintains the climate can be activated or deactivated based on need. • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust in the passenger compartment after driving. The gases are emitted if the heater starts. function can use direct start from the centre dis- • In locations with combustible or flamma- play. ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.

The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the cli- Related information mate view. • Timer for preconditioning (p. 211) 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. • Setting the timer for preconditioning (p. 211) Button for climate comfort retention in the Parking climate tab in the climate view. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. • Heater (p. 216) 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping 2. Select the Parking climate tab. on the timer button to the right of the setting. > The time setting is activated/deactivated 3. Press Keep climate comfort. and the button illuminates/extinguishes. > Climate comfort retention is started/ switched off and the button illuminates/ extinguishes.

9 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. }}

213 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| NOTE It is not possible to start climate comfort retention if there is not enough residual heat in the engine to maintain the passenger compartment climate, or if the outside temperature is above approx. 20 °C.

NOTE Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car.

Related information • Parking climate (p. 208) • Starting/stopping preconditioning (p. 209)

214 CLIMATE CONTROL

Symbols and messages for parking This symbol illuminates in the driver climate control display when the heater is active. A number of symbols and messages regarding parking climate control can be shown in the driver display.

Symbol Message Specification Parking climate Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater. In some Unavailable Fuel level too cases, parking climate control can be activated, but has limited functionality. Filling the vehicle's normal fuel tank. lowA

Parking climate Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the hybrid battery is too low to start the park- Unavailable Charge level ing heater. In some cases, parking climate control can be activated, but has limited functionality. Charging the battery. too low

Parking climate Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the hybrid battery and the fuel level are too Unavailable, fuel and low to start the parking heater. In some cases, parking climate control can be activated, but has limited functionality. Charge the battery and fill up the car's normal fuel tank. charge level too lowB

Parking climate Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopC to check the function as soon as possible. Service required

A Applies to fuel-driven heater. B Applies to fuel-driven heater. C An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information • Starting/switching off climate comfort reten- • Heater (p. 216) • Parking climate (p. 208) tion (p. 213) • Managing messages in the driver display and • Starting/stopping preconditioning (p. 209) • Timer for preconditioning (p. 211) the centre display (p. 112)

215 CLIMATE CONTROL

Heater NOTE Fuel and refuelling12

The heater helps the engine and passenger 11 compartment reach the correct temperature When the heater is running , smoke may be before and during driving. emitted from the right-hand front wheel housing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking The heater has two subfunctions: sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is per- Parking heater - heats the passenger com- • fectly normal. partment, if necessary, when the parking climate control's preconditioning is activated. Battery and charging • Additional heater - heats the passenger compartment and engine, if necessary, dur- The heater is powered by the car's hybrid battery. ing driving. If the charge level of the hybrid battery is too low, then the heater is switched off automatically and Either a fuel-driven heater or an electric heater is the driver display shows a message. Warning label on fuel filler flap. used, depending on the market10. The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel NOTE tank. housing. Make sure that there is enough charge in the If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the When the heater is active, this symbol battery if the heater needs to be used. car should point downhill to ensure that there is a illuminates in the driver display. supply of fuel to the heater. If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message.

10 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding which markets use which type of heater. 11 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 12 Applies to fuel-driven heater.

216 CLIMATE CONTROL

NOTE Parking heater NOTE The parking heater helps the passenger com- Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's partment reach the correct temperature before normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be driving. used. used14. The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of Make sure that there is enough charge in the the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front WARNING hybrid battery if the heater needs to be used. right-hand wheel housing. Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to NOTE WARNING refuel. 13 Do not use preconditioning15: Check in the driver display that the heater is When the heater is running , smoke may be switched off. The heat symbol is shown when emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust it is operating. ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking gases are emitted if the heater starts. sound from the fuel pump may also be heard • In locations with combustible or flamma- Related information from the rear section of the car. This is per- ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • Parking heater (p. 217) fectly normal. • When there is a risk that the heater’s • Additional heater (p. 218) The parking heater starts automatically when exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand • Parking climate (p. 208) extra heat is required if the parking climate con- wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s trol's preconditioning is activated. ventilation. It is then switched off automatically when the Remember that the preconditioning can be right temperature, the time of a set timer or the started by a timer that has been set for a long heater's maximum running time has been time in advance. reached. The heater's maximum running time is 40 minutes.

13 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 14 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 15 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. }}

217 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| WARNING Additional heater NOTE The additional heater helps the passenger com- If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's partment and engine reach the correct tempera- smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds com- normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be 16 ture while driving. ing from the parking heater , switch off the used18. heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo The additional heater is one of two subfunctions recommends that an authorised Volvo work- Make sure that there is enough charge in the shop should be contacted for repair. of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the hybrid battery if the heater needs to be used. front right-hand wheel housing. Related information NOTE Activating/deactivating automatic start • Heater (p. 216) for the additional heater 17 • Additional heater (p. 218) When the heater is running , smoke may be It is possible to set whether automatic start for emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- • Parking climate (p. 208) the additional heater should be activated/deacti- ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking vated. • Fuses in engine compartment (p. 560) sound from the fuel pump may also be heard Settings from the rear section of the car. This is per- 1. Press in the top view in the centre fectly normal. display. 2. Press Climate. The additional heater starts and is controlled 3. Select Additional Heater to activate/deac- automatically when heating is required while the tivate automatic start of the additional heater. car is being driven. It then switches off automatically when the car is NOTE switched off. Volvo recommends that the automatic start for the additional heater should be switched off for short driving distances19.

16 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 17 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 18 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 19 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater.

218 CLIMATE CONTROL

NOTE If the auxiliary heater's automatic starting is deactivated, this may impede comfort in the passenger compartment as the climate control system will then have no heat source during electrical operation.

Related information • Heater (p. 216) • Parking heater (p. 217)

219

LOADING AND STORAGE LOADING AND STORAGE

Passenger compartment interior Third seat row Overview of the passenger compartment's interior and storage locations. Front seat

Storage spaces with cup holder, ashtray*, electrical socket and cigarette lighter* as well as an AUX/USB Storage compartment and cup holder in the side panel socket in the tunnel console. and storage space between the seats. Second seat row WARNING Storage compartment in the door panel and by the Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, steering wheel, glovebox and sun visors. cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

Related information • Tunnel console (p. 223) • Using the glovebox (p. 229) • Sun visors (p. 230) Storage compartment and ashtray* in the door panel, Electrical sockets (p. 224) cup holder* in the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* • on the front seat backrest and also electrical sockets • Emptying ashtrays* (p. 228) and cigarette lighter* in the tunnel console.

222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

Tunnel console Related information The tunnel console is located between the front • Passenger compartment interior (p. 222) seats. • Electrical sockets (p. 224) • Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 228) • Emptying ashtrays* (p. 228) • Connecting media via AUX/USB input (p. 476) • Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console (p. 192)

Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch is opened/closed with a push on the handle. Storage compartment with cup holder for driver and passenger as well as 12 V socket. If ashtray and cigarette lighter were specified then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V socket and a detachable ashtray in the cup holder. Storage compartment and AUX/USB input under the armrest. Climate controls for the rear seat climate functions* or storage compartment.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 223 LOADING AND STORAGE

Electrical sockets 230 V electrical socket* 3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the In the tunnel console there are two 12 V electri- plug - do not pull on the cable. cal sockets and one 230 V electrical socket*, in Pull up the cover when the socket is not the cargo area there is one 12 V electrical being used or the socket is left unattended. socket*.

For the sockets to supply current, the car's elec- IMPORTANT trical system must be set in the lowest ignition • Do not use accessories with large or position I. The sockets are then active as long as heavy connectors - they can damage the the starter battery level does not become too low. socket or come loose when driving. If the engine is switched off and the car is locked, • Do not use accessories that can cause the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is interference to the car's radio receiver or switched off and the car is not locked, or is electrical system for example. locked with blocked lock position temporarily 230 V electrical socket in tunnel console, second seat Position the accessory so that it is not at row. • deactivated, then the sockets continue to be risk of injuring the driver or passengers in active for a further ten minutes. The socket can be used for various accessories the event of heavy braking or collision. requiring a 230 V supply, such as chargers and Keep an eye on connected accessories portable computers. • NOTE as they can generate heat that can burn Remember that use of the electrical socket passengers or the interior. with the engine switched off entails a risk of IMPORTANT discharging the starter battery, which can limit Maximum socket output is 150 W. functionality. WARNING Only use accessories that are undam- Using the socket • aged and fault-free. The accessories 1. Pull down the socket cover and insert the must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with accessory's plug. connectors designed for the socket. The > The diode on the socket indicates its sta- accessories must have a CE marking, UL tus. marking or an equivalent safety marking. • Never allow sockets, connectors or 2. Check that the diode is illuminated with a accessories to come into contact with steady green light - only then is current avail- water or other liquids. Do not touch or able at the socket. use the socket if it appears to be dam-

224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

aged or has come into contact with water or other liquid. Status indication • Do not connect junction sockets, adapt- A diode on the socket indicates its status: ers or extension cables to the socket as these can override the socket's safety features. • The socket is equipped with a protective cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or damages the socket preventing the cover from doing its job. Do not leave children in the car unsupervised when the socket is active. Failure to follow the advice given above can lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.

Status indication Reason Action Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compart- down before reinserting the plug. ment is too warm). The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or contin- None The accessory cannot be connected to the uously) or is defective. socket.

}}

225 LOADING AND STORAGE

|| Status indication Reason Action Diode not illuminated The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the socket. The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest ignition position I. The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.

If the problem persists, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

WARNING Never modify or repair the 230 V electrical socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

12 V electrical socket

12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, second seat 12 V electrical socket in cargo area*. row. The sockets can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones. The socket in the tunnel console can be comple- mented with a cigarette lighter*.

IMPORTANT Maximum socket output is 120 W per socket. 12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.

226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

Using the sockets 1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold down the cover (cargo area) and plug in the accessory. 2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up the cover (cargo area) when the socket is not being used or if the socket is left unattended. Related information • Passenger compartment interior (p. 222)

227 LOADING AND STORAGE

Using the cigarette lighter* 1. Press in the button on the lighter. Emptying ashtrays* The cigarette lighter can be mounted in the 12 V > When the lighter is glowing the button With a cigarette lighter in the car there are sockets in the front and rear sections of the tun- hops up. detachable ashtrays in the tunnel console's cup nel console. 2. Pull out the lighter from the socket and light holders and in the door panels for the second a cigarette on the glowing coils. seat row. 3. Replace the lighter in the socket. Emptying an ashtray in the tunnel console IMPORTANT 1. Detach the ashtray by pulling it straight up from the cup holder and empty the contents. Observe caution when the lighter is activated so that the glowing part does not damage the 2. Refit the ashtray in the cup holder. interior for example. Emptying an ashtray in the door panels for the second seat row Related information • Tunnel console (p. 223) • Electrical sockets (p. 224) Cigarette lighter in the tunnel console, front seat. • Emptying ashtrays* (p. 228)

1. Open the ashtray's cover and then press the cover up to a fully vertical position. > The catch that holds the ashtray in place Cigarette lighter in the tunnel console, second seat row. is released. 2. Lift up the ashtray and empty the contents.

228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

3. Refit the ashtray and allow it to slide down in Using the glovebox Using the glovebox as a cooled area the tracks on the sides. The glovebox is located on the passenger side. The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g. drinks or food. The cooling works when the climate control system is active (i.e. when the car is set in ignition position II or when the engine is running).

4. Carefully press the two short sides of the Glovebox and opening button in the centre console. ashtray. The printed owner's manual and maps can be > The catch that holds the ashtray in place kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also a reattaches. pen holder on the inside of the lid. Cooling activated Related information Opening the glovebox Cooling deactivated • Passenger compartment interior (p. 222) – Press the opening button in the centre con- • Tunnel console (p. 223) sole. – Activate/deactivate the cooling by moving the control to the end position toward the • Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 228) > The glove box opens. passenger compartment/glovebox. Locking/unlocking the glovebox The glovebox can be locked, so-called private Related information locking, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, • Passenger compartment interior (p. 222) left at a hotel or similar. Private locking also locks • Activate/deactivate private locking (p. 253) the tailgate.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 229 LOADING AND STORAGE

Sun visors Cargo area Loading The rear of each sun visor includes a vanity mir- The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it There are a number of things to remember when ror with card holder. possible to transport and secure large objects. loading the car.

By folding down the backrests in the second and Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The third rows of seats, the cargo area becomes quite total of the weight of the passengers and all spacious. To facilitate loading and unloading, the accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor- rear section of the car can be lowered with the responding weight. level control function*. Use load retaining eyelets or bag holders to secure the load, and the WARNING extendable cargo cover* to conceal the load if The car’s driving properties change depend- desired. The warning triangle and first-aid kit are ing on the weight and positioning of the load. also stored in the cargo area. The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or Recommendations for loading in the spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area cargo area floor. • Position the load firmly against the rear Vanity mirror with lighting plus card holder. seat's backrest. Related information The vanity mirror lighting* is switched on auto- • Centre the load. matically when the lid is lifted. • Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 135) • Heavy objects should be placed as low as The vanity mirror frame incorporates a holder for possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low- Lowering backrests in the third seat row e.g. cards or tickets. • ered backrests. (p. 137) • Cover sharp edges with something soft to Related information • Level control* and shock absorption (p. 414) Passenger compartment interior (p. 222) avoid damaging the upholstery. • Loading (p. 230) • • Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets • Tool kit (p. 525) with straps or web lashings. WARNING A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

WARNING car's cargo area or to assist when a trailer shall NOTE be coupled/uncoupled to/from the towbar*. The protection provided by the inflatable cur- It is not possible to adjust the height of the tain in the headlining may be compromised or Level control is performed via a control at the rear section when one or more of the doors eliminated by high loads. rear on the right-hand side in the cargo area's or the bonnet is open. This does not apply to • Never load cargo above the backrest. side panel. the tailgate.

WARNING WARNING Always secure the load. During heavy braking Pay attention to ensure that there is no per- the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to son, animal or object under the car when low- the car's occupants. ering. This would involve danger to life and Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with damage to the car or object. something soft. Switch off the engine and apply the parking Recommendations for roof loads brake when loading/unloading long items. For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers1 Otherwise you may accidentally knock the that Volvo have developed are recommended. gear lever or gear selector with the load into a This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in drive position - and the car could then move Controls for raising/lowering the car's rear section. order to achieve the maximum possible safety off. during a journey. The control consists of two buttons - one button Increasing the space in the cargo area that lowers and one button that raises the rear Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers. To expand the cargo area and simplify loading, section of the car. For raising or lowering, each the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note button must be held depressed until the rear sec- • Check periodically that the load carriers and that objects must not prevent the function of the tion has reached the desired level. load are properly secured. Lash the load WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the It is not possible to raise the car's rear section securely with retaining straps. rear seat's backrests is folded down. higher than its normal level. • Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom. Level control of the car's rear section* During driving, the rear section height will return The car's rear section can be lowered/raised in to the normal level. order to create a better working height for the

1 Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231 LOADING AND STORAGE

|| • The size of the area exposed to the wind, and Load retaining eyelets Bag hooks therefore fuel consumption, increase with the The folding load retaining eyelets are used to Bag hooks, together with an elastic strap, keep size of the load. fasten straps in order to anchor items in the bags in place and prevent them from falling over • Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy cargo area. and spreading their contents across the cargo braking and hard cornering. area. Along the sides WARNING The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. Read about maximum permitted roof load in the section on Weights.

Related information • Load retaining eyelets (p. 232) • Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 251) • Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 135) WARNING Lowering backrests in the third seat row • Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro- (p. 137) There are also two extensible bag hooks in side trude may cause injury under violent braking. panels - one on each side of the cargo area. • Safety grille* (p. 237) Always secure large and heavy objects with a • Safety net* (p. 235) seatbelt or cargo retaining straps. IMPORTANT • Cargo cover* (p. 233) The bag hooks may be loaded with a maxi- Related information mum of 5 kg. • Weights (p. 585) • Loading (p. 230) • Bag hooks (p. 232) Related information • Safety grille* (p. 237) • Loading (p. 230) • Safety net* (p. 235) • Safety grille* (p. 237) • Cargo cover* (p. 233) • Safety net* (p. 235) • Cargo cover* (p. 233)

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

Cargo cover* Usage When the cargo cover is extended so that it In the extended position, the cargo cover pre- There are two extended positions for the cargo covers the cargo area - guide the cover's vents visual access to the cargo area. cover - a full-cover position and a loading posi- attachment pins into the grooves in the side tion, where it is partially extended to make it eas- panels and release, while at the same time Installation2 ier to reach further into the cargo area. angling the handle with a light downward pressure. Full-cover position > The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover position.

If 7-seat car - hang the locking tabs of the seatbelts for the third seat row from the des- Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in ignated hooks in the side panels. If 5-seat the recess in the side panel in the cargo car - see the next point. area. Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover Then insert the other end piece in the recess so that it slides over the side panels in the in the side panel on the opposite side. cargo area. Pull to the end position. Press down the end pieces on both sides - one by one. > When a "click" is heard and the red marking on each end piece has disappeared, the cargo cover is attached - check that it is affixed securely.

2 In the car model XC90 Excellence, the cargo cover is fixed and removal/fitting of the cover is not possible. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233 LOADING AND STORAGE

|| Loading mode In the event that your hands are occupied: WARNING In a 7-seat car, never have the cargo cover fitted when there are passengers in the rear seats. This may lead to serious injury in the event of a collision.

Retracting 1. From the full-cover position: Lift up the handle and pull it backward to disengage the cargo cover's attachment pins From retracted position - grip the handle and In the extended full-cover position - lightly and then release. pull out the cover so it slides over the side push the handle part of the cargo cover From loading position: panels in the cargo area - pull to the end upward, e.g. with an elbow. position and guide the cargo cover's attach- > Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover ment pins into the grooves in the side panels. The cover retracts until it stops in the in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position. (If the cover is already in the full-cover posi- loading position. Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis- tion - see the next point) To return to full-cover position from loading posi- engage the attachment pins and then From full-cover position - grip the handle and tion: release. guide the cargo cover's attachment pins into 1. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out 2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins the grooves in the side panels and release. to the end position. outside of the side panels until it stops in the > Retract the cover until it stops in the load- retracted position. 2. Release slightly and angle the handle by ing position. means of a light downward pressure. Removal > The cover is then locked in the end posi- In retracted position: tion. 1. Depress the button on one of the retracted IMPORTANT cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that end. Avoid loading objects on top of the cargo cover in extended position. In a 7-seat car - release the third seat row's seatbelt locking tabs from the hooks above the side panels.

234 LOADING AND STORAGE

2. Angle the cover up/out carefully. Safety net* Installation > The other end piece loosens automatically The safety net prevents loads from being thrown and the cover can be lifted out of the forward in the passenger compartment in the WARNING cargo area. event of sudden braking. It is necessary to ensure that the upper secur- Related information The safety net is fitted into four mounting points. ing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the puller-straps are hooked in prop- • Loading (p. 230) erly. • Safety grille* (p. 237) Damaged safety nets must not be used. • Safety net* (p. 235) • Load retaining eyelets (p. 232) NOTE The easiest way to fit the safety net is via one of the rear doors.

1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that the split upper rod in the net is locked in its extended position. 2. Hook one retaining hook of the net into the For reasons of safety, the safety net must always front or rear roof mounting with the anchor- be fastened and anchored as described below. ing strap locks turned towards you. The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can 3. Hook the net's other retaining hook into the be secured two different locations in the car: roof mounting on the opposite side - the • Rear fitting - behind second seat row. telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks • Front fitting - behind the front seats. facilitate alignment. Take care to press forward the net's retain- WARNING ing hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position. Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235 LOADING AND STORAGE

|| 4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear Removing and storing roof mountings, hook the safety net's anchor- The safety net can be easily removed and folded ing straps into the front floor eyes in the up. cargo area. 1. Reduce safety net tension by pressing the button in the anchoring strap lock and feed- ing out a little of the anchoring strap on each side. 2. Press in the catches and detach both of the anchoring strap's hooks. 3. Undo the upper attachments and release the net from the roof mountings. Front fitting. 4. Press the red button on the rod to enable Pay attention to make sure that you do not folding and then roll up the net. press the seat/backrest hard against the net Related information when the seat/backrest is moved back again Rear fitting. - only adjust until the seat/backrest makes • Loading (p. 230) contact with the net. Safety grille* (p. 237) Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front • roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps 5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring • Cargo cover* (p. 233) into the outer eyes on the rear of the seat straps. • Load retaining eyelets (p. 232) slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved for- IMPORTANT ward slightly. If the seat/backrest is pressed hard backwards against the safety net then the net and/or its roof mountings could be damaged.

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE

Safety grille* WARNING The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the For safety reasons, the third seat row3 must cargo area from being thrown forward in the be lowered when the safety grille is fitted in passenger compartment in the event of sudden the car. braking.

For reasons of safety the safety grille must IMPORTANT always be mounted and secured correctly. It is not possible to have the protective grille fitted at the same time as the cargo cover. WARNING 2. Guide one of the safety grille's hooks into Under no circumstances may anybody remain Installation the larger opening in the roof mounting (1). in the cargo area while the car is moving. This is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking 1. Lower the rear seat and then lift the safety Grasp the grille near the hook and pull/slide or an accident. grille in through one of the rear side doors or it towards the smaller opening (2). via the tailgate - the arched/convex side of > The hook is now secured in the roof the grille should face the cargo area while The safety grille's parts consist of the grille and mounting's end position. the hooks on each side point up. The attach- two loose attaching braces. The attaching braces ing braces and plastic sleeves are not used 3. Repeat the steps in point 2 above to secure each come with a screw cap and there are two in this stage. the other hook in the mounting on the other plastic sleeves for the safety grille. side.

WARNING WARNING The safety grille must only be used in the rear Make sure the hooks of the safety grille are position described here. The roof mountings securely fitted in the roof mountings so there behind the front seats are not intended for is no risk of the grille coming loose. the safety grille.

3 Applies to 7-seat cars. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237 LOADING AND STORAGE

|| Note that the attaching braces can be removed before the plastic sleeves are removed from the holes in the grille. Related information • Loading (p. 230) • Load retaining eyelets (p. 232) • Safety net* (p. 235) • Cargo cover* (p. 233) 4. Hook the attaching brace's hook through the load securing eyelet at the cargo floor from underneath, and guide the threaded part through the cargo grille's lower attachment hole from underneath (1). Slide a plastic sleeve on the threaded part of the attaching brace - the sleeve flange should face up - and guide it down through the hole. Then screw on the screw cap until its lower edge is approx. 5 mm from the grille (2). 5. Repeat the steps in point 4 on the other side. 6. Centre the safety grille and then tighten the two attaching braces alternately until the grille is properly secured. Removal Remove the safety grille by performing the above steps in reverse order.

238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM LOCKS AND ALARM

Remote control key with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres out from the programmed and used for one single car. If addi- The remote control key locks/unlocks the doors driver's door and approx. 1 metre out from the tional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles and tailgate and must be located inside the car tailgate. See the section "Remote control key are added - one per new remote control key. This for the car to be started. range". also applies for the key tag. With keyless starting and keyless locking/unlock- In the event of a lost key, see the heading "Loss ing, the remote control key can be located any- of a remote control key" below. where in the passenger compartment or the cargo area and maintain the functionality to start Remote control key buttons the car. Each of the remote control keys that are supplied with the car can be linked to a driver profile with unique settings for the car. When a key with a specific profile is used, the car's settings are adjusted to match the settings for that profile. See the section "Driver profiles". Button-less key (Key Tag) Remote control key, on left, and button-less key (Key Tag), on right. For cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*, a slightly smaller, lighter and button-less key The remote control key is not physically used (Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same way as when starting since the car is equipped with sup- the normal remote control key when it comes to The remote control key has four buttons - one on the left-hand side and three on the right-hand side. port for keyless starting (Passive Start) as stand- keyless starting and locking/unlocking. It has no ard. The key needs to be located in the front of detachable key blade and the battery cannot be Locking - Pressing the button locks the the passenger compartment, e.g. in the driver’s replaced. A new key tag can be ordered from an doors and the tailgate and also arms the pocket or in the cup holder in the tunnel console, authorised Volvo workshop. alarm1. Press and hold to close all of the win- to be able to start the car. See the section "Star- dows and the panorama roof* simultane- ting the engine". Ordering additional keys ously. See the section "Locking/unlocking As an option, keyless locking/unlocking of doors The car is supplied with two remote control keys from the outside" and "Locking/unlocking and tailgate (Passive Entry*) is also available. The - one key tag is supplied if the car is equipped from the inside". with keyless locking/unlocking*. Additional keys key then has a range extending in a semicircle Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks can be ordered. A total of twelve keys can be the doors and tailgate and also disarms the

1 Option in certain markets.

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

alarm. A longer press opens all the windows NOTE NOTE simultaneously, also called Global opening2. See the section "Locking/unlocking from the Be aware of the risk of locking the remote When the remote control key is placed in the outside". control key/Key Tag in the car. cup holder, make sure that no other car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g. Tailgate A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car - Unlocks the tailgate only and mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) will be deactivated when the car is locked and disarms its alarm. On cars with power oper- are in the cup holder. Several car keys close the alarm is armed using another valid key or ated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto- to each other in the cup holder can cause Volvo On Call*. The deactivated key is reacti- matically when the button is held depressed. interference with each other. The tailgate is also closed with a long press - vated when the car is unlocked. acoustic warning signals sound. See the sec- Loss of a remote control key tion "Power operated tailgate". Interference If you lose a remote control key then a new one Panic function – Used to attract attention Remote control key functions for keyless starting can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised in an emergency. Press and hold the button and keyless locking/unlocking* can be disrupted Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within by electromagnetic fields and screening. remote control keys must be taken to the work- 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators shop. The code of the missing key must be and the horn. The function can be turned off NOTE erased from the system as a theft prevention with the same button once it has been active measure. for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the func- Avoid storing the remote control key close to tion switches off automatically after 3 metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g. The current number of keys registered to the car minutes. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers - can be checked in the centre display's top view. preferably no closer than 10-15 cm. Related information WARNING If there is still interference, use the remote con- • Remote control key range (p. 242) If anyone is left in the car, make sure the trol key blade and then place the key in the Detachable key blade (p. 254) power windows and sunroof are de-energised • by always taking the remote control key with backup reader to disarm the car. See section • Replacing the battery in the remote control you when you leave the car. "Locking/unlocking with the detachable key key (p. 261) blade". • Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 248) • Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 245) • Driver profiles (p. 179)

2 Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241 LOCKS AND ALARM

• Power operated tailgate* (p. 257) Remote control key range the button-less key Key Tag is used, a remote • Starting the car (p. 400) In order for the remote control key to work prop- control key must be within a semi-circular area of erly the key needs to be within a certain distance radius approx. 1.5 metres on the left or right- • Red Key - Restricted remote control key* from the car. hand side of the car or within a radius of approx. (p. 243) 1 metre from the tailgate (see image above). For manual use The remote control key's functions for e.g. lock- NOTE ing/unlocking that are activated by pressing on The remote control key functions may be dis- or have a range that extends approx. rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, 20 metres from the car. topographical conditions, etc. The car can If the car does not verify a button being pressed - always be locked/unlocked with the key move closer and try again. blade. For keyless use3 If the remote control key is removed from the car If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is running, the warning message Car key not found Removed from car is shown in the driver display and an acoustic reminder sounds when the last door is closed. The message extinguishes when the key is returned to the car, followed by a press of the right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last door is closed.

The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered Related information by the system's antennas. • Remote control key (p. 240) In order for the doors or tailgate to be locked and • Antenna locations for the start and lock sys- unlocked keylessly without pressing a button, or if tem (p. 244)

3 Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Red Key - Restricted remote control car - at least one must be a normal remote con- Speed reminder4 (On/Off): key* trol key. • Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-155 mph) A Red Key enables the car owner to set limits for The settings for Red Key are made by the user of • Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and certain car properties. The restrictions are the normal remote control key from the centre 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph) intended to promote safe driving of the car, e.g. display's top view; go to: Settings System Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) when it is loaned out. • Driver Profile Red Keys • Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6 Some of the car's driver support functions cannot Muted max. volume4 (On/Off): be deactivated by the user of a Red Key. • Setting at first use: On The restrictions are intended to act as measures Adaptive cruise control*: to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it • Setting at first use: Longest intervals feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young dri- See the section "Adaptive cruise control" for vers, valet parking or a workshop. The settings • more information cannot be changed by the person using a Red Key. Driver support functions Possible settings The following driver support functions will always be active for the user of a Red Key: The following settings can be made to apply for a Red Key: • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* - see section "Blind Spot Information" For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's Speed limiter (Speed Limiter)4 (On/Off): maximum speed, set speed reminders and deter- • Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph) • Lane assistance (LDW and LKA)* - see sec- mine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. tion "Lane assistance" In addition, some of the car's driver support sys- • Setting during first use is 120 km/h Distance warning* - see section "Distance tems will always be active. Other functions of the (75 mph) • warning" key are the same as those of a normal remote • Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) City Safety - see section "City Safety" control key. The driver display shows the symbol • One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a and message • Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - see section "Driver Alert Control" Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with restric- Red key Speed limitation cannot tions can be programmed and used for a single be exceeded. • Road Sign Information* - see section "Road Sign Information"

4 Option, only available with Red Key. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Related information Antenna locations for the start and WARNING • Remote control key (p. 240) lock system People with pacemaker operations should not • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock come closer than 22 cm to the keyless sys- system5 and therefore has a number of built-in • Distance Warning* (p. 293) tem's antennae with their pacemaker. This is antennas positioned at different locations in the to prevent interference between the pace- • Blind Spot Information* (p. 354) car. maker and the keyless system. • City Safety (p. 344) • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 368) Related information Remote control key (p. 240) • Driver Alert Control (p. 366) • Remote control key range (p. 242) • Road sign information* (p. 362) • • Driver profiles (p. 179)

Antenna locations. Under the cup holder in the front section of the tunnel console In the upper front section of the left-hand rear door6 In the upper front section of the right-hand rear door6 In the centre of the rear seat's backrest6

5 The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*). 6 Only in cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking/unlocking from the outside If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote making it more convenient to open the car if your The car is locked/unlocked from the outside control key, the battery may be discharged - in hands are full. For information on the system's using buttons on the remote control key or with which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with range, see the section "Remote control key the door or tailgate handles if the car is equip- the detachable key blade. See the section range". "Detachable key blade" for more information. ped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive The outside of the door handles contains a Entry)*. The tailgate can be operated via power recess for locking, while the inside contains a operation* and/or foot movement*. NOTE touch-sensitive surface for unlocking. The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure plate that Locking/unlocking Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt. is only used for unlocking. The buttons on the remote control key can be used to lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate simultaneously. NOTE It is possible to select different unlocking Be aware of the risk of locking the remote sequences, which can be found in the top view of control key/Key Tag in the car. the centre display. Go to Settings My Car A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car Locking Remote Unlock. will be deactivated when the car is locked and Then select Unlock All Doors or Driver Door the alarm is armed using another valid key or Only. Volvo On Call*. The deactivated key is reactivated when the car is unlocked. In order for the lock sequence to be activated, the driver's door must be closed. If any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then they are WARNING Recess on outside of door handles for locking. Touch- 7 locked. The alarm movement detector is only Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with- sensitive surface on the inside for unlocking. armed once they have been closed. out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to Touch-sensitive recess for locking The settings made for the Remote Unlock func- avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking tion also affect central unlocking via opening handles from the inside. For more information Keyless locking/unlocking* about how unlocking from the inside is affected, If the car is equipped with keyless locking/ see the section "Locking/unlocking from the unlocking*, it is sufficient to have the remote con- inside". trol key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag,

7 Option in certain markets. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| NOTE open when locking the car with a side door han- Remote Door Unlock (RDU) dle. It is possible to remotely unlock the car with the It is important that only one touch-sensitive Volvo On Call* app. surface is activated at a time. Gripping the – Touch the marked surface towards the rear handle while touching the lock surface risks on the outside of a door handle after the Related information door has been closed, or press the lock but- giving double commands. This means that the • Remote control key (p. 240) requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not ton on the bottom edge of the tailgate before Power operated tailgate* (p. 257) be executed, or will be executed with a delay. closing it. • > The lock indicator in the windscreen starts • Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 251) to flash to indicate the car is locked. To close all side windows and the panorama roof* • Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move- simultaneously - place a finger against the touch- Unlocking the doors and tailgate ment* (p. 259) sensitive recess on the outside of the door han- – Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised • Remote control key range (p. 242) pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to dle until all side windows and the panorama roof* • Detachable key blade (p. 254) are closed. unlock the car. Alarm (p. 267) > The lock indicator in the windscreen extin- • guishes to confirm the car is unlocked - open the doors or tailgate as usual. Unlocking sequences Different sequences for unlocking can be selected in the centre display's top view: Go to Settings My Car Locking Keyless Unlock and select All Doors or Single Door. Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate used for within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked unlocking only. automatically. This function prevents the car from Locking the doors and tailgate being left unlocked unintentionally. All side doors must be closed to be able to lock the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Indication on locking/unlocking the Indication on the instrument panel Indicator in the lock buttons car Lock buttons only in the front doors When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key, the direction indicators confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly performed. It is possible to adapt the indication for locking/unlocking. To adapt the indication, go to the centre display and then tap on Settings My Car Locking Locking and Unlocking Feedback. Exterior indication • The car's hazard warning flashers indicate locking by flashing and retracting the door The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel show the status of the alarm system. mirrors9. Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door. A long flash indicates that the car has been • The car's hazard warning flashers indicate An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button locked. When the car is locked, this will be indi- unlocking by two flashes and extending the of either front door indicates that all doors are cated by short, pulsating flashes. door mirrors9. locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extin- All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to guish in both doors. indicate the car is locked. If locking is performed with only the driver's door closed10, the car will be locked but indication will only occur after all doors, tailgate and bonnet have been closed.

9 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors. 10 Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*). }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| In all doors* Related information Locking/unlocking from the inside • Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 245) The doors and tailgate can be locked and • Approach light duration (p. 153) unlocked from inside using the central locking controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 159) • the rear doors each lock their own rear door. Central locking

Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door. An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button for one of the doors indicates that the door in question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its lamp will extinguish while the others will continue to illuminate. Locking/unlocking button with indicator lamp in the Selecting the function front door. Different options for indicating locking/unlocking – Press the button to lock and the but- can be set via the centre display. ton to unlock. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre Unlocking display. – Press the button to unlock all side doors 2. Press My Car Locking. and the tailgate. 3. Adjust settings under Locking and Unlocking Feedback. Read more about indication of locking/unlocking in section "Approach lighting" and "Adjusting the door mirrors".

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

A long press on the button opens all the side Locking Automatic locking windows simultaneously - also called global – Press the button - both front doors must The doors and tailgate are locked automatically opening11. be closed. when the car starts to move. Alternative unlocking method > All doors and the tailgate are locked. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. A long press on the button closes all side windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously. 2. Press My Car Locking. Lock button* rear doors 3. Select Auto Door Locking > The help text Doors and tailgate lock when the car moves is shown and the doors and tailgate are locked automatically. Related information • Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 245) • Indication on locking/unlocking the car Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the front (p. 247) door. – Pull the opening handle on one of the front doors and release. > If the Unlock All Doors option is Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door. selected for the Remote Unlock function The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec- for the remote control key, all doors will be tive rear door. unlocked. If the Driver Door Only option To unlock the rear door: is selected, only the individual front door will be unlocked and opened. – Pull the door handle - the rear door unlocks and opens. For more information about Remote Unlock, see the section "Locking/unlocking from the outside".

11 Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249 LOCKS AND ALARM

Deadlocks deactivated immediately, but when deadlocks are • Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 248) Deadlocks means that all door handles are temporarily deactivated, they will be active for a • Locking/unlocking with the detachable key mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors maximum of 10 minutes after locking. blade (p. 255) being opened from the inside. Temporary deactivation can be done performed • Alarm (p. 267) via the centre display's top view, select: Deadlocks are activated with the remote control key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*. Settings My Car Locking Reduced Deadlocks are activated with a delay of about Guard. 10 seconds after the doors have locked. This can also be done from the centre display's function view by pressing Reduced guard. NOTE Reduced Guard is then shown in the centre If a door is opened within the delay time then display. Deadlocks are temporarily deactivated the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is the next time the car is locked. If the car is deactivated. unlocked and then locked again, deadlocks must be temporarily deactivated again. Note that the The car can only be unlocked with the remote alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are control key, keyless unlocking or Volvo On Call switched off at the same time. (VOC)* mobile app when deadlocks are activated. The system is reset the next time the engine is The front left door can also be unlocked with the started. detachable key blade. NOTE WARNING Remember that the alarm is activated Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with- • out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to when the car is locked. avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. • If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered. Temporary deactivation If someone is going to stay in the car but the Related information doors must be locked from the outside, then • Remote control key (p. 240) deadlocks can be temporarily switched off. In Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 245) conventional locking, the electrical sockets are •

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking/unlocking the tailgate 1. Press the remote control key's button. Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* The tailgate can be locked/unlocked and > The lock and alarm indicator on the instru- opened in different ways depending on the ment panel extinguishes in order to show equipment level of the car. that the alarm is not armed for the whole of the car. Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key The alarm's level and movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected. The tailgate is unlocked, but remains closed while the doors remain locked and their alarm functions armed. To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle Rubber plate with pressure-sensitive surface. and open the tailgate. The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock. You simply need to have the remote control key If the tailgate is not opened within in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag. 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed. 1. To open the tailgate - lightly press on the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tail- The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed and the tail- 2. With the power operated tailgate* option gate unlocked by using the remote control key's gate handle. button. Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the > The lock is released. There are two different ways to unlock the tail- remote control key's button gate > The tailgate is unlocked and opened, NOTE while the doors remain locked and their If the remote key is not detected sufficiently alarm functions armed. close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will not work. See the section "Remote key range" for more information.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| 2. Lift by the outside handle in order to fully Unlocking from the inside of the car Related information open the tailgate. • Remote control key (p. 240) • Power operated tailgate* (p. 257) IMPORTANT • Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move- • Minimal force is required to release the ment* (p. 259) rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel. • Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel.

To unlock the tailgate: WARNING 1. Brief press on the button on the instrument panel. Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car > The tailgate can be unlocked and opened through the cargo area. from the outside by grasping the rubberised pressure plate. 2. Plus with the power operated tailgate option Long press on the button on the instrument panel. > The tailgate opens. Locking with the remote control key – Press the remote control key's button. > The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash - alarm is armed.

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Activate/deactivate private locking If the system has been reset then the above pro- Deactivate private locking The glovebox and tailgate can be locked, so- cedure needs to be repeated. 1. The function can be deactivated from the called private locking, e.g. when the car is taken The security code can be used to deactivate pri- function view or the settings view: in for service, left at a hotel or similar. vate locking if the selected PIN code has been • Press the Private Locking button in the lost or forgotten. If the wrong PIN code is function view in the centre display. NOTE entered three times in a row then an error mes- • Press Settings in the top view in the cen- sage is shown and the security code needs to be The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a My Car Locking entered to deactivate private locking. tre display. Press . minimum for the private locking function to be Select Private Locking. activated. Activate private locking > A pop-up window is shown. 1. The function can be activated from the func- 2. Enter the code that was used for locking and Enter security code tion view or the settings view: Confirm A security code needs to be selected the first tap on . Press the Private Locking button in the time the function is used. The security code acts • > The glovebox and the tailgate are function view in the centre display. as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN codes set unlocked. Unlocking is confirmed by the for the private locking function. Save the security • Press Settings in the top view in the cen- green indication at the button in the func- code in a safe place. tre display. Press My Car Locking. tion view disappearing and the tick disap- Private Locking pearing from the private locking box in the 1. The security code can be activated from the Select . settings view. function view or the settings view: > A pop-up window is shown. • Press the Private Locking button in the 2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock NOTE function view in the centre display. the glovebox and tailgate after locking and tap on Confirm. If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if • Press Settings in the top view in the cen- the wrong PIN code has been entered more > The glovebox and the tailgate are locked. tre display. Press My Car Locking. than three times, the security code can be Locking is confirmed by a green indication Select Private Locking. used to deactivate the private locking. at the button in the function view and the > A pop-up window is shown. private locking box being ticked in the set- 2. Enter the desired security code tings view. NOTE > The security code is saved. The private Is private locking is activated and the car is locking function is now ready to be acti- unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On vated. Call* mobile app, private locking will be deactivated automatically. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Related information Detachable key blade Detaching the key blade • Using the glovebox (p. 229) The remote control key contains a detachable • Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 251) key blade of metal with which a number of functions can be activated and some operations carried out.

The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades. The key blade's application areas Using the remote control key's detachable key Hold the remote control key with the blade: front visible and the Volvo logo facing the • the left-hand13 front door can be opened right way - slide the button at bottom edge manually if central locking cannot be acti- by the key ring to the right. Guide the front vated with the remote control key. side's shell a few millimetres upwards. • all doors are emergency locked - see the The shell will then come free and can be section "Locking/unlocking with detachable lifted off the key. key blade". • the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated/deactivated - see the section "Child safety locks". The button-less key14 (Key Tag) does not have a detachable key blade. If necessary, use the detachable key blade from the normal remote control key.

Detach the key blade by angling it up.

13 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive. 14 Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking/unlocking with the 5. Pull out the handle. detachable key blade > The door opens. Amongst other things, the detachable key blade Locking will be performed in the same way, but can be used to unlock the car from the outside - with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of e.g. if the remote control key's battery has clockwise in step (3). become discharged. Unlocking

Return the key blade to its intended position in the remote control key after use. Refit the shell and slide it back. > A click will indicate that the shell is properly positioned and engaged. Related information • Locking/unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 255) Pull out the front door handle on the left- 15 • Child safety locks (p. 265) hand side to its end position so that the lock cylinder become visible. • Remote control key (p. 240) Insert the key in the lock cylinder.

Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key blade is pointing straight back. Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting position. Remove the key from the lock cylinder and release the handle so that the rear section of the handle is resting against the car again.

15 This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive. }}

255 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| NOTE The left-hand front door can be locked with its The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock lock cylinder and the detachable key blade. button on the remote control key or with the cen- When the door is unlocked using the key tral locking button on the driver's door. blade and is then opened, the alarm is trig- Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead gered. have a lock switch on the end of each door which NOTE must be depressed using the key blade - they are then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent • A door's lock reset only locks that partic- them being opened from outside. ular door - not all doors simultaneously. The doors can still be opened from the inside. • A manually locked rear door with activated manual or electric child safety locks cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside. A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking button.

The backup reader's location in the tunnel console. Related information Deactivate the alarm as follows: • Detachable key blade (p. 254) 1. Place the remote control key in the backup reader in the bottom of the cup holder in the tunnel console. 2. Then turn the start knob to START and Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the release it. child safety locks. > The control automatically returns to its – Remove the detachable key blade from the starting position - the alarm signal stops remote control key. Insert the key blade in and the alarm switches off. the hole for lock reset and press the key in until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm. Locking The door can be opened from both the out- It is also possible to lock the car with the remote side and the inside. control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the event of a loss of power or if the key's battery The door is blocked against opening from has become discharged. the outside. To return to position A, the inner door handle must be opened.

256 LOCKS AND ALARM

Power operated tailgate* Choose one of the following options to open the The car's tailgate can be opened/closed electri- tailgate: cally. • Light press on the tailgate handle. Opening/closing via a foot movement is also • Long press on the instrument panel's available as an extended option - see the section button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate "Opening/closing the power operated tailgate starts to open. with foot movement" for more information. • Long press on the remote control key's Opening button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate The tailgate can be opened with its handle, with starts to open. foot movement*, a button on the instrument Closing panel or the remote control key. The tailgate can be closed via the instrument Button for closing and locking on the underside of the panel's button, with foot movement*, with the tailgate. 16 remote control key or the buttons along the – Press the button16 on the underside of bottom edge of the tailgate. the tailgate to close. Choose one of the following options to close the > The tailgate closes automatically - the tail- tailgate. gate remains unlocked. – Long press on the instrument panel's NOTE button or the remote control key's button. The button is active 24 hours after the hatch > The tailgate closes automatically and has been left open. Thereafter, it must be acoustic signals sound - the tailgate closed manually. remains unlocked. Opening/closing button on the instrument panel.

16 Cars with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*) have one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| – Press the button16 on the underside of Cancel opening/closing 2. Press the button on the underside of the tailgate to close it and simultaneously – There are five ways to cancel opening/clos- the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be ing: > Two short acoustic signals sound to indi- closed for locking). • Press the button on the instrument panel. cate that the set position has been saved. > The tailgate closes automatically - the tail- • Press the remote control key's button. To reset max. opening: gate and doors are locked and the 16 alarm17 is armed. • Press the close button along the bottom – Manually move the tailgate to its highest edge of the tailgate. possible position - press the button on NOTE • Press the rubberised pressure plate the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. beneath the outside handle. > Two acoustic signals sound to indicate If the remote key is not detected sufficiently that the set position has been cleared. close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will • Using the foot movement* (see section The tailgate will then assume its max. not work. See the section "Remote key "Opening/closing power operated tailgate position when opened. range" for more information. with foot movement" for more information). > Tailgate movement will be interrupted and NOTE NOTE the tailgate will stop and can then be • If the system has been operating continu- When using key-free* blocking/closing, three manoeuvred manually. ously for a long time, it is switched off to signals will sound if the key is not detected Programmable max. opening avoid overload. It can be used again after sufficiently close to the tailgate. See the sec- about 2 minutes. The maximum opening position of the tailgate tions "Remote key range" and "Locks and can be adjusted, e.g. to suit a low ceiling height in remote keys" for more information. a garage. Pinch protection If something with sufficient resistance prevents To adjust max. opening: the tailgate from opening/closing then the pinch IMPORTANT 1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open posi- protection is activated. tion. During manual tailgate operation, open or close it slowly. Do not use force to open/ close it if there is resistance. It may be damaged and stop working correctly.

16 Cars with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*) have one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. 17 Option in certain markets.

258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

• During opening - movement is interrupted, WARNING Opening/closing the tailgate with the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal foot movement* sounds. Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate. They are pre-ten- To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when • During closing - movement is interrupted, the sioned with high pressure and can cause your hands are occupied, it can be opened/ tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds injury if opened. closed by means of a forward kicking motion and the tailgate returns to the programmed under the rear bumper. max. position. Related information • Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move- WARNING ment* (p. 259) Observe the risk of trapping when opening/ • Remote control key range (p. 242) closing. Before starting opening/closing, check that there is nobody near to the tailgate as trapping may have serious consequences. Always operate the tailgate with caution.

Pre-tensioned springs

The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Operation ton(s)20 under the tailgate. For more information, see the section "Power operated tailgate". If several kicking motions take place without an approved remote control key being located behind the car, opening will not be possible until after a certain delay. Do not leave your foot positioned under the car during the kicking motion. This could cause activation to fail. Cancel opening/closing – Make one slow forward kicking motion when The sensor is positioned to the left of centre in the opening/closing is in progress in order to 18 bumper . Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area. stop the movement of the tailgate. One of the car's remote control keys must be Opening/closing The remote control key does not have to be in 19 within range behind the car in order for open- – Make one slow, forward kicking motion the vicinity of the car to cancel opening/closing. ing/closing to be possible. This also applies to an under the left part of the rear bumper. Then already unlocked car in order to avoid accidental take a step back. The bumper must not be NOTE opening e.g. in a car wash. touched. There is a risk of reduced function, or no > A short acoustic signal sounds when function, if the rear bumper is loaded with opening/closing is activated - the tailgate large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For is opened/closed. this reason, make sure you keep it clean. If the tailgate is on open position then it is always closed on activation via foot move- NOTE ment. Pay attention to the possibility that the sys- The tailgate can also be closed via the instrument tem may be activated in a car wash or similar panel's button, the remote control key or the but- if the remote key is within range.

18 If the car is equipped with skid plate/diffuser* then the detector is positioned out towards the left-hand corner of the bumper. 19 See the section "Remote control key range" for more information. 20 Only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry)*.

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

With the accessory skid plate/diffuser* Replacing the battery in the remote If the car is equipped with the skid plate/diffuser* control key accessory, then the detector is positioned out The battery in the remote control key needs to towards the left-hand corner of the bumper. be replaced when it has become discharged.

NOTE All batteries have a limited service life and must eventually be replaced (does not apply to Key Tag). The service life of the battery varies depending on how often the vehicle/key is used. Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area. The battery for the remote control key should be Related information replaced if: • Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 251) the information symbol illuminates and • Power operated tailgate* (p. 257) If the car is equipped with the skid plate/diffuser* the message Car key battery low accessory, then the detector is positioned out towards • Remote control key range (p. 242) See Owner's manual is shown in the the left-hand corner of the bumper. driver display To activate opening/closing with a foot move- and/or ment on a car equipped with the skid plate/ diffuser accessory, the kicking motion is made • the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the side of the car. from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.

NOTE Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| The battery in the button-less key21 (Key Tag) Opening and changing cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop.

IMPORTANT A discharged Key Tag must be handed over to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key must be deleted from the car since it is still possible to use it to start the car via back-up start. Move the button to the side and slide the Hold the remote control key with the back shell a few millimetres upwards. front visible and the Volvo logo facing the The shell will then come free and can be right way - slide the button at bottom edge lifted off the key. by the key ring to the right. Slide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards. The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.

21 This key is supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the bat- The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Install a new battery with the (+) side up. tery cover anticlockwise until the markings Then carefully prize loose the battery as illus- Avoid touching the remote control key's bat- meet at the OPEN text. trated. tery contacts with your fingers. Carefully lift away the cover by pressing Place the battery in the holder with the e.g. a fingernail into the recess. IMPORTANT edge down. Then slide the battery forwards Avoid touching new batteries and their con- so that it fastens under the two plastic Then prize the cover upwards. tact surfaces with your fingers as this may catches. impair their function. Press the battery down so that it fastens under the upper black plastic catch.

NOTE Use batteries with the designation CR2032, 3 V.

}}

263 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| NOTE Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub- section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.

Reposition the rear side's shell and press Turn the remote control key over and refit it down until a clicking sound can be heard. the front side's shell by pressing it down until a clicking sound can be heard. Then slide the shell back sedan. > A further click will indicate that the shell is Then slide the shell back sedan. properly positioned and securely attached. > A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached.

IMPORTANT Refit the cover and turn it clockwise until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text. Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis- posed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.

Related information • Remote control key (p. 240)

264 LOCKS AND ALARM

Immobiliser The following error message in the driver display Child safety locks The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection is related to the remote-controlled immobiliser The child safety locks prevent children from system that prevents an unauthorised person with tracking system: being able to open a rear door from the inside. from starting the car. There is an electric* and a manual lock. Symbol Message Specification The car can only be started with the correct Electric activation/deactivation* remote control key. Remotely The remote-con- The electric child safety locks can be activated/ immobilised trolled immobiliser The following error message in the driver display deactivated in all ignition positions higher than 0. with tracking sys- is related to the electronic immobiliser: Car not pos- Activation/deactivation can be performed up to tem is activated. sible to start 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided The car cannot be that no door is opened. See the section "Ignition Symbol Message Specification started. Contact position" for more information. Car key not Error reading the Volvo On Call found remote control key Service Centre. during starting - See place the key in the Related information Owner's cup holder near the • Remote control key (p. 240) manual key symbol and try • Remote control key range (p. 242) again.

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system22 The car is fitted with a system which makes it possible to track and locate the car and to remotely activate the immobiliser, which prevents Button for electric activation/deactivation. starting the engine. Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more information and assistance with 1. Start the engine or choose an ignition posi- 0 activating the system. tion higher than .

22 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| 2. Press the button in the driver's door control Symbol Message Specification The door is blocked against opening from panel. the inside. > The driver display shows the message Rear child Child safety The door can be opened from both the out- Rear child lock Activated and the but- lock Acti- locks are acti- side and the inside. ton's lamp illuminates - the locks are vated vated. active. NOTE Rear child Child safety When the electric child safety lock is active then lock Deacti- locks are deacti- • A door's knob control only blocks that the rear: vated vated. particular door - not both rear doors • windows can only be opened with the driver's simultaneously. door control panel Manual activation/deactivation • Cars with an electric child safety lock do • doors cannot be opened from inside. not have a manual child lock. To deactivate the locks: Related information – Press the button in the driver's door control Detachable key blade (p. 254) panel. • > The driver display shows the message • Ignition positions (p. 399) Rear child lock Deactivated and the button's lamp goes out - the locks are deactivated. The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off - if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown, the function will remain activated the next time the engine is Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man- started. ual door locks. – Use the remote control key's detachable key blade to turn the knob. For more information, see the section "Detachable key blade".

266 LOCKS AND ALARM

23 Alarm NOTE Deactivate the alarm The alarm alerts e.g. in the event of a break-in in Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows: The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the car. the event of movement in the passenger • press the remote control key's unlock button, When armed, the alarm is triggered if: compartment - air currents are also regis- • grip one of the door handles24 or tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure • a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened, the car is left with a window or the panoramic • plate24. • a movement is detected in the passenger roof* open or if the passenger compartment compartment (if fitted with a movement heater is used. Switching off a triggered alarm detector ), * To avoid this: Close the window/panoramic – Press the remote control key's unlock button • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with roof when leaving the car. If the car's inte- or set the car in ignition position I by turning a tilt detector*), grated parking heater (or a portable electric the ignition dial to START and then releas- • the starter battery's cable is disconnected or heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from ing. the air vents so that they are not pointing the siren is disconnected. • upwards into the passenger compartment. NOTE If there is a fault in the alarm system, Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used Remember that the alarm is activated the driver display shows the symbol - see the section further down in this article. • and the message Alarm system when the car is locked. failure Service required. In which Arming the alarm • If any of the doors are opened from the case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo Lock and arm the car alarm as follows: inside then the alarm is triggered. workshop is recommended. press the remote control key's lock button, • Alarm signals NOTE • touch in the marked area on the outside of When the alarm has been triggered, the following the door handle24 or Do not attempt to repair or alter components happens: in the alarm system yourself. Any such • push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the 24 • attempts may affect the terms of the insur- plate . alarm is switched off. ance. If the car is equipped with a power-operated tail- • The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes gate, the button on the underside of the tailgate or until the alarm is switched off. can also be used to lock the car and arm the car alarm.

23 Option in certain markets. 24 Only applies to cars with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*). }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified, To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if Automatic arming/rearming of the the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times25. a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on alarm28 a car train or car ferry - temporarily deactivate the Lock and alarm indicator Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car movement and tilt detectors. The procedure is being left with the alarm disarmed unintention- A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the the same as with the temporary disengaging of ally. alarm system's status: the deadlocks function. This can be done from the centre display's function view by pressing If the car is unlocked with the remote control key Reduced guard. (which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors For more information, see the section "Dead- or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then locks". the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time. Related information In certain markets, the alarm is re-armed auto- • Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm matically after a certain delay after the driver's (p. 268) door has been opened and closed without being • Disarming the alarm without working remote locked. control key (p. 269) Related information Deadlocks (p. 250) • • Alarm (p. 267) Disarming the alarm without working remote LED not lit – alarm not armed. • • control key (p. 269) • The LED flashes once every other second – alarm is armed. • After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED flashes rapidly for up to 30 seconds or until ignition position I has been selected by turning the ignition dial to START and releasing it - the alarm has been triggered. Reduced alarm level Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt detectors can be temporarily deactivated.

25 Applies to certain markets.

268 LOCKS AND ALARM

Disarming the alarm31 without • Detachable key blade (p. 254) working remote control key • Starting the car (p. 400) The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the remote control key's battery is dead.

1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade. > The alarm is triggered.

The backup reader's location in the cup holder. 2. Place the remote control key in the backup reader in the tunnel console's cup holder. 3. Turn the ignition dial to START and release. > The alarm is deactivated. Related information • Alarm (p. 267) • Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm (p. 268)

28 Option in certain markets. 31 Option in certain markets.

269 LOCKS AND ALARM

Type approval for the remote Lock system keyless start (Passive control key system Start) and keyless locking/unlocking Type approval for the remote control key system (Passive Entry*) can be read in the table.

CEM marking for the remote control key system. For supplementary type approval number, see the table below.

Country/Area Type approval Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250 Serbia P1614120100 Argentina CNC ID: C-14771

270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM

Country/Area Type approval Brazil MT-3245/2015

Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015 Malaysia RAAT/37A/0315/S(15-0663) Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396 Russia

The United Arab Emirates ER37847/15 DA0062437/11

For more information about type approval for the remote control key system, see support.volvocars.com. }}

271 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Remote control key Country/Area Type approval Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/104 Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015 Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015 Mexico IFETEL Marca: HUF Modelo (s): HUF8423 NOM-121-SCT1-2009 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. Oman

272 LOCKS AND ALARM

Country/Area Type approval Serbia

The United Arab Emi- rates

Key Tag Country/Area Type approval Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/107 Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015 Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015

}}

273 LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Country/Area Type approval Mexico IFETEL Marca: HUF Modelo (s): HUF8432 NOM-121-SCT1-2009 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. Oman

274 LOCKS AND ALARM

Country/Area Type approval Serbia

The United Arab Emi- rates

Related information • Remote control key (p. 240)

275

DRIVER SUPPORT DRIVER SUPPORT

Speed-dependent steering force Electronic stability control Active Yaw Control Speed related power steering causes the steer- Electronic stability control (Electronic Stability The function checks the driving and brake force ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the Control — ESC) helps the driver to avoid skid- of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv- ding and improves the car’s traction. car. ity. The activation of the ESC sys- Spin Control On motorways the steering feels firmer. When tem during braking may be The function prevents the driving wheels from parking and at low speed steering is light and noticed as a throbbing sound. spinning against the road surface during acceler- requires only a slight effort. The car may accelerate slower ation. than expected when the accel- Traction control system NOTE erator pedal is depressed. The function is active at low speed and transfers In certain situations the power steering may power from the driving wheel that is spinning to become too hot and then needs to be tempo- WARNING the one that is not. rarily cooled - during this time the power The stability system ESC is supplementary steering operates with reduced power and assistance - it cannot handle all situations in Engine Drag Control turning the steering wheel may then be per- all road conditions. Engine Drag Control (Engine Drag Control — EDC) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. ceived to be slightly heavier. The driver always bears responsibility that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable after shifting down or engine braking when driv- In parallel with the temporarily reduced steering in low gear on slippery road surfaces. ing assistance, the driver display shows a road traffic rules and regulations are followed. message. Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, The ESC system consists of the following func- amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to tions: steer the car. Change the steering force level* To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive • Active Yaw Control modes" section and see the description at the • Spin Control alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading Traction control system "Selectable drive modes". • • Engine Drag Control This setting is not accessible while the car is moving. • Trailer stability assist Related information • Drive modes (p. 410)

278 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Trailer stability assist*1 Sport mode for electronic stability – Tap on the ESC Sport Mode button in The function of trailer stability assist (Trailer control function view. Stability Assist - TSA) is to stabilise a car with Electronic stability control (Electronic Stability > Sport mode is activated/deactivated, a attached trailer in situations where snaking Control — ESC) helps the driver to avoid skid- green/grey indicator is displayed in the occurs. For more information, see the “Driving ding and improves the car’s traction. button. with a trailer” section. The ESC system is always activated — it cannot The driver display indicates Sport mode by displaying this symbol with a con- NOTE be switched off. However, the driver can select Sport mode, which allows for a more active driv- stant glow until the function is deacti- The TSA function is deactivated if sport mode ing experience. vated or the engine is switched off. The is activated. next time the engine is started, the ESC system In Sport mode the ESC system detects whether is back in its normal mode again. the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements Related information and cornering are more active than in normal Limitations for Sport mode • Sport mode for electronic stability control driving and then allows a certain degree of con- The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be (p. 279) trolled skidding with the rear section before ESC selected when one of the functions from speed • Symbols and messages for electronic stabil- intervenes and stabilises the car. limiter, cruise control or adaptive cruise control is ity control (p. 280) For example, if the driver stops a controlled skid activated. • Roll Stability Control (p. 282) by releasing the accelerator pedal, the ESC sys- Related information • Driving with a trailer (p. 438) tem intervenes and stabilises the car. • Electronic stability control (p. 278) Sport mode also provides maximum traction if the • Speed limiter* (p. 282) car has become bogged down or is driving on a loose surface, such as sand or deep snow. • Cruise control (p. 289) • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) Select/deselect Sport mode The Sport mode is activated/ deactivated in the centre display's function view.

1 Trailer stability assist is included when installing the Volvo genuine towbar.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 279 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols and messages for Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver dis- electronic stability control play. A number of symbols and messages regarding The following table shows some examples. electronic stability control (Electronic Stability

Symbol Message Specification Constant glow for approx. 2 seconds. System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.

Constant glow. Sport mode is selected. NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode — it is partly reduced.

ESC ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactiva- Temporarily off ted automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC ESC system disengaged. Service required • Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again. • Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

280 DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information • Electronic stability control (p. 278) • Sport mode for electronic stability control (p. 279) • Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 112)

281 DRIVER SUPPORT

Roll Stability Control Speed limiter* The car's current speed Roll Stability Control (RSC) is a stabiliser sys- A speed limiter (Speed Limiter — SL) can be Stored maximum speed tem that minimises the risk of overturning, for regarded as a reverse cruise control — the example during sudden evasive manoeuvres or if driver regulates the speed using the accelerator the car skids. pedal but is prevented by the speed limiter from WARNING accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/preset The Speed Limiter is an aid and cannot deal The RSC system registers if and how much the maximum speed. car's lateral inclination changes. This information with all traffic, weather and road conditions. is used to calculate the risk of the car overturn- Overview The driver must always pay attention to traffic ing. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability con- conditions and take action when the Speed trol system engages, the engine torque is Limiter is not maintaining a suitable speed. reduced and one or more wheels are braked until The driver always has the ultimate responsibil- the car has regained its stability. ity for the car being driven safely and in accordance with applicable traffic rules and WARNING regulations, even when the Speed Limiter function is in use. Under normal driving conditions, the RSC system improves the car's road safety, but this must not be taken as a reason to increase Limitations speed. Always follow the normal precautions On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s for safe driving. braking effect may be inadequate and hence the stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this Speed Related information Buttons and symbols for functions2. case, the driver is alerted by the message limit exceeded in the driver display. • Electronic stability control (p. 278) Increase the stored maximum speed or reac- • Safety (p. 60) tivate the speed limiter and resume the stored maximum speed NOTE Activate the speed limiter and store the cur- A text message that the maximum speed is rent speed, or deactivate the speed limiter exceeded will be activated if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h Reduces stored maximum speed (approx. 2 mph). Marker for stored max speed

2 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

282 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Activating and starting the speed – With the symbol/function displayed, • Activating and starting the speed limiter limiter press the steering wheel button (2). (p. 283) The speed limiter function (Speed Limiter - SL) • Managing speed for the speed limiter must first be selected and activated in order to > The speed limiter starts and the current (p. 284) be able to regulate the speed. speed is stored as the maximum speed. • Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter Activate the speed limiter Related information (p. 284) • Speed limiter* (p. 282) • Switching off the speed limiter (p. 285) • Managing speed for the speed limiter • Automatic speed limiter* (p. 286) (p. 284) • Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter (p. 284) • Switching off the speed limiter (p. 285)

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. – Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the symbol/function (4). > The symbol is shown and the speed limiter can then be activated.

Start the speed limiter The lowest maximum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 283 DRIVER SUPPORT

Managing speed for the speed Related information Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter • Speed limiter* (p. 282) limiter The speed limiter (Speed Limiter - SL) can be • Activating and starting the speed limiter The speed limiter (Speed Limiter - SL) can be set to different speeds. (p. 283) temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later. • Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter (p. 284) • Switching off the speed limiter (p. 285)

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary – Change the stored maximum speed with depending on car model. short or long presses on the steering wheel Deactivate the speed limiter and set it button (1) or - (3): in standby mode • Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h – Press the steering wheel button (2). (+/- 5 mph) with each press. > The speed limit markings and symbols in • Hold the button depressed to adjust the driver display change colour from +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release WHITE to GREY - the speed limiter is now when the driver display's marking (4)/(6) temporarily deactivated and the driver can is at the desired speed. exceed the maximum speed setting. > The speed set after the last press is stored in the memory.

284 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Reactivating the speed limiter from 2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the Switching off the speed limiter standby mode temporary acceleration is finished. The speed limiter Speed Limiter — SL can be – Press the steering wheel button (1). > The car is then braked automatically deactivated. > The driver display's speed limit markings below the last stored maximum speed. change colour from GREY to WHITE - the Related information car's speed is then limited again by the • Speed limiter* (p. 282) last stored maximum speed. • Activating and starting the speed limiter or (p. 283) – Press the steering wheel button (2). • Managing speed for the speed limiter > The speed limiter indicators and symbols (p. 284) in the driver display change colour from • Switching off the speed limiter (p. 285) GREY to WHITE — the car will now apply its current speed as the maximum speed. Temporary increase in speed with the NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary accelerator pedal depending on car model. The speed limiter can also be temporarily overridden with the accelerator pedal without the speed 1. Press the steering wheel button (2). limiter being set in standby mode - e.g. to be able > The speed limiter is set in standby mode. to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation. In 2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶ which case, proceed as follows: (3) to change to another function. 1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and > The driver display's symbol and indicator release it so that acceleration is interrupted for speed limiter (4) are switched off - when the desired speed has been reached. which deletes the set/stored maximum > In this case, the speed limiter is still acti- speed. vated and the driver display's symbol is 3. therefore WHITE. Press the steering wheel button (2) again. > Another function is activated.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 285 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Related information Automatic speed limiter* Is SL or ASL active? • Speed limiter* (p. 282) The automatic speed limiter (Automatic Speed Symbols in the driver display show which speed • Activating and starting the speed limiter Limiter - ASL) function helps the driver to adapt limiter function is active: (p. 283) the car's maximum speed to the speed shown on the road signs. Symbol SL ASL • Managing speed for the speed limiter (p. 284) The speed limiter function (Speed Limiter — SL) • Deactivating/reactivating the speed limiter can be changed to automatic speed limiter. ✓ ✓ (p. 284) A The automatic speed limiter uses speed informa- ✓ tion from the Road Sign Information3 function to automatically adapt the car's maximum speed.

WARNING Sign symbolB after "70" = ASL is acti- The automatic speed limiter function is an aid, vated. and does not work in all driving situations, A VIT symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode. traffic, weather and road conditions. The driver B See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the mean- always bears responsibility for maintaining the ing of the symbol's colour. correct distance and speed, as well as when the automatic speed limiter is being used. Even if the driver clearly sees the speed-related road sign, the speed from the Road sign information function many be incorrect - in such cases the driver must intervene him/ herself and accelerate or brake to a suitable speed. See also the heading "Limitations for Road sign information".

3 Road Sign Information – RSI

286 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

The ASL symbol The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI3 func- Activating/deactivating the The sign symbol (displayed alongside tion can once again interpret and provide speed automatic speed limiter the stored speed, "70", in the centre of information to the ASL. The automatic speed limiter function (Automatic the speedometer) can be shown in See also the heading "Limitations for Road Sign Speed Limiter - ASL) can be activated and three colours with the following mean- Information". deactivated as a supplement to the speed limiter ings: (Speed Limiter - SL). Related information Colour of sign Meaning • Speed limiter* (p. 282) The function is activated/deac- symbol tivated in function view in the • Activating/deactivating the automatic speed centre display. Greenish yellow ASL is active limiter (p. 287) • Changing the tolerance for the Automatic Grey ASL has been set in speed limiter (p. 288) standby mode • Road sign information* (p. 362) Amber/Orange ASL is in temporary Activating the automatic speed limiter • Limitations for Road Sign Information* standby modeA 1. Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in (p. 366) function view. A For example, scanning of a sign failed. > ASL is set in standby mode, a green indi- Limitations of ASL cator appears on the button, and the Automatic speed limitation takes place using driver display shows a sign symbol in the centre of the speedometer. speed information from the RSI3 function - not from the speed limit road signs that the car 2. Press the steering wheel button . passes. > ASL is activated with the car’s current If RSI3 cannot interpret and provide speed infor- speed. mation to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the driver must intervene and brake to a suitable speed.

3 Road Sign Information – RSI }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 287 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Deactivating the automatic speed Changing the tolerance for the limiter Automatic speed limiter – Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in The speed limiter function (Automatic Speed function view. Limiter - ASL) can be set for different tolerance > ASL is deactivated and the button's indi- levels. cation becomes GREY - SL is activated It is possible to increase/decrease the signed instead. speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a signed speed limit of 75 km/h (45 mph) the WARNING driver can instead choose to allow the car to After switching from ASL to SL the car will no maintain 80 km/h (50 mph). longer follow the signed speed limit but only the maximum speed stored in memory. Buttons and symbols for functions.

Related information – Press the steering wheel button (1) until 75 km/h (45 mph) in the centre of the • Automatic speed limiter* (p. 286) speedometer (4) changes to 80 km/h • Changing the tolerance for the Automatic (50 mph). speed limiter (p. 288) > After which, the car uses the selected tolerance 5 km/h (5 mph) as long as signs passed are showing 75 km/h (45 mph). The tolerance is followed until a road sign with a lower or higher speed is passed - then the car follows the new signed speed limit instead and the tolerance is deleted from the memory. If the Road Sign Information* function is activated, the signed speed limit will then be shown with a RED indicator on the speedometer.

288 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the Cruise control In cars equipped with the adaptive cruise control speed setting is in the speed limiter. The cruise control (Cruise Control - CC) helps option, the driver can change between CC and the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in a ACC - see "Change between Cruise control and NOTE more relaxed driving on motorways and long, adaptive cruise control". straight roads in regular traffic flows. The maximum selectable tolerance is WARNING +/- 10 km/h (5 mph). Overview The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene Related information when the cruise control is not maintaining a • Automatic speed limiter* (p. 286) suitable speed and/or suitable distance. • Activating/deactivating the automatic speed The driver always bears ultimate responsibility limiter (p. 287) for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely. • Road sign information* (p. 362) • Managing speed for the speed limiter Related information (p. 284) • Activating and starting the Cruise control (p. 290) • Managing speed for the Cruise control (p. 290) Buttons and symbols for functions. • Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control Increase the stored speed or reactivate the (p. 291) Cruise control and resume the stored speed • Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 292) Activate the Cruise control and store the cur- • Change between Cruise control and adaptive rent speed, or deactivate the Cruise control cruise control* (p. 305) Reduces stored speed • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) Marker for stored speed

The car's current speed

Stored speed

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 289 DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating and starting the Cruise – Managing speed for the Cruise control With the symbol/function displayed, control press the steering wheel button (2). Cruise control function (Cruise Control - CC) The cruise control (Cruise Control - CC) can be must first be selected and activated in order to > Cruise Control starts and the current set to different speeds. be able to regulate the speed. speed becomes the stored speed.

NOTE Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph).

Related information • Cruise control (p. 289) • Managing speed for the Cruise control (p. 290) • Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control (p. 291) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary • Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 292) depending on car model. depending on car model. – Change the stored speed with short or long Active Cruise Control presses on steering wheel button (1) or – Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym- - (3): bol/function (4). • Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph) with each press. > The symbol is shown and the cruise control can then be activated. • Hold the button depressed to adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release Start Cruise Control when the driver display's marking (4)/(6) In order to start the Cruise control from the is at the desired speed. standby mode, the car's current speed must be > The speed set after the last press is 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed stored in the memory. that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).

290 DRIVER SUPPORT

If the driver increases the car’s speed using the • Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control Deactivating/reactivating the cruise accelerator pedal before pressing the steering (p. 291) control wheel button , the speed stored will be the • Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 292) The cruise control (Cruise Control - CC) can be car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi- temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at standby mode and can be reactivated later. the moment when the button is depressed. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Using engine braking instead of the foot brake With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less frequent application of the foot brake. On a downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable to start moving a little faster and limit the acceleration by engine braking. In this case the driver can temporarily disable foot brake application by NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. Cruise Control. – Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway Deactivate Cruise Control and set in down and release. standby mode > Cruise Control will disengage its auto- – Press the steering wheel button (2). matic foot braking and then uses engine > The speed limit markings and symbols in braking only. the driver display change colour from WHITE to GREY — Cruise Control is now Related information temporarily deactivated and the driver can • Cruise control (p. 289) temporarily exceed the set speed. • Activating and starting the Cruise control (p. 290)

}}

291 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Standby mode on driver intervention Reactivating cruise control from Deactivating Cruise Control The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and standby mode Cruise control Cruise Control — CC can be set in standby mode if: – Press the steering wheel button (1). deactivated. • the foot brake is used > The cruise control markings and symbols • the gear selector is moved to N position in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow the driver maintains a speed higher than the • the most recently stored speed again. stored speed for longer than 1 minute The driver must then control the speed himself/ or herself. – Press the steering wheel button (2). A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- > The cruise control markings and symbols tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect in the driver display change colour from the setting - the car returns to the last stored GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow speed when the accelerator pedal is released. the current speed. Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set NOTE Buttons and symbols for functions. in standby mode if: A marked speed increase may occur once the 1. Press the steering wheel button (2). • wheels lose traction speed has been resumed by pressing steer- > Cruise control is set in standby mode. ing wheel button . • engine speed is too low/high 2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶ • brake temperature is too high (3) to change to another function. Related information • speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph). > The driver display's symbol and indicator • Cruise control (p. 289) The driver must then control the speed himself/ for Cruise control (4) are switched off - Activating and starting the Cruise control herself. • which deletes the set/stored speed. (p. 290) 3. Press the steering wheel button (2) • Managing speed for the Cruise control again. (p. 290) > Another function is activated. • Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 292) In cars equipped with adaptive cruise control* it is possible to change between both cruise control

292 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT functions - see the heading "Change between Distance Warning* NOTE CC and ACC". The Distance Warning function (Distance Alert) Information on the windscreen may be diffi- warns the driver if the time interval to the vehicle Related information cult to see in strong sunlight and when wear- ahead becomes too short. • Cruise control (p. 289) ing sunglasses. • Activating and starting the Cruise control Distance warning is active at speeds (p. 290) above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to the NOTE vehicle ahead travelling in the same direction. No Managing speed for the Cruise control • distance information is provided for oncoming, Distance warning is deactivated during the (p. 290) slow or stationary vehicles. time the adaptive cruise control is active. • Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control (p. 291) WARNING • Change between Cruise control and adaptive cruise control* (p. 305) Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected.

Warning light for Distance Warning on the windscreen4. A warning light is visible on the windscreen and illuminates with a constant glow if the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value.

4 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 293 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Head-up display* Related information Activating and setting the time • Activating and setting the time interval for interval for Distance warning* Distance warning* (p. 294) The Distance warning (Distance Alert) function • Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 295) can be activated/deactivated and a time interval can be set. • Head-up display* (p. 115) • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) Activating/deactivating Distance warning The function is activated/deactivated in function view in the centre display.

Symbol for Distance Warning on the windscreen4. In cars equipped with head-up display, a symbol – Tap on the Distance Alert button in func- is shown on the windscreen for as long as the tion view. time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than > Distance warning is activated/deactivated, the preset value. However, this presupposes that a green/grey indicator is displayed in the the Show Driver Support In Head-Up Display button. function is activated via settings in the car's menu system; see the heading "Head-up display" Setting the time interval for Distance for how this works. warning Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected NOTE and shown in the driver display Information on the windscreen may be diffi- as 1-5 horizontal lines - the cult to see in strong sunlight and when wear- more lines the longer the time ing sunglasses. interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.

4 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

294 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

The same symbol is also shown when the adap- NOTE Limitations of Distance Warning* tive cruise control function is activated. The Distance warning (Distance Alert) function The higher the speed the longer the calcula- may have limitations in certain situations. ted distance in metres for a given time interval. NOTE The set time interval is also used by the Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- Adaptive Cruise Control function. tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sun- Only use the time intervals permitted by local glasses, could mean that the warning light in traffic regulations. the windscreen cannot be seen. Poor weather or winding roads could affect Related information the radar unit's capacity to detect vehicles in • Distance Warning* (p. 293) front. • Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 295) The size of other vehicles could also affect Control for time interval. • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This Decrease time interval could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting or that Increase time interval the warning is temporarily absent.

Distance indicator Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than – Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to that set due to limitations in sensor range. increase or decrease the time interval. > The distance indicator (3) shows the cur- NOTE rent time interval. The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limita- tions for radar unit" section.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 295 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Related information Adaptive cruise control* is clear again the car returns to the selected • Distance Warning* (p. 293) The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise speed. • Activating and setting the time interval for Control - ACC) helps the driver to maintain an Distance warning* (p. 294) even speed combined with a pre-selected time WARNING interval to the vehicle ahead. • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 333) The Adaptive cruise control is an aid, which cannot handle all traffic, weather and road An adaptive cruise control provides a more relax- conditions. ing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traf- The driver must always be observant with fic flows. regard to the prevailing traffic conditions and intervene if the Adaptive cruise control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable time interval. Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before the function is used. The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct time interval and speed - even when the Adaptive cruise control is being used.

The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the Adaptive cruise control regulates the speed with vehicle ahead5. acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being The driver selects the desired speed and a time used to adjust the speed. interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the The adaptive cruise control aims to control the car, the speed is adapted automatically via the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road sudden braking the driver must brake himself/ herself. This applies in case of large speed differ-

5 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

296 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT ences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. IMPORTANT Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead Due to the limitations of the radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all. Maintenance of adaptive cruise control com- Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead ponents must only be performed at a work- The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval ommended. and is following a target vehicle at the preset set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any time interval vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead the speed set and stored by the driver. This also Overview takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead Controls In cars equipped with the adaptive cruise control increases and exceeds the stored speed. option, the driver can change between CC and ACC - see "Change between Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle adaptive cruise control". at speed from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).

WARNING Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front. The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles

such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low 5 trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles Buttons and symbols for functions . and objects. Increases stored speed or reactivates the Do not use the Adaptive cruise control, for adaptive cruise control and resumes stored example, in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery speed and time interval surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the Activate the adaptive cruise control and store road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on the current speed or deactivate the adaptive winding roads or on slip roads. cruise control Reduces stored speed

5 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

297 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Driver display Collision risk warning WARNING The adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles which its radar unit has detected - hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Do not wait for a warning without braking when so required.

Head-up display*

Indication of speeds5. Warning light for collision warning on the windscreen5. Stored speed Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be Speed of vehicle ahead. braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise Current speed of your car. control is capable of and the driver does not brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are To see different combinations of symbols activated to alert the driver that immediate inter- depending on traffic situation - see the heading vention is required. Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen5. "Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise control". NOTE In cars equipped with a head-up display, the warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing Information on the windscreen may be diffi- symbol. cult to see in strong sunlight and when wearing sunglasses. NOTE Information on the windscreen may be difficult to see in strong sunlight and when wearing sunglasses.

5 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

298 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Activating and starting the adaptive Start Adaptive Cruise Control • Activating and starting the adaptive cruise cruise control* In order to start the ACC the following require- control* (p. 299) The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise ments apply: • Managing the speed of the adaptive cruise Control - ACC) must first be activated and then • The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and control* (p. 300) started if it is to control the speed and distance. the driver's door must be closed. • Setting the time interval for the adaptive • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") cruise control* (p. 300) within reasonable distance in front of the car, • Change of target and automatic braking with or the current speed must be at least the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 304) 15 km/h (9 mph). • Change between Cruise control and adaptive – With the symbol/function displayed - cruise control* (p. 305) press the steering wheel button (1). • Overtaking assistance with the adaptive > Adaptive cruise control starts and the cur- cruise control* or Pilot Assist-2* (p. 303) rent speed is stored, which is shown in • Deactivating/activating the adaptive cruise figures in the centre of the speedometer. control* (p. 301) The time interval is only • Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* adjusted to the vehicle ahead (p. 305) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary by the ACC when the distance depending on car model. symbol shows two vehicles. • Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise control* (p. 307) Activate Adaptive Cruise Control Immediately after the engine is started the Adap- • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) tive Cruise Control is in the standby mode. At the same time a speed • Distance Warning* (p. 293) – Press ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym- range is marked. Head-up display* (p. 115) • bol/function (4). The higher speed is the Limitations of the radar unit (p. 333) • > The symbol is displayed and Adaptive stored/selected speed and the Cruise Control is set in standby mode. lower speed is that of the vehicle ahead (target vehicle). Related information • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 299 DRIVER SUPPORT

Managing the speed of the adaptive If the driver increases the car’s speed using the Setting the time interval for the cruise control* accelerator pedal before pressing the steering adaptive cruise control* The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise wheel button , the speed stored will be the The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control -ACC) can be set to different speeds. car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi- Control -ACC) can be set to different time inter- ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at vals. the moment when the button is depressed. Different time intervals to the A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- vehicle in front can be selected tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect and shown in the driver display the setting - the car returns to the last stored as 1-5 horizontal lines - the speed when the accelerator pedal is released. more lines the longer the time Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle interval. One line represents at speed from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h about 1 second to the vehicle (125 mph). in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds. Note that the lowest programmable speed for the The same symbol is also shown when the Dis- adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - tance Warning function is activated. even though it is capable of following another NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than depending on car model. NOTE 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored. – Change the stored speed with short or long When the symbol in the driver display shows Maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front presses on steering wheel button (1) or (125 mph). at a pre-set time interval. - (3): When only one car is shown, there is no vehi- Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h Related information • cle within a reasonable distance ahead. (+/- 5 mph) with each press. • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) • Hold the button depressed to adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release when the driver display's marking (4) is at the desired speed. > The speed set after the last press is stored in the memory.

300 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

NOTE Deactivating/activating the adaptive cruise control* Only use the time intervals permitted by local The adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise traffic regulations. Control - ACC) can be temporarily deactivated If the adaptive cruise control does not appear so that it is set in the standby mode and can to react when activated, this may be because later be reactivated. the time distance to the vehicle in front is preventing an increase in speed. Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and The higher the speed the longer the calcula- set it in standby mode ted distance in metres for a given time interval.

Control for time interval. Decrease time interval Related information • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) Increase time interval • Managing the speed of the adaptive cruise Distance indicator control* (p. 300) • Distance Warning* (p. 293) – Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval. > The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter- depending on car model. val to vary significantly in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly. Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen problem should arise. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 301 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control the setting - the car returns to the last stored Reactivating adaptive cruise control and set it in standby mode: speed when the accelerator pedal is released. from standby mode – Press the steering wheel button (2). Automatic standby mode Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other > The symbol on the driver display systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC. If any changes colour from WHITE to GREY and of these systems stops working, adaptive cruise the stored speed in the centre of the control is switched off automatically. speedometer changes from BEIGE to GREY. In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and a message is shown in the driver dis- In standby mode, the driver must him/herself play. The driver must then intervene and adapt control both speed and distance. the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. When the adaptive cruise control is in standby Automatic deactivation may occur if: mode and the car drives too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned about the short dis- • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary tance by the Distance Warning function instead depending on car model. (see reference to the heading "Distance Warn- stationary vehicle or an object, such as a ing" at the end of this section). speed bump. To reactivate ACC from standby mode: Standby mode on driver intervention • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the – Press the steering wheel button (1). vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no The adaptive cruise control is temporarily deacti- > The speed is then set to the most recently longer has a vehicle to follow. vated and set in standby mode if: stored speed. • the driver opens the door • the foot brake is used • the driver takes off the seatbelt NOTE • the gear selector is moved to N position • engine speed is too low/high A marked speed increase may occur once the the driver maintains a speed higher than the • speed has been resumed by pressing steer- stored speed for longer than 1 minute. • wheels lose traction ing wheel button . In this situation, the driver must intervene and • brake temperature is high adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle • the parking brake is applied Related information ahead. • the radar unit is covered by e.g. wet snow or Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio waves are • tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect blocked). • Distance Warning* (p. 293)

302 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Overtaking assistance with the Starting Overtaking Assistance Some situations should be avoided for this rea- adaptive cruise control* or The following conditions must exist for Overtak- son. Examples of such situations are: Pilot Assist-2* ing Assistance to be activated: • the car is approaching an exit road in order Adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control • there must be a vehicle in front (the “target to turn off in the same direction that is nor- - ACC) or Pilot Assist can assist the driver when vehicle”) mally used for overtaking overtaking other vehicles. • the speed must be at least 70 km/h • the vehicle in front slows before your car has When ACC or Pilot Assist is following another (43 mph) entered the overtaking lane vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to • the stored speed for ACC or Pilot Assist • traffic in the overtaking lane is slowing 6 overtake by activating the direction indicator , must be high enough for overtaking to take • a car designed for right-hand traffic is being adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist helps by place safely. driven in a country with left-hand traffic (or accelerating the car towards the vehicle ahead – Activate the direction indicator. vice versa) before the car reaches the overtaking lane. Use the left direction indicator in a car with Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo- The function then delays reducing speed in order the steering wheel on the left, or the right rarily setting ACC or Pilot Assist in standby mode. to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car direction indicator in a car with the steering Related information is approaching a slower vehicle. wheel on the right. • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) The function remains active until the driver’s vehi- > Overtaking assistance is started. cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle. • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 318) Limitations • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) WARNING When using Overtaking Assistance the driver should be prepared for sudden changes in condi- Be aware that this function can be activated tions. In some conditions Overtaking Assistance in more situations other than during overtak- can cause unwanted acceleration. ing, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road - the car will then accelerate briefly.

6 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 303 DRIVER SUPPORT

Change of target and automatic WARNING control is set in standby mode with automatic braking with the Adaptive Cruise braking. Control When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of – The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in In combination with automatic gearbox, the approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is one of the following ways: adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary - ACC ) has functionality for change of target vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore • Press the steering wheel button . and braking at certain speeds. the stationary vehicle and instead select the • Depress the accelerator pedal. stored speed. Change of target > The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes fol- • The driver must then intervene him/ lowing the vehicle ahead if it starts mov- herself and brake. ing forward within 6 seconds.

Automatic standby mode with change of NOTE target ACC can keep the car stationary for a maxi- The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set mum of 5 minutes. After this the parking in standby mode: brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) disengaged. and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain The parking brake must be released before whether the target object is a stationary vehi- If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated. may be stationary traffic in front. cle or some other object, such as a speed When the adaptive cruise control is following bump. another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) (20 mph) and the target is changed from a mov- and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adap- ing vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to cruise control will brake for the stationary vehicle. follow. Automatic braking For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise

304 DRIVER SUPPORT

Cessation of automatic braking Limitations of the adaptive cruise Change between Cruise control and In some situations, automatic braking ceases on control* adaptive cruise control* reaching 0 km/h and Adaptive Cruise Control is The (Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC) may have In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) the set in standby mode. This means that the brakes limitations in certain situations. driver can change between Cruise Control (CC) are released and the car may start to roll - the and ACC. driver must therefore intervene and brake the car Steep roads and/or heavy load himself/herself to keep it stationary. Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise primarily intended for use when driving on level control is active: This may take place in the following situations: road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in CC ACC • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake keeping the correct distance from the vehicle pedal ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control • the parking brake is applied which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake. Do not use the adaptive cruise control with a A A the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi- • heavy load or with a trailer connected to the car. tion Cruise control Adaptive cruise control • the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in Miscellaneous A VIT symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode the standby mode. • Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected Changing from ACC to CC Automatic activation of parking brake when the adaptive cruise control is activated. How to change from Adaptive Cruise Control In certain situations the parking brake is applied (ACC) to Cruise Control (CC): to keep the car stationary. NOTE 1. Set adaptive cruise control in standby mode This takes place if the adaptive cruise control is The function uses the car's radar unit, which holding the car stationary with the foot brake and: has some general limitations, see the "Limita- using the steering wheel button. tions for radar unit" section. • the driver opens the door or takes off his/her 2. Tap on the Cruise control button in func- seatbelt tion view. Related information • ACC has kept the car stationary for more > The symbol in the driver display changes • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) than approx. 5 minutes from ACC to CC. Adap- • the brakes have overheated • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 333) tive Cruise Control (ACC) is now switched • the engine is switched off. off and Cruise Control (CC) is set in standby mode. Related information • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 305 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 3. Press the steering wheel button . Related information > Cruise control starts and stores the cur- • Cruise control (p. 289) rent speed. • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296)

WARNING The car no longer brakes automatically after switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows the set speed.

If CC is active when the engine is switched off, ACC will be activated the next time the engine is started. Changing from CC to ACC Proceed as follows to change from cruise control (CC) to adaptive cruise control (ACC): 1. Set cruise control in standby mode using the steering wheel button. 2. Tap on the Adaptive cruise button in function view. > The symbol in the driver display changes from CC to ACC. Adap- tive Cruise Control is set in standby mode. 3. Press the steering wheel button . > Adaptive cruise control starts and stores the current speed, together with the preset distance to the vehicle in front.

306 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols and messages for the The previous illustration8 shows that the adaptive adaptive cruise control* cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h and A number of symbols and messages regarding that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. the adaptive cruise control (Adaptive Cruise Control - ACC) can be shown via the driver display and/or the head-up display*.

Here are some examples7.

The previous illustration8 shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h and at the same time follow the vehicle ahead that is keeping the same speed.

Symbol Message Specification The symbol is WHITE The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed.

Unavailable and the symbol is GREY Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.

7 In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h. 8 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 307 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Symbol Message Specification Adaptive cruise The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo Service required workshop is recommended.

Windscreen sensor Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

Related information • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) • Road sign information* (p. 362)

308 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Pilot Assist* Pilot Assist-1* using the camera and radar unit. The preset time Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car interval is maintained with automatic speed between the road lane whilst at the same time between the road lane whilst at the same time adjustment whilst the steering assistance helps maintaining a preselected time interval to the maintaining a preselected time interval to the to position the car in the lane. preceding vehicle. preceding vehicle. Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into account the speed of the preceding car and the There are two different variants of the Pilot Pilot Assist provides more comfortable driving in lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore Assist function available - Pilot Assist-1 and slow traffic - up to 50 km/h (30 mph) - on the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and Pilot Assist-2. Verify here which variant is in motorways and main roads. your car. steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or avoid an obstruction on the road. Pilot Assist-1 If the camera and radar unit does not sense the Cars with Pilot Assist-1 have lane markings or a preceding vehicle, Pilot Assist this symbol in the driver display is set in the standby mode. for this function. When Pilot Assist is in the standby mode and the car comes too close to a preceding vehicle, the driver is instead warned by the Distance warning for the short distance (refer to Distance warning Pilot Assist-2 at the end of this section). Cars with Pilot Assist-2 have this symbol in the driver display for this function. Function overview9. Camera and radar unit

Distance readers Related information Readers, side markings Pilot Assist-1* (p. 309) • The driver sets the desired time interval to the • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 318) vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's side markings

9 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 309 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the Overview limitations of the camera and radar unit, braking Controls Pilot Assist is an aid which cannot handle all may come unexpectedly or not at all. traffic, weather and road conditions. The stored speed for the Pilot Assist is pre- The driver must always be observant with • regard to the prevailing traffic conditions and set to 50 km/h (30 mph) and cannot be intervene if Pilot Assist does not provide suit- adjusted - if the speed of the preceding vehi- able steering assistance or maintain a suita- cle increases to more than 50 km/h ble speed or suitable time interval. (30 mph) and is no longer within a reasona- Read all the sections about this function in ble distance, Pilot Assist is set to standby the owner's manual in order to learn about its mode. limitations, of which the driver should be aware before the function is used. WARNING Pilot Assist must only be used if there are Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance sys- clear lane lines painted on the road surface tem. The driver must intervene if the system on each side of the lane. All other use does not detect a vehicle in front. Buttons and symbols for functions9. involves increased risk of contact with surrounding obstacles that are not detected by Pilot Assist does not brake for people, ani- Reactivates Pilot Assist from automatic brak- the function. mals, objects, small vehicles (e.g. cycles and ing at a standstill motorcycles), low trailers as well as oncoming, Activates/deactivates Pilot Assist The driver always bears responsibility for how slow or stationary vehicles. the car is controlled as well as for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when Do not use Pilot Assist, for example, in city Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive cruise Pilot Assist is being used. traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery control surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the No function road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration winding roads or on slip roads. and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a Increases the distance to vehicles ahead low sound when Pilot Assist uses them. IMPORTANT Switches from adaptive cruise control to Pilot Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed Assist smoothly. In situations that demand sudden brak- Maintenance of Pilot Assist components must Reduces the distance to vehicles ahead ing the driver must brake himself/herself. This only be performed at a workshop - an author- applies in case of large speed differences or if ised Volvo workshop is recommended. Function symbol

9 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

310 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols for target vehicle and time interval Collision risk warning Head-up display* to vehicles ahead Driver display

Warning light9. A flashing symbol attracts the driver's attention9. Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's If the car is fitted with a head-up display the Indication of speeds. capacity. If the car needs to be braked more warning is displayed on the windscreen with a Stored speed heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the flashing symbol. driver does not brake, the warning lamp and Speed of vehicle ahead. acoustic warning from City Safety are activated to WARNING alert the driver that immediate intervention is Current speed of driver’s vehicle. required. Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles whose camera and radar unit has been detected - therefore a warning may not occur NOTE or be delayed. Do not wait for a warning without braking when so required. Information on the windscreen may be difficult to see in strong sunlight and when wearing sunglasses. Related information • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-1* (p. 312)

9 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 311 DRIVER SUPPORT

• Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-1 Activating and starting the Function availability is indicated (p. 313) Pilot Assist-1* by the colour of the symbol • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-1* Pilot Assist must first be activated and then (WHITE = available) when Pilot (p. 314) started to be able to control speed and distance Assist is selected. • Automatic braking with Pilot Assist-1 and to give steering assistance. Otherwise it is indicated by the (p. 315) colour of the right arrow next to the symbol - WHITE = available. • Limitations of Pilot Assist-1 (p. 316) A YELLOW symbol with a blinking WHITE arrow • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) indicates an imminent change to the standby • Distance Warning* (p. 293) mode. • Head-up display* (p. 115) With the adaptive cruise control in the standby • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 333) mode: • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) 1. Press ▶ (6). > The symbol changes to Pilot Assist in standby mode (8). 2. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary Press the steering wheel button (2). depending on car model. > Pilot Assist is started. In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that: ...or... • There is a vehicle ahead within a reasonable With the adaptive cruise control started: distance. – Press ▶ (6). The camera can "see" the lane lines. • > Pilot Assist is started. • The speed of your own car is less than 50 km/h (30 mph). Hands on the steering wheel In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver must have his/her hands on the steering wheel. The system continually monitors this. If hands are not detected on the steering wheel then a text message is shown, prompting the driver to

312 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT actively steer the car. If this does not take place, Setting the time interval for an acoustic warning signal is given. Pilot Assist-1 If the driver still does not place his or her hands Pilot Assist can be set with different time inter- on the wheel, Pilot Assist is deactivated. Pressing vals. the steering wheel button reactivates Pilot Different time intervals to the Assist. vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display NOTE as 1-5 horizontal lines - the Note that Pilot Assist only works when the more lines the longer the time driver has hands on the steering wheel. interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds. Related information Control for time interval. • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) The same symbol is also shown when the Dis- Decrease time interval tance Warning function is activated. • Pilot Assist-1* (p. 309) Increase time interval Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-1 • Distance indicator (p. 313) • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-1* – Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to (p. 314) increase or decrease the time interval. • Automatic braking with Pilot Assist-1 > The distance indicator (3) shows the cur- (p. 315) rent time interval. • Limitations of Pilot Assist-1 (p. 316) In order to follow the preceding car in a smooth and comfortable way Pilot Assist allows the time interval to noticeably vary. At low speed when the distance becomes short, Pilot Assist increases the time interval slightly. Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen problem should arise.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 313 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| NOTE Deactivating/activating the ...or... Pilot Assist-1* Only use the time intervals permitted by local – Press ◀ (3). Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so traffic regulations. > Pilot Assist is switched off and changes that it is set in the standby mode and can be to the adaptive cruise control in active If Pilot Assist does not appear to react when reactivated later. mode. activated, this may be because the time distance to the vehicle in front is preventing an Standby mode on driver intervention increase in speed. When the direction indicators or the accelerator pedal are being operated, Pilot Assist is tempo- The higher the speed the longer the calcula- rarily disabled and set in standby mode. When ted distance in metres for a given time inter- these conditions no longer apply, Pilot Assist is val. reactivated automatically. Related information Automatic reactivation from standby mode must take place within 1 minute - Pilot Assist must • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) thereafter be activated manually with the • Pilot Assist-1* (p. 309) steering wheel button. Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-1* • Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in (p. 312) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary standby mode if: • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-1* depending on car model. • the foot brake is used (p. 314) Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in • the gear selector is moved to N position. • Automatic braking with Pilot Assist-1 standby mode (p. 315) The driver does not then receive any control rec- 1. Press the steering wheel button (2). ommendation and must control both the speed • Limitations of Pilot Assist-1 (p. 316) > Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the and distance. Alternatively, the driver can man- symbol (8) in the driver display changes ually reactivate Pilot Assist with the steering colour from WHITE to GREY. wheel button. 2. Press ◀ (3). > Pilot Assist is switched off and changes to the Adaptive cruise control in standby mode.

314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Automatic standby mode Reactivating Pilot Assist from the Automatic braking with Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, such standby mode Pilot Assist-1 as the Electronic Stability Control system. If any Automatic braking with Pilot Assist works as fol- of these other systems ceases to function then lows. Pilot Assist is disengaged automatically. For shorter stops in connection with inching for- In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will ward in slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is sound and a message is shown in the driver dis- automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed play. The driver must then intervene and adapt about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead and car in front starts moving again then the Pilot the surrounding traffic. Assist is set in standby mode with automatic Automatic deactivation may occur if: braking. • the camera cannot "see" the lane lines – Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following • there is no vehicle within a reasonable dis- way: tance ahead NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. • Press the steering wheel button . • the driver's hands are not on the steering • Depress the accelerator pedal. wheel – Press the steering wheel button . > Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle > The speed is set to the latest stored - the • the driver takes off the seatbelt ahead if it starts moving forward within symbol (8) in the driver display changes 6 seconds. • engine speed is too low/high colour from GREY to WHITE. • wheels lose traction Related information NOTE • brake temperature is high • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) • the parking brake is applied Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a • Pilot Assist-1* (p. 309) maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking • the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-1* brake is applied and the function is disen- wet snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio gaged. waves are blocked). (p. 312) • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-1 Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the (p. 313) parking brake must be released. • Automatic braking with Pilot Assist-1 (p. 315) • Limitations of Pilot Assist-1 (p. 316) }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 315 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Cessation of automatic braking Related information Limitations of Pilot Assist-1 In some situations, automatic braking ceases on • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in • Pilot Assist-1* (p. 309) certain situations. standby mode. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-1* The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help must therefore intervene and brake the car him- (p. 312) the driver in many situations. But the driver is at self/herself to keep it stationary. • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-1 all times responsible for maintaining a safe dis- (p. 313) tance to surrounding objects and a correct posi- This may take place in the following situations: tion in the lane. Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-1* the driver puts his/her foot on the brake • • (p. 314) pedal • Limitations of Pilot Assist-1 (p. 316) • the parking brake is applied • the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R position • the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby mode. Automatic activation of parking brake In certain situations the parking brake is applied to keep the car stationary. This takes place if: • the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt • Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for more than approx. 5 minutes • the brakes have overheated • the engine is switched off.

316 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

IMPORTANT markings, with a subsequent risk of con- Miscellaneous tact between the car and such obstacles. • Off Road drive mode cannot be selected In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering The driver must ensure him/herself that when Pilot Assist is activated. assistance may have difficulty helping the the car is at a suitable distance from such driver in the right way or it may be automati- obstacles. NOTE cally deactivated - in which case, the use of The camera and radar sensor does not Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of • The function uses the car's camera unit, have the capacity to detect all oncoming such situations may be that: which has some general limitations, see the objects and obstacles in traffic environ- "Limitations for camera unit" section. • the lane markings are worn, missing or ments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles cross each other. or objects which completely or partially • lane division is unclear, for example, when block the route. NOTE the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, The function uses the car's radar unit, which the event of multiple sets of markings. animals, etc. has some general limitations, see the "Limita- • edges or other lines than lane markings • The recommended steering input is force tions for radar unit" section. are present on or near the road, e.g. limited, which means that it cannot curbs, joints or repairs to the road sur- always help the driver to steer and keep Related information face, edges of barriers, roadside edges or the car within the lane. Pilot Assist* (p. 309) strong shadows. • • Pilot Assist-1* (p. 309) • the lane is narrow or winding. The driver always has the possibility of correcting • the lane contains ridges or holes. or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-1* Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to (p. 312) weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, • the desired position. snow or fog or slush or impaired view • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-1 (p. 313) with poor light conditions, back-lighting, Steep roads and/or heavy load wet road surface etc. Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-1* The driver should also note that Pilot Assist intended for use when driving on level road surfa- (p. 314) has the following limitations: ces. The function may have difficulty in keeping • Automatic braking with Pilot Assist-1 the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when (p. 315) High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary • driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers, • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) be extra attentive and ready to brake. Do not use etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they Pilot Assist with a heavy load or with a trailer con- • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 333) may be detected incorrectly as lane nected to the car.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317 DRIVER SUPPORT

Pilot Assist-2* The driver selects the desired speed and a time The current status of steering Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans assistance is indicated by the between the lane's side markings using steering the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's colour of the steering wheel's assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, side markings on the road surface using the symbol: camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is combined with a preselected time interval to the • WHITE steering wheel indi- maintained with automatic speed adjustment vehicle ahead. cates active steering assis- whilst the steering assistance helps to position tance The Pilot Assist function gives more comfortable the car in the lane. driving and a more relaxed driving experience • GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indi- Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into during, for example, long journeys on motorways cates deactivated steering assistance. account the speed of the preceding car and the in even traffic flows. lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or avoid an obstruction on the road. If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambig- uously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist temporarily deactivates steering assistance, but resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again - although the speed and distance control functions remain active.

NOTE The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead and detects side markings10. Pilot Assist steering assistance is deactivated Camera and radar unit and is resumed without prior warning.

Distance readers

Readers, side markings

10 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

318 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING applies in case of large speed differences or if WARNING the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the Pilot Assist is an aid which cannot handle all limitations of the camera and radar unit, braking Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance sys- traffic, weather and road conditions. may come unexpectedly or not at all. tem. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front. The driver must always be observant with regard to the prevailing traffic conditions and Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in Pilot Assist does not brake for people, ani- intervene if Pilot Assist does not provide suit- the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. mals, objects, small vehicles (e.g. cycles and able steering assistance or maintain a suita- If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front motorcycles), low trailers as well as oncoming, ble speed or suitable time interval. then the car will instead maintain the speed set slow or stationary vehicles. Read all the sections about this function in and stored by the driver. This also takes place if Do not use Pilot Assist, for example, in city the owner's manual in order to learn about its the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery limitations, of which the driver should be exceeds the stored speed. surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the aware before the function is used. road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at • winding roads or on slip roads. Pilot Assist must only be used if there are speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h clear lane lines painted on the road surface (approx. 125 mph). on each side of the lane. All other use • Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from involves increased risk of contact with sur- IMPORTANT rounding obstacles that are not detected by almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph). the function. Maintenance of Pilot Assist components must The driver always bears responsibility for how only be performed at a workshop - an author- the car is controlled as well as for maintaining ised Volvo workshop is recommended. the correct distance and speed, even when Pilot Assist is being used.

Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed. Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed smoothly. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This

}}

319 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Overview Function symbol Collision risk warning Controls Symbols for target vehicle and time interval to vehicles ahead Symbol for activated/deactivated steering assistance Driver display

Warning light for collision warning on the windscreen10. Buttons and symbols for functions10. Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's Increases stored speed or reactivates Pilot capacity. If the car needs to be braked more Assist and resumes stored speed and time heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the interval driver does not brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver Activates/deactivates Pilot Assist Indication of speeds10. that immediate intervention is required. Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive cruise Stored speed control NOTE Speed of vehicle ahead. Reduces stored speed Information on the windscreen may be diffi- Current speed of your car. cult to see in strong sunlight and when wear- Increases the distance to vehicles ahead ing sunglasses. To see different combinations of symbols Switches from adaptive cruise control to Pilot depending on traffic situation - see the heading Assist "Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist". Reduces the distance to vehicles ahead

10 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

320 DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Related information Activating and starting the • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) Pilot Assist-2* Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles whose camera and radar unit has been • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-2* Pilot Assist must first be activated and then detected - therefore a warning may not occur (p. 321) started to be able to control speed and distance or be delayed. Do not wait for a warning with- and to give steering assistance. Managing the speed for Pilot Assist-2* out braking when so required. • (p. 323)

Head-up display* • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-2* (p. 324) • Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist-2* (p. 327) • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-2* (p. 325) • Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist-2* (p. 303) • Limitations of Pilot Assist-2* (p. 328)

• Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist-2* NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary (p. 330) depending on car model. • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that: Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen10. • Distance Warning* (p. 293) The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and In cars equipped with a head-up display, the • the driver's door must be closed. warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing • Head-up display* (p. 115) symbol. • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 333) • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) within reasonable distance in front of the car, NOTE or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph). Information on the windscreen may be difficult to see in strong sunlight and when wearing sunglasses.

10 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| With the adaptive cruise control in the standby Hands on the steering wheel • Overtaking assistance with the adaptive mode: In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver cruise control* or Pilot Assist-2* (p. 303) must have his/her hands on the steering wheel. 1. Press ▶ (6). • Limitations of Pilot Assist-2* (p. 328) The system continually monitors this. If hands are > The symbol changes to Pilot Assist not detected on the steering wheel then a text • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist-2* in standby mode (8). message is shown, prompting the driver to (p. 330) actively steer the car. If this is not done, an 2. Press the steering wheel button (2). acoustic warning signal will also be given. > Pilot Assist is started and current speed is stored, which is shown with figures in the If that does not prompt the driver to put his/her centre of the speedometer. hands on the steering wheel either, Pilot Assist changes to standby mode. Following which, Pilot ...or... Assist must be restarted with the steering wheel With the adaptive cruise control started: button . – Press ▶ (6). > Pilot Assist is started. NOTE Pilot Assist steering assistance Note that Pilot Assist only works when the is only active when the steering driver has hands on the steering wheel. wheel symbol (2) has changed from GREY to WHITE. Related information Pilot Assist only regulates the • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) time interval to the vehicle • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 318) ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle • Managing the speed for Pilot Assist-2* (1) above the steering wheel symbol. (p. 323) At the same time a speed • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-2* range is marked. (p. 324) The higher speed is the • Change of target and automatic braking with stored/selected speed and the Pilot Assist-2* (p. 327) lower speed is that of the vehi- • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-2* cle ahead (target vehicle). (p. 325)

322 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Managing the speed for wheel button , the speed stored will be the • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-2* Pilot Assist-2* car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi- (p. 325) Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds. ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at • Overtaking assistance with the adaptive the moment when the button is depressed. cruise control* or Pilot Assist-2* (p. 303) A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- • Limitations of Pilot Assist-2* (p. 328) tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist-2* the setting - the car returns to the last stored (p. 330) speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to approx. 200 km/h (approx. 125 mph). Note that the lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary cannot be selected/stored. depending on car model. Maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h – Change the stored speed with short or long (125 mph). presses on steering wheel button (1) or - (3): Related information • Use short presses to adjust +/- 5 km/h • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) (+/- 5 mph) with each press. • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 318) Hold the button depressed to adjust • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-2* +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph) and release • (p. 321) when the driver display's marking (4) is at the desired speed. • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-2* > The speed set after the last press is (p. 324) stored in the memory. • Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist-2* (p. 327) If the driver increases the car’s speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 323 DRIVER SUPPORT

Setting the time interval for NOTE Pilot Assist-2* Only use the time intervals permitted by local Pilot Assist can be set with different time inter- traffic regulations. vals. If Pilot Assist does not appear to react when Different time intervals to the activated, this may be because the time dis- vehicle in front can be selected tance to the vehicle in front is preventing an and shown in the driver display increase in speed. as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time The higher the speed the longer the calcula- interval. One line represents ted distance in metres for a given time inter- about 1 second to the vehicle val. in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds. Control for time interval. Related information NOTE Decrease time interval • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) When the symbol in the driver display shows Increase time interval • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 318) a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist follows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap. Distance indicator • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-2* (p. 321) When only one steering wheel is shown, there – Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to Managing the speed for Pilot Assist-2* is no vehicle within a reasonable distance increase or decrease the time interval. • (p. 323) ahead. > The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval. • Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist-2* (p. 327) In order to follow the preceding car in a smooth and comfortable way Pilot Assist allows the time • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-2* interval to noticeably vary. At low speed when the (p. 325) distance becomes short, Pilot Assist increases • Overtaking assistance with the adaptive the time interval slightly. cruise control* or Pilot Assist-2* (p. 303) Note that a short time interval only allows the • Limitations of Pilot Assist-2* (p. 328) driver a short time to react and take action if any • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist-2* unforeseen problem should arise. (p. 330) • Distance Warning* (p. 293)

324 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Deactivating/activating the – Press ◀ (3). assistance is automatically reactivated if the Pilot Assist-2* > Pilot Assist is switched off and changes lane's side markings can still be detected. Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so to the adaptive cruise control in active that it is set in the standby mode and can be mode. reactivated later. In standby mode, the driver is no longer given any driver steering recommendations and must control both speed and distance him/herself. When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and the car drives too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned about the short distance by the Distance Warning function instead (see reference to the heading "Distance Warning" at the end of this section). Standby mode on driver intervention Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if: NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary • the foot brake is used depending on car model. • the gear selector is moved to N position. Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in • the direction indicators are used for longer standby mode than 1 minute . To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in • the driver maintains a speed higher than the standby mode: stored speed for longer than 1 minute. – Press the steering wheel button (2). A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- > Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect symbol in the driver display changes col- the setting - the car returns to the last stored our from WHITE to GREY and the stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. speed in the centre of the speedometer When the direction indicators are used, Pilot changes from BEIGE to GREY. Assist steering assistance is temporarily disen- ...or... gaged. When this is no longer the case, steering }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 325 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Automatic standby mode • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-2* Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g. Reactivating Pilot Assist from the (p. 321) stability control/anti-skid ESC. If any of these standby mode • Managing the speed for Pilot Assist-2* other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is (p. 323) switched off automatically. • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-2* In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will (p. 324) sound and a message is shown in the driver dis- Change of target and automatic braking with play. The driver must then intervene and adapt • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 327) the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. • Overtaking assistance with the adaptive Automatic deactivation may occur if: cruise control* or Pilot Assist-2* (p. 303) • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot • Limitations of Pilot Assist-2* (p. 328) Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist-2* speed bump. (p. 330) • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary • Distance Warning* (p. 293) vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no depending on car model. longer has a vehicle to follow. – Press the steering wheel button (1). • the driver's hands are not on the steering > The speed is then set to the most recently wheel stored speed. • the driver opens the door • the driver takes off the seatbelt NOTE • engine speed is too low/high A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by pressing steer- • wheels lose traction ing wheel button . • brake temperature is high • the parking brake is applied Related information • the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) wet snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio waves are blocked). • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 318)

326 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Change of target and automatic WARNING – Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following braking with Pilot Assist-2* way: When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h • Press the steering wheel button . Assist has functionality for change of target and (20 mph) and the target is changed from a Depress the accelerator pedal. braking at certain speeds. moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot • Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and > Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle Change of target instead select the stored speed. ahead if it starts moving forward within • The driver must then intervene him/ 6 seconds. herself and brake. NOTE Automatic standby mode with change of Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a target maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby brake is applied and the function is disen- mode: gaged. • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the tar- parking brake must be released. may be stationary traffic in front. get object is a stationary vehicle or some When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at other object, e.g. a speed bump. speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, Pilot and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot Assist will slow down for the stationary vehicle. Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow. Automatic braking For shorter stops in connection with inching forward in slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the Pilot Assist is set in standby mode with automatic braking.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 327 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Cessation of automatic braking Related information Limitations of Pilot Assist-2* In some situations, automatic braking ceases on • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 318) certain situations. standby mode. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-2* The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help must therefore intervene and brake the car him- (p. 321) the driver in many situations. But the driver is at self/herself to keep it stationary. • Managing the speed for Pilot Assist-2* all times responsible for maintaining a safe distance to surrounding objects and a correct posi- This may take place in the following situations: (p. 323) tion in the lane. Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-2* the driver puts his/her foot on the brake • • (p. 324) pedal Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-2* the parking brake is applied • • (p. 325) the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi- • Overtaking assistance with the adaptive tion • cruise control* or Pilot Assist-2* (p. 303) • the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby mode. • Limitations of Pilot Assist-2* (p. 328) • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist-2* Automatic activation of parking brake (p. 330) In certain situations the parking brake is applied to keep the car stationary. This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car stationary with the foot brake and: • the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt • Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for more than approx. 5 minutes • the brakes have overheated • the engine is switched off.

328 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

IMPORTANT markings, with a subsequent risk of con- Miscellaneous tact between the car and such obstacles. • Off Road drive mode cannot be selected In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering The driver must ensure him/herself that when Pilot Assist is activated. assistance may have difficulty helping the the car is at a suitable distance from such driver in the right way or it may be automati- obstacles. NOTE cally deactivated - in which case, the use of The camera and radar sensor does not Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of • The function uses the car's camera unit, have the capacity to detect all oncoming such situations may be that: which has some general limitations, see the objects and obstacles in traffic environ- "Limitations for camera unit" section. • the lane markings are worn, missing or ments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles cross each other. or objects which completely or partially • lane division is unclear, for example, when block the route. NOTE the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, The function uses the car's radar unit, which the event of multiple sets of markings. animals, etc. has some general limitations, see the "Limita- • edges or other lines than lane markings • The recommended steering input is force tions for radar unit" section. are present on or near the road, e.g. limited, which means that it cannot curbs, joints or repairs to the road sur- always help the driver to steer and keep Related information face, edges of barriers, roadside edges or the car within the lane. Pilot Assist* (p. 309) strong shadows. • • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 318) • the lane is narrow or winding. The driver always has the possibility of correcting • the lane contains ridges or holes. or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-2* Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to (p. 321) weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, • the desired position. snow or fog or slush or impaired view • Managing the speed for Pilot Assist-2* (p. 323) with poor light conditions, back-lighting, Steep roads and/or heavy load wet road surface etc. Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-2* The driver should also note that Pilot Assist intended for use when driving on level road surfa- (p. 324) has the following limitations: ces. The function may have difficulty in keeping • Change of target and automatic braking with the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary Pilot Assist-2* (p. 327) • driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers, • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-2* be extra attentive and ready to brake. Do not use etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they (p. 325) Pilot Assist with a heavy load or with a trailer con- may be detected incorrectly as lane nected to the car. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 329 DRIVER SUPPORT

• Overtaking assistance with the adaptive Symbols and messages for cruise control* or Pilot Assist-2* (p. 303) Pilot Assist-2* • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist-2* A number of symbols and messages regarding (p. 330) Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) and/or the head-up display*. • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 333) Here are some examples11.

The previous illustration12 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h and at the same time follow the vehicle ahead that is keeping the same speed. Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected.

The previous illustration12 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected.

11 In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h. 12 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

330 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

• Change of target and automatic braking with Pilot Assist-2* (p. 327) • Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist-2* (p. 325) • Overtaking assistance with the adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist-2* (p. 303) • Limitations of Pilot Assist-2* (p. 328) • Road sign information* (p. 362)

The previous illustration12 shows that Pilot Assist The previous illustration12 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h and at the same is set to maintain 110 km/h and that there is no time follow the vehicle ahead that is keeping the vehicle ahead to follow. same speed. Here too, Pilot Assist provides steering assis- Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assistance since the lane's side markings can be tance since the lane's side markings can be detected. detected. Related information • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 318) • Activating and starting the Pilot Assist-2* (p. 321) • Managing the speed for Pilot Assist-2* (p. 323) • Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist-2* (p. 324)

12 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 331 DRIVER SUPPORT

Radar unit • Distance Warning* (p. 293) The radar unit is used by several driver support • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) systems and has the task of sensing other vehi- Pilot Assist* (p. 309) cles. • • City Safety (p. 344)

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. The radar unit is used by the following functions: • Distance Warning* • Adaptive cruise control* • Pilot Assist* • City Safety Modification of the radar unit could result in its use being illegal. Related information • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 333) • Type approval for radar units (p. 337)

332 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Limitations of the radar unit The radar unit is placed inside the upper section If the driver display shows this symbol The radar unit has certain limitations - which in of the windscreen together with the car's camera with the message Windscreen turn also limits those functions that use the unit. unit. sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual, it means that the Blocked unit camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi- IMPORTANT cles in front of the car. Do not place, stick or mount anything on the The following table presents examples of possi- outside or inside of the windscreen in front of ble causes for a message being shown, along or around the camera and radar unit — this with the appropriate action: can interfere with camera and radar-dependent functions. This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.

The marked area must be kept free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc.13.

Cause Action The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or cov- Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera ered with ice or snow. and radar unit. Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall. view.

13 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

333 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Cause Action Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered or camera view. road surface. Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an and radar unit. authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE that drives in between your car and the vehicle ahead. Keep the windscreen clean in front of the Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi- camera and radar unit. cles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected. Vehicle speed In bends, the radar unit may detect the The capacity of the radar unit to detect vehicles wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from ahead is reduced significantly if: view. • the speed of the vehicle ahead is signifi- Low trailers cantly different from that of your own car Limited field of vision The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.

Low trailer in radar shadow. Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit The radar unit's field of vision. to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting should therefore be particularly careful when driv- vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle ing behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is activated.

334 DRIVER SUPPORT

High temperature IMPORTANT • The same type or Volvo-approved wind- At very high temperatures the camera and radar screen wipers must be fitted during unit can temporarily be switched off for If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind- replacement. about 15 minutes after the engine is started so screen in front of one of the camera and as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera radar unit “windows” covers an area of and radar unit restarts automatically when the approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm or larger, a workshop IMPORTANT temperature has fallen sufficiently. must be contacted to have the windscreen When the windscreen is replaced, the camera replaced. An authorised Volvo workshop is and radar unit must be recalibrated at the Damaged windscreen recommended. workshop to ensure the functionality of all the If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform- car’s camera and radar-based systems. An ance for the driver support systems that use authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. the camera and radar unit. This may mean that functions are reduced, Maintenance deactivated completely or give incorrect func- In order that the radar and camera unit shall tion response. function correctly, the windscreen in front of the unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo. reduced operation of driver support systems that use the radar unit, the following also applies: NOTE • Volvo recommends against repairing Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and cracks, scratches or stone chips in the radar unit will reduce its function and may area in front of the camera and radar unit. prevent measurement. Instead, the whole windscreen should be This may mean that functions are reduced, replaced. deactivated completely or give incorrect func- • Before replacing a windscreen, contact tion response. an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted. Related information • Radar unit (p. 332) • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) • Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 295) }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 335 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| • Limitations of the adaptive cruise control* (p. 305) • Limitations of City Safety (p. 351) • Pilot Assist* (p. 309)

336 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Type approval for radar units Type approval for the car's radar units can be seen in the following table.

Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário. ✓ Modelo: L2C0055TR 1500-15-8065 Brazil EAN: 07897843840978 Modelo: L2C0054TR ✓ 4122-14-8645 EAN: (01)07897843840855 Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive Europe ✓ ✓ 1999/5/EC. The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA TRA ✓ REGISTERED No: ER37536/15

The United Arab Emi- DEALER No: DA37380/15 rates TRA ✓ REGISTERED No: ER37357/15 DEALER No: DA37380/15

}}

337 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval 37295/POSTEL/2014 ✓ 4927 Indonesia 38806/SDPPI/2015 ✓ 4927 Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255 ✓ Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD) Jordan Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3 ✓ Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD) AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC Morocco ✓ ✓ NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014 DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014

Moldavia ✓ ✓ 1024

Singapore ✓ ✓ Complies with IDA Standards DA105753

338 DRIVER SUPPORT

Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval TA-2014/1824 ✓ APPROVED South Africa TA-2014/2390 ✓ APPROVED ✓ CCAB15LP0560T3 Taiwan ✓ CCAB15LP0680T0

A ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control B BLIS = Blind Spot Information

Related information • Radar unit (p. 332) • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 333) • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) • Blind Spot Information* (p. 354)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 339 DRIVER SUPPORT

Camera unit Related information The camera unit is used by several driver sup- • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) port systems and has the task of for example • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 296) detecting lane lines or traffic signs. • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 368) • Driver Alert Control (p. 366) • Pilot Assist* (p. 309) • City Safety (p. 344) • Run-off Mitigation Run-off Mitigation (p. 374) • Road sign information* (p. 362) • Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 144)

NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. The camera unit is used by the following functions: • Adaptive cruise control* • Lane assistance* • Driver Alert Control* • Pilot Assist* • City Safety • Run-off Mitigation Run-off Mitigation • Road sign information* • Active main beam*

340 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Limitations of the camera unit Blocked unit The camera unit has certain limitations - which in If the driver display shows this symbol turn also limits those functions that use the unit. with the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Impaired vision Owner's manual, it means that the The camera has limitations similar to the human camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi- eye, i.e. it can "see" worse in for example intense cles in front of the car. snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms The following table presents examples of possi- and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the ble causes for a message being shown, along functions of camera-dependent systems could be with the appropriate action: significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged. Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings can also sig- The marked area must be kept free from stickers, 14 nificantly reduce camera function when it is used objects, shade film, etc. . to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians, The camera unit is placed inside the upper sec- cyclists and other vehicles. tion of the windscreen together with the car's radar unit.

IMPORTANT Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit — this can interfere with camera and radar-dependent functions. This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.

14 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

341 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Cause Action The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and covered with ice or snow. radar unit. Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall. view. Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road signals or camera view. surface. Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the cam- Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an era and radar unit. authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light conditions.

NOTE IMPORTANT To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation of driver support systems Keep the windscreen clean in front of the If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind- that use the radar unit, the following also camera and radar unit. screen in front of one of the camera and applies: radar unit “windows” covers an area of • Volvo recommends against repairing High temperature approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm or larger, a workshop must be contacted to have the windscreen cracks, scratches or stone chips in the At very high temperatures the camera and radar replaced. An authorised Volvo workshop is area in front of the camera and radar unit. unit can temporarily be switched off for recommended. Instead, the whole windscreen should be about 15 minutes after the engine is started so replaced. as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform- Before replacing a windscreen, contact and radar unit restarts automatically when the ance for the driver support systems that use • an authorised Volvo workshop to verify temperature has fallen sufficiently. the camera and radar unit. Damaged windscreen This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.

342 DRIVER SUPPORT

that the correct windscreen is ordered Related information and fitted. • Camera unit (p. 340) • The same type or Volvo-approved wind- • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 333) screen wipers must be fitted during • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 368) replacement. • Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 368) • Limitations of Pilot Assist-1 (p. 316) IMPORTANT • Limitations of Pilot Assist-2* (p. 328) When the windscreen is replaced, the camera Limitations of City Safety (p. 351) and radar unit must be recalibrated at the • workshop to ensure the functionality of all the • Limitations for Road Sign Information* car’s camera and radar-based systems. An (p. 366) authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Maintenance In order that the radar and camera unit shall function correctly, the windscreen in front of the unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.

NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and radar unit will reduce its function and may prevent measurement. This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect function response.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 343 DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety The function helps the driver by automatically In the event of a risk of a collision with a large City Safety uses visual, haptic and acoustic sig- braking the car in the event of an imminent risk animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by nals to alert the driver of any pedestrians, of collision if the driver does not react in time by up to 15 km/h (9 mph). The braking function for cyclists, large animals and vehicles that appear. braking and/or swerving. large animals is primarily intended to reduce the collision force at high speeds. Braking is most The car then brakes automatically unless the City Safety activates a short, sharp braking proce- effective at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) and driver him/herself acts within a reasonable time. dure, normally stopping the car just behind the less effective at low speeds. vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well outside normal driving style and may be perceived as uncomfortable. WARNING City Safety is activated in situations where the City Safety is an aid and does not work in all driver should have started braking earlier, which driving situations, traffic, weather and road conditions. is why it cannot help the driver in every situation. Warning only activated in the event of a high City Safety is designed to be activated as late as risk for collision. This section and the section possible in order to avoid unnecessary interven- "Limitations for City Safety" inform about limi- tion. tations that the driver should be aware of before using City Safety. The driver or passengers are not normally aware of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation Warnings and brake interventions for pedes- where a collision is immediately imminent. trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle Location of the radar unit15. speeds above 100 km/h (62 mph). City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce colli- City Safety's auto-brake function can prevent sion speed. ahead or a bicycle by reducing the speed of the a collision or reduce collision speed. To car by up to 50 km/h (30 mph). For a pedestrian, ensure full brake performance, the driver City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at City Safety can reduce speed by up to 45 km/h should always depress the brake pedal - even risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal, (28 mph). if the car auto-brakes. cyclist or a vehicle. If the speed difference is greater than 50 km/h City Safety does not activates any auto-brake The City Safety function can help the driver to (30 mph) or 45 km/h (28 mph) respectively, City functions in the event of heavy acceleration. avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g. Safety's automatic braking cannot prevent a colli- The driver is always responsible for maintain- when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with sion but it can mitigate the consequences of a ing the correct distance and speed - never a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident. collision. wait for a collision warning or for City Safety to intervene.

15 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

344 DRIVER SUPPORT

Market limitation City Safety carries out three steps in the follow- Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking City Safety is not available in all countries. If City ing order: action if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision. Safety does not appear in the centre display's 1. Collision warning Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this function. 2. Brake support 3. Auto Brake Search path in the top menu: Settings My Collision warning Car IntelliSafe The driver is first warned of a potentially immi- Overview nent collision. City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large animals that are crossing the road in front of the car. In the event of a risk of collision with a pedestrian, large animal, cyclist or vehicle (including vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by means of a red flashing warning signal, an acoustic signal and a haptic warning in the form of a brake pulse. At lower speeds or with hard braking 15 Function overview . or acceleration there will be no haptic warning. Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a The brake pulse frequency varies according to collision risk the car's speed. Distance measurement with the camera and Brake support radar unit If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.

15 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

345 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Auto Brake When City Safety is activated and brakes the Setting the warning distance for City The automatic brake function is activated last. vehicle, the driver display shows a text message Safety to the effect that the function is/has been active. If in this situation the driver has not yet started to City Safety is always activated, but it is possible take evasive action and the risk of collision is to select the warning distance for the function. imminent then the automatic braking function is WARNING deployed - this takes place irrespective of City Safety must not be used as an excuse for NOTE whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then the driver to change his/her driving style. If The City Safety function cannot be deacti- takes place with full brake force in order to the driver relies solely on City Safety to do the vated. It is activated automatically when the reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force braking, there might be a risk of a collision sooner or later. engine/electric operation is started and if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. remains switched on until the engine/electric operation is switched off. In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt Related information tensioner may also be activated. For more infor- Setting the warning distance for City Safety mation see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section. • (p. 346) The warning distance determines the sensitivity In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may of the system and regulates the distance at • Detection of obstacles with City Safety™ begin with light braking and then progress to full which the visual, acoustic and haptic warnings (p. 347) brake action. shall be triggered. • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are 1. Tap on Settings in top view in the centre When City Safety has prevented a collision with a prevented (p. 350) stationary object, the car remains stationary in display. • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 349) anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the 2. Press My Car IntelliSafe. car has been braked to avoid collision with a • Limitations of City Safety (p. 351) 3. Under City Safety, select Later, Normal or slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to • Messages for City Safety (p. 353) match that of the vehicle in front. Earlier to set the desired warning distance. • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 63) The driver can always interrupt a braking inter- Try first with Earlier. If the setting produces too vention by firmly depressing the accelerator many warnings, which could be perceived as irri- pedal. tating in certain situations, then change to the Normal warning distance. NOTE If warnings are perceived as being too frequent When City Safety™ brakes, the brake lights or disturbing then the warning distance can be come on. reduced. This would lead to the system warning

346 DRIVER SUPPORT at a later stage, which reduces the total number NOTE Detection of obstacles with City of warnings. Safety™ Warning with the direction indicators for Rear The obstructions that City Safety can detect are The Later warning distance should only be used Collision Warning deactivates if the warning vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians. in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driving. distance for collision warning is set to the lowest level "Later" (see section "Set warn- Vehicles NOTE ing distance for City Safety"). City Safety detects most vehicles that are either City Safety warns the driver when there is a The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking stationary or moving in the same direction as your risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten the functions are, however, still active. car, as well as vehicles described in the "City driver’s reaction time. Safety in cross traffic" section. For City Safety to be effective, it is recom- WARNING In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a mended always to drive with the warning dis- vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear tance set to Earlier. No automatic system can guarantee 100 % lights must be working and clearly illuminated. correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test City Safety by driving at people, Cyclists NOTE animals or vehicles - this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives. Even if the warning distance has been set to Earlier warnings could be perceived as being Related information late in certain situations, e.g. when there are City Safety (p. 344) large differences in speed or if vehicles in • front brake heavily.

Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline. Optimal performance requires that the system function that detects a cyclist must receive the clearest possible information about the body and }}

347 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the Pedestrians City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and dark if they are illuminated by the car's head- lower body plus a normal human pattern of move- lamps. ment. If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are WARNING not visible to the function's camera then the sys- City Safety is an aid and cannot detect all tem cannot detect a cyclist. pedestrians in all situations and, for example, cannot see: For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle • partially obscured pedestrians, people in designed for adults. clothing that hides their body contour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm. WARNING • pedestrians if the background contrast of the pedestrians is poor - warning and City Safety is an aid, and cannot detect all Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes- brake interventions may then be late or cyclists in all situations and, for example, can- trians with clear body outlines. not occur at all. not see: For optimal performance, the system function • pedestrians who are carrying larger • partially obscured cyclists. that detects pedestrians must receive the clear- objects. • cyclists wearing clothing that obscures est possible information about the body outline, The driver is always responsible that the vehi- the body outline. requiring the ability to identify the head, arms, cle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed. • bicycles loaded with large objects. shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety dis- In order that it shall be possible to detect a tance adapted to the speed. pedestrian there must be a contrast with the background and this will be affected by such things as clothes, the background and the weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may either be detected late or not at all, which may mean that warnings and braking are late or omit- ted.

348 DRIVER SUPPORT

Large animals WARNING City Safety in cross traffic City Safety can help the driver when turning and City Safety is an aid, and cannot detect all large animals in all situations and, for exam- crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at ple, cannot see: an intersection. • partially obscured large animals. • large animals straight ahead or behind. • large animals that run or move quickly. • large animals if the background contrast of the animals is poor - warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all. • small animals such as dogs and cats, for Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as example. large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with The driver is always responsible that the vehi- clear body outline. cle is driven properly and with a safety dis- Optimal performance requires that the system tance adapted to the speed. function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming cross- horse) must receive the clearest possible infor- Related information ing vehicles. mation about the body outline, requiring the abil- • City Safety (p. 344) For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on ity to identify the animal directly from the side in a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first combination with what is a normal pattern of enter the sector (1) in which City Safety can ana- movement for the animal. lyse the situation. If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect the animal. City Safety can also detect large animals in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps.

}}

349 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| The following further criteria must also be fulfil- • if the oncoming vehicle is hidden by another City Safety when evasive led: vehicle manoeuvres are prevented • your car must be travelling at no less than • if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by 4 km/h (3 mph) switched off automatically braking the car earlier when it is not possible to avoid a collision by only steering your car must turn to the left in markets with • if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpre- • away. right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand dictable manner, for example, abruptly traffic) changes lanes at a late stage. City Safety assists the driver by continuously • the oncoming vehicle must have its head- Related information attempting to anticipate whether there are "escape routes" to the side in case a slow or sta- lamps switched on. • City Safety (p. 344) tionary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late WARNING stage. City Safety is an aid and does not work in all driving situations, traffic, weather and road conditions. Warnings and brake interventions due to a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle often come very late. The driver is always responsible for maintaining the correct distance and speed - never wait for a collision warning or for City Safety to intervene.

Limitations in cross traffic In some cases City Safety may have difficulty Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier. helping the driver deal with collision risks due to oncoming cross traffic. Examples are: Your car • stability control ESC intervenes in the event Slow/stationary vehicle of slippery driving conditions • if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late City Safety does not intervene with the auto- brake function as long as the driver him/herself

350 DRIVER SUPPORT has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a Limitations of City Safety cles in some situations cannot be detected, or steering manoeuvre. The City Safety function may have limitations in they are detected later than anticipated. However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive certain situations. Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an Surroundings and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver or not at all. by automatically starting to brake at an earlier Low objects If a text message in the driver display indicates stage. Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro- that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon- WARNING animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of net limit the function. City Safety's ability to anticipate a certain sit- the car. This means that the functionality of City uation is an aid, and does not work in all driv- Skidding Safety may be reduced. ing situations or traffic, weather and road con- On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is However, an error message is not shown in all ditions. extended, which may reduce the capacity of City situations where the windscreen sensors are Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the The driver always bears ultimate responsibility obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC will for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely keep the area of windscreen in front of the cam- and that applicable laws and road traffic regu- give the best possible braking force with main- era and radar unit clear. lations are followed. tained stability. Oncoming light IMPORTANT Related information The visual warning signal in the windscreen may • City Safety (p. 344) be difficult to notice in the event of strong sun- Maintenance and replacement of City Safety • Limitations of City Safety (p. 351) light, reflections, when sunglasses are being components must only be performed by a worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Heat In the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the Driver intervention visual warning signal in the windscreen may be Reversing temporarily disengaged. When your own car is reversing, City Safety is The camera and radar unit's field of view temporarily deactivated. The camera's field of vision is limited, which is why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehi-

}}

351 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Low speed WARNING Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of the City Safety is not activated at very low speeds - camera sensor may reduce its function, fully below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system there- Warnings and brake interventions could be deactivate it or give incorrect function implemented late or not at all if a traffic situa- response. fore does not intervene in situations where your tion or external influences mean that the cam- car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly, era and radar unit cannot detect pedestrians, e.g. when parking. cyclists, large animals or vehicles correctly. NOTE Active driver For vehicles to be detected at night, their Driver commands are always prioritised, which is headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be The function uses the car's camera unit, why City Safety does not intervene or postpone switched on and shining clearly. which has some general limitations, see the warning/intervention in situations where the The camera and radar unit has a limited range "Limitations for camera unit" section. driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive for pedestrians and cyclists. The system can manner, even if a collision is unavoidable. provide effective warnings and brake interventions as long as the relative speed is below NOTE Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore 50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow- The function uses the car's radar unit, which delay a collision warning and intervention in order moving vehicles, warnings and brake interven- to minimise unnecessary warnings. tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to has some general limitations, see the "Limita- 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large tions for radar unit" section. Miscellaneous animals is less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle speeds above Related information 70 km/h (43 mph). The warning and brake intervention for large animals is less effective • City Safety (p. 344) at lower speeds. • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehi- • Limitations of the radar unit (p. 333) cles and large animals could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility. Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 70 km/h (43 mph). Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit — this can interfere with camera-dependent functions.

352 DRIVER SUPPORT

Messages for City Safety The following table shows some examples. A number of messages regarding City Safety can be shown in the driver display.

Message Specification City Safety When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated Automatic intervention in connection with a text message being shown.

City Safety The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is Reduced functionality Service recommended. required

Related information • City Safety (p. 344)

353 DRIVER SUPPORT

Rear Collision Warning • if the vehicle approaching from the rear has a Blind Spot Information* The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). The Blind Spot Information (BLIS) function is help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle designed to give a warning of vehicles diago- approaching from behind. NOTE nally behind and to the side of your car so as to In certain markets, RCW does not give a give assistance in heavy traffic on roads with RCW is activated automatically each time the several lanes in the same direction. engine is started. warning with the direction indicators due to local traffic regulations - in such cases, this BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of: The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle part of the function is deactivated. approaching from behind that a collision is immi- • vehicles in the car's blind spot nent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators. • quickly approaching vehicles in the left and NOTE If, at a vehicle speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), right lanes closest to the car. the RCW function detects that the car is in dan- Warning with the direction indicators for Rear ger of being hit from behind, the seatbelt ten- Collision Warning deactivates if the warning sioners may tension the front seatbelts and the distance for collision warning is set to the Whiplash Protection System safety system is lowest level "Later" (see section "Set warn- activated. ing distance for City Safety"). The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking Immediately before the collision, RCW may also functions are, however, still active. activate the foot brake in order to reduce the forward acceleration of the car during the collision. However, the foot brake is only activated if the Related information car is stationary. The foot brake releases immedi- • City Safety (p. 344) ately if the accelerator pedal is depressed. • Setting the warning distance for City Safety Limitations (p. 346) In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 63) helping the driver in the event of a collision risk. • Whiplash Protection System (p. 61) This can be for example: • if the vehicle approaching from the rear is detected too late • if the vehicle approaching from the rear changes lane at the last moment

354 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light.

NOTE The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

WARNING

16 Blind Spot Information does not work on Location of BLIS lamp . Principle of Blind Spot Information sharp bends. Indicator lamp Zone in blind spot Blind Spot Information does not work when the car is reversing. The BLIS button in the centre display's func- Zone for quickly approaching vehicle. tion view activates/deactivates the function. The BLIS function is active at speeds above 10 km/h (6 mph). WARNING The system is designed to react when: Blind Spot Information is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations. • your car is overtaken by other vehicles Blind Spot Information is no substitute for a • another vehicle is quickly approaching your safe driving style and the use of rearview and car. door mirrors. When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a Blind Spot Information can never replace quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indica- responsibility and attention by the driver. It is tor lamp on the door mirror on the affected side always the driver’s responsibility to change lanes in a safe manner. illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning, the indicator lamp will change over

16 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

355 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING Activate/deactivate Blind Spot If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was Information* switched off, it will continue to be deactivated The system is a supplement to, not a replace- The Blind Spot Information (BLIS) function can when the engine is next started and no indicator ment for, a safe driving style and use of the lights will then be illuminated. rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driv- be activated/deactivated. er's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests WARNING with the driver. Blind Spot Information is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations. Related information Blind Spot Information is no substitute for a • Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Information* safe driving style and the use of rearview and (p. 356) door mirrors. • Limitations of Blind Spot Information* Blind Spot Information can never replace (p. 357) responsibility and attention by the driver. It is always the driver’s responsibility to change • Messages for Blind Spot Information* and lanes in a safe manner. Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 361) • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 357) Related information Location of Blind Spot Information lamp17. • Blind Spot Information* (p. 354) Indicator lamp • Limitations of Blind Spot Information* The function is activated/deactivated using (p. 357) the BLIS button in the centre display's func- • Messages for Blind Spot Information* and tion view. Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 361) – Tap on the BLIS button in function view. > BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/ grey indicator is shown in the button. If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator lamps blinking once.

17 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

356 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Limitations of Blind Spot To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces in Cross Traffic Alert* Information* front of the sensors must be kept clean. Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a driver aid that is The Blind Spot Information (BLIS) function may Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area intended to warn of crossing traffic when the car have limitations in certain situations. of the sensors. is reversing. CTA is a supplement to Blind Spot Information (BLIS). Examples of limitations: • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may IMPORTANT reduce the functions and deactivate alerts. Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com- • BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con- ponents or repainting the bumpers must only nected to the car’s electrical system. be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Sensors The sensors for the BLIS function are located Related information inside each corner of the rear wing/bumper. The Blind Spot Information* (p. 354) sensors are also used by the Cross Traffic Alert • (CTA) function. • Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Information* (p. 356) Messages for Blind Spot Information* and • Principle of CTA. Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 361) CTA supplements the functionality of BLIS by Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 359) • providing the ability to see crossing traffic approaching from the side, such as while reversing out of a parking space. CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians. CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if Keep this surface clean - on both the left and right-hand reverse gear has been selected. sides18 of the car.

18 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 357 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| If CTA has sensed that something is approaching Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Related information from the side, this is also indicated with: Alert* • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 357) • an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function can be • Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 359) activated/deactivated. left-hand or right-hand speaker according to • Messages for Blind Spot Information* and the direction from which the object The function is activated/deac- Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 361) approaches. tivated in function view in the • an illuminated icon in the PAS graphics on centre display. the screen. • an icon on the Park assist camera top view.

WARNING – Tap on the Cross Traffic Alert button in CTA is a supplementary aid and does not function view. work in all situations. > • GREEN button indication - CTA is acti- CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style vated. and the use of rearview and door mirrors. • GREY button indication - CTA is deac- CTA can never replace the driver's responsi- tivated. bility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to reverse in a safe manner. CTA is always in activated mode after the engine is started. Related information WARNING • Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358) CTA is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations. • Messages for Blind Spot Information* and Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 361) CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors. • Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 359) CTA can never replace the driver's responsi- • Blind Spot Information* (p. 354) bility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.

358 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert sensors are also used by the Blind Spot The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function may have Information (BLIS) function. limitations in certain situations.

CTA does not perform optimally in all situations but has some limitations. For example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructing obstacles. Here are some examples of situations where CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close: In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely “blind” on one side.

Blind CTA sector. Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand sides of the car19. Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”. To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces in However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it front of the sensors must be kept clean. makes with the obstructing vehicle/object changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases. Do not affix any objects, tape, labels or similar within the area of the sensors. Examples of further limitations: • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may IMPORTANT reduce the functions and deactivate alerts. Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com- The car is parked deep inside a parking slot. • CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con- ponents or repainting the bumpers must only nected to the car’s electrical system. be performed by a workshop - an authorised Sensors Volvo workshop is recommended. The sensors for the CTA function are located inside each corner of the rear wing/bumper. The

19 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

359 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Related information • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 357) • Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358) • Messages for Blind Spot Information* and Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 361) • Limitations of Blind Spot Information* (p. 357)

360 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Messages for Blind Spot The following table shows some examples. Information* and Cross Traffic Alert* A number of messages regarding Blind Spot Information (BLIS) and Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) can be shown in the driver display.

Message Specification Blind spot sensor The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Service required

Blind spot system off BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system. Trailer attached

Related information • Blind Spot Information* (p. 354) • Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Information* (p. 356) • Limitations of Blind Spot Information* (p. 357) • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 357) • Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 358) • Managing messages in the driver display and the centre display (p. 112)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 361 DRIVER SUPPORT

Road sign information* WARNING Sign display with Road Sign The road sign information function (Road Sign Information RSI does not work in all situations but is Information – RSI) helps the driver to observe designed merely as a supplementary aid. The Road Sign Information function (Road Sign speed signs and certain prohibition signs as the Information - RSI) registers and shows road car passes them. The driver always bears ultimate responsibility signs in different ways depending on the sign for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and the situation. and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.

Related information • Sign display with Road Sign Information (p. 362) • Speed camera information (p. 364) • Activating/deactivating Road sign information (p. 365) • Limitations for Road Sign Information* (p. 366) Examples of readable signs20. 21 RSI provides information about such things as Example of detected speed information . current speed, when a motorway or road is star- When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed ting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a when the direction of travel is one-way. symbol plus an indication in red on the speedometer. If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised traffic and a sign showing the maximum permitted speed are passed, RSI selects and shows the sign symbol for maximum permitted speed.

20 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples. 21 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

362 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Besides the speed limit symbol End of all restrictions. Sometimes different speed limits are signed for an additional sign may be the same road - an additional sign then indicates shown as well, such as "no the circumstances under which the different overtaking". speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example.

If the driver enters a road End of motorway. An additional sign relating to rain is displayed marked with a no-entry sign at only if the windscreen wipers are in use. the roadside, the symbol for If the car has a trailer attached and you pass a this sign flashes on and off on speed sign with the additional sign “trailer”, the the driver display as a warning. indicated speed will appear on the driver display. Some speed limits only apply If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation* Following which, the sign information is hidden after a certain distance or at a then information from the map is also used to until the next speed-related sign is detected. certain time of day. The driver's determine whether the car is being driven in the attention is drawn to this fact wrong direction. Additional signs by means of a symbol for an additional sign below the speed The driver can also get an acoustic warning when symbol. The additional symbol driving towards a no-entry entrance if the Audio in the driver display will show either “DIST” or Warning function is activated - see the heading “TIME”. "Activating/deactivating the acoustic warning" in the section "Activating/deactivating Road Sign A symbol for additional sign in Information". the form of an empty frame under the driver display's speed End of restriction or motorway symbol means that the RSI has If RSI detects a sign which may imply the end of detected an additional sign a speed limit, such as the end of a motorway, the with supplementary information driver display shows the corresponding road sign for the current speed limit. for 10–30 seconds. Examples of additional signs21. Examples of such signs are:

21 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 363 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Sensus Navigation Speed camera information section "Activating/deactivating Road sign infor- If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation, A car equipped with Sensus Navigation can pro- mation" as well as the section "Limitations for speed information is read from the navigation vide information on an upcoming speed camera Road sign information". unit in the following cases: in the driver display. • On detecting signs that indirectly indicate a NOTE speed limit, such as motorway, dual carriage- Information about speed cameras in the navi- way and city limit signs. gation maps is not available for all markets. • If a previously detected sign is assumed not to apply any longer, but no new sign has Related information been detected. • Road sign information* (p. 362) • Activating/deactivating Road sign informa- NOTE tion (p. 365) If a downloaded third-party app is used for • Limitations for Road Sign Information* navigation then there is no support for speed- (p. 366) related information.

Sign for "School" and "Children at play" Speed camera warning in the driver display. If the warning sign for "School" If the car exceeds a detected or "Children at play" is included speed limit, the driver can be in the satellite navigator's map warned when the car data, the driver display shows a approaches a speed camera, 21 sign of this type. provided that the navigation maps for the market in ques- Related information tion contain information on speed cameras. • Road sign information* (p. 362) For more information on speed warning in con- Activating/deactivating Road sign informa- • nection with speed camera, see the heading tion (p. 365) "Activating/deactivating speed warnings" in the

21 Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

364 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating/deactivating Road sign The speed warning is given by 2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign information the driver display symbol show- Information. The Road sign information (Road Sign ing the applicable maximum permitted speed temporarily 3. Select Audio Warning to activate/deacti- Information - RSI) function can be activated/ vate the acoustic warning. deactivated. flashing when this speed is exceeded. With the Audio Warning function activated, the Activating/deactivating Road sign driver is also warned when driving towards a no- 1. Press Settings in the centre display's top information entry entrance. view. The function is activated/deac- Related information tivated in function view in the 2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign centre display. Information. • Road sign information* (p. 362) Speed camera information (p. 364) 3. Select Speed Limit Warning to activate/ • deactivate speed warnings. • Sign display with Road Sign Information (p. 362) > A speed selector is shown if the function – Tap on the Road Sign Information button is activated. in function view. 4. Adjust the limit for when a speed warning is > RSI is activated and the button shows a to be given, either up or down, by pressing green indicator - a grey indicator means the up/down arrows. that RSI is deactivated. Note that no consideration is given to any Activating/deactivating speed warnings boundary adjustment made when the driver The speed warning function warns the driver display shows the speed camera symbol. when the applicable speed limit is exceeded. A speed warning is always given if the speed limit is Activating/deactivating the acoustic exceeded in connection with speed camera infor- warning. mation. The driver can choose to have the func- It is also possible to have an acoustic warning in tion activated or deactivated. connection with a speed warning: 1. Press Settings in the centre display's top view.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 365 DRIVER SUPPORT

Limitations for Road Sign NOTE Driver Alert Control Information* The Driver Alert Control function is intended to The function uses the car's camera unit, The Road Sign Information Road Sign attract the driver's attention when he/she starts which has some general limitations, see the Information - RSI function may have limitations in to drive less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes "Limitations for camera unit" section. certain situations. distracted or starts to fall asleep. Examples of things that can reduce the RSI func- Related information The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio- tion are as follows: • Road sign information* (p. 362) rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city Faded signs • • Activating/deactivating Road sign informa- traffic. • Signs positioned on bends tion (p. 365) The function is activated when speed exceeds Sign display with Road Sign Information • Rotated or damaged signs • 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as (p. 362) • Signs positioned high above the roadway the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph). • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) • Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned signs • signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt • digital road maps22 are out-of-date, inaccu- rate or have no speed information23.

NOTE The RSI function can interpret some types of bicycle rack (connected to the electrical socket for trailers) as a connected trailer. In such cases the driver may be shown incorrect A camera detects the edge markings painted on speed information. the carriageway and compares the alignment of the road with the driver’s steering wheel movements.

22 In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation. 23 Map data with speed information is not available in all markets.

366 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be own condition. activated/deactivated. In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired- Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon 1. Tap on Settings in top view in the centre as possible and rest. display. Studies have shown that it is equally as dangerous to drive while tired as it is under the 2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert influence of alcohol. Control. 3. Select Alertness Warning to activate/deac- WARNING tivate the DAC. If driving behaviour becomes seriously erratic, the driver is Driver Alert Control does not work in all situa- alerted by means of an acous- tions but is designed merely as a supplemen- WARNING tic signal combined with a sym- tary aid. Driver Alert Control does not work in all situa- bol in the driver display and the The driver always bears ultimate responsibility tions but is designed merely as a supplemen- message Time for a break for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely. tary aid. soon?. The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely. The warning is repeated after a time if driving Related information ability does not improve. • Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control (p. 367) Activating/deactivating the rest place NOTE • Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 368) guide in the event of a warning It is possible to select whether the rest place The function must not be used to extend a guide shall be activated or deactivated. With the period of driving. Always plan breaks at regu- guide activated a proposal for a suitable rest lar intervals, and make sure you are well place is presented at the same time as DAC rested. gives a warning. 1. Tap on Settings in top view in the centre display.

}}

367 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert Limitations of Driver Alert Control Lane Keeping Aid Control. The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may The function of lane assistance is to help the have limitations in certain situations. 3. Select Rest Stop Guidance to activate/ driver to reduce the risk of the car accidentally deactivate the rest place guide. In certain cases the driving behaviour may not be leaving its own lane on motorways and similar affected, which results in the driver not receiving major routes. Related information any warning from the DAC. For this reason it is Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane Driver Alert Control (p. 366) always important to stop and take a break in the • and/or warns the driver with an acoustic signal or event of any signs of driver fatigue, irrespective of • Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 368) steering wheel vibration. whether or not DAC issues a warning. Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed In some cases the system may issue a warning range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam- clearly visible side lines. ple: On narrow roads the function may be unavailable, in strong side winds • in which case it goes into standby mode. The • on rutted road surfaces. function becomes available again when the road is wide enough. NOTE The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

Related information • Driver Alert Control (p. 366) • Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control (p. 367) • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341)

A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.

368 DRIVER SUPPORT

steer the car back into its lane by applying a If the driver does not keep slight torque to the steering wheel. his/her hands on the steering 2. Warning activated: If the car is about to cross wheel, the driver display shows a lane line, the driver is warned by means of this symbol and the following an acoustic signal or vibration in the steering message, to prompt the driver wheel. to actively steer the car: • Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering NOTE If the driver does not then start to steer, the sym- When a direction indicator is switched on, bol is shown again, combined with a warning there are no steering corrections or alerts sound and this message: from Lane assistance. • Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane. applied WARNING If the driver then still does not follow the prompt Lane assistance is merely a driver aid and to start steering, LKA is set in standby mode - does not engage in all driving situations or the function will then be unavailable until the traffic, weather or road conditions. driver starts to steer the car again. The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regulations are followed.

Steering assistance A precondition for the functioning of the LKA steering assistance is that the driver’s hands are 24 Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations . holding the steering wheel. The system monitors Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in this continuously. accordance with the following: 1. Steering assistance activated: When the car is approaching a lane line, LKA will actively

24 The steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the car remains outside the lane lines, the longer the vibration. }}

369 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Lane assistance does not intervene • poor weather with reduced visibility Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping • sharp edges or lines other than the lane lines Aid • roads with unclear or non-existent line mark- Lane assistance Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) can be ings. activated/deactivated and some subfunctions can be selected. NOTE The function is activated/deac- The function uses the car's camera unit, tivated in function view in the which has some general limitations, see the centre display. "Limitations for camera unit" section.

Related information • Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside – Tap on the Lane Keeping Aid button in (p. 370) curves. function view. Run-off Mitigation Run-off Mitigation In some situations, lane assistance allows lane • > LKA is activated (GREEN button indica- (p. 374) lines to be crossed without intervening with either tion is shown) or deactivated (GREY but- steering assistance or a warning - e.g. when • Symbols and messages for lane assistance ton indication is shown). using the direction indicators or cutting bends. (p. 372) Select the type of warning for the Lane Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) Limitations • Keeping Aid In certain demanding conditions lane assistance It is possible to select how LKA shall warn the may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In driver if the car leaves its lane. such cases it is recommended to switch off this 1. Press Settings in the centre display's top function. view. Examples of such conditions are: 2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Lane • road works Assistance. • winter road conditions • poor road surface • a very “sporty” driving style

370 DRIVER SUPPORT

3. Under Lane Keeping Aid Warning Feedback, select type of warning: • Sound - the driver is warned by an acoustic signal. • Vibration — the driver is warned with steering wheel vibrations. Assistance options for Lane Keeping Aid It is possible to select how LKA shall react if the driver if the car leaves its lane. 1. Press Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car IntelliSafe Lane Assistance. 3. Under Lane Keeping Aid Assistance Mode, select how LKA shall react • Steering - the driver is given steering assistance without a warning. • Both - the driver is given both a warning and steering assistance. • Warning — warning to driver only. Related information • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 368) • Symbols and messages for lane assistance (p. 372)

371 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols and messages for lane Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane Indication of steering assistance/warning assistance lines. Unavailable A number of symbols and messages regarding lane assistance can be shown on the driver display. Symbol in the driver display Lane assistance is visualised by symbols in the driver display depending on the situation. Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the sym- Here are some examples of bol are in colour. symbols and the situations in which they are shown: Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are grey. Lane assistance indicates that the system is giving a warning and/or attempting to steer the car The lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines, Available back into the lane. the speed is too low or the road is too narrow. Symbols and messages The following table shows some examples.

Available — the lane lines in the symbol are white.

372 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbol Message Specification Driver support system The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Reduced functionality Service required Volvo workshop is recommended.

Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

Lane Keeping Aid The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not hold the wheel. Follow Apply steering the instruction and steer the car.

Lane Keeping Aid LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again. Standby until steering applied

Related information • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 368) • Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid (p. 370)

373 DRIVER SUPPORT

Run-off Mitigation Run-off Mitigation Run-off Mitigation with steering assistance Brake intervention helps in situations where The function of Run-off Mitigation is to assist the steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The driver to reduce the risk of the car accidentally brake force is adapted automatically depending leaving the road by means of actively steering on the situation at the time of run-off. the car back onto the road. Settings for Run-off Mitigation Run-off The function is active within the speed range Mitigation 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly The Run-off Mitigation function is selectable - visible side markings/lane lines. the driver can select On or Off by dragging down the centre display's top view and there searching A camera scans the edges of the road and the for the following: painted side markings. If the car is about to cross the edge of the road, Run-off Mitigation will Settings My Car IntelliSafe Lane actively steer the car back onto the road. In addi- Run-off Mitigation intervenes with steering assistance. Assistance tion, if steering intervention is considered insuffi- To activate Run-off Mitigation: cient to avoid run-off, brake intervention may also Run-off Mitigation with steering assistance be activated. and brake intervention • Select the box at Run-off Mitigation, Assistance in case of road departure Run-off Mitigation does not intervene with either - steering assistance or brake intervention if the the function is then activated. direction indicators are used. If the function The current setting for Run-off Mitigation when detects that the driver is driving the car in an the engine is switched off remains the next time active way, activation of Run-off Mitigation will be the engine is started. suppressed for a short time. Limitations of Run-off Mitigation Run-off The function has two activation levels: Mitigation • Steering assistance only In certain demanding conditions, Run-off Mitiga- • Steering assistance with brake intervention tion may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases, it is recommended that the function be switched off. Run-off Mitigation intervenes with steering assistance Examples of such conditions are: and braking. • road works • winter road conditions

374 DRIVER SUPPORT

• narrow roads • Limitations of the camera unit (p. 341) • poor road surface • a very “sporty” driving style • poor weather with reduced visibility • roads with unclear or non-existent side markings • sharp edges or lines other than the lane's side markings.

WARNING The road run-off protection function is only a driver aid and does not work in all driving situations, traffic, weather and road conditions. The function cannot detect barriers, rails or similar obstacles at the side of the road. The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regulations are followed.

NOTE The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section.

Related information • Symbols and messages for Run-off Mitiga- tion (p. 376) • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 368)

375 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols and messages for Run-off The following table shows some examples. Mitigation A number of symbols and messages regarding the Run-off Mitigation Run-off Mitigation can be shown in the driver display.

Symbol Message Specification Run-off Mitigation When Run-off Mitigation is activated, a message is shown to the driver informing that the Automatic intervention system has been activated.

Driver support system The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Reduced functionality Service required Volvo workshop is recommended.

Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

Related information • Run-off Mitigation Run-off Mitigation (p. 374)

376 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist* approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obsta- Backwards Parking assistance assists the driver when cles behind is also active when the car is station- manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the ary. distance to obstacles by acoustic signals com- At a distance within 30 cm from an obstacle bined with graphics on the centre display. behind or in front of the car, the tone is constant and the active sensor's field closest to the car symbol is filled.

The volume of the parking assistance signal can be adjusted while the signal is sounding by means of the [>II] knob on the centre console. Adjustment can also be performed in the top view's Settings menu option. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary NOTE depending on car model. The sensors for reverse are activated if the car Acoustic warnings are only given for • rolls backward without a gear engaged or when objects directly on the vehicle's route. the gear lever is moved to reverse position. Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors. The measuring range starts approx. 1.5 metres The centre display shows an overview of the rela- WARNING behind the car. tionship between the car and detected obstacles. • Parking assistance does not relinquish When reversing with a hitched trailer, parking the driver's own responsibility during The highlighted sector indicates the location of assistance backward is deactivated automatically. the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a parking. highlighted sector box, the shorter the distance • The sensors have blind spots where between the car and detected obstacle. obstacles cannot be detected. NOTE The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the • Be aware of e.g. people or animals near When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car- faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the the car. rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine audio system is muted automatically. trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to sensors do not react to them. the sides is active when the car is moving but stops after the car has been stationary for }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 377 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Along the sides Forwards IMPORTANT When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors - the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle.

Related information • Activating/deactivating Parking assistance* (p. 379) • Limitations of Parking assistance* (p. 379) • Messages for Park Assist* (p. 381) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary • Park Assist Camera* (p. 382) Parking assistance side sensors are activated depending on car model. automatically when the engine is started. They • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 388) are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). The front parking assistance sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. The measuring range starts approx. 30 cm from The front sensors are active at speeds the sides. The acoustic signal for obstacles on below 10 km/h (6 mph). the sides comes from the side loudspeakers. The measuring range starts approx. 0.8 metres in front of the car.

NOTE Parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.

378 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating/deactivating Parking Limitations of Parking assistance* IMPORTANT assistance* The Parking assistance function may have limita- In certain conditions the parking assistance The Parking assistance function can be acti- tions in certain situations. system may produce incorrect warning sig- vated/deactivated. nals that are caused by external sound NOTE The front and side parking assistance sensors sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- are activated automatically when the engine is Since a towbar is configured with the car's quencies that the system works with. electrical system, towbar protrusion is started. The rear sensors activate if the car rolls Examples of such sources include horns, wet included when the function measures the dis- backwards or if reverse gear in engaged. tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and tance to an object behind the car. The function is activated/deac- exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc. tivated in function view in the centre display. IMPORTANT Maintenance Parking assistance can also be Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low activated/deactivated from the barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and camera views. are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpect- – Tap on the Park Assist button in function edly stop instead of changing over to the view. expected constant tone. > Parking assistance is activated/deactivated, a green/grey indicator is displayed The sensors cannot detect high objects, such in the button. as projecting loading docks. In such situations, pay extra attention and Related information • manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly • Park Assist* (p. 377) slowly or stop the current parking • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 357) manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of Location of the parking sensors25. damage to vehicles or other objects since For parking assistance to work optimally, the information from the sensors is not parking assistance sensors must be cleaned reg- always reliable in such situations. ularly with water and car shampoo.

25 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 379 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or no function.

Related information • Park Assist* (p. 377) • Activating/deactivating Parking assistance* (p. 379) • Messages for Park Assist* (p. 381)

380 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Messages for Park Assist* The following table shows some examples. A number of messages regarding Park Assist can be shown in the driver display.

Message Specification Park Assist System The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is Unavailable Service required recommended.

Park Assist System One or more of the system's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

Related information • Park Assist* (p. 377) • Activating/deactivating Parking assistance* (p. 379) • Limitations of Parking assistance* (p. 379)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 381 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera* CTA* - activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert 360° view camera* The Park Assist Camera helps the driver when Zoom27 - zoom in/out manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obstacles with a camera image and graphics in the centre display. WARNING Overview • The parking camera serves as an aid. It does not relieve the driver of responsibil- The Park Assist Camera is activated either auto- ity when reversing. matically, when reverse gear is selected or manually via the centre display - depending on the • The camera has blind spots, where obstacles cannot be detected. selected setting. • Be aware of people and animals in the vicinity of the car.

The approximate coverage area of the Park Assist Cam- Camera views eras. The function can display a composite 360° view The four sides of the car are shown simultane- and separate views for each of the four cameras: ously in the centre display, which helps the driver rear, front, left or right camera view. The upper- to observe what is around the car when manoeu- most in the selected view denotes which camera vring at slow speeds. is active. Every camera view can be activated separately by tapping on the screen on the desired camera's "field of vision" - e.g. in front of or above the front camera. Lines - activates/deactivates park assist If the car is also equipped with Parking assis- lines tance* then distance to detected obstacles is Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar illustrated with fields in different colours. assist line*26 PAS* - activates/deactivates Parking assistance

26 Not available in all markets. 27 The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in.

382 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Backwards Forwards The sides

The backwards-facing camera28 is fitted above the reg- The forwards parking camera28 is located in the grille. The side cameras28 are positioned in each door mirror. istration plate. The front camera can be helpful on an exit road The side cameras show what is along each side The backward-facing camera shows a wide area with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there of the car. behind the car. For certain models, part of the are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in 25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front Related information some cases. camera is switched off. • Starting the Park Assist Camera* (p. 386) Objects shown in the centre display may appear If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph), and • Park assist lines and fields for the Park slightly tilted — this is normal. the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within Assist Camera* (p. 384) 60 seconds after the forward-facing camera has • Limitations of the Park Assist Camera* NOTE been switched off, the camera is reactivated. (p. 387) Objects on the centre display may be closer • Park Assist* (p. 377) NOTE to the car than they appear to be on the • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 357) screen. Automatic reactivation of the front camera on • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 388) speed reduction requires that Auto Camera Reverse Activation is selected in Settings My Car Park Assist.

28 The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 383 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park assist lines and fields for the These park assist lines include the car's most IMPORTANT Park Assist Camera* protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and Remember that when rear camera view is The Park Assist Camera indicates the position of corners. selected, the centre display only shows the the car in relation to its surroundings by display- area behind the car. Keep an eye on the sides ing lines on the camera image. NOTE and front of the car when turning the steering Park assist lines Park assist lines are not shown when zoom- wheel while reversing. ing in. The same applies vice versa - note what happens to the rear parts of the car when the NOTE front camera view is selected. • When reversing with a trailer which is not Note that the guide lines show the shortest connected electrically to the car, the lines route. Therefore, pay extra attention to the on the display show the route the car will car's sides so that they do not go against/ take - not the trailer. over something when the steering wheel is turned when driving forward or that the front The screen shows no lines when a trailer • sweeps against/over something when the is connected electrically to the car's elec- steering wheel is turned when reversing. trical system.

Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver. Park assist lines show the intended route for the car's external dimensions with the current steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking, reversing into tight spaces and when connecting a trailer. The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and respond directly to steering wheel movements, showing the driver the path the car will take - also when the car is turning.

384 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Park assist lines in 360° view* Towbar assist line Sensor field from Parking assistance* If the car is equipped with Parking assistance* then the distance is shown in the 360° view with coloured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle. Sensor fields backwards and forwards

360° view with park assist lines. Towbar with assist line. With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown Towbar - activates the towbar assist line*. behind, in front of and at the side of the car Zoom - zoom in/out. (depending on the direction of travel): • When driving forwards: Front lines The camera can facilitate connecting up to a trailer by showing an assist line representing the The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car When reversing: Side lines and reversing • towbar's intended "path" to the trailer. symbol to the right. lines. 1. Press Towbar (1). The fields for the front and reversing sensors If front camera or reversing camera has been change colour as the distance to the obstacle > The assist line for the intended "path" of selected, park assist lines are displayed without decreases — from yellow through orange to red. regard to the car's direction of travel. The the towbar is shown. At the same time the selected side camera is used to show the park car's park assist lines are extinguished. Colours of front and Distance (metres) assist lines only while reversing. 2. Press Zoom (2) when a more precise reversing fields manoeuvring is required. > The camera view zooms in. Yellow 0,6–1,5 Park assist lines for both car and towbar cannot Orange 0,4–0,6 be shown at the same time. Red 0–0,4

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 385 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Sensor field to the sides Starting the Park Assist Camera* Activating/deactivating automatic start The side fields are only shown in orange. The Park Assist Camera can be made to start of the Park Assist Camera automatically when reverse gear is selected or It is possible to activate/deactivate the automatic Colour of side fields Distance (metres) manually via the centre display. starting of the Park Assist Camera when reverse gear is selected. Orange 0–0.3 Starting the Park Assist Camera 1. Settings The Park Assist Camera can be Press in the centre display's top Related information started manually if it is view. • Park Assist Camera* (p. 382) switched off when reverse gear 2. Press My Car Park Assist. • Starting the Park Assist Camera* (p. 386) is selected or if required in another situation. 3. Select Auto Camera Reverse Activation • Limitations of the Park Assist Camera* to activate/deactivate automatic start. (p. 387) – Press the Camera button in the centre dis- Automatic deactivation of camera play's function view. The front view is extinguished at 25 km/h (16 mph) to avoid distracting the driver. If the > The Park Assist Camera is started. Auto Camera Reverse Activation setting is Camera start in different situations selected, the camera is reactivated automatically A press of the button determines the car's speed at 22 km/h (14 mph) within 60 seconds. If speed and travel direction if the camera starts with top exceeds 50 km/h (31 mph) then the front view is view or front view: not reactivated. • Top view: When stationary and moving for- Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h ward - 0-15 km/h (0-9 mph). (9 mph) and not reactivated. • Top view: When stationary and moving back- Select basic view for Park Assist ward - independent of speed. Camera backward • Front view: When moving forward With the Auto Camera Reverse Activation 15-22 km/h (9-14 mph). function selected, the driver can also select which camera function should be activated for reversing - the rearward-facing camera or the 360° view*. 1. Press Settings in the centre display's top view.

386 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

2. Press My Car Park Assist. Limitations of the Park Assist Camera* 3. Select Rear View Instead of 360° to activate/deactivate the rear camera view as The Park Assist Camera function may have limi- basic view. tations in certain situations. Related information The Park Assist Camera cannot see all objects in every situation - a driver should be aware of the Park assist lines and fields for the Park • following limitations: Assist Camera* (p. 384) • Limitations of the Park Assist Camera* NOTE (p. 387) A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on Ignition positions (p. 399) • the rear of the car could obscure the cam- There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of era's view. vision. In 360° view obstacles/objects can “vanish” in Blind sectors the gaps between the individual cameras. Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is Defective camera obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that If a camera sector is black and is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go contains this symbol then it undetected until the car is very close to the means that the camera is out obstacle. of order. The following illustration shows an example.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 387 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Maintenance Park Assist Pilot* Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm Active parking assistance (Park Assist Pilot - water and car shampoo - be careful not to PAP) helps the driver to park in or leave a park- scratch the lenses. ing space.

NOTE PAP checks first if a space is sufficiently big and thereafter helps the driver to turn the steering Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and wheel and manoeuvre the car into the space. ice to ensure optimum function. This is particularly important in poor light. The centre display indicates with symbols, graphics and text the various operations to be carried out and when to do so. Related information The car's left-hand camera is out of order. • Park Assist Camera* (p. 382) NOTE Black camera sector Starting the Park Assist Camera* (p. 386) • The PAP function measures the space and A black camera sector is also shown in the fol- • Park assist lines and fields for the Park steers the car - the driver's task is to: lowing instances, but then without the symbol for Assist Camera* (p. 384) defective camera: • keep a close watch around the car • folded-in door mirror • follow the instructions in the centre display • open door • change gear (reverse/forward) • open tailgate • control and maintain a safe speed Light conditions • brake and stop. The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in reduced image quality.

388 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING 3. The car is positioned in the space by means NOTE of driving forward/backward. PAP does not work in all situations but is A perpendicular-parked car cannot be assis- Using the Park Out function, a parallel-parked designed merely as a supplementary aid. ted by the PAP Park Out function to leave a car can also be assisted by PAP to leave the parking space - the function must only be The driver always has the final responsibility parking space - see the heading "Leaving a park- for driving the car in a safe manner and for used for a parallel-parked car. paying attention to the surroundings and ing space" in the section "Parking with Active other road users approaching or passing parking assistance". Related information while parking. Perpendicular parking • Parking with Active parking assistance* Types of parking situations (p. 390) PAP can be used for the following different park- • Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393) ing situations. • Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 395) Parallel parking

Principle for perpendicular parking. The PAP function parks the car using the following steps: 1. A parking space is identified and measured.

The principal of parallel parking. 2. The car is reversed into the space and then positioned in the space by means of driving The PAP function parks the car using the follow- forward/backward. ing steps: 1. A parking space is identified and measured. 2. The car is reversed into the space.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 389 DRIVER SUPPORT

Parking with Active parking Parking assistance* The PAP function parks the car using the follow- The Active parking assistance (Park Assist Pilot - ing steps: PAP) helps the driver park in three steps. The 1. A parking space is identified and measured. function can also help the driver to leave a park- 2. The car is reversed into the space. ing space. 3. The car is positioned into the space - the NOTE system may then request that the driver changes gear. The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to: Finding and measuring parking spaces The function can be activated • keep a close watch around the car in the centre display's function • follow the instructions in the centre dis- view. Principle for perpendicular parking. play 1. Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for It can also be accessed from parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for • change gear (reverse/forward) the camera views. perpendicular parking. • control and maintain a safe speed 2. Tap on the Park In button in function view. • brake and stop. > PAP searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough. PAP can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started: 3. Keep an eye on the centre display - be ready to stop the car when the graphic and mes- No trailer is attached to the car. • sage indicate that a suitable parking space • Speed must be lower than 30 km/h has been found. (20 mph). > A pop-up window is shown. NOTE 4. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular parking and select reverse gear. The distance between the car and parking spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres while PAP Principle for parallel parking. is searching for a parking space.

390 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

NOTE NOTE PAP searches the area for parking, displays • Keep your hands away from the steering instructions and guides the car in on its pas- wheel when the PAP function is acti- senger side. But if required the car can also vated. be parked on the driver's side of the street: • Make sure that the steering wheel is not • Activate the direction indicator to the hindered in any way and can rotate freely. driver's side - then the system searches • To achieve optimum results - wait until for a parking space on that side of the the steering wheel is fully turned before car instead. starting to drive backward/forward.

Reversing in to the parking space Perpendicular. 1. Check that there is nothing behind. 2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than 7 km/h (4 mph). > PAP will then steer the car into the parking space. 3. Keep an eye on the centre display - be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and message so request.

Parallel.

}}

391 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Positioning the car in the parking space 2. Keep an eye on the centre display - be pre- The Park Out function is acti- pared to stop the car when the graphics and vated in the centre display's message so request. function view. 3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly backwards. 4. Keep an eye on the centre display - be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and 1. Tap on the Park Out button in function view. message so request. 2. Use the direction indicator to select the The function is deactivated automatically and the direction in which the car should leave the graphics and message show that parking is com- parking space. plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct 3. Keep an eye the centre display. follow the the car’s position. Only the driver can determine instructions in the same way as during park- Parallel. whether the car is properly parked. ing.

IMPORTANT Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when the function is completed - the driver may then The warning distance is shorter when the need to turn the steering wheel back to the maxi- sensors are used by PAP compared with mum steering angle in order to leave the parking when Park Assist uses the sensors. space. If PAP considers that the driver can leave the Leaving a parking space parking space without any extra manoeuvring then the function will be stopped, even if the NOTE driver may consider that the car is still in the parking space. When leaving a parking space, the Park Out function must only be used for a parallel- Related information Perpendicular. parked car - it does not work for a perpendic- • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 388) D ular-parked car. 1. Move the gear selector into the position, • Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393) wait until the steering wheel has been turned and drive slowly forward • Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 395)

392 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* IMPORTANT • Parking spaces on narrow streets are not The Active parking assistance (Park Assist Pilot always feasible, since the space required for Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable – PAP) function may have limitations in certain manoeuvring may not be sufficient. to find parking spaces - one reason for this situations. Bear in mind that the front of the car may may be the fact that there is interference with • swing out towards oncoming traffic while the sensors from external sound sources Parking is discontinued being parked. A parking sequence will be discontinued: which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works. • Objects situated higher than the detection • if the driver moves the steering wheel areas of the sensors are not taken into Examples of such sources include horns, wet account when calculating the parking • if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and (4 mph) manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to turn into exhaust noises from motorcycles etc. the parking space too early, and hence such if the driver presses Cancel in the centre • parking spaces should be avoided. display Driver responsibility The driver is responsible for determining when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic • • The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an whether the space selected by PAP is suita- stability control are engaged - e.g. when a aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function. ble for parking. wheel loses grip on a slippery road. The driver must therefore be prepared to inter- Use approved tyres29 with the correct tyre Where applicable, a message in the centre dis- rupt a parking step. • pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to play states the reason for a parking sequence There are also a few details to bear in mind while park the car. being discontinued. parking, e.g.: • Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to NOTE • PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles measure the parking space incorrectly. already parked nearby - if they are inap- Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will • propriately parked, your own car's tyres and wheel are fitted. reduce their function and may prevent meas- wheel rims may be damaged by contact with urement. the kerb. • Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding from the car. • PAP is designed for parking on straight streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this • Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed reason, make sure the car is parallel to the or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is parking space when PAP measures the protruding more than other parked cars. space.

29 "Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 393 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| IMPORTANT Related information • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 388) Changing to another approved wheel rim and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed • Parking with Active parking assistance* tyre circumference, which means that the (p. 390) PAP system's parameters may then need to be updated. Consult a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Maintenance

PAP sensor locations30. For the PAP function to work correctly, its sensors must be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.

30 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

394 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT

Messages for Park Assist Pilot* The following table shows some examples. A number of messages regarding Park Assist Pilot – PAP can be shown in the driver display.

Message Specification Park Assist System One or more of the systems' sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

Park Assist System The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is Unavailable Service required recommended.

Related information • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 388) • Parking with Active parking assistance* (p. 390) • Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 395

STARTING AND DRIVING STARTING AND DRIVING

Alcohol lock* Bypass of the alcohol lock* Before starting the engine with the The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the In the event of an emergency situation or the alcohol lock car from being driven by individuals under the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car. then ready for use when the car is opened. started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the sep- To bear in mind alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in arate instructions for that specific lock. In order to obtain correct function and as accu- accordance with each market's limit value in Activating the bypass function (Bypass) rate a measurement result as possible: force for driving legally. • Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test. The car has an interface for the electrical con- NOTE nection of the different makes and models of All bypass activation is logged and saved in • Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alco- alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The inter- the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit. hol in the washer fluid may result in an incor- face facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives It is not possible to undo a bypass. rect measurement result. the option of an integrated function including messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's NOTE The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass main display. For information about a specific instead?, is shown in the screen: After a completed period of driving, the alcohol lock, please refer to its owner's manual. engine can be restarted within 30 minutes O – Select Bypass by pressing once on the without a new breath test. WARNING button on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. The alcohol lock is an aid and does not Related information > The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the exempt the driver from responsibility. It is • Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 398) always the responsibility of the driver to be car can be started. Starting the car (p. 400) sober and to drive the car safely. The number of bypasses possible before service • is required is selected during alcohol lock installation. Related information • Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock (p. 398) • Starting the car (p. 400)

398 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

Ignition positions Level Functions Level Functions The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the differ- 0 • Odometer, clock and temperature II • The headlamps come on. ent functions available. gauge are illuminated. • Warning/indicator lamps illuminate • Power seats can be adjusted. for 5 seconds. In order to facilitate the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the • The power windows can be used. • Several other systems are acti- car's electrical system can be set in 3 different • The centre display is started and vated. However, heating in seat levels - 0, I and II. These levels are described can be used. cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the car has with the denomination "ignition position" • It is possible to start the audio. throughout the owner's manual. been started. The functions are time-controlled in This ignition position consumes a The following table shows the functions available this ignition position and are switched lot of current from the battery and in each ignition position/level: off automatically after a period of time. should therefore be avoided! I • Panorama roof, power windows, Selecting ignition position 12V socket in the passenger compartment, navigation, phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used. • Power seats can be adjusted. • 12 V sockets in the cargo area can be used. • The audio is started automatically if it was running when the car was left. Power is taken from the battery in this ignition position. Ignition dial in the tunnel console. • Ignition position 0 - Unlock the car and store the remote control key inside the car.

}}

399 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| NOTE Starting the car 3. Depress the brake pedal fully1. The car is started using the remote control key To reach level I or II without starting the 4. Turn the start knob to START and release it. and the start knob in the tunnel console. engine, do not depress the brake pedal when The control automatically returns to its star- these ignition positions are to be selected. ting position. When the engine is started the starter motor • Ignition position I - Turn the ignition dial to works until the engine is started or until its over- START and release it. The control automati- heating protection triggers. cally returns to its starting position. When starting in normal conditions, the car's • Ignition position II - Turn the ignition dial to electric drive motor is prioritised - the petrol START and hold it in the START position for engine remains switched off. This means that approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob, after the start knob has been turned towards which automatically returns to its starting START, the electric motor has "started" and the position. car is ready to drive. A started car is indicated by • Back to ignition position 0 - To return to the driver display's indicator lamps extinguishing 0 I II and its preset theme illuminating. ignition position from position and - Start knob in the tunnel console. Turn the ignition dial to STOP and release it. However, there are situations where the petrol The control automatically returns to its star- The remote control key is not physically used engine is started instead, e.g. in the event of the ting position. when starting the car since the car is equipped temperature being too low or if the hybrid battery with support for keyless starting (Passive Start). needs charging. Related information To start the car: • Starting the car (p. 400) 1. The remote control key must be inside the Switching off the car (p. 401) • car. For cars with Passive Start, the key • Driver display (p. 95) needs to be located in the front part of the passenger compartment. With the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*), the key can be anywhere in the car. 2. Make sure that gear position P or N is selected. Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.

1 If the car is moving, then you simply need to turn the start knob towards START to start the engine.

400 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

If the message Car key not found is shown in WARNING Switching off the car the driver display when starting, place the remote The car is switched off using the ignition dial in Never remove the remote control key from control key on the backup reader in the cup the tunnel console. holder. Then try to start again. the car while driving.

NOTE WARNING When the remote control key is placed in the Always take the remote control key out from cup holder, make sure that no other car keys, the car when leaving the car and make sure metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g. the car's electrical system is in ignition posi- mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) tion 0 - especially if there are children in the are in the cup holder. Several car keys close car. to each other in the cup holder can cause interference with each other. NOTE The idling speed can be noticeably higher If the message Car start System check, wait is than normal for certain engine types during shown in the driver display when starting, wait cold starting. This is done in order that the Ignition dial in the tunnel console. until the message disappears and then try to emissions system can reach normal operating start the car again. To switch off the car: temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the – Turn the ignition dial to STOP and release it IMPORTANT environment. - the car is switched off. The control auto- If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - matically returns to its starting position. wait for 3 minutes before making a further Related information If the gear selector is not in P position or if the attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat- • Ignition positions (p. 399) car is moving: tery is allowed to recover. • Switching off the car (p. 401) – Hold the dial in the STOP position until the • Remote control key (p. 240) car switches off. NOTE • Replacing the battery in the remote control Related information The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery key (p. 261) • Starting the car (p. 400) is discharged. • Hybrid related information in the driver display (p. 97) • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 444)

401 STARTING AND DRIVING

Steering lock Using jump starting with another When jump-starting the car, the following steps The steering lock makes steering difficult if the battery are recommended to avoid short circuits or other car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise If the starter battery is discharged then the car damage: can be perceived when the steering lock locks can be started with current from another battery. or unlocks. Activating the steering lock The steering lock is activated when the car is locked from the outside and the engine is switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the steering lock will lock automatically after a while. Deactivating the steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the car is unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked, it is sufficient that the remote control key is inside the passenger compartment and the engine is START started by turning the start knob towards Charging point for jump-starting own car. in order to unlock the steering lock. Related information IMPORTANT • Starting the car (p. 400) The car’s charging point is only intended for • Switching off the car (p. 401) jump-starting the car itself. The charging point is not intended for jump-starting Steering wheel (p. 138) • another car. Using the charging point to jump start another car may cause a fuse to blow, which means the charging point will stop working.

When a fuse has blown the message 12 V Battery Fuse failure Service required is shown in the driver display. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.

402 STARTING AND DRIVING

1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition 9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed 12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - position 0. securely so that there are no sparks during first the black and then the red. the starting attempt. 2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of Make sure that none of the black jump lead's 12 V. 10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow clamps comes into contact with the car's it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly positive jump-starting point/donor battery's 3. If the donor battery is installed in another car higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm. positive terminal or the clamp connected to - switch off the donor car's engine and make the red jump lead. sure that the two cars do not touch each 11. Start your own car's engine. If the start other. attempt fails then extend the charging time to 10 minutes, and then make a new start WARNING 4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps attempt. to the donor battery's positive terminal (1). • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can NOTE be formed if a jump lead is connected IMPORTANT incorrectly, and this can be enough for When starting the engine in normal condi- Connect the start cable carefully to avoid the battery to explode. tions the car’s electric drive motor is priori- short circuits with other components in the • The battery contains sulphuric acid, which tised — the petrol engine remains off. This engine compartment. can cause serious burns. means that after the ignition dial has been • If sulphuric acid comes into contact with turned to START the electric motor has eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large 5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover “started” and the car is ready to drive. A quantities of water. If acid splashes into (2). started motor is indicated by the driver dis- the eyes - seek medical attention imme- 6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp play's indicator lamps extinguishing and its diately. onto the car's positive jump-starting point preset theme illuminating. (2). NOTE 7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps IMPORTANT The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery to the donor battery's negative terminal (3). Do not touch the crocodile clips during the is discharged. 8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp start procedure. There is a risk of sparks onto the car's negative jump-starting point forming. Related information (4). • Starter battery (p. 554) • Ignition positions (p. 399) • Starting the car (p. 400) }}

403 STARTING AND DRIVING

• Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 539) Gearbox Symbol Specification • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 444) The gearbox is part of the car's driveline (power transmission) between engine and drive wheels. Information or error message for The function of the gearbox is to change the gearbox. Follow the recommenda- gear ratio depending on speed and power tion given. requirements. Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow The car has an eight-speed automatic gearbox, the recommendation given. and an electric motor for rear-wheel drive. Using the steering wheel paddles* it is possible to change gear manually. The driver display shows Related information which gear position is currently in use. • Gear positions for automatic gearbox IMPORTANT (p. 405) To prevent damage to any drive system com- • Gear shift indicator (p. 407) ponents, the working temperature of the • Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over- (p. 408) heating, a warning symbol illuminates in the driver display and a text message is shown - follow the recommendation given.

Symbols in the driver display If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver display shows a symbol and a message.

404 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

Gear positions for automatic Change gear position by pressing the spring-loa- Select the P position when the car is parked or gearbox ded gear selector forwards or backwards. when starting the engine. The car must be sta- An automatic gearbox unburdens the driver, who tionary when the park position is selected. can instead focus attention on the traffic and the To select another gear position when the park road. The system selects gears in order to opti- position is selected, the brake pedal must be mise driving. depressed and the ignition position must be II. The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P Gear positions in the driver display position is engaged. Apply the parking brake first when the car is parked.

WARNING Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation. Gear positions Park position - P NOTE The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed. The driver display shows the gear selector's position: Help functions: P, R, N, D or B. The system will change to P position automati- During manual gear changing, the gear being cally: used is also shown (1-8). • if the car is switched off in position D or R. Changing gear • if the driver unfastens the seatbelt and opens The gear selector is the Shift-by-wire type where the driver's door when the engine is running gear changing is performed electronically rather with the gear selector in a position other P than mechanically. This means easier gear The park position is activated via the P button than . changing and more distinct gear positions. next to the gear selector. }}

405 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Reverse position - R Kick-down Select position R to reverse. The car must be sta- When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the tionary when reverse position is selected. way to the floor (beyond the position normally Neutral position - N regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is No gear is engaged and the engine can be immediately engaged. This is known as kick- started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta- down. tionary with the gear selector in N position. If the accelerator is released from the kick-down To be able to change from the neutral position to position, the gearbox automatically changes up. another gear position, the brake pedal must be Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration depressed and the ignition position must be II. is needed, such as for overtaking. Drive position - D Safety function D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and B-position in the driver display. To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gear- down takes place automatically based on the From the B position it is possible to change gear box control program has a protective downshift level of acceleration and speed. The car must be manually to lower gears. The driver display shows inhibitor. stationary when changing gear from R position to which gear (1 - 8) is being used. D position. The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kick- • Press the gear selector backwards once to down which would result in an engine speed high Brake position - B change down to the next lower gear. enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens B can be selected at any time while driving. In the if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at B position the car engine-brakes when the accel- • Press the gear selector backwards once more to change down further. high engine speed – the original gear remains erator pedal is released while the hybrid battery is engaged. charging. This gives more opportunities for To be able to change manually to a higher gear recharging the hybrid battery, since charging also requires that the car is equipped with steering When kick-down is activated the car can change takes place without the driver using the brake wheel paddles*. one or more gears at a time depending on pedal. engine speed. The car changes up when the • Press the gear selector forwards to return to engine reaches its maximum speed in order to the D position. prevent damage to the engine. The gearbox automatically shifts down if the speed decreases to a level lower than appropri- Related information ate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking • Gearbox (p. 404) and stalling. • Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 408)

406 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

• Gear shift indicator (p. 407) Gear shift indicator4 Related information • Gear selector inhibitor (p. 408) The gear shift indicator in the driver display • Gearbox (p. 404) • Ignition positions (p. 399) shows the current gear during manual gearshift- • Gear positions for automatic gearbox ing and when it is appropriate to engage the (p. 405) next gear for optimum fuel economy.

For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is important to drive in the right gear and to change gear in good time. The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in the driver display and uses an up arrow to indicate when shifting to a higher gear is recommended. The gear shift indicator is shown in gear position B.

Gear shift indicator in the driver display5.

4 Standard in certain markets. 5 The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.

407 STARTING AND DRIVING

Gear selector inhibitor Related information Changing gear with steering wheel The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental • Gear positions for automatic gearbox paddles* changing between different gear positions in an (p. 405) The steering wheel paddles are a complement automatic gearbox. • Ignition positions (p. 399) to the gear selector and make it possible to change gear manually without releasing hands Automatic gear selector inhibitor from the steering wheel. The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special Activating the steering wheel paddles safety systems. To be able to change gear with the steering From park position - P wheel paddles they must first be activated: To be able to move the gear selector from the P – Pull one of the paddles toward the steering position, the brake pedal must be depressed and wheel. the ignition position must be II. > A figure in the driver display indicates cur- From neutral position - N rent gear. If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked. To be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. Message in the driver display If the gear selector is inhibited, a message is shown in the driver display, e.g. Gear lever Press brake pedal to activate gear lever. Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel The gear selector is not inhibited mechanically. paddles. Changing gear To change gear one step:

408 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

– Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards Automatic deactivation Drive systems the steering wheel - and release. In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are XC90 Twin Engine is a parallel hybrid, which deactivated after a short time if they are not used. means that it has two separate drive systems: an This is indicated by means of the figure for the electric motor and an internal combustion current gear extinguishing. engine. Depending on the driver-selected drive In gear position B there is no automatic deactiva- mode and available electric energy, the two drive tion. systems can be used either individually or in parallel. Related information Two drive systems • Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 405) An advanced control system combines the properties of both drive systems in order to provide • Gear shift indicator (p. 407) optimum driving economy.

"-": Selects the next lower gear.

"+": Selects the next higher gear. A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle provided that the engine speed does not leave the permitted range. After each gear change the figure in the driver display changes to show the current gear. Deactivating the function Manual deactivation in gear position D. Hybrid battery – Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by pulling both paddles toward the steering Internal combustion engine wheel and holding in place until the figure in the driver display for the current gear extinguishes.

}}

409 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| High-voltage generator7 Drive modes Selecting drive mode Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving Electric motor characteristics in order to enhance the driving Both the internal combustion engine and electric experience and facilitate driving in special situa- motor can generate motive force directly to the tions. wheels. The internal combustion engine can also charge the electric motor's hybrid battery with a Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly special high-voltage generator. have access to the car's numerous functions and settings for different driving needs. The following Related information systems are adapted to obtain the best possible • Drive modes (p. 410) driving characteristics in each respective drive mode: • General information about XC90 Twin Engine (p. 54) • Steering • Engine/gearbox/all-wheel drive 1. Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE. • Brakes > A pop-up menu is opened in the centre • Air suspension and shock absorption display. • Driver display 2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the desired drive mode is highlighted. • Climate settings 3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly Select the drive mode that best suits the current on the touch screen to confirm the selection. driving conditions. Remember that not all drive > The selected drive mode is indicated in modes can be selected in all situations. the driver display. A message is shown when a drive mode is unse- lectable, for example: • Cannot be selected because gear is in manual • Cannot be selected due to low battery

7 Combined high-voltage generator and starter motor - CISG (Crank Integrated Starter Generator).

410 STARTING AND DRIVING

• Cannot be selected due to low higher speeds the ground clearance is adjusted shows how much energy is available for use. temperature automatically to a lower level in order to reduce Read more about hybrid information in the driver • Cannot be selected due to limitations wind resistance. display in the section "Hybrid related information in the driver display". • Cannot be selected because speed is The capacity to run solely with the electric motor too high. in the Hybrid drive mode depends on the hybrid The internal combustion engine starts when the battery's energy level and, for example, the need energy level in the battery is insufficient for the Selectable drive modes for heating/cooling in the passenger compart- engine power that the driver requests with the ment. accelerator pedal. WARNING If high power output is available, it is possible to The driver display also shows when energy is Remember that the car does not emit any drive with electrical power alone. When the accel- returned to the battery (regenerated) during light engine noise when it is only powered by the erator pedal is depressed, only the electric motor braking. More information on regeneration is electric motor and may therefore be difficult is activated until a certain position is reached. available in the section "Foot brake". to notice by children, pedestrians, cyclists and When this position is passed the internal com- At low energy level (hybrid battery almost empty) animals. This applies in particular at low bustion engine starts. speeds, such as in car parks. the battery's energy level must be maintained, leading to the internal combustion engine starting more often. WARNING Charge the hybrid battery from a 230 VAC Do not leave the car in an unventilated area socket with the charging cable, or activate with activated drive mode and the fuel-driven Charge in the function view in order to restore engine switched off - automatic engine start occurs at low energy level in the hybrid bat- the capacity to run on electricity alone. tery, and the exhaust gases could then cause serious injury to people and animals.

HYBRID • This is the car's normal mode. When the car starts, it is in the Hybrid mode. The The driver display for propulsion with both the electric control system uses both the electric motor and motor and internal combustion engine. fuel-driven engine - individually or in parallel - The pointer in the driver display indicates how and calculates optimal use with regard to per- much energy the car uses during driving, and the formance, fuel consumption and comfort. At small pointer between the flash and the drop }}

411 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| PURE In the event of difficulties due to misting, press NOTE • Drive the car with electric motor, with energy the button for max. defroster which has normal consumption as low as possible and with functionality. If the car is switched off in OFF ROAD mode, and therefore has high ground clearance, the lowest possible carbon dioxide emissions. OFF ROAD car is lowered next time it is started. The drive mode maximises driving on the hybrid • Maximise the car's traction when driving in battery. This means e.g. that the ground clear- difficult terrain and on poor roads. ance is lower to reduce wind resistance and that The drive mode provides high ground clearance, IMPORTANT the output of certain climate settings is reduced. steering is light, all-wheel drive and the function The OFF ROAD drive mode must not be used The Pure mode is available when the hybrid bat- for low speed control with hill descent control while driving with a trailer without trailer con- tery has a sufficiently high energy level. If the (Hill Descent Control) are activated. nector. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to energy level in the battery becomes too low, the The drive mode can only be activated at low the air bellows. internal combustion engine starts. The internal speeds and the speedometer shows the range combustion engine also starts for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded, Off AWD • if the speed exceeds 125 km/h (78 mph) Road mode is cancelled and the AWD drive • Improve the car's roadholding and traction mode is activated instead. • if the driver requests more motive force than with all-wheel drive. electric drive can provide The driver display is supplemented with a com- The drive mode is intended for low speeds on • in the event of system/component limita- pass and altimeter. slippery road surfaces but also has a stabilising tions, e.g. low outside temperature. To be able to drive all four wheels, the internal effect at higher speeds. Climate settings in Pure combustion engine and electric motor run contin- To be able to drive all four wheels, the internal ually, which results in increased fuel consump- combustion engine and electric motor run contin- NOTE tion. ually, which results in increased fuel consumption. When the Pure drive mode is activated, sev- NOTE eral parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several elec- The driving mode is not designed to be used tricity consumer functions are reduced. Cer- on public roads. tain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only regained by leaving Pure drive mode or adapting Individual drive mode with full climate functionality.

412 STARTING AND DRIVING

POWER 3. Select a drive mode to start from: Pure, Related information • Power mode makes the car feel sportier for Hybrid or Power. • Speed-dependent steering force (p. 278) more active driving. Possible adjustments apply to settings for • Level control* and shock absorption (p. 414) The drive mode maximises the combined power • Driver Display • Hybrid related information in the driver dis- from the internal combustion engine and electric play (p. 97) motor by means of the car being driven by both • Steering force • Foot brake (p. 416) front and rear wheels. The car has sportier cha- • Powertrain Characteristics racteristics and faster response to accelerating. • All-wheel drive (p. 416) • Brake Characteristics Driving in a lower gear, with delayed upshifting, is • Hill descent control (p. 425) prioritised. Steering response is faster, shock • Suspension Control absorption is harder and a lower ground clear- • ECO Climate. ance means that the body follows the roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering. Starting and stopping the combustion engine The internal combustion engine and electric motor are running continually, which results in An advanced control system determines the increased fuel consumption. extent to which the car is driven on internal combustion engine, electric motor or both in parallel. INDIVIDUAL • Adapting a drive mode according to individ- The primary function is to use the engine or ual preferences. motor and the available energy in the hybrid battery as efficiently as possible, with regard to the Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust characteristics of the different drive modes as the settings according to the desired driving cha- well as the driver's request for power via the racteristics. These settings are saved in an indi- accelerator pedal. vidual driver profile. There are also cases where temporary limitations An individual drive mode is only available if it is in the system, or functions governed by legal first activated in the centre display. requirements aimed at maintaining a low level of 1. Press Settings in the top view. total emissions for the car, may use the internal combustion engine to a greater extent. 2. Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and select Individual Drive Mode.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 413 STARTING AND DRIVING

Maintain or increase the hybrid Charge Level control* and shock absorption battery's state of charge while Engine charges hybrid Level control regulates the car's suspension and driving. battery. shock absorption characteristics automatically to In some situations it can be useful to be able to The function is only available ensure the best comfort and functionality while control the hybrid battery's state of charge while when the hybrid battery's state driving. It is also possible to adjust the level driving. The Hold and Charge functions are of charge is low and can manually in order to facilitate loading or entry available for the hybrid battery in all drive modes charge the hybrid battery up to and exit. while driving. 33 %. Hold is then activated automatically. Air suspension and shock absorption "Hold" and "Charge" function buttons Symbol in the driver display The system is adapted according to the selected These functions are activated in the centre dis- drive mode and according to the speed of the The symbol is shown in the driver display play's function view. car. Using the air suspension, the car's ground when one of the functions is activated, see the clearance is adjusted to a lower level at higher Hold section "Hybrid related information in the driver speeds, which reduces wind resistance and Battery level sustained for display". increases stability. Shock absorption is normally later use. Related information set for the best possible comfort and is regulated The function maintains the • Hybrid related information in the driver dis- continuously depending on the road surface, the charge in the hybrid battery for play (p. 97) car's acceleration, braking and cornering. electric operation saves availa- • Driving economically (p. 432) The driver display indicates ble electrical energy for later when level control is in pro- Drive modes (p. 410) use, e.g. for driving in an urban environment or • gress. through a residential area. Hold is available • Electric operation range in urban environ- regardless of the hybrid battery's state of charge. ment (p. 433) The car works as for normal hybrid operation and re-uses brake regenerated energy, for example, The level cannot be regulated when the bonnet to support the internal combustion engine. or any side door is open.

414 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

Settings for level control Loading mode During transport Entry assistance During transport of the car on a ferry, train or The car can be lowered to facilitate entry and exit. truck, the car must be lashed around the tyres and not around other parts of the chassis. Activating entry assistance via the centre display: Changes in the air suspension may occur during 1. Press Settings in the top view. transport, which could affect the lashing negatively. 2. Press My Car Suspension . Related information Easy Entry/Exit Control 3. Select . • Drive modes (p. 410) > When the car is parked with the engine Loading (p. 230) switched off, the car is lowered (level con- • trol stops if a door is opened and there may be a certain delay before level control resumes after the door has been closed). Use the buttons in the cargo area to regulate the When the car is started and begins to height of the car's rear section and facilitate move, the car will rise to the height setting loading/unloading or when connecting/discon- for the drive mode selected. necting a trailer. See the section "Loading". Deactivation of air suspension and level During parking control During parking, make sure you allow adequate In certain cases, the function must be deacti- space above and below the car since the car's vated, e.g. before the car is raised with a jack*. ground clearance may vary e.g. depending on the The difference in level created by raising the car outside temperature, how the car is loaded, the with a jack can otherwise cause problems for the use of loading mode or the drive mode that is air suspension. selected after starting. Deactivating the function via the centre display: The level may also be adjusted a period after the 1. Press Settings in the top view. car is parked. This is to compensate for any height changes that may occur due to tempera- 2. Press My Car Suspension . ture changes in the air springs when the car 3. Select Deactivate Suspension & Leveling cools down. Control.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 415 STARTING AND DRIVING

All-wheel drive Brake functions Foot brake All-wheel drive, AWD (All Wheel Drive), means The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed The foot brake is used to reduce the car's speed that the car is driving all four wheels at the same or prevent the car from rolling. while driving. time, which improves traction. Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car Foot brake system To achieve the best possible traction and prevent is equipped with several automatic brake assist The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a wheel spin the motive force is distributed auto- functions. These can assist the driver by not brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will matically to the wheels with the best grip. All- needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at higher when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on therefore be needed to produce the normal brak- speeds. Under normal driving conditions, the an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill ing effect. majority of power is transmitted to the front gradient. wheels. Depending on the car's equipment, the following WARNING All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on auto braking functions are available: In a de-energised car with the electric motor the selected drive mode. • Automatic braking when stationary and fuel-driven engine switched off it is not possible to brake the car. Related information • Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist) Drive modes (p. 410) • • Auto braking after a collision In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy • Low speed control (p. 424) • Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)* load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking in manual gear position B. Use Off Road Related information drive mode for increased engine braking while • Foot brake (p. 416) driving on steep downhill gradients at low speeds. Parking brake (p. 419) • Anti-lock braking system • Hill descent control (p. 425) The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking • Hill start assist (p. 422) System (ABS), which prevent the wheels from • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 423) locking while braking and allows maintained steering control. Vibration may be felt in the • Auto braking after a collision (p. 419) brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal. A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto-

416 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING matic test of the system may be made at low Braking on wet roads New and replaced brake linings and brake discs speed. The test may be experienced as pulses in When driving for a prolonged period of time in do not provide optimal braking effect until they the brake pedal. heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may have been "worn in" a few hundred kilometres. be delayed slightly when next using the brakes. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by Light braking charges the hybrid battery This may also be the case after a car wash. It is depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recom- The electric motor's engine brake is used during then necessary to depress the brake pedal more mends only fitting brake linings that are approved light braking. The car's kinetic energy is then forcefully. You should therefore maintain a for your Volvo. converted to electrical energy instead, which is greater distance to the vehicles in front. used to charge the hybrid battery. Battery charg- IMPORTANT ing with engine braking is indicated in the driver Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or display, see the section "Hybrid related informa- using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs, The wear on the brake system's components tion in the driver display". enabling them to dry faster and protecting them must be checked regularly. against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic Contact a workshop for information about the This function is active in the speed interval situation when braking. 150-5 km/h (93-3 mph). During heavier braking, procedure or engage a workshop to carry out as well as outside the speed interval, braking is Braking on salted roads the inspection - an authorised Volvo work- supplemented by the hydraulic brake system. When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may shop is recommended. form on the brake discs and brake linings. This may extend braking distance. You should there- Symbols in the driver display fore maintain an extra large safety distance to Symbol Specification vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do the following: Check the brake fluid level. If the • Brake now and again to remove any layer of level is low, fill with brake fluid and salt. Make sure that other road users are not check for the cause of the brake put at risk by the braking. fluid loss. • Gently depress the brake pedal after finish- Fault in pedal sensor. ing driving and before starting your next trip. Maintenance The driver display indicates charging during engine brak- To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, ing. follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

}}

417 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Symbol Specification WARNING Emergency brake lights Emergency brake lights are activated to alert If both the warning lamps for brake fault and Constant glow for 2 seconds when vehicles behind about heavy braking. The func- the engine is started: Automatic ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault has occurred in the brake system. tion means that the brake light flashes instead of function check. - as in normal braking - shining with a constant If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is • glow. Constant glow for more than 2 normal at this stage, drive carefully to the seconds: Fault in the ABS system. nearest workshop and have the brake The emergency brake lights are activated during The car's normal brake system is system checked - an authorised Volvo heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at still working, but without the ABS workshop is recommended. high speeds. After emergency braking to a low function. MIN • If the brake fluid is below the level in speed, the brake lights return from flashing to the the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- If the message Brake pedal Cha- ther before topping up the brake fluid. normal constant glow. The car's hazard warning racteristics changed Service The reason for the loss of brake fluid flashers are activated at the same time. These required is shown then the system must be investigated. flash until the driver accelerates the car to a for Brake-by-Wire is inoperative. higher speed again or switches off the hazard The brake pedal engages deeper Related information warning flashers. and a higher pedal pressure is • Brake functions (p. 416) Related information required to achieve braking effect. • Brake assistance (p. 419) • Foot brake (p. 416) • Brake lights (p. 148) • Hazard warning flashers (p. 149) • Emergency brake lights (p. 418) • Brake lights (p. 148) • Hybrid related information in the driver display (p. 97)

418 STARTING AND DRIVING

Brake assistance Auto braking after a collision Parking brake The brake assist system, BAS (Brake Assist In the event of a collision in which the activation The parking brake prevents the car from rolling System), helps to increase brake force during level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt ten- away from stationary by means of mechanically braking, thereby shortening the braking distance. sioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large locking/blocking two wheels. animal is detected, the car's brakes are automat- The system detects the way in which the driver ically applied. This function is to prevent or brakes and increases brake force where neces- reduce the effects of any subsequent collision. sary. The brake force can be boosted up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no function is suspended when the pressure on the longer possible to control and steer the car. In brake pedal decreases. order to avoid or mitigate a possible further collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's Related information path, the auto braking system is activated auto- • Foot brake (p. 416) matically and brakes the car in a safe manner. Brake lights and hazard warning lights are activated during braking. When the car has stopped, the hazard warning lights continue to flash and the parking brake is applied. The control for the parking brake is located in the tunnel console between the seats. If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk A faint electric motor noise can be heard when of being hit by following traffic, the system can be the electrically-operated parking brake is being overridden by the driver depressing the accelera- applied. The noise can also be heard during the tor pedal. automatic function checking of the parking brake. The function assumes that the brake system is If the car is stationary when the parking brake is intact after the collision. applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is Related information applied when the car is moving then the normal • Brake functions (p. 416) foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear Seatbelt tensioner (p. 63) • wheels when the car is almost stationary. • Airbags (p. 66) • Rear Collision Warning (p. 354)

}}

419 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Related information Using the parking brake Automatic application • Brake functions (p. 416) Use the parking brake to prevent the car from The parking brake is applied automatically: • Using the parking brake (p. 420) rolling from stationary. • if the Auto Hold function (automatic braking • In the event of a fault in the parking brake when stationary) is activated and the car has (p. 422) Applying the parking brake been stationary approx. 5 minutes. • when the car has been switched off. • when gear position P is selected on a steep hill. Emergency brake In an emergency, the parking brake can be applied when the car is in motion by pulling and holding up the control. Braking stops when the control is released.

NOTE An acoustic signal sounds while emergency 1. Pull the control upward. braking is active at high speeds. > The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the parking brake is applied. 2. Check that the car is stationary. Symbol in the driver display Symbol Specification The symbol is illuminated when the parking brake is applied. If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. Read the message on the driver display.

420 STARTING AND DRIVING

Releasing the parking brake Parking on a hill Related information • Parking brake (p. 419) WARNING • In the event of a fault in the parking brake Always apply the parking brake when parking (p. 422) on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 423) has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.

If the car is parked facing uphill: • Turn the wheels away from the kerb. If the car is parked facing downhill: • Turn the wheels towards the kerb. Releasing manually Heavy load uphill 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car 2. Press the control down. to roll backward when the parking brake is > The parking brake releases and the sym- released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid bol in the driver display extinguishes. this by pulling the control upwards while driving the car away. Release the control when the Releasing automatically engine achieves traction. 1. Put the seatbelt on. Settings for parking brake 2. Start the car. It is possible to deactivate/reactivate the function 3. Select gear position D or R and depress the for automatic application when the engine is accelerator pedal. switched off via the centre display. > The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Electric Parking Brake and deselect/select the function Auto Activate Parking Brake.

421 STARTING AND DRIVING

In the event of a fault in the parking Symbols in the driver display Hill start assist brake Symbol Specification Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not the car from rolling backwards when starting on possible to release or apply the parking brake If the symbol flashes, it indicates a an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it pre- after several attempts. fault has occurred. See the mes- vents the car from rolling forwards. sage in the driver display. An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving The function means that the pedal pressure in with the parking brake applied. Fault in brake system. See the the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal If the car must be parked before a possible fault message in the driver display. to accelerator pedal. is rectified, then the wheels must be turned as for parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in The temporary braking effect releases after sev- position P. Information message in driver dis- eral seconds or when the driver accelerates. play. Low battery voltage Hill start assist is available even if the function for If the battery voltage is too low then the parking automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is brake can neither be released nor applied. Con- deactivated. Message examples: nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too Related information low. • Parking brake Service required • Brake functions (p. 416) Replacing the brake linings • Parking brake System overheated • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 423) The rear brake linings must be replaced at a • Parking brake Temporarily unavailable workshop due to the design of the electrically- operated parking brake - an authorised Volvo Related information workshop is recommended. • Brake functions (p. 416) • Using the parking brake (p. 420) • Parking brake (p. 419) • Using jump starting with another battery (p. 402)

422 STARTING AND DRIVING

Automatic braking when stationary Switch for automatic brake Related information Automatic braking when stationary (Auto Hold) • Brake functions (p. 416) means that the driver can release the brake • Hill start assist (p. 422) pedal while maintaining braking effect when the car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction.

When the car has stopped, the brakes are activated automatically. The function can use either foot brake or parking brake to hold the car stationary and it works on all gradients. When the accelerator pedal is depressed again, the brakes are released. When braking to a stop on a downhill or uphill gradient - depress the brake pedal a bit harder The switch illuminates when the function is activated. before releasing to ensure that the car does not Activate or deactivate Auto Hold with the switch roll at all. in the tunnel console. The function remains deac- If the driver switches off the engine when the car tivated until it is reactivated. is stationary, the parking brake is applied. When the function is deactivated, hill start assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient. Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the foot brake to keep the car stationary.

The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the parking brake to keep the car stationary.

423 STARTING AND DRIVING

Low speed control Activating low speed control, LSC NOTE The low speed control function Low Speed The function is deactivated when driving at Control (LSC) facilitates off-road driving and higher speeds and must be reactivated at a driving on slippery surfaces, such as with a cara- lower speed, if required. van on grass or a boat trailer on a launch ramp.

The function is included in drive mode Off Related information Road. • Brake functions (p. 416) The function is adapted for off-road driving and • Hill descent control (p. 425) towing a trailer at low speeds. • Drive modes (p. 410) With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheel- spin and provides better traction on all wheels. The accelerator is more dynamic in order to make • Select the Off Road drive mode in order to it easier to regulate the speed at low speeds. activate the function. The function is activated together with Hill • Select a different drive mode in order to Descent Control (HDC) which provides increased deactivate. engine braking to be able to maintain a low and even speed when driving on a steep downhill gra- NOTE dient. Which system is active depends on the When LSC with HDC is activated by the OFF road surface, gradient of the road and car speed. ROAD driving mode, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response are changed.

NOTE The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads.

424 STARTING AND DRIVING

Hill descent control the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are NOTE Hill descent control, Hill Descent Control switched on when the function is operating. When LSC with HDC is activated by the OFF (HDC), is a low speed function with enhanced The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed, ROAD driving mode, the feel of the accelera- engine braking. The function makes it possible or stop the car at any time by using the foot tor pedal and engine response are changed. to increase or reduce vehicle speed on steep brake. downhill gradients using only the accelerator This function is activated by Low Speed Control pedal, without using the foot brake. NOTE (LSC), which makes it easier to drive on slippery The function is included in drive mode Off surfaces and enables a low and even speed. The driving mode is not designed to be used Road. Which system is active depends on the road sur- on public roads. face, gradient of the road and car speed. Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driving at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep Activating hill descent control, HDC NOTE downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The Hill descent control only works at low speeds. driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but The function is deactivated when driving at can instead focus on steering. higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. WARNING Related information HDC does not work in all situations but is Brake functions (p. 416) designed merely as a supplementary aid. • Low speed control (p. 424) The driver always bears ultimate responsibility • for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely. • Drive modes (p. 410)

Function Hill descent control allows the car to roll at inching speed both forward and backward with enhanced engine braking. The speed can be • Select the Off Road drive mode in order to increased by using the accelerator pedal. When activate the function. the accelerator pedal is then released the car slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of • Select a different drive mode in order to the gradient of the hill and without the need for deactivate. If the drive mode is changed while driving on a steep downhill gradient, the braking effect will gradually decrease.

425 STARTING AND DRIVING

Driving in water IMPORTANT Overheating in the engine and drive Driving in water means that the car is driven system Parts of the car (e.g. engine, gearbox, drive- through deep water on a water-covered road- Under special conditions, for example hard driv- line or electrical components) may be dam- way. Driving in water must be carried out with ing in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk aged when driving through water with a level great caution. that the engine and drive system may overheat - higher than the floor of the car. Damaged in particular with a heavy load. Note the following in order to prevent damage to caused to a component caused by submer- the car when driving through water (e.g. on floo- sion, hydrolock or lack of oil is not covered by • In the event of overheating, the engine's ded roads): the warranty. power may be limited temporarily. • The water level must not be higher than the In the event of stalling in water, do not try to • Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of floor of the car. If possible, check the depth restart. Instead, tow the car out of the water the grille when driving in hot climates. at the deepest point before starting to drive and transported on a low loader to a work- • If the temperature in the engine's cooling through the water. Extra caution should be shop. An authorised Volvo workshop is rec- system becomes too high then a warning exercised when passing through flowing ommended. symbol is illuminated and the driver display water. shows the message Engine temperature • Always change to Off Road drive mode When the water has been passed, depress the High temperature Stop safely. Stop the before driving through water in order to brake pedal lightly and check that full brake func- car in a safe way and allow the engine to run ensure that the engine is running. tion is achieved. Water and mud for example can at idling speed for several minutes and cool make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed • Do not drive faster than walking pace. down. brake function. Engine temperature High • Do not stop the car in the water. Drive for- • If the message ward carefully or reverse the car back out of If necessary, clean the contact for the trailer cou- temperature Turn off engine or Engine the water. pling after driving in water and mud. coolant Level low, turn off engine is shown, stop the car and switch off the • Remember that waves created by oncoming Related information engine. traffic may rise above the level for the floor of • Towing (p. 442) the car. • In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an • Recovering the car (p. 443) alternative gear shift program will be • Avoid driving through salt water (corrosion selected. In addition, a built-in protection risk). function is activated that, amongst other things, illuminates a warning symbol and the driver display shows the message Transmission warm Reduce speed to lower temperature or Transmission hot

426 STARTING AND DRIVING

Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the Related information Overloading the starter battery recommendation given, reduce speed or stop • Driving with a trailer under special conditions The electrical functions in the car load the starter the car in a safe way and allow the engine to (p. 440) battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the igni- run at idling speed for several minutes to • Preparations for a long trip (p. 428) tion position II when the engine is switched off. enable the gearbox to cool down. Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less • If the car overheats, the air conditioning may power. be switched off temporarily. Also, be aware of different accessories that load • Do not turn the engine off immediately you the electrical system. Do not use functions which stop after a hard drive. use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. Examples of such functions are: NOTE • ventilation fan It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to • headlamps operate for a time after the engine has been switched off. • windscreen wiper • audio system (high volume). Symbols in the driver display If the starter battery voltage is low, the message 12 V Battery Low charge, will soon enter Symbol Specification power save mode is shown in the driver display. High engine temperature. Follow The energy-saving function then shuts down cer- the recommendation given. tain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system. – In which case, charge the starter battery by Low level, coolant. Follow the rec- starting the engine and then running it for at ommendation given. least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary. Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled. Follow the recommendation given. Related information • Ignition positions (p. 399) • Starter battery (p. 554)

427 STARTING AND DRIVING

Preparations for a long trip • Speed camera information (p. 364) Winter driving Before a driving holiday or some other type of • Driving with a trailer (p. 438) For winter driving it is important to perform cer- long journey, it is important to check the car's • Driving in water (p. 426) tain checks of the car in order to ensure that it functions and equipment particularly carefully. can be driven safely. • Charging cable (p. 446) Check that: • Alarm (p. 267) Check the following in particular before the cold season: • the engine is working normally and that fuel • Level control* and shock absorption (p. 414) consumption is normal • The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol. • Warning triangle (p. 526) • there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid) This mixture protects the engine against • Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 516) frost erosion down to approximately –35 °C. • all bulbs are working • Spare wheel* (p. 524) To avoid health risks, different types of glycol • the tyres have sufficient tread depth and must not be mixed. pressure • The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent • a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are condensation. located in the car - legally required in certain • Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with countries lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting • the wiper blades are in good condition. in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. Read Related information more about suitable oils in the section • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions "Adverse driving conditions for engine oil". (p. 594) • Checking the tyre pressures (p. 510) IMPORTANT • Filling washer fluid (p. 553) Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard • Winter driving (p. 428) driving or in hot weather. • Driving economically (p. 432) • Settings for car modem* (p. 493) • The condition of the starter battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold • Loading (p. 230) weather places great demands on the starter • Pilot Assist-2* (p. 318) • Speed limiter* (p. 282)

428 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

battery and its capacity is reduced by the • Foot brake (p. 416) Opening/closing the fuel filler flap cold. • All-wheel drive (p. 416) and refuelling • Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice • Electronic stability control (p. 278) The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler forming in the washer fluid reservoir. system. Slippery driving conditions Opening/closing the fuel filler flap To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom- In the driver display, the arrow mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is next to the tank symbol indi- a risk of snow or ice. cates which side of the car the fuel filler flap is located. NOTE The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.

Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts. Related information • Topping up coolant (p. 543) • Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 590) • Starter battery (p. 554) • Winter wheels (p. 525) 1. Press the button on the instrument panel. • Filling washer fluid (p. 553) > Pressure equalisation of the fuel tank • Replacing a wiper blade (p. 552) involves a certain delay in opening the • Parking climate (p. 208) flap. The message Fuel tank Fuel lid is • Activating/deactivating defrost of windows opening is shown in the driver display, and door mirrors (p. 198) and then Fuel tank Ready for refuelling. • Drive modes (p. 410) }}

429 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| 2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap Label Handling of fuel with a gentle press. Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that rec- in a filling station area. Refuelling at a petrol station ommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect engine power and fuel consumption.

WARNING Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes. In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioe- thanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap. or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical atten- Refuelling is carried out as follows. tion immediately if fuel has been swallowed. Related information 1. Open the fuel filler flap. • Handling of fuel (p. 430) 2. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler open- WARNING ing. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni- pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps ted. before refuelling is started. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- 3. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump ting to refuel. nozzle cuts out the first time. Never carry an activated mobile phone when > The tank is full. refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury. NOTE Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

430 STARTING AND DRIVING

IMPORTANT Petrol Alcohols-ethanol Petrol is a form of motor fuel. Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels IMPORTANT which are not recommended will invalidate Only use petrol from well-known producers. Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must • Fuel that contains up to service agreements; this is applicable to all fulfil the EN 228 standard. 10 percent by volume ethanol is permit- engines. ted. • 95 RON can be used for normal driving. • EN 228 E10 petrol (max • 98 RON is recommended for optimum per- NOTE 10 percent by volume ethanol) is formance and minimum fuel consumption. approved for use. Extreme weather conditions, driving with a When driving in temperatures above +38 °C, fuel Ethanol higher than E10 (max. trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- • with the highest possible octane rating is recom- 10 percent by volume ethanol) is not per- tion with fuel grade are factors that could mended for optimum performance and fuel econ- mitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted. affect the car's performance. omy. Related information Related information IMPORTANT • Handling of fuel (p. 430) • Petrol (p. 431) Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag- • Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu- Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu- ing the catalytic converter. • • elling (p. 429) elling (p. 429) • Fuel containing metallic additives must • Driving economically (p. 432) not be used. • Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo.

431 STARTING AND DRIVING

Driving economically wheel heating first of all. Avoid warming up • Select Hold in the function view at higher Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv- the whole of the interior which takes energy speeds during journeys which are longer ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your from the hybrid battery. than the range of the electricity. driving style and speed to the prevailing condi- Drive • Drive with the correct air pressure in the tions. • For lowest energy consumption, activate the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO Pure drive mode. tyre pressure for best results. Plan for electric operation It is important to plan carefully when driving in • Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis- • Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - electric mode in order to achieve the longest tance to other vehicles and objects to mini- seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer. possible driving distance: mise braking. • Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the consump- Charge • Balance the power requirement using the accelerator pedal. Use the indicator for avail- tion. Charge the car regularly from the mains • able electric motor power in the driver display power circuit. Make it a habit to always start • A roof load and ski box increase air resis- in order to avoid starting the internal com- a journey with fully-charged hybrid battery. tance, leading to higher consumption - bustion engine unnecessarily. The electric remove the load carriers when not in use. • Find out where the charging stations are motor is more efficient that the internal com- Avoid driving with open windows. located. bustion engine, in particular at low speed. • • If possible, select a parking space with a See the section "Hybrid related information • Do not hold the car stationary on a hill with charging station. in the driver display". the accelerator pedal. Use the foot brake instead. Precondition • During braking - brake gently with the brake • Precondition the car before driving if possible pedal, this recharges the hybrid battery. A Related information using the charging cable connected to the regenerative braking function is integrated in • Electric operation range in urban environ- mains power circuit. the brake pedal. ment (p. 433) • Avoid parking the car in a way that the inte- • When driving in hilly terrain, utilise the engine • Maintain or increase the hybrid battery's rior cools down or overheats while parking. braking function in gear position B. The car state of charge while driving. (p. 414) engine brakes when the accelerator pedal is Park the car in an acclimated garage, for • Approved tyre pressures (p. 596) example. released, and the hybrid battery is recharged. • High speed results in increased energy con- • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions • During a short drive after preconditioning of (p. 594) the passenger compartment, switch off the sumption - the wind resistance increases ventilation fan if possible. with speed. • Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25) • If preconditioning is not possible when it is cold outside, use seat heating and steering

432 STARTING AND DRIVING

• Hybrid related information in the driver dis- Electric operation range in urban 10 °C 90 % play (p. 97) environment • Gear positions for automatic gearbox The car's range for electric operation depends 5 °C 85 % (p. 405) on several factors. The ability to achieve a long 0 °C 80 % range varies according to the circumstances and conditions under which the car is being driven. -5 °C 75 %

The driver can influence some factors, but has no -10 °C 70 % influence over others. The longest range is achieved under extremely favourable conditions when all factors have a positive impact. Factors that affect the range Factors the driver cannot influence There are several external factors that affect the range in varying degrees: • traffic situation • short driving distances • topography • outside temperature and headwind • road condition and surface. The table shows the approximate ratio between the outside temperature and the range of a car with reduced climate settings. A warmer outside temperature has a positive effect on range.

25 °C 105 % 20 °C 100 %

}}

433 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Factors the driver can influence NOTE Towing bracket* The driver should be aware that the following fac- The car can be equipped with a towing bracket The values shown in the tables relate to a tors affect the range so he/she can operate the • that makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer after new car. car in an energy-efficient manner: the car. These are not absolute values, but are regular charging • • dependent upon driving behaviour, envi- There may be different towing bracket variants • Preconditioning ronment and other circumstances. available for the car; contact a Volvo dealer for • drive mode Pure more information. • Climate settings Driving with electric operation For information on towing capacity and towball • speed and acceleration Select drive mode Pure for the most energy-effi- load, see the section "Towing capacity and tow- cient driving - to get as far as possible with elec- ball load". Hold function • tric power alone. • tyres and tyre pressure. Select Hold with the function button in the cen- IMPORTANT The table shows the approximate ratio between tre display at higher speeds during journeys When the engine is switched off, the constant constant speed and range, where a lower con- which are longer than the range of the electricity. battery voltage to the trailer connector can be stant speed has a positive effect on range. switched off automatically so as not to drain Related information the starter battery. 100 km/h (62 mph) 70 % • Driving economically (p. 432) Maintain or increase the hybrid battery's 90 km/h (56 mph) 80 % • state of charge while driving. (p. 414) IMPORTANT 80 km/h (50 mph) 90 % • Drive modes (p. 410) The towball needs regular cleaning and lubri- cation with grease in order to prevent wear. 70 km/h (43 mph) 100 %

60 km/h (37 mph) 110 % NOTE 50 km/h (31 mph) 120 % When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated. This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack that is clamped in around the towball.

434 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

NOTE Extendable/retractable towing brackets* If the car is equipped with a towing bracket, The extendable/retractable towing hitch is there is no rear mounting for a towing eye. always easily accessible and simple to extend or retract as needed. In the retracted position, the Related information towing hitch is completely concealed. • Driving with a trailer (p. 438) • Towing capacity and towball load (p. 586) WARNING • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 440) Follow the instructions for retracting and extending the towing bracket carefully. • Towing bracket specifications* (p. 437) 1. Open the tailgate. A button for extending/ retracting the towbar is located on the right- Extendable/retractable towing brackets* • Extending the towing hitch hand side at the rear of the cargo area. An (p. 435) indicator lamp in the button must illuminate WARNING with a constant orange glow for the extension function to be active. Avoid standing close to the bumper in the centre behind the car when extending the towing hitch.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 435 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Retracting the towing hitch

IMPORTANT Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in the electrical socket when retracting the towing bracket.

1. Open the tailgate. Press and release the button on the right-hand side at the rear of the 2. Press and release the button - extension 3. Move the towbar to its end position, where it cargo area - retraction might not start if the might not start if the button is pressed for is secured and locked in place - the indicator button is pressed for too long. too long. lamp illuminates with a constant orange > The towing bracket automatically lowers in glow. > The towbar extends out and down in an an unlocked position - the indicator lamp unlocked position - the indicator lamp > The towbar is ready for use. in the button flashes orange. flashes orange. WARNING WARNING Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable Do not press the extend/retract button if a in the intended bracket. trailer is attached to the towing bracket. NOTE Power save mode activates after a while and the indicator lamp goes out. The system is reactivated by closing and opening the tailgate. This applies when retracting or extending the towing bracket. If the car detects a connected trailer electrically, the indicator lamp stops illuminating with a constant glow.

436 STARTING AND DRIVING

Towing bracket specifications* Dimensions, mounting points (mm) Dimensions and mounting points for the towing bracket. A 1476 B 86 C 875 D 437,5 E See the image above 2. Lock the towing bracket by moving it back to F 273 its retracted position, where it is locked. > The indicator lamp will now illuminate with G Ball centre a constant glow if the towing bracket is correctly retracted. Related information • Towing bracket* (p. 434)

Related information • Towing bracket* (p. 434) • Towing bracket specifications* (p. 437)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 437 STARTING AND DRIVING

Driving with a trailer • Follow the regulations in force for the permit- IMPORTANT When driving with a trailer, there are a number of ted speeds and weights. When the engine is switched off, the constant points that are important to think about regar- Maintain a low speed when driving with a • battery voltage to the trailer connector can be ding the towing bracket, the trailer and how the trailer up long, steep ascents. switched off automatically so as not to drain load is positioned in the trailer. • The maximum trailer weights given only apply the starter battery. Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The to altitudes up to 1000 metres above sea level. At higher altitudes, engine power and total of the weight of the passengers and all Trailer weights thus the car's climbing ability is decreased accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay- Information about Volvo's permitted trailer load by a corresponding weight. due to the reduced air density, and the maximum trailer weight must therefore be weights is available in the article "Towing The car is supplied with the necessary equipment reduced. The weight of the car and trailer capacity and towball load". for towing a trailer. must be decreased by 10% for each addi- WARNING • The car's towing bracket must be of an tional 1000 m (or part thereof). approved type. • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be Distribute the load on the trailer so that the than 12%. • difficult to control in the event of sudden weight on the towing bracket complies with NOTE movement and braking. the specified maximum towball load. Towball load is calculated as part of the car's payload. Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- • Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- NOTE tion with fuel quality are factors that could mended pressure for a full load. For more The stated maximum permitted trailer weights affect the car's fuel consumption. information on tyre pressure, see the section are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle "Approved tyre pressures". regulations can further limit trailer weights • The engine is loaded more heavily than usual Trailer connector and speeds. Towbars can be certified for when driving with a trailer. An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket higher towing weights than the car can has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin actually tow. • Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo. brand new. Wait until it has been driven at Make sure the cable does not drag on the Direction indicators and brake lights on least 1000 km. ground. the trailer • The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift If one or more of the trailer lamps is broken, the to a lower gear and adjust your speed. driver display shows a symbol and a message.

438 STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbol Message 2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- Level control* hand steering wheel keypad's O button. The car endeavours to maintain a constant height • Trailer turn indicator Right > The lamp check starts. regardless of load (up to the maximum permissi- turn indicator malfunction ble weight). When the car is stationary the rear of 3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality. • Trailer turn indicator Left the car lowers slightly, which is normal. turn indicator malfunction > All trailer lamps start to flash - then the lamps are switched on one at a time. Related information Driving with a trailer under special conditions • Trailer brake light Malfunc- 4. Visually check that all lamps available on the • (p. 440) tion trailer are operational. Towing capacity and towball load (p. 586) 5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash • again. • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 440) If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is > The check is complete. • Approved tyre pressures (p. 596) broken, the driver display symbol for direction indicators will also flash more quickly than nor- Switching off automatic checking • Towing bracket* (p. 434) mal. The automatic checking function can be switched off in the centre display. Checking trailer lamps* 1. Press Settings in the top view. Automatic checking 2. After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possi- Press My Car Lights. ble to check that the trailer lamps are working via 3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp Check. an automatic lamp activation. The function helps Manual checking the driver check that the trailer lamps are working If the automatic checking is switched off then it is before starting off. possible to start the check manually. The engine must be switched off to perform the 1. Press Settings in the top view. check. 2. 1. When a trailer is connected to the towing Press My Car Lights. bracket, the Automatic Trailer Lamp 3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check. Check message is shown in the driver dis- > The lamp check starts. Exit the car to play. check lamp functionality.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 439 STARTING AND DRIVING

Driving with a trailer under special 4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off. Trailer Stability Assist* conditions Related information The function of the trailer stability assist Trailer When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot Stability Assist (TSA) is to stabilise cars with Driving with a trailer (p. 438) climate there may be a risk of overheating. • attached trailers in situations where they begin • Overheating in the engine and drive system In the event of overheating, a warning symbol illu- (p. 426) minates in the driver display together with a mes- • Low speed control (p. 424) sage, see section "Overheating in the engine and drive system". • Using the parking brake (p. 420) The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed. Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine speed. Parking on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully. 2. Activate the parking brake. 3. Select gear position P. 4. Release the brake pedal. Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill. Starting on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully. 2. Select gear position D. 3. Releasing the parking brake.

440 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING snaking. The function is included in the stability If snaking is not eliminated the first time that Related information system ESC10. trailer stability assist comes into action, the car/ • Driving with a trailer (p. 438) trailer combination is braked with all wheels and Reasons for snaking • Driving with a trailer under special conditions engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been (p. 440) The snaking phenomenon can occur with any gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combi- car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs nation is stable once again, the system stops • Electronic stability control (p. 278) at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring regulating and the driver once again has full con- at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the trol of the car. load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back. In order for snaking to occur, there must be a NOTE triggering factor, e.g.: The stability function is deactivated if the • Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and driver selects Sport mode by deactivating powerful side wind. ESC via the menu system in the centre display. • Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole. The trailer stability assist may fail to engage if the Sweeping steering wheel movements. • driver uses severe steering wheel movements to If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even try to rectify the snaking because in such a situa- impossible to suppress. This makes the car/ tion the system cannot determine whether it is trailer combination difficult to control and there is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snak- a risk that you could, for example, end up in the ing. wrong lane or leave the carriageway. When trailer stability assist is Trailer Stability Assist function operating, the ESC symbol The trailer stability assist function continually flashes in the driver display. monitors car movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car.

10 Electronic Stability Control (Electronic stability control)

441 STARTING AND DRIVING

Towing eye Towing Use the towing eye if the car shall tow another During towing, one vehicle pulls another vehicle vehicle. The towing eye is screwed into a threa- along behind it by means of a towline. ded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the rear bumper. Towing the XC90 Twin Engine is not permitted since this damages the electric motor. When NOTE moving the car it must be transported raised up with all the wheels on a recovery vehicle's plat- If the car is equipped with a towing bracket, form. there is no rear mounting for a towing eye. Remove the cover - press on the marking When towing another car Fitting the towing eye with a finger and, at the same time, fold out Towing a car requires a lot of energy - use the the opposite side/corner using a coin or sim- AWD drive mode. This then charges the hybrid ilar. battery, in combination with improving the car's > The cover pivots around its centre line and driving characteristics and roadholding. can then be removed. Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for 3. Screw the towing eye right in until it stops. towing before the towing begins. Tighten the towing eye firmly e.g. using the Jump starting wheel wrench*. Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged its place. and the engine does not start. Take out the towing eye from the foam block Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper. under the floor hatch in the cargo area. IMPORTANT IMPORTANT The electric drive motor and the catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to It is important that the towing eye is firmly tow-start the car. screwed into place - right in until it stops.

Related information Related information Warning triangle (p. 526) • Towing (p. 442) • Towing eye (p. 442) • Recovering the car (p. 443) •

442 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING

• Recovering the car (p. 443) Recovering the car WARNING For recovery, the car is taken away with the help • Using jump starting with another battery No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind (p. 402) of another vehicle. the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform. • Ignition positions (p. 399) Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. The towing eye can be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. NOTE If the car is equipped with a towing bracket, IMPORTANT there is no rear mounting for a towing eye. Note that the XC90 Twin Engine must always be transported raised up with all the wheels Related information on the recovery vehicle's platform. • Towing (p. 442) • Towing eye (p. 442) Applies to cars with level control*: If the car is equipped with air suspension , this must be disabled before the car is raised. Deactivating the function via the centre display. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Suspension . 3. Select Deactivate Suspension & Leveling Control. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting device.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 443 STARTING AND DRIVING

Charging the hybrid battery batteries is reduced outside this temperature Charging with the petrol engine In addition to the fuel tank, as in a conventional range. car, the car is equipped with a rechargeable bat- Electric operation is not possible if the tempera- tery - a so-called hybrid battery of the lithium-ion ture of the battery is too low or too high. If drive type. mode PURE is then selected, the combustion engine starts. Read more in the section "Drive The hybrid battery is charged using a charging modes". cable with control unit, which is located in the storage area under the cargo area floor, see sec- Charging with fixed control unit in tion "Charging cable". accordance with mode 311 In certain markets the control unit is installed NOTE within a charging station connected to the mains Volvo recommends a charging cable in power circuit. In which case, the charging cable accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC 61851 has no control unit of its own. Instead, it has a The car generates current to the battery and the battery special connector to be used to connect the is charged, e.g. when the brake pedal is pressed lightly which supports temperature monitoring. or during engine braking down a hill. charging cable to the charging station. Follow the instructions at the charging station. The hybrid battery can also be charged by the The time it takes for the hybrid battery to be car's engine. The hybrid battery is recharged dur- charged is dependent on the charging current ing gentle braking with the brake pedal. that is used. The hybrid battery is also recharged during During the charging of the car's hybrid battery engine braking in gear position B when e.g. trav- the various indicators on the charging cable's elling downhill. control unit shows the current status while charging is in progress and after it is complete. Read more in the sections "Gear positions for automatic gearbox" and "Hybrid related informa- While the hybrid battery is being charged, charg- tion in the driver display". ing is also in progress for the car's starter battery. If the hybrid battery's temperature is below Related information -10 ºC or above 40 ºC then it may mean that • Charging current (p. 445) some of the car's functions are changed or • Charging cable (p. 446) unavailable because the capacity of the hybrid

11 European standard - EN 61851-1.

444 STARTING AND DRIVING

• Gear positions for automatic gearbox Charging current ing. If charging time seems long, it should be (p. 405) Charging current is used for charging the hybrid investigated. • Preparation for charging the hybrid battery battery as well as preconditioning of the car. The (p. 452) charging cable between the car's charging input Current intensity (A)A Charging time (hours) socket and a 230 VAC socket12 can be set for • Long-term storage of vehicles with hybrid 6 6 batteries (p. 457) different current intensity loads (6-16 A) using the control unit. • Drive modes (p. 410) 10 3.5 When the charging cable is activated, the driver 16 2,5 display shows a message and a lamp is illuminated in the car's charging input socket (see sec- A Maximum charging current may vary depending on market. tion "Charge status"). The charging current is mainly used for battery charging, but is also used NOTE for preconditioning the car. • If the weather is very hot or very cold, some of the charging current is used to IMPORTANT heat/cool the hybrid battery and the pas- Never unplug the charging cable from the senger compartment, which results in a 230 VAC socket while charging is in progress longer charging time. - there is then a risk of damaging the • The charging time is extended if precon- 230 VAC socket. ditioning has been selected. The time required depends mainly on the outside Always stop charging first before unplugging temperature. the charging cable from the car's charging input socket and then from the 230 VAC socket.

Charging time varies with the amperage setting on the control unit. The following charging times apply to optimal charging, i.e. when no climate control function or other load is affecting charg-

12 The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market. }}

445 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Example 2 Charging cable If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A The charging cable with its control unit is used socket and the control unit is set at 10 A, then to charge the car's hybrid battery. Use a charg- the car will draw 10 A from the 230 VAC mains ing cable recommended by Volvo. power circuit. If additional consumers are connected to the same socket (or another socket in the same fuse circuit) then there is a risk that the fuse for the socket/fuse socket will be overloaded and triggered, at which point battery charging is stopped. In such cases, reset the fuse for the socket/fuse circuit and select a lower charging current on the Charging cable plug and charging input socket. control unit - or disconnect other consumers Normally several 230 VAC consumers are from the socket/fuse circuit. included in a fuse circuit, so additional consumers (e.g. lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric drill, Example 3 etc.) can be on the same fuse. If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A socket and the control unit is set at 6 A, then the The charging cable is located in the storage compart- Example 1 car will only draw 6 A from the 230 VAC mains ment under the cargo area's floor cover. If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A power circuit. Battery charging will of course take socket and the control unit is set at 16 A, then longer, but then additional consumers can be Specifications, charging cable connected at the same time to the same socket/ the car will attempt to draw 16 A from the Enclosure class IP67 230 VAC mains power circuit - after a while the fuse circuit as long as the total load does not overloaded 10 A fuse for the socket will be trip- exceed the capacity of the socket/fuse circuit. Ambient temperature -32 ºC to +50 ºC ped and battery charging stopped. Related information In which case, reset the fuse for the socket and • Starting/stopping preconditioning (p. 209) select a lower charging current on the control unit, see section "Preparation for charging the • Preparation for charging the hybrid battery hybrid battery". (p. 452) • Charge status (p. 454)

446 STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING Control unit Indicator shows selected charging current13. The charging cable must not be used if any The symbol illuminates when the charging part of it is damaged - there is then the risk of cable is plugged into a 230 VAC socket14. electric shock and serious personal injury. Pushbuttons to increase/decrease the A damaged or inoperative charging cable charging current. must only be repaired by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The symbol illuminates when the charging cable is plugged into the car's charging input socket. IMPORTANT Never unplug the charging cable from the NOTE 230 VAC socket while charging is in progress The charging cable will remember the last - there is then a risk of damaging the setting of the charging current. It is therefore 230 VAC socket. important to adjust the setting if another Always stop charging first before unplugging 230 VAC socket is used at the next charging. the charging cable from the car's charging input socket and then from the 230 VAC socket. IMPORTANT Multiple plugs, overvoltage protection or similar devices must not be used together with the charging cable since this may involve a risk of fire, electric shocks, etc. An adapter between the 230 VAC socket and charging cable may only be used if the adapter is approved in accordance with IEC 61851 and IEC 62196.

Control unit indicators and controls.

13 Maximum charging current may vary depending on market. 14 The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market. }}

447 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Related information • Status indication in the charging cable's control unit (p. 449) • Ground fault breaker in the charging cable (p. 451) • Temperature monitoring of the charging cable (p. 451) • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 444)

448 STARTING AND DRIVING

Status indication in the charging cable's control unit During the charging of the car's hybrid battery the various indicators on the charging cable's control unit shows the current status while charging is in progress and after it is complete.

Control unit indicators and controls.

}}

449 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Control unit indicators Status Specification Recommended action The indicator for charging current (1) is Standby • The charging cable is connected to the car. Wait until the battery is fully charged. extinguished. The car symbol (4) illuminates • Charging is possible but has not yet been with a constant green glow. activated by the electronics in the car. Existing current consumption is shown with Charging in pro- • The car's electronics have started charging. Wait until the battery is fully charged. a green indicator (1). The car symbol (4) gress. • Charging in progress. illuminates with a constant green glow. The indicator for charging current (1) is Charging is not • There is a communication error between the 1. Check all connections or use extinguished. The car symbol (4) flashes possible. control unit and the car. another 230 VAC socket. red. • The ventilation for the car's electronics is not 2. Restart the battery charging. adequate, not activated or defective. The car symbol (4) illuminates with a con- Charging is not • The ground fault breaker on the charging 1. Unplug the charging cable from stant red glow. possible. cable has triggered. the 230 VAC socket. 2. The ground fault breaker is reset and the unit restarts. The indicator for charging current (1) and Charging is not Temperature monitoring has triggered for the Restart charging. If the problem per- the house symbol (2) flash red. possible. 230 VAC socket. sists - consult a qualified professional.

Related information • Hybrid-related symbols and messages (p. 458) • Charge status (p. 454)

450 STARTING AND DRIVING

Ground fault breaker in the Temperature monitoring of the IMPORTANT charging cable charging cable If the temperature monitoring has automati- The control unit for the charging cable charging For the car's hybrid battery to be charged safely cally lowered the charging current repeatedly cable has a built-in ground fault breaker that pro- every time, the control unit for the charging cable and charging has been interrupted then the tects the car and the user from electric shocks and the plug have built-in monitoring devices for cause of the overheating must be investiga- caused by system faults. the temperature. ted and rectified. If the control module's built-in ground fault Temperature monitoring takes place in the con- breaker is tripped then the car symbol illuminates trol unit and the plug. Related information with red constant glow - check the 230 VAC • Charging cable (p. 446) socket. NOTE Volvo recommends a charging cable in WARNING accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC 61851 Charging the hybrid battery must only take which supports temperature monitoring. place with grounded and approved 230 VAC sockets. If the capacity for the socket or fuse circuit is unknown, ask a licensed electrician Monitoring in the control unit to check the capacity. Charging above the Charging is switched off if the temperature of the capacity of a fuse circuit may lead to fire or control unit is too high. This is to protect the damage the fuse circuit. electronics. This may take place at a high outer temperature, for example, and/or when strong IMPORTANT sunlight shines directly on the control unit. Monitoring at the plug The ground fault breaker does not protect the If the temperature at the power source to which 230 VAC socket/electrical installation. the charging cable is connected is too high, the charging current is reduced. If the temperature Related information exceeds a critical level, charging is stopped com- • Charging cable (p. 446) pletely.

451 STARTING AND DRIVING

Preparation for charging the hybrid Before charging Opening/closing the hatch for the battery charging input socket Before starting to charge the car's hybrid bat- IMPORTANT tery, a number of preparations need to be made. • The charging cable and its associated parts should not be swamped or WARNING immersed in water. • The hybrid battery must only be charged Avoid exposing the control unit and its at maximum permitted charging current • or lower in accordance with applicable plug to direct sunlight. In such cases, the local and national recommendations for overheating protection in the plug is at hybrid charging from 230 VAC sockets/ risk of reducing or interrupting the charg- plugs. ing of the hybrid battery. • Charging the hybrid battery must only take place from an approved grounded IMPORTANT 230 VAC socket15 or from a charging station with a loose charging cable (Mode • Check that the 230 VAC socket has ade- Press in the rear section of the cover and 3) supplied by Volvo. quate power supply for charging electric release. • The control unit's ground fault breaker vehicles - in the event of uncertainty the Open the cover. protects the car, but there may still be a socket must be checked by a qualified risk of overloading the 230 VAC mains professional. Pull away the cover for the charging input power circuit. • If the socket has unknown current inten- socket and secure it in the holder inside the • Avoid visible worn or damaged mains cover. Make sure that the cover's rubber sockets since they may lead to fire dam- sity - use the lowest level on the control age and/or personal injury if used. unit. straps are bent downwards in order to prevent the cover coming off from the holder. • Never use an extension cable. On the charging cable's control unit, set the Close the cover for the charging input socket in required charging current 6-16 A16. On delivery, reverse order. WARNING the lowest possible charging current is preset. Related information Replacing the hybrid battery must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo • Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 453) workshop is recommended. • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 444)

15 Or equivalent sockets with a different voltage, depending on market. 16 Maximum charging current may vary depending on market.

452 STARTING AND DRIVING

Start charging the hybrid battery Take the charging cable from the storage com- The car's hybrid battery is charged with a charg- partment under the cargo area floor. Note that ing cable between the car and a 230 VAC the car must be switched off prior to charging. socket17.

IMPORTANT Never connect the charging cable when there is a risk of lightning.

Clamp the charging handle's cover in place NOTE as illustrated. Volvo recommends a charging cable in accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC 61851 Connect the charging cable to a 230 VAC IMPORTANT which supports temperature monitoring. socket. Never use an extension cord. To avoid damage to the paint, e.g. in the event 2. Set the correct charging current (for current of high winds, position the charging handle's 230 VAC socket) on the control unit. protective cover so that it does not touch the car.

Remove the charging handle's cover and then connect the handle to the car.

17 The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market. }}

453 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| 5. The charging cable's charging handle is fas- IMPORTANT Charge status tened/locked in, and charging starts within Charge status is shown in an LED lamp in the Never unplug the charging cable from the 5 seconds. The driver display shows the car's charging input socket and in the driver dis- 230 VAC socket while charging is in progress remaining estimated charging time or play, amongst others. whether charging is not working as intended. - there is then a risk of damaging the Read more in the section "Charge status". 230 VAC socket. Indication in the charging input socket's Battery charging can be interrupted for a Always stop charging first before unplugging LED lamp while if the car is unlocked: the charging cable from the car's charging input socket and then from the 230 VAC • and the door is opened - charging restarts socket. within 2 minutes. • without the door being opened - the car is relocked automatically. Charging restarts Condensation from the air conditioning may drip after 1 minute. under the car during charging. This is normal and takes place due to cooling of the hybrid battery. NOTE Related information Charge status is shown in the driver display, • Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 456) amongst other things. If it is not used for a • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 444) while then it is dimmed. Reactivate the display Status indication in the charging cable's con- LED lamp location in the car's charging input socket. by means of one of the following: • trol unit (p. 449) The LED lamp shows the existing status while • depress the brake pedal charging is in progress. The white, red and yellow • open one of the doors lamps are activated when the passenger com- • set the car in ignition position I by turning partment lighting is switched on - they remain the start knob to START and releasing. switched on for a while after the passenger compartment lighting has been switched off.

454 STARTING AND DRIVING

LED lamp's Specification NOTE Image Message Specifica- glow Charge status is shown in the driver display, tion White LED light. amongst other things. If it is not used for a Fully Charging while then it is dimmed. Reactivate the display charged at: continues Yellow A Waiting mode - waiting for by means of one of the following: [Time] is and an charging to start. • depress the brake pedal shown approxi- together mate time Flashing green Charging in progressB. open one of the doors • with an ani- for when Green Charging completeC. • set the car in ignition position I by turning mation with the battery the start knob to START and releasing. blue pulsat- is estimated Red A fault has arisen. ing light to be fully A For example, after a door has been opened or if the charging through the charged is cable's plug is not locked in. charging shown. B The slower the flashing, the closer to fully charged. C Extinguishes after a while. cable. Charge status in the driver display The text The battery The driver display shows the status for charging Charging is fully with both image and text. The information is complete is charged. shown for as long as the driver display is operat- shown. An ing. illustration of the car is shown with an LED indicator at the charging input socket that illuminates in green.

}}

455 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Image Message Specifica- Stop charging of hybrid battery tion Finish charging by unlocking the car, unplugging the charging cable from the car's charging input The text A fault has socket and then from the 230 VAC socket18. Charging occurred, error is check the NOTE shown. The connection LED indica- of the Always unlock the car so that charging is tor at the charging stopped before the connection to the charging cable to the 230 VAC socket is unplugged. Note that the input socket car's charg- charging cable must be unplugged from the Unplug the cable from the car's charging illuminates in ing input car's charging input socket before being input socket, refit the charging input socket's red. socket and unplugged from the 230 VAC socket, partly cover and close the hatch. to the to avoid damage to the system and partly to 230 VAC avoid stopping the charging unintentionally. socketA.

A The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market. Related information • Hybrid-related symbols and messages (p. 458) • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 444) • Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 456) Unplug the cable from the 230 VAC socket. • Status indication in the charging cable's con- Return the charging cable to the storage trol unit (p. 449) space under the cargo area floor. Unlock the car with the remote control key - charging is finished and the charging cable's Related information locked plug releases/is unlocked. • Hybrid related information in the driver display (p. 97) • Charging cable (p. 446)

18 The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market.

456 STARTING AND DRIVING

Long-term storage of vehicles with 2. If storage has lasted longer than 6 months or hybrid batteries the hybrid battery charge level is significantly To minimise hybrid battery degradation during lower than 25% - charge the battery to prolonged storage (longer than 1 month) of the approx. 25% again to compensate for the vehicle, a charge level of approximately 25% is natural self-discharge that occurred during recommended, as indicated on the driver dis- the prolonged storage. Continuously check play. the charge level in the driver display. For handling the starter battery in connection Proceed as follows: with long-term storage, see "Using jump starting with another battery".

NOTE Choose the coolest location possible for the vehicle in order to minimise aging of the battery during long-term storage. During summer the vehicle should preferably remain indoors or outdoors in the shade, depending on where the temperature is lowest.

Related information • Drive modes (p. 410) 1. If the state of charge is high - run the car until approx. 25% remains. If the state of • Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 453) charge is low - charge the battery until a • Using jump starting with another battery level of approx. 25% is reached. (p. 402) • Drive systems (p. 409)

457 STARTING AND DRIVING

Hybrid-related symbols and display. They may also be shown in combination messages with general indicator and warning symbols and A number of symbols and messages regarding are then extinguished when the problems have XC90 Twin Engine can be shown in the driver been rectified.

Symbol Message Specification

12 V Battery Hybrid battery fault. Contact a workshopA to check the battery as soon as possible. Charging fault, service urgent. Drive to workshop

12 V Battery Hybrid battery fault. Stop the car safely and contact a workshopA to have the battery checked as Charging fault Stop safely soon as possible.

12 V Battery The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged for optimal driving. Charge the battery as soon as Low charge, temporarily reduced func- possible. tionality

12 V Battery The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged. Stop the car as soon as possible and charge the bat- Charging fault, low battery. Stop safely tery.

12 V Battery Hybrid battery fault. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible. Fuse failure Service required

Hybrid battery The temperature of the hybrid battery seems to be rising abnormally. Stop the car and switch off A Overheated, stop safely the engine. Wait at least 5 minutes before continuing to drive. Call a workshop or check from the outside that everything seems normal before continuing to drive.

458 STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbol Message Specification Reduced performance The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged for driving at high speeds. Charge the battery as soon Max car speed limited as possible.

Hybrid system The hybrid system does not function as intended. Contact a workshopA to check the function as Harsh behaviour at low speed, car ok soon as possible. to use

Hybrid system failure The hybrid system is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible. Service required

Charge cable Shown when the driver tries to start the car and the charging cable is connected to the car. Dis- Remove before start connect the charging cable and close the charging hatch.

Charge cable Shown when the driver starts the car with the charging cable connected to the car after an earlier Removed? Turn and hold start knob 7s attempt. Disconnect the charging cable or investigate whether the cable actually is disconnected and that the charging hatch is closed.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information • Warning symbols in the driver display • Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 453) (p. 101) • Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 456) • Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 99) • Charging cable (p. 446) • Hybrid related information in the driver dis- • Status indication in the charging cable's con- play (p. 97) trol unit (p. 449)

459

AUDIO AND MEDIA AUDIO AND MEDIA

Audio and media Related information Apps The audio and media system consists of media • Media player (p. 470) Applications (apps) are programs that are used player, radio and Bluetooth phone connection. • Radio (p. 464) to control some of the car's functions. With an online car it is also possible to listen to Phone (p. 482) services via apps. • • Online car* (p. 488) Functions can be controlled by voice command or via the steering wheel keypad and the centre • Apps (p. 462) display. The number of speakers and amplifiers • Ignition positions (p. 399) depends on which audio system the car is • Symbols in the centre display's status bar equipped with. (p. 45) • Voice recognition (p. 118) • System updates (p. 534) • License agreement for audio and media (p. 495)

Overview of audio and media. System updating Application view. The audio and media system is continuously Some basic apps are always available. When the improved. When the car is online there is the car is online it is possible to download more. The option to download updates for optimal function- apps that are available to download vary, but can ality, see the section "System updates" and include Internet radio and music services. support.volvocars.com. Certain apps are only available for use if the car is connected to the Internet.

462 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

– Tap on an app in the app view to launch it. Audio settings Related information The audio system is preset for optimal sound reproduction, but can be adapted according to Online car* (p. 488) • needs. • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 494) The volume is normally adjusted with the volume control below the centre display or with the right- Changing settings for apps (p. 183) • hand steering wheel keypad. Setting for optimal sound reproduction The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account Microphones in the car's roof. loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combination of car model and audio system. There is NOTE also a dynamic calibration that takes into account Do not cover the car's microphones; other- the setting of the volume control and vehicle wise a rumbling sound from the audio system speed. may be produced. Audio settings are described in the corresponding section in the owner information. To access Related information the settings, open the top view and tap on • Audio settings for media (p. 476) Settings Sound. • Settings for voice recognition (p. 120) Active noise reduction • Settings for phone (p. 487) Certain cars are equipped with an active noise • Audio and media (p. 462) reduction function that suppresses engine noise • Online car* (p. 488) in the passenger compartment via the audio system. Microphones in the car's roof detect disruptive noise and the audio system outputs anti- noise in order to dampen the noise.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 463 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Radio Related information Changing and searching radio It is possible to listen to the FM bands and to • Changing and searching radio stations stations digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is online it is (p. 464) The radio automatically compiles a station list of also possible to listen to Internet radio. • Digital radio (p. 468) the radio stations within the area that are transmitting the strongest signals. • RDS radio (p. 467) • Online car* (p. 488) Starting the radio • Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 121) • Media player (p. 470)

The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the 1. Open the app (e.g. FM) from the app view. centre display. 2. Select station.

464 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

Changing lists within the frequency Genres — only plays back channels broadcast- Radio Favourites band ing the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop Radio Favourites shows saved or classical. favourites from all frequency bands. Changing stations within the selected list – Press on < > under the centre display or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. > The highlight moves up or down one 1. Open the app Radio favourites from the place in the selected playlist. app view. You can also change stations from the centre 2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start display. listening. When you remove a favourite, it will also be Favourites removed from frequency band favourites. When a favourite is saved from a list, the radio will automatically search for the best frequency. But if a favourite is saved from a manual station search, the radio does not automatically change to a stronger frequency. To choose among favourites within the frequency band, see the heading “Changing lists within the frequency band” above. To choose from among all favourites, see the heading “Radio Favourites” 1. Press Library. below. 2. Select playback from Stations, Favourites, – Tap on to add or remove a channel to or Genres or Ensembles4. from frequency band favourites and Radio 3. Tap on the desired station from the list. Favourites. Favourites — only plays back selected favourite channels, see heading “Favourites” below.

4 Only applies to digital radio (DAB). }}

465 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| Changing radio band Searching for radio stations 3. Enter the search terms. > Searching takes place with each input of a character and the search results are shown by category. Manual tuning

– Tap on the app (such as FM) from app view, The parameters you can search on depend on or open the app menu with the right-hand the frequency band selected: steering wheel keypad and select from there. • FM — station, genre and frequency. • DAB - ensembles and stations. 1. Press Library. On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no longer changes frequency automatically when 2. Press . reception is poor. > Search view with keyboard is opened. – Tap on Manual tuning, pull the control or tap on < > to the desired frequency.

466 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Related information RDS radio Related information • Radio (p. 464) With RDS (Radio Data System) the radio can • Radio (p. 464) • Digital radio (p. 468) automatically change to the strongest transmit- • Settings for radio (p. 469) ter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic Voice recognition control of radio and media • information and to search for certain programme (p. 121) types.

RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions: • Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor. • Search for programme category, e.g. programme types or traffic information. • Receive text information on current radio programme.

NOTE Some radio stations do not use RDS or only selected parts of its functionality.

When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio source currently in use. For example, if the CD player is in use, it is paused. The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast. To go back earlier, press on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel in the centre display.

467 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Digital radio DAB subchannel Linking between different radio Digital radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting, DAB) Secondary components are usually named sub- bands FM and DAB is a digital broadcasting system for radio. The channels. These are temporary and can contain The function enables the digital radio to switch radio supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB (Digital e.g. translations of the main programme into from a channel with poor or no reception to the Multimedia Broadcasting). other languages. Subchannels are indicated with same channel in another channel group (ensem- an arrow symbol in the channel list. ble) with better reception, within DAB and/or The radio can be operated between DAB and FM. using voice recognition, the Related information steering wheel keypad or the • Changing and searching radio stations DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking centre display. (p. 464) 1. Press Settings in top view. Linking between different radio bands FM • 2. Press Media DAB. and DAB (p. 468) 3. DAB To DAB Handover The digital radio app is • Voice recognition control of radio and media Tick/untick and/or DAB To FM Handover launched from app view in the (p. 121) in order to activate/ deactivate the respective functions. centre display. • Radio (p. 464) • Settings for radio (p. 469) Related information Digital radio (p. 468) • Resetting settings in the settings view • (p. 178) • Radio (p. 464) Digital radio plays back in the same way as FM • Settings for radio (p. 469) and AM, see section "Changing and searching for radio stations". Besides the options to select playback from Stations, Favourites and Genres, there is also the option to select playback from subchannels and Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio channels (a channel group) broadcasting on the same frequency. In the cases where the radio channel transmits its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside the station name (download time varies).

468 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Settings for radio is resumed when the message is finished. Alarm - interrupts the current media play- Settings for the different radio bands. The Local Interruptions function is a geo- back and sends alerts about major accidents graphically restricted version of the Traffic and disasters. Playback of previous media The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be Announcement function. The Traffic source is resumed when the message is fin- temporarily interrupted by tapping on in the Announcement function must be activated ished. right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping at the same time. Road Traffic on Cancel in the centre display. • Alarm - interrupts the current media play- Flash — receives information about traffic disruptions. Drag down the top view and select Settings back and sends alerts about major accidents Media and the desired radio band. Activating/ and disasters. Playback of previous media News Flash — receives news. source is resumed when the message is fin- deactivating functions. Transport ished. Flash FM — receives information about public DAB transport, e.g. ferry and train timetables. Show Radio Text — shows information on • Sort Services programme content, artists, etc. • - selection for how channels Warning/ will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by Services — receives information about inci- Freeze Program Service Name — select • service number. dents of lower significance than the Alarm to stop the programme service name from DAB To DAB Handover function, e.g. power failures. scrolling continuously. Instead it freezes after • - starts the func- 20 seconds. tion for linking within DAB. If reception of a • Show Radio Text — select to show radio radio channel is lost, another channel is text or selected types of radio text, e.g. artist. • News - interrupts the current media play- found automatically in another channel group Show Program Related Images — select back and broadcasts news. Playback of pre- (ensemble). • vious media source is resumed when the whether or not to show images for pro- DAB To FM Handover news broadcast is finished. • - starts the function grammes on the screen. for linking between DAB and FM. If reception • Traffic Announcement - interrupts the cur- of a radio channel is lost, an alternative fre- Related information rent media playback and broadcasts informa- quency is searched for automatically. • Radio (p. 464) tion about traffic disruptions. Playback of Select Announcements Types Digital radio (p. 468) previous media source is resumed when the • — select • message is finished. the types of messages to be received while • Symbols in the centre display's status bar DAB is playing. Selected messages will inter- (p. 45) • Local Interruptions — interrupts the cur- rupt the current media playback to play back rent media playback and broadcasts informa- the message. Playback of previous media tion about traffic disruptions in the neigh- source is resumed when the message is fin- bourhood. Playback of previous media source ished.

469 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Media player • Apps (p. 462) The media player can play back audio from • Radio (p. 464) CDs* and externally connected audio sources • CD player* (p. 474) via the AUX/USB input or wirelessly stream audio files from external devices via Bluetooth. • Media via Bluetooth (p. 475) Video can be watched from USB connected • Media via AUX/USB input (p. 475) devices. In an Online connected car, it is possi- • video (p. 476) ble to listen to Internet radio, audiobooks and music services via apps. The media player also operates the radio, which is described in a separate section.

The media player is controlled from the centre display, but several functions can be controlled from the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or by voice recognition control.

Related information • Media playback (p. 471) • Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 121)

470 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

Media playback 2. Open the app CD from the app view. 3. Start playback from the connected media source. The media player is controlled from the centre 3. Select what to play back. display. Several functions can also be controlled > Playback begins. 4. Open the app Bluetooth from the app view. from the right keypad on the steering wheel or > Playback begins. with voice recognition. USB memory 1. Insert the USB memory. Internet media The media player also operates the radio, which 1. Connecting the car. is described in a separate section. 2. Open the app USB from the app view. 2. Open the app from the app view. 3. Select what to play back. Starting the media source > Playback begins. > Playback begins. video Mp3 player and iPod® 1. Connect media source. NOTE 2. Open the app USB from the app view. To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app 3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play (not USB). back. > Playback begins. When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's audio and media system has a menu Apple CarPlay structure that is similar to the iPod player's Apple CarPlay is described in a separate section. own menu structure. Controlling and changing media The media player can be oper- 1. Connect media source. ated by voice recognition, from 2. Start playback from the connected media the steering wheel keypad or source. the centre display. 3. Open the app (iPod, USB, AUX) from the app view. > Playback begins. Bluetooth connected device 1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source. CD* 1. Insert a CD. 2. Connect media source. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 471 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| tre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand Playing back DivX® keypad. This DivX Certified® device must be registered in Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis order to play back purchased DivX Video-on- in the centre display and drag sideways, or press Demand (VOD) films. and hold depressed under the centre dis- 1. Press Settings in top view. play or on the steering wheel's right-hand key- 2. pad. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the registration code. Changing media - select under Recent sources in the app, and in the app view, tap on the 3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and desired app, or select using the steering wheel's to complete the registration. right-hand keypad via the app menu . Related information Library - tap on the button to play back from the • Using the application menu in the driver dis- library. play (p. 109) Shuffle - tap on the button to shuffle the play- • Voice recognition control of radio and media back order. (p. 121) Connecting the car (p. 489) Similar - tap on the button in order to use • Gracenote to search for similar music on the • Apps (p. 462) USB device and to create a playlist from it. The • Searching media (p. 474) playlist can contain a maximum of 50 songs. Connecting media via Bluetooth (p. 475) Volume - turn the control knob in the centre dis- • Change device - tap on the button in order to play or press on on the steering wheel's • Connecting media via AUX/USB input switch between USB devices when several are (p. 476) right-hand keypad in order to increase or connected. decrease the volume. • CD player* (p. 474) Settings for video Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the • Radio (p. 464) With the video player in full screen mode, or by song being played, the button under the centre ® opening the top view and pressing Settings • Gracenote (p. 473) display or on the steering wheel's right-hand Video, the following can be adjusted: Primary • video (p. 476) keypad. Audio Default Language, Subtitle and • Audio settings for media (p. 476) Change track/song - tap on the desired track in Primary Subtitle Default Language. the centre display, press on under the cen-

472 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

• Apple CarPlay* (p. 478) Gracenote® Updating Gracenote • Technical specifications for media (p. 481) Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles The content of the Gracenote database is upda- and associated images, which are shown during ted continuously. Download the latest update for playback. optimal functionality. For information and download, see support.volvocars.com. Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music recognition. Related information • Media playback (p. 471) Activate/deactivate Gracenote • License agreement for audio and media On activation, Gracenote data replace the original (p. 495) data. 1. Press Settings in top view. 2. Press Media Gracenote®. 3. Activate/deactivate Gracenote by ticking/ unticking the box for Gracenote®. 4. Select settings for activated Gracenote data: • Gracenote® Online Look Up - searches in Gracenote's online database for playing media. • Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects how to display Gracenote data if there are more than one search results. 1 - the file's original data are used. 2 - Gracenote data are used. 3 - Gracenote or original data can be selected. • None - no results are shown.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 473 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Searching media 3. Press Search. CD player* It is possible to search by artist, composer, song > Connected devices are searched and the The media player can play back CD discs with (titles), album, video, audiobook, playlist and, search results are listed by category. audio files. See technical specifications for sup- when the car is online, podcasts (digital media ported formats. Swipe sideways across the screen to show each via Internet). category separately. Related information • Media player (p. 470) • Media playback (p. 471) • Using the keyboard in the centre display (p. 49) • Online car* (p. 488)

Disc insert and eject slot.

Disc eject button.

Related information • Media playback (p. 471) • Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 121) • Media player (p. 470) Technical specifications for media (p. 481) 1. Press . • > Search view with keyboard is opened. 2. Enter the search terms.

474 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

Media via Bluetooth Connecting media via Bluetooth Media via AUX/USB input The car's media player is equipped with Connect a Bluetooth device with the car in order An external media source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 Bluetooth and can wirelessly play streaming to stream media and use as Internet connection player, can be connected to the audio system. audio files from external devices with Bluetooth, if it is available. such as mobile phones and PDAs. A media source with rechargeable batteries is Many phones on the market now have wireless recharged when connected via USB and when Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully the ignition is in position I, II or the engine is run- Related information compatible with the car. For compatibility, see ning. • Connecting media via Bluetooth (p. 475) support.volvocars.com. To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick, only • Media playback (p. 471) The procedure for connecting a media device is store compatible formats on it. It takes a lot • Voice recognition control of radio and media the same as for connecting a phone. longer for the system to load storage media that (p. 121) contains anything other than compatible formats. Related information • Media player (p. 470) In addition to audio, the media player also sup- • Connect phone (p. 483) ports video playback when the device is con- • Ignition positions (p. 399) • Media via Bluetooth (p. 475) nected via USB. • Technical specifications for media (p. 481) • Media playback (p. 471) Some MP3 players have their own file systems • Media player (p. 470) that are not supported by the audio system. Related information • Connecting media via AUX/USB input (p. 476) • Media playback (p. 471) • Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 121) • Media player (p. 470) • Ignition positions (p. 399) • video (p. 476) • Apple CarPlay* (p. 478) • Technical specifications for media (p. 481)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 475 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Connecting media via AUX/USB video Audio settings for media input Video from a USB-connected device can be Personalisation of audio settings for media play- An external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 played back with the media player. back. player, can be connected to the audio system via any of the connectors in the tunnel console. The There will be no picture when the car is moving, cable must be routed out in the front to avoid but the audio continues to be played back. The being trapped when the hatch is closed. picture returns when the car is stationary. See section "Technical specifications for media" In the cases where there are two USB ports, the for supported video formats. one with the white frame around the port must be used for connecting an Iphone when it will be Related information used for Apple CarPlay. • Media playback (p. 471) • Media player (p. 470) • Technical specifications for media (p. 481)

Audio mode that recreates the acoustics from Gothen- burg Concert Hall. 1. Press Settings in top view. 2. Tap on Sound and select settings: • Sound Experience* — more audio playback options, e.g. playback with concert hall feel. Settings replace any selections made in accordance with the points below Related information for audio settings. • Media playback (p. 471) • Tone — personal settings for bass, treble, • Media via AUX/USB input (p. 475) equaliser, etc. • Media player (p. 470) • Balance - balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/ Technical specifications for media (p. 481) • rear loudspeakers.

476 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

System volumes for media TV*12 Change the list of visible channels 1. Press Settings in top view. The TV picture is only shown when the car is 1. Press Library 2. Press Sound System Volumes: stationary. There will be no picture when the car 2. Select playback from TV-channels, is moving, but the audio continues to be played Favourites or Genres. • AUX - If an external audio source (e.g. an back. The picture reappears when the car has MP3 player or iPod) is connected to the stopped. 3. Select the desired channel. AUX input then the audio source that is Change channel from selected list connected can have a different volume – Press on <> under the centre display or on than the audio system's internal volume the steering wheel keypad. (e.g. radio). Correct this by adjusting the > The highlight moves up or down one volume of the input. If the volume is too place in the selected playlist high or too low then the quality of the sound can be impaired. You can also change stations from the centre display. • Speed and Volume Compensation - the audio system compensates for dis- Favourites rupting noises in the passenger compart- A TV channel can be saved as a Favourite: ment by increasing the volume in relation – to the speed of the car. Compensation Tap on in order to add/remove a chan- level can be set. nel to/from the favourites list. The TV is controlled from the centre display. Several Related information functions can also be controlled from the right keypad • Audio settings (p. 463) on the steering wheel or with voice recognition. • Media player (p. 470) Start the TV 1. Open the app TV from the app view. 2. Select a channel. Change or search for TV channels The TV automatically searches for the channels with best reception.

12 Applies to certain markets. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 477 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| TV guide Settings for TV*15 Apple CarPlay* A programme guide is available with information The option to make certain settings is available, Apple CarPlay gives you the option to listen to about TV programmes for up to 24 hours. both in the top view or when TV-viewing takes music, make phone calls, get directions, send/ – Tap on Guide to show information about TV place in full screen mode. receive messages and use Siri, all while you stay programmes. focused on your driving. Apple CarPlay works Settings for TV with selected Apple devices. NOTE With the video player in full screen mode, or by If the car is moved within the country, e.g. opening the top view and pressing Settings from city to city, it is not certain that Media TV, the following can be adjusted: Favourites are available since the frequency Primary Subtitle Default Language may have changed. • • Primary Audio Default Language

Change the format of the TV picture NOTE Tapping on Picture format enables you to choose which format the TV picture should be The system only supports TV broadcasts in shown in. the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2 or MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T/T2 1. Auto - The TV picture is shown in the image standard. The system does not support ana- format being transmitted. logue broadcasts. If the car is not already equipped with 2. Auto fill - The TV picture is maximised with- Apple CarPlay then it is possible to install it after- out cropping. Related information wards. Contact a Volvo dealer to install Related information • TV* (p. 477) Apple CarPlay. • Settings for TV* (p. 478) • License agreement for audio and media Information about which apps are supported and which phones are compatible is available on Voice recognition control of radio and media (p. 495) • Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. (p. 121) Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the • Media playback (p. 471) content in Apple CarPlay. • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 40)

15 Applies to certain markets.

478 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

NOTE fully responsible for your and any others 2. If the setting for automatic start is not person’s use of Apple CarPlay. selected - open the Apple CarPlay app Apple CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth from the app view. is deactivated. A phone or media player con- Starting Apple CarPlay > The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened nected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore Voice recognition control with Siri must be acti- and compatible apps are shown. not be available when CarPlay is active. An vated in the phone before using Apple CarPlay. alternative Internet source must be used to 3. Tap on the desired app. The first time an iPhone is connected connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use > The app starts. 1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port. In the Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*. cases where there are two USB ports, the Apple CarPlay runs in the background if another one with the white frame around the port app is started in the same subview. To show When using map navigation via Apple CarPlay must be used. Apple CarPlay in the subview again - tap on the there is no guidance in the driver display or head- Apple CarPlay icon in the app view. up display, but only in the centre display. 2. Read the information in the pop-up message and then tap on OK. Switch the connection between The Apple CarPlay apps can be controlled via the Apple CarPlay and iPod centre display, mobile phone or with the steering 3. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view. wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain 4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap Apple CarPlay to iPod functions). The apps can also be voice-controlled on Accept to connect. 1. Press Settings in top view. using Siri. A long press on the steering wheel > The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened 2. Press Communication Apple CarPlay. button starts voice control using Siri and a and compatible apps are shown. short press activates the car's own voice control. 3. Untick the box for the Apple device that shall If Siri breaks off too early, hold the steering wheel 5. Tap on the desired app. no longer start Apple CarPlay when it is con- button depressed. > The app starts. nected. Previously connected iPhone By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge 4. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to the following: Apple CarPlay is a service 1. Connect the phone to the USB port. In the the USB input. cases where there are two USB ports, the provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and iPod one with the white frame around the port 5. Open the app from the app view. conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not must be used. responsible for Apple CarPlay or its features/applications. When using Apple > If the setting for automatic start is CarPlay, certain information from your car selected - the subview with (including its position) is transferred to your Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are apps are shown. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 479 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| iPod to Apple CarPlay Settings for Apple CarPlay* Related information 1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view. Settings for phone connected as Apple CarPlay. • Apple CarPlay* (p. 478) Resetting settings in the settings view 2. Read the information in the pop-up message Automatic start • and then tap on OK. (p. 178) 1. Press Settings in top view. 3. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to 2. the USB input. Press Communication Apple CarPlay and select setting: > The subview with Apple CarPlay opens. • Tick the box - Apple CarPlay starts auto- Related information matically when the USB cable is con- • Media player (p. 470) nected. • Media playback (p. 471) • Untick the box - Apple CarPlay does not • Connecting media via AUX/USB input start automatically when the USB cable is (p. 476) connected. • Settings for Apple CarPlay* (p. 480) A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in • Connecting the car (p. 489) the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted. A factory reset is required in order to delete the list, see the section "Resetting settings in the settings view". System volumes 1. Press Settings in top view. 2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following: • Voice Control • Navigation • Ringtone

480 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

Technical specifications for media Format File extension Max file size 4 GB Compatible file formats, audio specifications and USB. AVI .avi Audio codec MP3, AC3 Audio files AVI (DivX) .avi, divx Subtitles XSUB For- File extension Codec ASF .asf, .wmv Special func- Multiple subtitles, multiple mat tions audio, resume play MKV .mkv MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III, Reference Meets all requirements of MPEG2 Layer III, Subtitles the DivX Home Theater profile. Visit divx.com for more MP3 Pro (mp3 Format File extension compatible), information and software MP3 HD (mp3 SubViewer .sub tools to convert your files compatible) into DivX Home Theater SubRip .srt video. AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4 part III Audio), SSA .ssa Storage on USB device HE-AAC (aacPlus DivX® In order for the system to read the USB device v1/v2) DivX certified devices have been tested for high- correctly, the following specifications must be fol- WMA .wma WMA8/9, quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you lowed. No folder structure will be shown in the WMA9/10 Pro see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play centre display during playback. DivX films. WAV .wav LPCM Max number Profile DivX Home Theater FLAC .flac FLAC Files 15000 Video codec DivX, MPEG-4 Video files Folders 1000 Resolution 720x576 Format File extension Folder levels 8 Bit rate 4.8Mbps MP4 .mp4, m4v Playlists 100 Frame rate 30 fps MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v Items in a playlist 1000 File extension .divx, .avi Subfolders No limit }}

481 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| Technical specification for USB Phone Overview connector A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth can be • Type A socket connected wirelessly to the car's built-in hands- • Version 2.0 free system. • Voltage supply 5 V The audio and media system acts as a handsfree, • Current supply max. 2.1 A with the facility to remotely control a selection of the mobile phone's functions. The mobile phone Related information can still be operated with its own keys if it is con- • Media player (p. 470) nected to the car. • Media playback (p. 471) When a mobile phone has been connected with the car and connected, it can be used make calls, send/receive messages, stream media and provide an Internet connection. Microphone. The phone is operated from the Mobile phone. centre display, but some operations are also available via voice Phone operation from centre display. recognition and the app menu, which are accessed from the Keypad for operating phone functions that right-hand steering wheel key- are shown in the driver display and voice rec- pad. ognition. Driver display.

Related information • Connect phone (p. 483) • Connecting/disconnecting the phone (p. 484) • Managing phone calls (p. 485) • Managing text messages (p. 486) • Settings for phone (p. 487)

482 AUDIO AND MEDIA

• Settings for text messages (p. 488) Connect phone 3. Open the subview for phone. • Bluetooth settings (p. 488) Connect a Bluetooth-activated phone to the car • If there is no phone connected to the car, • Voice recognition (p. 118) to make calls, send/receive messages, stream tap on Add phone. media and connect the car to the Internet. • Using the application menu in the driver dis- • If there is a phone connected to the car, play (p. 109) It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices con- tap on Change . In the pop-up win- • Media player (p. 470) nected at once, in which case one of them can dow, tap on Add phone. only be streaming media. The most recently con- > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. nected phone will automatically be connected to make calls, send/receive messages, stream 4. Tap on the name of the phone to be con- media and provide an Internet connection. To nected. change the use of the phone, see section 5. Check that the specified number code in the "Bluetooth settings". car matches that in the phone. In which case, Connection is performed once per device. After choose to accept in both places. connection, the Bluetooth device no longer 6. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any needs to be visible/searchable but only needs to options for phone contacts and messages. have Bluetooth activated. To connect the car to the Internet via a phone, tethering must be acti- NOTE vated on the phone. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth devices can be stored in the car. • The message function must be activated in some phones. There are two options for connecting. Either search the phone from the car or search the car • Not all mobile phones are compatible and from the phone. can show contacts and messages in the car. Option 1 - search phone from car 1. Make the phone searchable/visible via Bluetooth. 2. To connect the car to the Internet via the phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (portable/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the phone.

}}

483 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| Option 2 - search car from phone NOTE Connecting/disconnecting the 1. Open the subview for phone. phone The message function must be activated • Connect, change or disconnect a connected • If there is no phone connected to the car, in some phones. phone. tap on Add phone Make car • Not all mobile phones are compatible and discoverable. can show contacts and messages in the Connect phone automatically • If there is a phone connected to the car, car. It is only the two last connected phones that can tap on Change . In the pop-up win- be connected automatically. dow, tap on Add phone Make car NOTE 1. Activate Bluetooth and tethering18 (portable/ discoverable. personal hotspot) on the phone before set- If the phone's operating system is updated ting the car in ignition position I. 2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone. then the connection may be broken. In which 3. To connect the car to the Internet via the case, delete the phone from the car and then 2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher. phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta- connect again. > The phone will connect. ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the Connect the phone manually phone. Compatible phones 1. Activate Bluetooth and tethering18 (portable/ Many phones on the market now have wireless 4. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices. personal hotspot) on the phone. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car. For compatibility, see 2. Open the subview for phone. 5. Select the name of the car on the phone. support.volvocars.com. > Connected phones are listed. 6. Check that the specified number code in the Related information 3. Tap on the name of the phone to be con- car matches that in the external device. In Phone (p. 482) nected. which case, choose to accept in both places. • • Connecting/disconnecting the phone > The phone will connect. 7. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any (p. 484) options for phone contacts and messages. Disconnecting the phone • Bluetooth settings (p. 488) – Deactivate Bluetooth on the phone. • Managing phone calls (p. 485) When the phone is out of range of the car it is • Managing text messages (p. 486) automatically disconnected. If disconnection • Online car* (p. 488) occurs during an active call then the call can be continued on the phone.

18 To connect the car to the Internet:

484 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

Changing phones Managing phone calls 2. Select call from: call history, enter number 1. Open the subview for phone. Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con- using the keypad or via the contact list. It is nected phone. possible to search or browse in the contact 2. Press Change . list. Tap on in the contact list in order to > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. add a contact under Favourites. 3. Tap on the phone to be connected. 3. Tap on Call or . Removing a phone 4. Tap on End call to end the call. 1. Open the subview for phone. You can also make calls from the call log via the 2. Press Settings Communication app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand Bluetooth. steering wheel keypad . > A list of connected Bluetooth devices is Making multi-party calls displayed. During a call: 3. Tap on the phone to be removed. 1. Press Add call. 4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your 2. Choose to make a call from the call log, selection. favourites or the contact list. > The phone is no longer connected with the car. 3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on alongside the contact in the contact list. Related information 4. Swap call • Phone (p. 482) Tap on to switch between the parties. • Connect phone (p. 483) 5. Tap on End call to end the active call. • Settings for phone (p. 487) Conference calls Bluetooth settings (p. 488) Making phone calls • During an active multi-party call: • Ignition positions (p. 399) 1. Open the subview for phone. 1. Tap on Join calls to merge the active multi- • Online car* (p. 488) party call. 2. Tap on End call to end the call.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 485 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| Incoming phone calls • Settings for phone (p. 487) Managing text messages Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver dis- Message handling in the car for a Bluetooth- play and the centre display. Manage the call on connected phone. the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the centre display. On certain phones the message function must be activated. Not all mobiles are fully compatible and Answer Reject 1. Tap on / . capable of displaying contacts and messages in 2. Tap on End call to end the call. the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. Incoming phone call during an active call 1. Tap on Answer/Reject. Reading a text message in the centre 2. Tap on End call to end the call. display Private call – During the current call, press Privacy and select setting: • Switch to mobile phone - the handsfree function is disconnected and the call continues on your mobile phone. • Driver focused - the microphone in the roof on the passenger side is switched off and the call continues with the car's handsfree function. Related information • Phone (p. 482) • Voice recognition control of the phone (p. 120) • Using the application menu in the driver display (p. 109) • Using the keyboard in the centre display (p. 49)

486 AUDIO AND MEDIA

2. Settings for phone • Reply to message — tap on the contact whose message you wish to reply to, then Settings for connected phone. tap on Answer. • Create a new message — tap on Create Phone new +. Select a contact or enter a 1. Press Settings in top view. number. 1. In app view, tap on Messages to open it. 2. Press Communication Phone and 3. Compose the message. select settings: 2. Press Read out to have the message read out, or press on the message you would like 4. Press Send. • Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possible read. to use a ringtone from the phone or the Message notification car. Some phones are not fully compatible Reading a new text message in the For notification settings, see section "Settings for and their ringtones may therefore not be driver display text messages". available for use in the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. A text message is only shown in the driver display Related information if the option is selected, see section "Settings for • Phone (p. 482) • Sort order for contacts - select sort text messages". order of contact list. • Settings for text messages (p. 488) – To have the message read out - select Read For call notifications in the head-up display*, Settings for phone (p. 487) out using the steering wheel keypad. • see section "Head-up display". • Voice recognition control of the phone Send text message (p. 120) Related information • Using the keyboard in the centre display • Settings for text messages (p. 488) (p. 49) • Bluetooth settings (p. 488) • Phone (p. 482) • Connect phone (p. 483) • Head-up display* (p. 115) 1. In app view, tap on Messages to open it.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 487 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Settings for text messages Bluetooth settings Online car* Settings for text messages on connected phone. Settings for Bluetooth-connected phone. An online car provides the ability to use e.g. Internet radio and music services via apps as Message Bluetooth well as contact dealers in the car and download 1. Press Settings in top view. 1. Press Settings in top view. software. 2. 2. Press Communication Text Messages Press Communication Bluetooth and The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or a and select settings: select settings: cable connected to the USB input, or with the • Notification in centre display - shows • Previously paired devices - lists con- car's built-in modem*. message notifications in the centre dis- nected devices. When the car is connected to the Internet, its play's status bar. Remove Internet connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) can be • Notification in driver display - shows device - removes the connected device. shared to allow other devices to use the Internet 21 notifications in the driver display. When Allowed services for this connection . notifications in the driver display are device - phone usage options: calling, send- Connection status is indicated by the symbol in active, it is possible to manage incoming ing/receiving messages, streaming media the centre display's status bar. messages with the steering wheel's right- and as Internet connection. hand keypad. Internet connection - option for connecting Text message tone • • - select tone for the car to the Internet via the device's incoming text message. Bluetooth connection. Related information • Add device - starts the pairing of a new • Phone (p. 482) device. • Connect phone (p. 483) Related information • Managing text messages (p. 486) • Online car* (p. 488) • Settings for phone (p. 487) • Phone (p. 482) • Connect phone (p. 483) • Media player (p. 470)

21 This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.

488 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

Related information Connecting the car Connecting with Wi-Fi • Connecting the car (p. 489) Connect the car to the phone via Bluetooth, • Apps (p. 462) Wi-Fi, with a cable plugged into the USB input, or with the car's built-in modem*. • Book service and repair (p. 531) • System updates (p. 534) The mobile phone and network operator must • Volvo ID (p. 23) support tethering (sharing the Internet connection) and the plan must include data. • Symbols in the centre display's status bar 1. Activate tethering (portable/personal hot- (p. 45) spot) on the mobile phone. NOTE • Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 491) 2. Press Settings in top view. Data is transferred when using the internet (data traffic), which can have a cost. 3. Press Communication Wi-Fi. Activation of data roaming can result in fur- 4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the ther charges. box for Wi-Fi. Contact your network operator about the cost 5. Tap on the network name of the network to for data traffic. be connected. 6. Enter the network password. NOTE 7. If another connection source has been used When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible in the past - confirm the option to change to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi connection. or car modem*. > The car connects to the network. Note that certain phones switch off tethering Read Terms and Conditions for Services and after the contact with the car has been discon- Customer Privacy Policy at nected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the support.volvocars.com before connecting. next time it is used. The tethering in the phone therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it Connecting with Bluetooth is used. See Connecting a phone. When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved for future use. When the maximum number of }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 489 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| saved phones (50) is reached, the first con- 1. Related information nected phones are deleted. To show the list of • Online car* (p. 488) saved networks or manually delete saved net- • Connect phone (p. 483) works, press Settings Wi-Fi Saved Symbols in the centre display's status bar networks. • (p. 45) For network connection requirements, see the • Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 492) section “Technology and security for Wi-Fi”. • Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 493) Connect with a cable plugged into the • No or poor connection (p. 492) USB input Settings for car modem* (p. 493) 1. Plug the phone by a cable into the car's USB • connection in the tunnel console's storage • Bluetooth settings (p. 488) compartment. • Apple CarPlay* (p. 478) 2. Activate USB tethering on the mobile phone. Fit a personal SIM card into the holder. 3. If another connection source has been used 2. Press Settings in top view. in the past - confirm the option to change connection. 3. Press Communication Car Modem > The car connects to the network. Internet. 4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the 23 Connecting with car modem* box for Car modem Internet. When the car is connected to the Internet via the car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this 5. If another connection source has been used connection. in the past - confirm the option to change connection. 6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code. > The car connects to the network.

23 Only cars with Volvo On Call.

490 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot 2. Press Communication Car Wi-Fi Press Connected devices to see a list of the When the car is connected to the Internet, its Hotspot. currently connected devices. Internet connection can be shared to allow other 3. Tap on Network name and name the Related information devices to use the Internet connection.25 shared connection. • Online car* (p. 488) 4. Tap on Password and select a password to • Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 493) be entered on connecting devices. • Symbols in the centre display's status bar 5. Tap on Frequency band and select the fre- (p. 45) quency on which the hotspot is to transmit • No or poor connection (p. 492) data. Note that selection of frequency band is not available in all markets. 6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot. 7. If Wi-Fi has previously been used as a connection source, confirm the option to change connection. > It is now possible for external devices to connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hotspot).

NOTE Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in further charges from your network operator. Contact your network operator about the cost The network operator (SIM card) must support for data traffic. tethering (sharing of Internet connection). 1. Press Settings in top view. Connection status is indicated by the symbol in the centre display's status bar.

25 This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 491 AUDIO AND MEDIA

No or poor connection Related information Remove Wi-Fi network Factors affecting the network. • Online car* (p. 488) Removing a network that is not to be used. Connecting the car (p. 489) The amount of data transferred is dependent on • 1. Press Settings in top view. the services or apps in use in the car. For exam- 2. ple, streaming audio can require large amounts of Press Wi-Fi Saved networks. data which requires a good connection and good 3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to be signal strength. removed. Mobile phone to car 4. Confirm the selection. The speed of the connection may vary depending > The car will no longer connect to the net- on the location of the mobile phone in the car. work in future. Move the mobile phone handset closer to the centre display in order to increase the signal Remove all networks strength. Ensure that there is no source of inter- All networks can be removed simultaneously by ference in between. restoring factory settings. Please note that all user data and system settings are reset to origi- Mobile phone to network nal factory settings. The speed of the mobile network varies depending on the coverage in the present location. Poor Related information network coverage may occur, for example in tun- • Online car* (p. 488) nels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or • Connecting the car (p. 489) indoors. The speed also depends on the agree- Resetting settings in the settings view ment you have with your network. • (p. 178) NOTE In the event of problems with data traffic, contact your network operator.

Restarting the phone If there are problems with the connection then it may help to restart the phone.

492 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

Wi-Fi technologies and security Settings for car modem*27 Change Possible network types to connect to. The car is equipped with a modem that can be PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be entered. used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also Disable It is only possible to connect to the following possible to share the Internet connection via PIN - select whether the PIN code shall be types of network: Wi-Fi. required for access to the SIM card. • Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz26. 1. Press Settings in top view. • Send request code — used e.g. to top up • Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n. or check the balance on a prepaid card. 2. Communication Car Modem • Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP. Press Functionality depends on the provider. Internet and select settings: The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle Related information Car modem Internet Wi-Fi devices inside the car. • - select whether to • Online car* (p. 488) use the car modem as Internet connection. If several devices operate on the frequency at the • Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 491) same time then it may result in reduced perform- • Data usage - tap on Reset resets the ance. counters for received and sent data volume. • Network Related information Select network • Online car* (p. 488) operator - automatic or manual selection of • Connecting the car (p. 489) network operator. • Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 491) Data • No or poor connection (p. 492) roaming - if the box is ticked, the car modem will attempt to connect to the Inter- net when the car is abroad and outside its home network. Note that this may result in heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement for data traffic abroad with your network provider in your home country. • SIM card PIN

26 Selection of frequency is not available on all markets. 27 Only cars with Volvo On Call.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 493 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Downloading, updating and 4. Select Install in order to start the download Uninstalling an app uninstalling apps and installation of the desired app. An app that is being used must be closed in When the car is online there is the option to > The status of the download and installa- order for the uninstallation to be completed. download new apps, keep existing apps upda- tion is shown while it is in progress. 1. Open the app Download Centre. ted or uninstall apps. A message is shown if a download cannot 2. Select Application updates in order to be started for the moment. The app will open a list of all installed apps. NOTE remain in the list and it is possible to try to Data download may affect other services that start a download again. 3. Locate the desired app and select Uninstall in order to start the uninstallation of the app. transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect Cancelling a download on other services is experienced as disruptive > When the app has been uninstalled, it dis- – Tap on Abort to cancel a download in pro- then the download can be interrupted. Alter- appears from the list. gress. natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services. Note that only the download can be cancelled — Related information installation cannot be cancelled once it has • Online car* (p. 488) The apps are managed via begun. • Radio (p. 464) Download Centre in applica- Updating apps • Media player (p. 470) tion view. If an app is being used during an ongoing update, • System updates (p. 534) To be able to download, update it will be restarted in order for the installation to or uninstall apps, the car must be completed. be online. Update all Downloading an app 1. Open the app Download Centre. 1. Open the app Download Centre. 2. Select Install all. > Updating is started. 2. Select New apps in order to open a list of apps that are available but not installed in Update some the car. 1. Open the app Download Centre. 3. Tap anywhere on the row for an app in order 2. Select Application updates in order to to expand in the list and get more informa- open a list of all available updates. tion about the app. 3. Locate the desired app and select Install. > Updating is started.

494 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

License agreement for audio and Dirac Unison® DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes media are trademarks belonging to Rovi Corporation or A license is an agreement granting a right to its subsidiaries and used under licence. conduct some activity or to make use of another About DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video for- person's right under the terms and conditions of mat created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's Corporation. This is an official DivX® certified agreements with manufacturers/developers. device which has been tested and found capable of playing DivX video. Visit divx.com for more Bowers & Wilkins information and software tools to convert your files to DivX video. Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in ABOUT DIVUX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX frequency, time and space for the best possible Certified® device must be registered in order to bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of (VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating specific performance venues. Using advanced the DivX VOD section in the device's settings algorithms, Dirac Unison controls Dirac Unison all menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic high- how to complete the registration. precision measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeakers Patent numbers Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of perform in perfect unison. Protected by one or more of the following US the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark DivX® 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052. of DuPont.

}}

495 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| Gracenote® You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote The Gracenote software and everything included software and Gracenote servers for your own in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". personal non-commercial use. You agree not to Gracenote provides no undertakings or warran- assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote ties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the software or any Gracenote data to any third party. Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote serv- YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT ers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE from the Gracenote servers or to change data OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS categories for any reason that Gracenote deems EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT. sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Grace- note software or Gracenote servers are fault-free You agree that your non-exclusive right to use or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Grace- Parts of the content are copyright of servers will operate without interruption. Grace- © note servers will be terminated if you violate Gracenote or its suppliers. note has no obligation to provide you with new, these restrictions. If your license is terminated improved or additional data types or categories Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype, you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. company reserves the right to discontinue its are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote services at any time. Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other coun- data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote tries. servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, will under no circumstances have any obligation EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, Gracenote® End User License Agreement to pay you for any information you provide. You BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN- This program or device contains software from agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the com- TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA pany's rights under this agreement against you PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON- ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote directly in its own name. INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROP- ("Gracenote software") activates this program to ERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUAR- The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain ANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH track enquiries for statistical purposes. The pur- music-related information, including name, artist, YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is track and title ("Gracenote data") from online OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE to enable the Gracenote service to count enqui- servers or embedded databases (together called WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CON- ries without knowing anything about who you are. "Gracenote servers") and in order to perform SEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST Additional information is available on the web other actions. You may only use Gracenote data PROFITS OR REVENUES. in accordance with the intended end-user func- page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Grace- tions for this program or this device. note service. © Gracenote, Inc. 2009

496 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Sensus software ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE and to permit persons to whom the Software is This software uses parts of sources from clib2 LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, furnished to do so, subject to the following and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR conditions: The above copyright notice including (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, the dates of first publication and either this and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF permission notice or a reference to http:// 1993), The Regents of the University of SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in California. All or some portions are derived from USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS all copies or substantial portions of the Software. material licensed to the University of California by INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT herein with the permission of UNIX System (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A source and binary forms, with or without THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND modification, are permitted provided that the POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL following conditions are met: Redistributions of SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY source code must retain the above copyright This software is based in part on the work of the CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, notice, this list of conditions and the following Independent JPEG Group. WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must This software uses parts of sources from TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE conditions and the following disclaimer in the Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE documentation and/or other materials provided 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, with the distribution. Neither the name of the Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be nor the names of its Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created used in advertising or otherwise to promote the contributors may be used to endorse or promote by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. sale, use or other dealings in this Software products derived from this software without All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] without prior written authorization from Silicon specific prior written permission. THIS Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Graphics, Inc. SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to This software is based in parts on the work of the HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND any person obtaining a copy of this software and FreeType Team. ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, associated documentation files (the "Software"), INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE to deal in the Software without restriction, This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY including without limitation the rights to use, Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, ([email protected]). All rights reserved }}

497 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| Linux software 1. Redistributions of source code must retain Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights the above copyright notice, this list of reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in This product contains software licensed under conditions and the following disclaimer as http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU the first lines of this file unmodified. Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to 2. Redistributions in binary form must any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data You have the right of acquisition, modification, reproduce the above copyright notice, this list files and any associated documentation (the and distribution of the source code of the GPL/ of conditions and the following disclaimer in "Data Files") or Unicode software and any LGPL software. the documentation and/or other materials associated documentation (the "Software") to You may download Source Code from the provided with the distribution. deal in the Data Files or Software without following website at no charge: http:// THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS restriction, including without limitation the rights www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, download/TVM_8351_013 WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or The website provides the Source Code "As Is" TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) and without warranty of any kind. MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN the above copyright notice(s) and this permission By downloading Source Code, you expressly NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or assume all risk and liability associated with DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) downloading and using the Source Code and EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES and this permission notice appear in associated complying with the user agreements that (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in accompany each Source Code. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR each modified Data File or in the Software as Please note that we cannot respond to any SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; well as in the documentation associated with the inquiries regarding the source code. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER Data File(s) or Software that the data or software CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, has been modified. camellia:1.2.0 WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE Copyright (c) 2006, 2007 OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING Corporation). All rights reserved. THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A Redistribution and use in source and binary DAMAGE. PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND forms, with or without modification, are permitted NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY provided that the following conditions are met: Unicode: 5.1.0 RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS

498 AUDIO AND MEDIA

INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR Declaration of Conformity for ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR Bluetooth® module CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

}}

499 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| Country/ Area EU:

Exporting country: Japan Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Type of equipment: Audio Navigation Unit Hereby, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation declares that this Audio Navigation Unit is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EG.

500 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Country/ Area China: 1. ■ 使用频率2.4 - 2.4835 GHz ■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ① ■ 最大率谱密度天线增益 10dBi 时≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ① ■ 载频容限20 ppm ■ 帯外发射率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP) ■ 杂散发射(辐射)率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外) • ≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz) • ≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz) • ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz) • ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz) • ≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz) 2.不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器)，不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线 3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时，应立即停止使用，并采措施消除干扰后方可继续使用 4.使用微率无线电设备，必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰 5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用

}}

501 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| Country/ Area

Korea: B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재) 이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다. 해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다. Taiwan: 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法第十二條經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能第十四條低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立停用，改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾

502 AUDIO AND MEDIA

Country/ Area Brazil:

Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário. Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br Kazakh- stan:

Model name: NR 0V Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Exporting country: Japan

}}

503 AUDIO AND MEDIA

|| Country/ Area Mexico:

The Uni- ted Arab Emirates:

Related information • Audio and media (p. 462) • Media player (p. 470) • Online car* (p. 488) • Gracenote® (p. 473) • Sensus - connection and maintenance (p. 29)

504 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. AUDIO AND MEDIA

Terms and conditions for services Related information and Customer Privacy Policy • License agreement for audio and media Read the terms and conditions for services and (p. 495) the Customer Privacy Policy at • License agreement for the driver display support.volvocars.com. (p. 103) Terms and services for services • Type approval for radar units (p. 337) Volvo is committed to offering you the absolute best services to ensure that it is as safe, comfortable and pleasant as possible for you to drive your Volvo. Volvo offers a wide range of services, from assistance in emergency situations to navigation in various infotainment services. Read these terms and conditions ("Service Terms and Conditions") carefully before using the services - support.volvocars.com. Customer Privacy Policy This policy applies for the processing of customer data and personal data. The purpose of the policy is to provide our existing, previous and prospec- tive customers with a general understanding of: • The circumstances in which we gather and process your personal data. • The types of personal data we gather. • The reasons we gather your personal data. • How we handle your personal data. This policy can be read in its entirety at support.volvocars.com.

505

WHEELS AND TYRES WHEELS AND TYRES

Tyres New tyres are stored for future use. Examples of external Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, use are cracks or discoloration. dampen vibration and protect the wheel from Wear and maintenance wear. Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear. The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road con- ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure dition affect how quickly the tyres age and wear. and speed rating are important for how the car To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre- performs. vent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front Recommended tyres and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo origi- 5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals. nal tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo work- the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is there- to harden at the same time as the friction shop is contacted for checking if you are uncer- fore important that the new tyres also have this capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For tain about tread depth. If significant differences in marking in order for the car's driving characteris- this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tics, comfort and fuel consumption to be main- when you replace them. This is especially impor- tyres have already occurred, then the least worn tained. tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig- tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Under- its in the sequence mean the week and year of steer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking and leads to the car continuing forwards in a (Department of Transportation), and this is stated straight line rather than having the rear end skid- with four digits, for example 0715. The tyre in the ding to one side, resulting in possible complete figure was manufactured in week 07 of 2015. loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip Tyre age before the front wheels. All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undam- WARNING aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car. therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that

1 There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.

508 WHEELS AND TYRES

Storage Tyres' rotation direction NOTE Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the down or hanging up - never standing up. only turn in one direction have the direction of same type and dimension, and also the same rotation marked with an arrow. Related information make. • Checking the tyre pressures (p. 510) • Tyres' rotation direction (p. 509) Related information • Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 510) • Tyres (p. 508) • Tyre pressure monitoring (p. 511) • Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 516) • Dimension designation for tyre (p. 528)

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).

509 WHEELS AND TYRES

Tread wear indicators on the tyres Checking the tyre pressures pressures the tyres should have at different loads Tread wear indicators show the status of the Tyres with the correct air pressure increase driv- and speed conditions. tyre's tread depth. ing safety, save fuel and extend the service life of Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure the tyres. For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natu- up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures ral phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. How- depending on ambient temperature. Inadequate ever, the lower comfort pressures are recom- tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, short- mended instead if optimum noise and travelling ens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's driving comfort are desired. characteristics. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure Checking the air pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheat- 1. Check the tyre pressures monthly. Carry out ing and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects the check on cold tyres, which means that travelling comfort, road noise and driving charac- the tyres should have the same temperature teristics. as the outside temperature. After several few Recommended tyre pressure kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation the pressure increases. across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread 2. If necessary, inflate so that the air pressure pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters corresponds with the approved tyre pressure TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread in accordance with the tyre pressure label. depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to NOTE new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit in rain and snow. the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. Related information • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust • Tyres (p. 508) caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which

510 WHEELS AND TYRES

Related information Tyre pressure monitoring4 When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator • Tyres (p. 508) The tyre pressure monitoring system, Tyre symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the • Check tyre pressure with the tyre pressure Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), gives a display and a message is shown, see also the monitoring system (p. 513) warning with an indicator symbol in the driver heading "Message in the driver display" below. • Inflate tyres with the compressor from the display when the pressure in one or more of the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 521) car's tyres is too low. • Approved tyre pressures (p. 596) If the symbol first flashes for about one minute and then changes to a constant glow, it may indicate that the system cannot detect or warn of low tyre pressure as intended.

Symbol Specification The symbol illuminates in the event of low tyre pressure. In the event of a fault in the TPMS system, the symbol will first flash for approx. one minute and then illuminate with a constant glow.

System description TPMS measures differences in rotation speed between the different wheels via the ABS system in order to be able to determine whether they have the correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By com- paring the tyres with each other the system can determine whether one or more tyres have pressure that is too low.

4 Standard in certain markets. }}

511 WHEELS AND TYRES

|| General information on the tire pressure bol for low tyre pressure. When the system To bear in mind monitoring system detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display • Always calibrate the system after changing a Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be will flash for about one minute and then remain wheel in order to ensure that replacement checked once a month. When checking, the tyre illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when wheels are working with the system. should be cold and have the air pressure recom- the car is started until the fault has been rectified. • The system does not replace normal tyre mended by the car manufacturer specified on the When the symbol is illuminated, the system's abil- maintenance. tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If ity to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be There is no option to deactivate TPMS. the car has tyres of a different size than that rec- affected. • ommended by the manufacturer, find out what A TPMS system fault can occur for several rea- Related information the correct air pressure level is for these. sons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or • Tyres (p. 508) As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from • Check tyre pressure with the tyre pressure with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS), functioning correctly. monitoring system (p. 513) which shows when the air pressure in one or Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS Calibrating the tyre pressure monitoring sys- more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol • after changing one or more tyres in order to tem (p. 515) for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre pres- as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air with TPMS. • pressure. sure monitoring (p. 514) Messages in the driver display Driving on tyres with low tyre pressure may cause The following messages may be shown when the the tyre to overheat, which can cause a puncture. indicator symbol is illuminated: Low tyre pressure also reduces fuel efficiency and tyre service life, and can affect car handling • Tyre pressure low and stopping ability. Note that TPMS does not • Tyre pressure system Temporarily replace regular tyre maintenance. It is the driver's unavailable responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for low tyre pressure has not • Tyre pressure system Service required. been reached so that the indicator symbol illumi- If the system cannot determine which tyre has nates. low pressure, all four tyres will be indicated in the centre display. The car is also equipped with a TPMS system fault indicator, which indicates when the system is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system fault indicator is combined with the indicator sym-

512 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TYRES

Check tyre pressure with the tyre All tyres grey: 8 pressure monitoring system • Calibration in progress. With the system for monitoring tyre pressure, • Unknown status. Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), tyre pressure status can be viewed in the centre dis- Several minutes driving above 30 km/h (20 mph) play. may be required for the system to become active. All tyres grey and a message: Checking status 1. Open the Car status app in the app view. • Tyre pressure system Temporarily unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is currently unavailable, Status view9. activated shortly. Green tyre: • Tyre pressure system Service required. The indicator symbol flashes and changes to • The tyre pressure is above the limit value for constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The 2. Tap on Status to show the status of the a warning. system is not working correctly, contact an tyres. Yellow tyre: authorised Volvo workshop (recommended). Status indication • The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and Related information The graphics show the status for each tyre. check/rectify the tyre pressure as soon as • Tyre pressure monitoring (p. 511) possible. Calibrate TPMS after the tyre pres- Calibrating the tyre pressure monitoring sys- sure has been adjusted. • tem (p. 515) All tyres yellow: • Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre pres- • The pressure is too low in two or more tyres. sure monitoring (p. 514) Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures as • Car status (p. 530) soon as possible. Calibrate TPMS after the tyre pressures have been adjusted.

8 Standard in certain markets. 9 The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.

513 WHEELS AND TYRES

Rectifying low tyre pressure with 2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure as NOTE tyre pressure monitoring13 indicated on the tyre pressure label on the door pillar on the driver's side. To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure When the tyre pressure monitoring system, Tyre should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), gives a means the tyres are the same temperature as warning, the tyre pressure in one or more of the the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours car's tyres is too low. after the car has been driven). After a few kil- Check and rectify the tyre pressure ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the when the indicator symbol for TPMS is pressure increases. illuminated and the message Tyre pressure low is shown. Calibrate NOTE TPMS after the tyre pressure has been adjusted. • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit 1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with the dust cap in order to avoid damage to a tyre pressure gauge. the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust 3. Recalibrate the TPMS system, see the sec- caps can rust and become difficult to tion "Calibrating the tyre pressure monitoring unscrew. system". 4. In some cases it may be necessary to drive WARNING the car for a few minutes at a speed above 30 km/h (20 mph) in order to clear the • Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver TPMS symbol and message. losing control of the car. Note that the TPMS symbol does not extin- • The system cannot indicate sudden tyre guish until the low tyre pressure has been damage in advance. rectified and new calibration has been performed.

13 Standard in certain markets.

514 WHEELS AND TYRES

Related information Calibrating the tyre pressure 2. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in • Tyre pressure monitoring (p. 511) monitoring system17 accordance with the tyre pressure label on • Check tyre pressure with the tyre pressure In order for the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System the door pillar on the driver's side. monitoring system (p. 513) (TPMS) to work correctly, a reference value for • Calibrating the tyre pressure monitoring sys- the tyre pressure must be determined. This must tem (p. 515) be performed each time the tyres are changed or the tyre pressure is changed. • Approved tyre pressures (p. 596) • Inflate tyres with the compressor from the For example, when driving with a heavy load or at emergency puncture repair kit (p. 521) high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre pressure should be adjusted in accordance with Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Fol- lowing which, the system must be recalibrated. 1. Stop the engine.

3. Start the engine. 4. Open the Car status app in the app view.

5. Tap on Status to view tyre pressure monitoring.

17 Standard in certain markets. }}

515 WHEELS AND TYRES

|| NOTE Related information Emergency puncture repair kit • Tyre pressure monitoring (p. 511) The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary The car must be stationary when calibration is Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture as started. • Check tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system (p. 513) well as to check and adjust the air pressure. Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre pres- 6. Press Calibrate. • The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor sure monitoring (p. 514) and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works 7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid effectively in all four tyres has been checked and seals tyres punctured in the tread. adjusted. The emergency puncture repair kit has limited 8. Drive the car. capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the Calibration is performed while the car is driv- wall. Do not use the puncture repair kit on tyres ing. Calibration is interrupted temporarily if that have larger slits, cracks or similar damage. the engine is switched off, but is resumed automatically when the car is driven again. NOTE > When sufficient data has been collected The emergency puncture repair kit is only to enable the system to detect low tyre intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in pressure, the tyres in the centre display the tread. change colour from grey to green. The system provides no additional confirmation that the calibration is complete. NOTE If calibration fails, a message is shown: The compressor for temporary emergency Calibration unsuccessful. Please try puncture repair has been tested and again.. approved by Volvo.

NOTE Location Remember that the TPMS system must be The puncture repair kit is located in the foam recalibrated at each tyre change or if the tyre block under the floor in the cargo area. pressure is adjusted. New reference values must be stored for the system to work correctly.

516 WHEELS AND TYRES

WARNING Using the emergency puncture repair kit • In the event of skin contact with the sealing fluid, it must be washed off immedi- Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture ately with soap and plenty of water. repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK). • If sealing fluid gets into an eye then it Overview must be immediately rinsed out with large quantities of water. If the discomfort persists then the eye should be examined by a doctor.

Related information • Using the emergency puncture repair kit Location in the cargo area. (p. 517) Sealing fluid bottle • Inflate tyres with the compressor from the Replace the bottle with sealing fluid before the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 521) expiration date has passed and after use. Treat • Tyres (p. 508) the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste. Electrical cable

WARNING Air hose The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex. Pressure reducing valve Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic Protective cap reaction in the event of skin contact. Label, maximum permitted speed Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. Store out of the reach of children. Bottle holder (orange cap) Pressure gauge

}}

517 WHEELS AND TYRES

|| Sealing fluid bottle 3. Check that the switch is in position 0, and 5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot- locate the electrical cable and the air hose. tle holder. Switch 4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the > The bottle and the bottle holder are equipped with a reverse catch to prevent Connecting compressor, and unscrew the cork from the bottle. sealant leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from NOTE the bottle holder again. Bottle removal must be performed at a workshop, Volvo Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The recommends an authorised Volvo work- seal is broken automatically when the bottle is shop. screwed in. WARNING • In the event of skin contact with the sealing fluid, it must be washed off immediately with soap and plenty of water. • If sealing fluid gets into an eye then it must be immediately rinsed out with large quan- 1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the tities of water. If the discomfort persists hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed then the eye should be examined by a doc- in a trafficked location. tor. If the puncture was caused by a nail or similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to WARNING seal the hole. Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with 2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted a reverse catch to prevent leakage. speed that is affixed on one side of the compressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a 6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap. reminder to observe the speed limit. You Check that the pressure reducing valve on should not drive faster than 80 km/h the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit the air hose's valve connection to the bottom has been used. of the tyre valve's thread.

518 WHEELS AND TYRES

7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest 9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes. 14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km at a 12 V socket and start the car. maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so IMPORTANT that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre. NOTE Risk of overheating. The compressor must not NOTE Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock- run for more than 10 minutes. ets is in use when the compressor is operat- Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during ing. 10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres- the first few rotations of the tyre. sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres- WARNING sure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar. WARNING (Release air with the pressure reducing valve Do not leave children in the car without if the tyre pressure is too high.) Make sure that nobody is standing near the supervision when the engine is running. car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto them when the car is driven away. The dis- WARNING tance should be at least two metres. 8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I. If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not 15. Follow-up inspection be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre WARNING centre is recommended. Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and Never stand next to the tyre when the com- screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness 11. Switch off the compressor and detach the must be switched off. arise then the compressor must be switched electrical cable. off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre cen- 12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and tre is recommended. refit the dust cap on the tyre. 13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order NOTE to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing fluid. When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

}}

519 WHEELS AND TYRES

|| 16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure 19. Refit the dust cap on the tyre. WARNING gauge. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h • If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf- NOTE (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit ficiently sealed. The journey should not be • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit has been used. Volvo recommends a visit to continued. Contact a tyre centre. the dust cap in order to avoid damage to an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance • If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, is 200 km). The staff there can determine the tyre must be inflated to the pressure • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it specified in accordance with the tyre caps can rust and become difficult to needs to be replaced. pressure label on the driver side door pil- unscrew. lar (1 bar = 100 kPa). Release air using Related information the pressure reducing valve if the tyre Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 516) pressure is too high. NOTE • 17. If the tyre needs to be inflated: The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that 1. Connect the electrical cable to the closest this replacement is performed by an author- 12 V socket and start the car. ised Volvo workshop. 2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label. WARNING 3. Switch off the compressor. Check the tyre pressure regularly. 18. Remove the tyre sealing equipment, fit the protective cap on the air hose and fold the Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the hose in the box. nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise Place TMK in the cargo area. the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

520 WHEELS AND TYRES

Inflate tyres with the compressor IMPORTANT When changing wheels from the emergency puncture repair The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter Risk of overheating. The compressor must not kit wheels or a spare wheel. run for more than 10 minutes. The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair Follow the relevant instructions for removing and kit. 5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on fitting wheels. the tyre pressure label on the driver side door When changing to another tyre 1. The compressor must be switched off. Make pillar. (Release air using the pressure reduc- sure that the switch is in position 0 and ing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.) dimension locate the cable and air hose. Check that the tyre dimension is approved for use on the car. 2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bottom Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updat- of the thread on the tyre's air valve. ing the software at each change of tyre dimension. A software download may be necessary 3. Connect the cable to one of the car's both when changing to larger and smaller dimen- 12 V sockets and start the engine. sions, and also when switching between summer and winter wheels. WARNING Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in Related information danger to life. Never leave the engine running • Removing a wheel (p. 522) in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation. • Fitting the wheels (p. 523) 6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air • Tool kit (p. 525) WARNING hose and cable. • Winter wheels (p. 525) Do not leave children in the car without 7. Refit the dust cap. • Spare wheel* (p. 524) supervision when the engine is running. Related information • Wheel bolts (p. 524) • Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 516) 4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to Approved tyre pressures (p. 596) position I. •

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 521 WHEELS AND TYRES

Removing a wheel WARNING 4. Place chocks in front of and behind the Instructions for removing a wheel when chang- wheels which will remain on the ground to Check that the jack is not damaged, that the ing wheels. prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is blocks or large stones for example. free from dirt. 1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the 5. Screw together the towing eye with the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being wheel wrench* to the stop position. changed in a trafficked location. 3. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted 2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear in the foam block. position P. Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If the car is equipped with air suspension, this must be disabled before the car is raised with a jack*. Deactivate the function via the top view of the centre display by pressing Settings My Car Suspension and selecting Deactivate Suspension & Leveling IMPORTANT Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts. Control. The towing eye must be screwed all the way into the wheel bolt wrench. NOTE The normal car jack is only designed for occa- 6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel sional, short-term use, such as when chang- bolts with the intended tool. ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to winter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the 7. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlock- specific car model may be used to raise the wise with the wheel wrench*. car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.

522 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TYRES

WARNING Crank up the jack* so that it makes contact Fitting the wheels with the car's jacking point. Check that the Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing Never position anything between the ground head of the jack is correctly positioned in the and the jack, nor between the jack and the wheels. jacking point so that the bump in the centre car's jacking point. of the head fits into the jacking point hole WARNING and the base is positioned vertically below IMPORTANT the jacking point. Also make sure you turn Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack. the jack so that the crank is as far away from The ground must be firm, smooth and level. the side of the car as possible, at which point Passengers must leave the car when it is the jack's arms are perpendicular to the raised on the jack. If a wheel must be 8. When raising the car, it is important that the direction of the car. changed in a trafficked environment, passen- jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended gers must stand in a safe place. points on the car's underbody. The triangle WARNING markings in the plastic cover indicate the 1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel locations of the jacking/lifting points. There Never crawl under the car when it is raised on and hub. the jack. are two jacking points on each side of the 2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts car. There is a recess for the jack at each Passengers must leave the car when it is thoroughly. point. raised on the jack. If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passen- Do not use lubricant on the threads of the gers must stand in a safe place. wheel bolts. 3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot 9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove rotate. the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel. Related information • When changing wheels (p. 521) • Raise the car (p. 537) • Fitting the wheels (p. 523) • Tool kit (p. 525)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 523 WHEELS AND TYRES

|| 4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is impor- Wheel bolts Spare wheel* tant that the wheel bolts are tightened prop- Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the The spare wheel can be used to replace a punc- erly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the tighten- hubs. tured normal wheel. ing torque with a torque wrench. IMPORTANT The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. Overtightening or loose tightening may damage the nuts and the bolts.

Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts with a torque wrench. Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts. The spare wheel is stored in a bag and must be 5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts. Locking wheel bolts* secured with two straps on the floor of the cargo In the foam block under the cargo area floor area during driving. The backrests of the third row NOTE there is space for the sleeve for the lockable of seats must be lowered. • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit wheel bolts. The straps must be tensioned crosswise over the the dust cap in order to avoid damage to wheel and attached in the car's four load retain- the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. Related information • When changing wheels (p. 521) ing eyelets. Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust • Check the tyre pressure in the spare wheel regu- caps can rust and become difficult to larly as well. unscrew. Related information Related information • When changing wheels (p. 521) • Removing a wheel (p. 522) • When changing wheels (p. 521) • Spare wheel* (p. 524)

524 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TYRES

Winter wheels Tread depth Tool kit Winter wheels are adapted for winter road con- Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera- Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel ditions. tures place considerably higher demands on tyres changes or similar are found in the car's cargo than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom- area. Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on tread depth of less than 4 mm. engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four Snow chains wheels. Volvo recommends that snow chains are not used on wheel dimensions greater than NOTE 19 inches. Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which Mounting instructions are supplied with Volvo wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable. original snow chains. Snow chains may only be used on the front Tips for changing to winter tyres wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). When summer and winter wheels are changed, Never drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph) with mark which side of the car they were mounted snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this on, for example L for left and R for right. wears out both the snow chains and tyres. The foam block under the cargo area floor contains the car's towing eye, emergency puncture Studded tyres WARNING repair kit, tools to remove the wheel bolts' plastic Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for caps, the jack* and the wheel wrench*. There is Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into also space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel chains designed for the car model, and tyre bolts. the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow studs, a longer service life. chains are permitted. A package with disposable gloves and wheel bag In the event of uncertainty about the show is also stored here. NOTE chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised Related information The legal provisions for the use of studded Volvo workshop should be contacted. The wrong snow chains may cause serious dam- When changing wheels (p. 521) tyres vary from country to country. • age to the car and lead to an accident. • Jack* (p. 526) Warning triangle (p. 526) Related information • • When changing wheels (p. 521) • First aid kit (p. 527)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 525 WHEELS AND TYRES

Warning triangle Jack* Use the warning triangle to warn other road Use the jack to raise the car when changing a users if the car is stationary in traffic. wheel.

Also activate the hazard warning flashers. Only use the original jack when fitting a spare wheel or when changing between summer and Storage spaces winter wheels. The jack's thread must always be The warning triangle is located in the compart- well greased. ment on the inside of the tailgate. IMPORTANT Folding up the warning triangle Open the hatch by first turning the knob a quarter turn and then pulling the hatch from The tools and jack* must be stored in the its brackets in the top and bottom edges. intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use. Press the latch that secures the warning triangle slightly to the right and remove the case. The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space. Remove the warning triangle from the case, unfold it and put the ends together. NOTE Fold out the warning triangle's support legs. The normal car jack is only designed for occa- sional, short-term use, such as when chang- Follow the regulations for the use of a warning ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win- triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suita- ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the ble place with regard to traffic. specific car model may be used to raise the Make sure that the warning triangle and case are car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or properly secured in their storage space and that for a longer time than is required just to the hatch is fully closed after use. change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the Related information instructions for use that come with the equip- • Tool kit (p. 525) ment. • Hazard warning flashers (p. 149)

526 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TYRES

Applies to cars with level control* First aid kit Dimension designation for wheel If the car is equipped with air suspension then The first aid kit contains first aid equipment. rim this must be deactivated before the car is raised Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in with the jack. Store the first aid kit in the space on the right- accordance with the examples in the table hand side in the cargo area. Switch off the function via the centre display: below. 1. Press on Settings in the top view: All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for example: 8Jx18x42.5. 2. Press My Car Suspension . 3. Select Deactivate Suspension & Leveling 8 Rim width in inches Control. J Rim flange profile Related information 18 Rim diameter in inches • Tool kit (p. 525) • Raise the car (p. 537) 42,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the hub)

Related information The car has an approval for the complete vehicle • Tool kit (p. 525) with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres. Related information • Tyres (p. 508) • Dimension designation for tyre (p. 528)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 527 WHEELS AND TYRES

Dimension designation for tyre Speed rating WARNING Designations for tyre dimension, load index and Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol), The lowest permitted load index (LI) and speed rating. speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each must at least correspond with the car's top respective engine variant are shown in the The car has an approval for the complete vehicle speed. The table below shows the maximum per- car's registration document. If a tyre with too with certain combinations of wheel rims and mitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The low a load index or speed rating is used, it tyres. only exception to these regulations is winter may overheat and be damaged. 21 Designation of dimensions tyres , where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be All tyres have a dimension designation, such as Related information driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for 235/60 R18 103 H. • Tyres (p. 508) example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of • Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 527) 235 Tyre width (mm) 160 km/h (100 mph).) The top speed at which the car can be driven depends on road condi- • Approved tyre pressures (p. 596) 60 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre tions, not the speed rating of the tyres. width (%) R Radial ply NOTE The maximum permitted speed is specified in 18 Rim diameter in inches the table. 103 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, tyre load index (LI) Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on win- H Speed rating for maximum permitted ter tyres) speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 210 km/h (130 mph).) T 190 km/h (118 mph) H 210 km/h (130 mph) Load index Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a V 240 km/h (149 mph) load index (LI). The car's weight determines the W 270 km/h (168 mph) load capacity required of the tyres. The lowest permitted load index is specified in a load index Y 300 km/h (186 mph) table.

21 Both those with metal studs and those without.

528 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Volvo service programme Charging cable with control unit Car status To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, The car's general status can be shown in the follow the Volvo service programme as specified IMPORTANT centre display along with the opportunity to book in the Service and Warranty Booklet. service. Do not modify the control unit in any way. Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo The Car status app is started workshop to perform the service and mainte- Related information from app view in the centre dis- nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, • Servicing the climate control system play and has three tabs: special tools and service literature to guarantee (p. 545) the highest quality of service.

IMPORTANT • Messages - saved status messages For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and • Status - check of tyre pressure and engine follow the instructions in the Service and oil level Warranty Booklet. • Appointments - booking of service and repair work. Service and repair Service the car regularly. Follow Volvo's recom- Related information mended service intervals. • Managing messages saved from the driver If inspection and repair are required then only an display and centre display (p. 113) authorised Volvo workshop may carry out the • Check tyre pressure with the tyre pressure work. monitoring system (p. 513) • Checking and filling with engine oil WARNING (p. 542) Do not carry out any repairs of your own on • Book service and repair (p. 531) this vehicle. Electrical cables and/or components that have detached must only be rectified by an authorised workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

530 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Book service and repair3 Changing contact address are needed is shown in the driver display and at Manage service, repair and booking information If you would like to change to another e-mail the top of the centre display. directly from your online car. address, you can contact a Volvo dealer. Selecting a Volvo dealer The information is handled in the Car status app, which is opened from the app view in the Select the Volvo dealer you would like to contact centre display. for service and repairs by going to www.volvocars.com and navigating to My Volvo. This service provides, for certain markets, a con- Prerequisite for booking from car venient way to book service and workshop visits For the car to send and receive booking informa- directly from your car. Vehicle data is sent to your tion, it must be connected to the Internet, see dealer, who can prepare the workshop visit. The section "Online car". dealer will get back to you with a booking suggestion. For certain markets, the system will Using the service remind you of a scheduled appointment time as it When it is time for service, and in some cases approaches and the navigation system4 can also when the car is in need of repair, a message will guide you to the workshop when the time comes. appear in the driver display and at the top of the You also have information on your dealer availa- centre display. The service date is determined by ble in the car and can contact your workshop at how much time has passed, hours that the any time. engine has been running, or distance driven since the last service. Before the service can be used You can also book a workshop visit later via the Volvo ID My Volvo owner's portal. To ensure that your • Create a Volvo ID, see section "Volvo ID". dealer has the latest information on your car you • Register the Volvo ID for your car, see sec- can send vehicle data, see section "Sending tion "Volvo ID". If a Volvo ID already exists, Vehicle Data" below. use the same e-mail address that was used Book service or repair when the Volvo ID was created. Fill in the appointment request when desired or when a message stating that service or repairs

3 Applies to certain markets. 4 Applies to Sensus Navigation*. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 531 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Filling in and sending an appointment 6. Fill in information for the workshop in the The appointment request contains vehicle data request. field Tap to write information to the when it is sent from your car to the workshop via workshop, e.g. if there is anything you would your Internet connection. This information facili- like done during the workshop visit or any tates planning for the workshop. other important information to your work- Accept the appointment suggestion shop. The car will retrieve appointment suggestions via your Internet connection when it is available. When the car has received an appointment sug- 1. Open the Car status app from the app view gestion, a message will be shown at the top of in the centre display. the centre display. 2. Press the Appointments button. 1. Tap the message. 3. Press the Request appoint. button. 2. If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap Or press the button and speak the informa- on the Accept button. Otherwise press 4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled tion. The information is then entered in the either of the Send new proposal or in. information field in your appointment request. Decline buttons. 5. Make sure that the desired Workshop is 7. Press the Send appointment request but- When an appointment suggestion is accepted, filled in. ton. the reply will be sent to the workshop via your > You will receive an appointment sugges- Internet connection. tion to your car within a couple of days.5. You will also receive the same communication via e-mail and when you visit My Volvo. In certain markets, once you have sent the appointment request, the message that the car needs service is extinguished in the driver display. 8. Press the Cancel request button to cancel your request.

5 This time frame may vary depending on market.

532 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Sending vehicle data See workshop information • function status You can send vehicle data at any time from your • fluid levels car, e.g. if you book a workshop visit directly via meter reading the My Volvo owner's portal, and will help your • workshop with better basic information. • the car's vehicle identification number (VIN6) The vehicle data sent is the last saved (last time • the car's software version the car was running). • the car's diagnostics data. 1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display. Related information • Volvo ID (p. 23) 2. Press the Appointments button. • Online car* (p. 488) 3. Press the Workshop information button. • Car status (p. 530) > A pop-up window with information on your dealer will open. 1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display. 4. Call your dealer if you like, or tap on the address or GPS coordinates to start naviga- 2. Press the Appointments button. tion to your workshop4. 3. Press the Send car data button. Booking information and vehicle data > A message that vehicle data are being When you decide to book a service or send data sent is shown at the top of the centre dis- from your car, the booking information and vehi- play. You can cancel data transmission by cle data will be sent via you Internet connection. tapping the X in the activity indicator. The vehicle data make it easier for your workshop The vehicle data are sent via your Internet to plan your next visit. connection. The vehicle data consists of information in the following areas: • service requirement • time since last service

4 Applies to Sensus Navigation*. 6 Vehicle Identification Number.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 533 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Remote updates System updates NOTE Several of the car's systems can be updated System updates are intended for the Internet- Data download may affect other services that from the centre display with an online car. connected and infotainment components of the transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect car. If system software updates are available, the on other services is experienced as disruptive The Download Centre app is updates can be made all at once or one at a then the download can be interrupted. Alter- started from app view in the time. centre display and enables: natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or System updates are handled interrupt other services. via the Download Centre app in the centre display's applica- NOTE tion view. A tap on the button • searching for and updating system software starts a download application in An update can be interrupted when the igni- • updating map data for Sensus Navigation the home view's bottom sub- tion is switched off and the car is left. • downloading, updating and uninstalling apps. view. If no search for available However, the update does not have to be updates has been performed since the last time completed before the car is left, this is Related information the infotainment system was started, a search is because the update is resumed the next time • System updates (p. 534) performed. No search is performed if a software the car is used. • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps installation is in progress. An icon in the down- (p. 494) load application's button System updates shows how many updates are available. A tap on Update all system software the button shows a list of updates that can be – Select Install all at the bottom of the list. installed in the car. For more information and If no list is desired, then Install all can be answers to common questions regarding function selected at the System updates button instead. and to download certain system updates, go in to support.volvocars.com. Update individual system software For system updates to be possible, the car must programs be connected to the Internet, see section "Online – Select Install for the software required. car". Cancelling the download Background searching for software updates – Tap on X in the activity indicator that has is activated when the car is supplied from the replaced the button Install at the start of the factory. download.

534 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Note that only the download can be cancelled, Data transmission between car and Connecting to a workshop when the installation phase has started, this can- workshop7 automatically not be cancelled. The time required for a booked visit to a Volvo Background search for software workshop can be shortened by transmitting trou- NOTE bleshooting data as soon as the car stops at the updates To avoid the driver being disturbed by unwan- workshop. The function can be deactivated via the centre ted connection inquiries (for example, if the display: The data can be transmitted most conveniently car is often parked in the neighbourhood of a by selecting the option Automatically connect workshop with an authorised Volvo network), 1. Press Settings in the top view. when I arrive in settings view in the centre dis- the connection mode will change to manual if 2. Press System Download Centre. play. the driver declines connection twice within a period of 5 days. 3. Deselect Auto Software Update. Each time the car slows to a slow enough speed it starts searching for a Wi-Fi network. If an If an update is available, the message New Without driver confirmation software updates available authorised Volvo network (at a workshop) is is shown in the This option provides the most convenient way of centre display's status bar. A tap on the message found, a message is displayed or a pop-up window opens in the centre display. (This does not transmitting troubleshooting data. The car con- starts a download application in the home view's nects without the need for the driver to confirm. bottom subview. As soon as the download appli- apply when you connect manually, see the sec- cation has started, an icon in the download appli- tion "Connecting to a workshop manually" If the car stops at the workshop and is switched cation's button System updates shows how below). off with the start knob, a message is shown at many updates are available. the top in the centre display. The car will connect automatically when the driver’s door is opened Related information unless the driver presses the Cancel message • Online car* (p. 488) button. • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 494) • Remote updates (p. 534)

7 This functionality will be gradually introduced in connection with the service workshops extending their services. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 535 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| With driver confirmation This option requires confirmation by the driver for the car to connect. If the car stops at the workshop and is switched off with the start knob, a pop-up window is opened in the centre display. The car will connect automatically when the driver’s door is opened provided the driver presses the Connect button in the pop-up window. If the driver does nothing, or presses the Abort button in the pop-up window, no connection will be made. Connecting to a workshop manually Manual connection is made by the service technician. Changing the connection mode The way the car connects can be changed in the settings view in the centre display. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication Volvo Service Networks. 3. Select Automatically connect when I arrive, Ask before connecting or Never connect and never ask (manual connection). Related information • Online car* (p. 488) • Settings view (p. 174)

536 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Raise the car When raising the car it is important that the car jack or the workshop/garage jack is fitted to the intended points on the car’s underbody.

For cars with level control*, air suspension, if fitted, must be switched off before the car is raised. Switch off the function via the centre display: 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Suspension . 3. Select Deactivate Suspension & Leveling Control.

NOTE Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 537 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red). If the car is raised with a workshop jack, it must be positioned under one of the four lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Make sure the jack plate is equipped with a rubber pad so that the car will be stable and not be damaged. Always use axle stands or similar. Related information • When changing wheels (p. 521) • Jack* (p. 526)

538 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Opening and closing the bonnet Close the bonnet The bonnet can be opened using the handle in 1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall the passenger compartment and a handle under from its own weight. the bonnet. 2. When the bonnet stops against the lock Open the bonnet catch, push the bonnet to close it completely. WARNING Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.

Turn the handle under the bonnet anticlock- WARNING wise to release the bonnet from the lock Check that the bonnet locks properly when catches and lift the bonnet. closed. The bonnet must engage at both Warning - bonnet not closed sides audibly. When the bonnet is released, the warning symbol and the graphics in the Pull the handle near the foot pedals to driver display will light up and an release the bonnet from its fully closed posi- acoustic reminder will sound. If the car tion. starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will repeat. For more information on graphics, see section "Door and seatbelt reminder".

NOTE If the warning symbol is lit or the warning signal is heard despite the bonnet being closed properly, contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

}}

539 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Engine compartment overview The overview shows some service-related components.

Some of the components included in the car's electric drive system are located under the bonnet. Exercise caution in this area and only touch anything that is related to normal maintenance.

WARNING Orange-coloured cables must only be handled by qualified personnel. Bonnet completely closed. The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant. WARNING WARNING Coolant expansion tank Never drive with an open bonnet! Several components in the car work with high-voltage current that could be dangerous Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driv- If there are any signs that the bonnet is not in the event of incorrect intervention. er's side) properly closed whilst driving, stop immedi- Washer fluid filler pipe8 ately and close it. • Do not touch anything that is not clearly described in this owner's manual. Central electrical unit Exercise caution when checking/refilling Related information • fluids in the engine compartment. Air filter • Engine compartment overview (p. 540) • Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 65) Engine oil filler pipe

8 Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling.

540 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

WARNING Engine oil IMPORTANT An approved engine oil must be used in order Remember that the radiator fan (located at In order to fulfil the requirements for the that the recommended service intervals can be the front of the engine compartment, behind engine's service intervals all engines are filled applied. the radiator) may start automatically some with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil after the engine has been switched off. at the factory. The choice of oil has been Always have the engine cleaned by a work- made very carefully with regard to service life, shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- starting characteristics, fuel consumption and ommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine environmental impact. is hot. An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can WARNING be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil The ignition system works at a very high and for both filling and oil change, otherwise there hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system is a risk of the service life, starting characte- must always be in ignition position 0 when ristics, fuel consumption and environmental work is being performed in the engine com- impact of the car being affected. partment. If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis- Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil Volvo recommends: cosity is not used, engine related components when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the engine is hot. may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims any liability for any such damage. Related information Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- • Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 539) ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. • Filling washer fluid (p. 553) Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/ Topping up coolant (p. 543) • high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain engine • Fuses in engine compartment (p. 560) variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the • Checking and filling with engine oil driver display's warning symbol for low oil pres- (p. 542) sure is used. Other variants have an oil • Ignition positions (p. 399) level sensor, when the driver is informed via the driver display's warning symbol and display

}}

541 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact Checking and filling with engine oil IMPORTANT a Volvo dealer for more information. The oil level is detected with the electronic oil If this symbol is shown together level sensor. Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with a message about low oil level, with the intervals specified in the Service and such as Engine oil level low Top Warranty Booklet. up 0.5 litres of engine oil for Using oil of a higher than specified grade is per- example, only fill the volume specified, such mitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, as 0.5 litres, for example. Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade. Related information WARNING • Checking and filling with engine oil Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold (p. 542) due to the risk of fire. • Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 590) Check the oil level • Engine oil — specifications (p. 589) Open the Car status app from Filler pipe9. the app view in the centre dis- Status In some cases, oil may need to be topped up play and press to dis- between service intervals. play oil level. Action with regard to engine oil level does not need to be taken until a message is shown in the driver display. WARNING If this symbol is shown together with the message Engine oil level Service required, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil level may be too high.

9 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

542 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

NOTE Topping up coolant The coolant cools the internal combustion If the right conditions for measuring the oil engine to the correct operating temperature. The level (time after engine shutdown, the car's heat that is transferred from the engine to the inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not coolant can be used to heat the passenger com- met, then the message No values available partment. will be shown in the centre display. This does not mean that there is something wrong in When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc- the car's systems. tions on the packaging. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too Related information little and too much coolant concentrate. • Engine oil (p. 541) WARNING Graphics for oil level in the centre display. • Engine oil — specifications (p. 589) The oil level is checked using the electronic oil Adverse driving conditions for engine oil Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant • requires topping up when the engine is at level gauge in the centre display when the engine (p. 590) is switched off. operating temperature, unscrew the expan- • Ignition positions (p. 399) sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure. NOTE • Car status (p. 530) The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched off and on level ground before the oil level indication is correct.

Coolant expansion tank. }}

543 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Detach the flap in the plastic cover by folding Related information out the release catch and turning the flap • Coolant — specifications (p. 591) upward. Screw off the cap and top up with coolant. The level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

IMPORTANT • A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system. • Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo. • Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant. • Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations. • When changing coolant/replacing cooling system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant. • The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera- Lift off the rubber strip by pressing it inward tures that are too high may occur result- in the engine compartment. ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.

544 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Servicing the climate control system Related information Bulb replacement The air conditioning system must only be serv- • Volvo service programme (p. 530) The bulbs in halogen headlamps can be iced and repaired by an authorised workshop. replaced by the driver.

Troubleshooting and repair The bulbs in the halogen headlamp can be The air conditioning system contains fluorescent replaced without the help of a workshop, but the tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur- plastic cover over the headlamp must be removed ing leak detection. before the bulbs can be replaced. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop. Cars with R134a refrigerant

WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Cars with R1234yf refrigerant

WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be Lift off the rubber strip by pressing it inward performed by trained and certified technicians in the engine compartment. in order to ensure the safety of the system.

}}

545 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Release the pins in the plastic cover's four WARNING Lamps, front (car with halogen clips by pressing down the pins with a screw- headlamps) driver or similar and removing the cover. The car's electrical system must be in ignition position 0 when replacing bulbs. Refit the cover in reverse order.

NOTE IMPORTANT Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with The pins in the clips need to be pressed back your fingers. Grease from your fingers is completely before the clips are refitted in the vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector cover. and then causing damage. When the cover is refitted the pins must be pressed in until their end surfaces are level with the surfaces of the clips. NOTE If an error message remains after the broken The dipped beam bulb becomes accessible when bulb has been replaced then we recommend Dipped beam the headlamp's round rubber cover is removed. visiting an authorised Volvo workshop. Main beam Bulbs for direction indicators, main beam and daytime running lights/position lamps are acces- NOTE Daytime running lights/position lamps sible when the headlamp's oval cover is Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear Indicator detached, see the section "Removing the headlamps may temporarily have condensation on lamp's oval cover". the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte- (Not used) Contact a workshop10 if faults occur in other rior lighting is designed to withstand this. lamps. This also applies to the bulbs for reversing Condensation is normally vented out of the lights. If a fault occurs in LED11 lamps, the entire lamp housing when the lamp has been lamp unit usually must be replaced. switched on for a time.

10 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 11 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

546 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Lamps, rear • Bulb specifications (p. 550) Replacing the dipped beam bulb • Ignition positions (p. 399) The dipped beam bulb in halogen headlamps can be replaced by the driver.

Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic cover over the headlamp must be removed; see the section "Bulb replacement".

IMPORTANT Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage. Brake light (LED11) Position lamps (LED)

Reversing lamp12 Position lamps (LED)

Direction indicator (LED)

Fog lamp (LED)

Brake light - central, high-level (LED)

Related information • Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 547) Left-hand headlamp. • Removing the headlamp's oval cover 1. Detach the headlamp's round rubber cover. (p. 548)

11 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 12 Contact a workshop for replacement - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. }}

547 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| 2. Unplug the connector from the bulb. Removing the headlamp's oval Related information 3. Detach the bulb by pushing it gently upwards cover • Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 549) and pulling it straight out. Most of the headlamp's bulbs become accessi- • Replacing daytime running light bulb/posible when the oval cover has been removed. tion lamp bulb, front (p. 549) 4. Fit a new bulb in the socket. The bulb's guide pin must be aimed straight upwards. Before the oval cover can be removed, the plastic • Replacing the front direction indicator bulb (p. 550) 5. Press in the connector. cover over the headlamp must be removed; see the section "Bulb replacement". • Bulb replacement (p. 545) 6. Refit the headlamp's round rubber cover. Related information • Bulb replacement (p. 545) • Bulb specifications (p. 550)

Left-hand headlamp. 1. Unscrew the cover's four screws using a Torx tool, size T20 (1). They must not be screwed all the way out, 3 - 4 turns is enough. Slide the cover to one side.

3. Remove the cover. Reinstall the cover in reverse order.

548 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Replacing the main beam lamp 2. Carefully prize the plastic cover at the con- Replacing daytime running light The main beam lamp in halogen headlamps can nector's lock lug so that the lock lug relea- bulb/position lamp bulb, front be replaced by the driver. ses. The bulb for the daytime running light/position 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. lamp in halogen headlamps can be replaced by Before the bulb can be replaced, the oval cover the driver. of the headlamp must be removed; see the sec- 4. Replace the bulb. tion "Removing the headlamp's oval cover". 5. Fit the bulb in the socket and turn downward. Before the bulb can be replaced, the oval cover of the headlamp must be removed; see the sec- IMPORTANT Related information tion "Removing the headlamp's oval cover". Removing the headlamp's oval cover (p. 548) Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with • your fingers. Grease from your fingers is • Bulb specifications (p. 550) NOTE vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector The bulb for the daytime running light/posi- and then causing damage. tion lamp is easier to access if the main beam bulb is detached. The main beam bulb is fitted diagonally above the daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb. Detach the main beam bulb by rotating its bulb holder upwards and then pulling straight out.

Left-hand headlamp. 1. Detach the bulb by turning the bulb holder upward and then pulling straight out.

}}

549 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Replacing the front direction Bulb specifications indicator bulb The specifications apply to bulbs in halogen The direction indicator bulb in halogen head- headlamps. Contact a workshop13 if faults occur lamps can be replaced by the driver. in other lamps. Before the bulb can be replaced, the oval cover Function WA Type of the headlamp must be removed; see the section "Removing the headlamp's oval cover". Dipped beam 55 H7 Main beam 65 H9 Front direction indicators 24 PY24W

Left-hand headlamp. daytime running lights/ 21/5 W21/5W position lamps, front 1. Pull the bulb holder for the daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb straight out. A Watt 2. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out. Related information 3. Replace the bulb. • Bulb replacement (p. 545) 4. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press it into place. Left-hand headlamp. 5. If the main beam bulb's bulb holder has been removed, fit it into the socket and screw in. 1. Press the catches together and pull the bulb holder straight out. Related information 2. Replace with a new bulb holder with bulb. • Removing the headlamp's oval cover (p. 548) 3. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press Bulb specifications (p. 550) • it into place. Related information • Removing the headlamp's oval cover (p. 548) • Bulb specifications (p. 550)

13 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

550 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Wiper blades in service position on. Service mode can be activated in two ways via Via settings The windscreen wiper blades must be in service the centre display: 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre position when, for example, they are to be Via function view display. replaced. Press the Wiper Service 2. Press My Car Wipers. Position button. The light indi- Wiper Service Position cator in the button illuminates 3. Deselect to deacti- when the service position is vate service position. activated. Upon activation, the The wiper blades also exit service position if: wipers move to standing • Windscreen wiping is activated. straight up. • Windscreen washing is activated. Via settings 1. Press Settings in the top view. • Rain sensor activated. • The car is driven away. 2. Press My Car Wipers. IMPORTANT 3. Select Wiper Service Position. > The wipers move up to standing straight If the wiper arms in service position have Wiper blades in service position. up. been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the wind- In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades Deactivating service position screen before the activation of wiping, wash- (e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen) ing or the rain sensor, as well as before driv- they must be in service position. Service mode can be deactivated in two ways via the centre display: ing. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet. IMPORTANT Via function view Press the Wiper Service Before placing the wiper blades in the service Position button in the centre Related information position, make sure that they are not frozen display. The light indicator in • Replacing a wiper blade (p. 552) down. the button extinguishes when • Filling washer fluid (p. 553) the service position is deacti- • Overview of the centre display (p. 33) Activating service position vated. Service mode cannot be activated when the car • Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 155) is stationary and the windscreen wipers are not

551 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Replacing a wiper blade The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced. Replacing a windscreen wiper blade

Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out The wiper blades are different lengths. parallel with the wiper arm. Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is NOTE heard. The wiper blades are different lengths. The Check that the blade is firmly installed. blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side. 4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen.

552 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window Related information Filling washer fluid • Wiper blades in service position (p. 551) Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps • Cleaning the exterior (p. 572) and windows. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when the temperature is under the freezing point.

1. Fold out the wiper arm. 2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the arrow). 3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end position against the wiper arm as a lever to Washer fluid is filled by opening the blue cap. detach the blade more easily. 4. Press the new wiper blade into place. You NOTE should hear a click. Check that it is firmly When approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains installed. in the reservoir the message Washer fluid 5. Lower the wiper arm. Level low, refill is shown in the driver display together with the symbol . IMPORTANT Check the blades regularly. Neglected main- Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended tenance shortens the service life of the wiper by Volvo - with frost protection during cold blades. weather and below freezing point.

}}

553 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| IMPORTANT Starter battery WARNING The electrical system is single-pole and uses the Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent The battery can generate oxyhydrogen chassis and engine casing as a conductor. • with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8, gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral The starter battery is used to start up the electri- be formed if a jump lead is connected water). cal system and drive electrical equipment in the incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode. car. The hybrid battery is used when the internal combustion engine is started. • The battery contains sulphuric acid, which IMPORTANT can cause serious burns. The starter battery should be replaced by a Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the • If sulphuric acid comes into contact with workshop. eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large temperature is below freezing to avoid freez- quantities of water. If acid splashes into ing in the pump, reservoir and hoses. The starter battery is a 12 V AGM battery, the eyes - seek medical attention imme- designed for the carbon dioxide reducing func- diately. Volume: tions, Start/Stop and regenerative charging, and to support the functionality of the car's different When connecting an external starter battery or • Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres. systems. battery charger, use the car's charging points in • Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres. The service life and function of the starter battery the engine compartment. The battery terminals Related information is influenced by factors such as the number of on the car's starter battery in the cargo area must starts, discharging, driving style, driving condi- not be used. Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 155) • tions, climatic conditions etc. • Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 539) • Never disconnect the starter battery when IMPORTANT the engine is running. It is not possible to charge another car’s bat- • Check that the cables to the starter battery tery by means of current through the charging are correctly connected and properly tight- points. Using the charging points to charge ened. another car's battery may cause a fuse to blow, which means that the charging points will stop working.

554 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

NOTE NOTE If both the starter battery and the hybrid bat- The life of the battery is shortened if it tery are discharged then both batteries must becomes discharged repeatedly. be charged. In such a case, charging only the The life of the battery is affected by several hybrid battery first is not possible. factors, including driving conditions and cli- In order for the hybrid battery to be charged mate. Battery starting capacity decreases the starter battery must have a certain state gradually with time and therefore needs to be of charge. recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity. IMPORTANT To maintain the battery in good condition, at Positive charging point If the following instruction is not observed least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- then the energy saving function for infotain- mended or that the battery is connected to a Negative charging point ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or battery charger with automatic trickle charg- the message in the driver display about the ing. IMPORTANT starter battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection A battery that is kept fully charged has a When charging the starter battery, only use a of an external starter battery or battery maximum service life. modern battery charger with controlled charg- charger: ing voltage. Fast charging function must not The negative battery terminal on the car's be used since it may damage the battery. • starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger - only the car's negative charging point may be used as the grounding point.

}}

555 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| IMPORTANT IMPORTANT The H8 AGM battery has a retaining strap. If the starter battery is replaced, make sure Make sure the retaining strap is properly you replace it with a battery with the same tightened. cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

NOTE The starter battery's container size must be consistent with the dimensions for the original battery. The starter battery is located in the cargo area. The following table shows specifications for the Related information starter battery. • Symbols on the batteries (p. 557) • Using jump starting with another battery Battery (p. 402)

H8 AGM H8 AGM battery with straps. • Hybrid battery (p. 557) • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 444) Voltage (V) 12 Volvo recommends entrusting battery replacement to an authorised Volvo workshop. Cold start capacityA - CCAB 850 (A) IMPORTANT Size , L×W×H (mm) 353×175×190 When replacing the starter battery, a battery 14 Capacity (Ah) 95 of AGM type must be fitted.

A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes.

14 Absorbed Glass Mat.

556 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Symbols on the batteries Hybrid battery There are information and warning symbols on The car is equipped with a hybrid battery for the batteries. Avoid sparks and naked electric motor operation - a maintenance-free flames. rechargeable Lithium-ion type battery.

NOTE Use protective goggles. The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery is discharged. Risk of explosion. NOTE If both the starter battery and the hybrid bat- Further information in the tery are discharged then both batteries must owner's manual for the car. be charged. In such a case, charging only the hybrid battery first is not possible. Must be taken for recycling. In order for the hybrid battery to be charged the starter battery must have a certain state of charge. Store the battery out of the reach of children. NOTE WARNING An expended battery must be recycled in an The hybrid battery must only be replaced by a environmentally safe manner as it contains workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is lead. recommended. The battery contains corrosive acid. Related information Coolant • Starter battery (p. 554) The hybrid battery's cooling system has a separate expansion tank.

}}

557 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Fuses Location of central electrical units All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.

WARNING Orange-coloured cables must only be handled by qualified personnel.

WARNING Several components in the car work with high-voltage current that could be dangerous IMPORTANT Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand in the event of incorrect intervention. The hybrid battery's coolant must only be top- drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central ped up by a workshop - an authorised Volvo Do not touch anything that is not clearly electrical units under the glovebox change sides. described in this owner's manual. workshop is recommended. Engine compartment If an electrical component or function does not Related information Under the glovebox work, it may be because the component's fuse • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 444) was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the Cargo area • Starter battery (p. 554) same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an Related information authorised Volvo workshop for checking. • Replacing a fuse (p. 559)

558 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Replacing a fuse All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse. 2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown. 3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

WARNING Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

Related information • Fuses (p. 558) • Fuses in engine compartment (p. 560) • Fuses under glovebox (p. 564) • Fuses in cargo area (p. 568)

559 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things.

560 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that Function AA Function AA facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses. Control module for the high-volt- 5 Shut-off valve for the hybrid bat- 10 The fuse box also provides space for several age heater of the internal com- tery's coolant; Coolant pump 1 spare fuses. bustion engine's coolant for hybrid battery Positions Control module for air condition- 5 Coolant pump for electric drive 10 ing; Charging unit; Shut-off valve system On the inside of the cover is a label that shows for heat exchanger; Shut-off the location of the fuses. valve for coolant that passes Cooling fan for hybrid compo- 25 • Fuses 1-13, 18-30, 35-37, 46-54 and through the climate control sys- nents 55-70 are of the "Micro" type. tem - - • Fuses 14-17, 31-34, 38-45 and 71-78 are Control module for hybrid bat- 5 - - of the "MCase" type and should be replaced tery; High voltage converter for by a workshop15. combined high-voltage genera- - - tor/starter motor with voltage Function AA converter 500 V-12 V - - Converter for control of the sup- 5 - - ply to the rear axle's electric - - motor Converter for control of the sup- 10 - - - - ply to the rear axle's electric motor - - - - Control module for hybrid bat- 10 - - Control module for actuator for 5 tery; High voltage converter for engagement/change of auto- combined high-voltage genera- USB port in tunnel console, 5 matic gearbox gear positions tor/starter motor with voltage front* converter 500 V-12 V 12 V socket in tunnel console, 15 Charging unit 5 front

15 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 561 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function AA Function AA Function AA

12 V socket in tunnel console, 15 Siren* 5 - - by legroom for second seat rowB Control module for brake system 40 - - 12 V socket in tunnel console, (valves, parking brake) between the rear seatsC; USB - - ports in tunnel console, between Windscreen wipers 30 the rear seatsC Airbags 5 Rear window washer 25 12 V socket in cargo area* 15 Left-hand headlamp 7.5 Heated windscreen* right-hand 40 C USB ports for iPad holder side Accelerator pedal sensor 5

- - Parking heater* 20 Transmission control module; 15 Control module for gear selector - - Control unit for brake system 40 (ABS pump) Engine Control Module (ECM) 5 ------Heated windscreen* right-hand Shunt - - Heated windscreen* left-hand Shunt side side - - Supplied when the ignition is 5 Heated windscreen* left-hand 40 switched on: Engine control - - side module; Transmission components; Electric steering servo; Engine control module; Actuator; 20 Headlamp washers* 25 Central electronic module Throttle unit; Valve for turbo- charger Windscreen washers 25 Exterior car noise (certain mar- 5 kets) Solenoids; Valves; Thermostat 10 - - for engine cooling system Right-hand headlamp 7.5 Horn 20 Vacuum regulators; Valve 7.5

562 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function AA Function AA Control module, spoiler roller 5 - - cover; Control module, radiator roller cover - -

- - A Ampere B Not Excellence C Lambda-sond, front; Lambda- 15 Excellence sond, rear Related information Solenoid for engine oil pump; 15 • Replacing a fuse (p. 559) Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda • Fuses under glovebox (p. 564) sond, centre • Fuses in cargo area (p. 568) - -

Engine Control Module (ECM) 20

Ignition coils; Spark plugs 15

- -

Control module for transmission 30 fluid pump Control module for vacuum 40 pump Actuator for transmission 25

- -

563 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses under glovebox Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst other things, the 230 V socket, displays and door modules.

564 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that The fuse box in the engine compartment also facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting provides space for several spare fuses. of fuses.

}}

565 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Positions Function AA Function AA • Fuses 1, 3-21, 23-36, 39-53 and 55-59 are of the "Micro" type. Module for start knob and for 5 Controls lighting; Interior lighting; 7.5 • Fuses 2, 22, 37-38 and 54 are of the parking brake control Dimming of interior rearview mirror*; Rain and light sensor*; Key- "MCase" type and should be replaced by a Steering wheel module for heated 15 16 pad in tunnel console, by legroom workshop . steering wheel* for second seat row*B; Power front Function AA - - seats* C - - - - Power rear seats ; Display for rear seat comfort functionsC; Modules 230 V socket in tunnel console, 30C - - for seat comfort (massage) rearC between the rear seatsC - - Control module for driver support 5 - - functions Control module for climate control 10 20 Movement detector* 5 system Panorama roof with sun blind* Media player 5 Steering lock 7.5 Head-up display* 5

Driver display 5 Diagnostic socket OBDII 10 Passenger compartment lighting 5

Keypad in centre console 5 Centre display 5 - -

Sun sensor 5 Fan module for climate control 40 Display in roof console (Seatbelt 5 system, front reminder/Indicator for airbag on - - the front passenger seat) ------

Steering wheel module 5 Humidity sensor 5

16 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

566 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function AA Function AA Related information • Replacing a fuse (p. 559) Door module in right-hand rear 20 Seat heating, driver's side front 15 • Fuses in engine compartment (p. 560) door Seat heating, passenger side front 15 • Fuses in cargo area (p. 568) Fuses in cargo area 10 Coolant pump 10 Control module for Internet-con- 5 nected car; Control module for tel- - - ematics Door module in left-hand front 20 Door module in left-hand rear door 20 door Audio control module (amplifier) 40 Control module for suspension 20 (certain variants) (active chassis)* Fan module for climate control 40 - - system, rear* Sensus control module 10 Module for multi-band antenna 5 - - Modules for seat comfort (mas- 5 sage) front* - -

- - Door module in right-hand front 20 door Rear window wiper 15 Display for rear seat comfort func- 5C Control module for fuel pump 15 tionsC Relay coils in central electrical unit 5 TV* (certain markets) 5 in engine compartment; relay coil for transmission fluid pump Primary fuse for fuses 53 and 58 15

- - A Ampere B Not Excellence C Excellence

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 567 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses in cargo area Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst other things, power seats*, airbags and seatbelt tensioners.

568 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

The central electrical unit is located under the storage compartment on the right-hand side. On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that The fuse box in the engine compartment also facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting provides space for several spare fuses. of fuses. }}

569 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Positions Function AA Function AA • Fuses 13-17 and 21-36 are of the "Micro" type. Towbar control module* 40 Supply when the ignition is 10 Fuses 1-12, 18-20 and 37 are of the switched on • Seatbelt pretensioner module, 40 "MCase" type and should be replaced by a right-hand side Control module for airbags and 5 workshop17. seatbelt tensioners Internal relay coils 5 Function AA RefrigeratorB; Heated/cooled cup 10B - - B Rear window defroster 30 holder, rear Module for detecting foot move- 5 Seat heating left-hand side rear* 15 Electrically operated seat, left- 20B B ment* (for opening the power hand side rear operated tailgate) - - Compressor for air suspension* 40 - - Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* 5

Electrically-driven heater right- 30 Module for lowering the backrest 20 - - hand side rear in the third seat row* Seatbelt pretensioner modules 5 - - Towbar control module* 25 Actuator for exhaust gases 5 Electrically-driven heater left-hand 30 Power driver seat* 20 side rear - - Seatbelt pretensioner module, left- 40 Electrically operated seat, right- 20B hand side - - hand side rearB Parking camera 5 - - * Seat heating right-hand side rear* 15 - - Power operated tailgate* 25 - -

- - A Ampere Electrically operated front passen- 20 B Excellence ger seat* Ionic air cleanerB 5B

17 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

570 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Related information • Replacing a fuse (p. 559) • Fuses under glovebox (p. 564) • Fuses in engine compartment (p. 560)

571 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Cleaning the exterior WARNING NOTE The car should be washed as soon as it Always have the engine cleaned by a work- The car must only be washed by hand over becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash with shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. the first few months. This is because the paint oil separator. Use car shampoo. is more delicate when it is new. Handwashing IMPORTANT • Remove bird droppings from the paintwork IMPORTANT as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling. Before driving the car into an automatic car very quickly. For example, use soft paper or Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but wash, deactivate the functions for Automatic sponge soaked in plenty of water. An author- use water and a non-scratching sponge braking when stationary (Auto Hold) and ised Volvo workshop is recommended for the instead. Automatic application of parking brake. If removal of any discoloration. these functions are not deactivated, the brake system will jam when the car is stationary and Hose down the underbody. • NOTE the car will not be able to move. Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt • Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear has been removed so as to reduce the risk of lamps may temporarily have condensation on scratches from washing. Do not spray directly In car washes where the car is towed through the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte- onto the locks. with rolling wheels, the following applies: rior lighting is designed to withstand this. 1. Drive into the automatic car wash. • If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on Condensation is normally vented out of the very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the lamp housing when the lamp has been 2. Deactivate the function for automatic braking surfaces must not be hot from the sun. switched on for a time. when stationary (Auto Hold) using the switch • Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and in the tunnel console. plenty of lukewarm water. Automatic car wash 3. Deactivate the function for automatic appli- • Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way cation of parking brake via the centre display. solution or car shampoo. of washing the car, but it cannot reach every- 4. Move the gear lever to position N. • Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a where. Handwashing the car is recommended for water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of achieving optimum results. water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out.

572 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

5. Switch off the engine by turning the start WARNING IMPORTANT knob in the tunnel console to STOP. Hold the knob in STOP position for at least Always test the brakes after washing the car, Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and 4 seconds. including the parking brake, to ensure that rubber. moisture and corrosion do not attack the > The car is ready for the automatic car brake linings and reduce braking perform- When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, wash. ance. only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. IMPORTANT Wiper blades Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear The system will automatically switch to P Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as away or damage the glossy surface layer. well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair mode unless the above step is followed. The Polishing agent that contains abrasive must the service life of wiper blades. wheels are locked in P mode, which they not be used. should not be when putting the car through When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service an automatic car wash. position. IMPORTANT High-pressure washing NOTE Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than When using high-pressure washing, use sweep- Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu- 11.5. This may result in discolouration of ano- ing movements and make sure that the nozzle larly with lukewarm soap solution or car dised aluminium parts such as roof rack and does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents. of the car (the distance applies to all exterior around the side windows. parts). Do not spray directly onto the locks. Exterior plastic, rubber and trim Never use metal polishing agent on anodised aluminium parts, this can result in discoloura- Testing the brakes components tion and destroy the surface treatment. Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then A special cleaning agent available from Volvo when driving long distances in rain or slush. The dealers is recommended for the cleaning and heat from the friction causes the brake linings to care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim Rims warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by in very damp or cold weather. using such a cleaning agent the instructions Volvo. must be followed carefully. Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims.

}}

573 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Related information Polishing and waxing IMPORTANT • Polishing and waxing (p. 574) Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo to give the paintwork extra protection. The car • Wiper blades in service position (p. 551) should be used. Other treatment such as pre- does not need to be polished until it is at least Automatic braking when stationary (p. 423) serving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or • one year old. However, the car can be waxed similar could damage the paintwork. Paint- • Using the parking brake (p. 420) during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in work damage caused by such treatments is Gear positions for automatic gearbox direct sunlight. • not covered by Volvo warranty. (p. 405) Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and Related information tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More • Cleaning the exterior (p. 572) stubborn stains can be removed using fine rub- bing paste designed for car paintwork. • Paint damage (p. 577) Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber. When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer. Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

574 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Rustproofing Cleaning the interior Leather upholstery* The car has effective protection against corro- Only use cleaning agents and car care products Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve sion. recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and its original appearance. treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming Leather upholstery is a natural product that Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of is important prior to using cleaning agents. modern metallic protective coatings on the sheet changes and acquires a beautiful patina over time. Regular cleaning and treatment are metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion- IMPORTANT protected and minimised metal overlap, and required in order that the properties and colours shielding plastic components, abrasion protection • Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g. of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a and supplemental rust inhibitor in exposed areas. dark jeans and suede garments) may comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care Kit/ This combination guarantees that the body will stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is Wipes, for the cleaning and treatment of leather remain free from corrosion problems over time. In important to clean and treat these parts upholstery which, when used in accordance with the chassis, exposed components of the wheel of the upholstery as soon as possible. the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating. suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast • Never use strong solvents such as aluminium. washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit to To achieve best results, Volvo recommends the clean the interior, since this may damage cleaning and application of the protective cream Inspection and maintenance the upholstery as well as other interior once to four times per year (or more if required). The car's anti-corrosion protection normally materials. The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available requires no maintenance, but a good way to fur- from Volvo dealers. ther reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the • Never spray the cleaning agent directly car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu- onto components that have electrical but- Leather steering wheel tons and controls. Wipe them instead tions must always be avoided on glossy trim com- Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the using a moistened cloth containing the ponents. Any stone chips should be rectified as leather steering wheel with protective plastic. cleaning agent. soon as they are discovered. Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recommended • Sharp objects and Velcro may damage for cleaning the leather steering wheel. Related information the fabric upholstery. • Cleaning the exterior (p. 572) Leather panel* • Paint damage (p. 577) Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather on the top of the instrument panel or at Never scrape or rub a stain since this risks the door panel. Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is destroying the upholstery. Never use strong stain recommended for cleaning the leather panels. removers since this risks destroying the colour of the upholstery.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 575 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Interior plastic, metal and wood parts A special textile cleaner is recommended for Cleaning the centre display A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois- stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect tened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is mats should be cleaned with agents recom- the centre display's performance and readability. recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur- mended by Volvo dealers. Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre faces. Related information cloth. Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong • Cleaning the centre display (p. 576) stain removers. Seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo dealers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract. Inlay mats and floor mat Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay mat is secured with pins. Home button for the centre display. Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay 1. Turn off the centre display with a long press mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up. on the home button. Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each 2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth pin. supplied or use another microfibre cloth of equivalent quality. The screen should be WARNING wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth with small circular movements. If necessary, Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in water. the pins so that it does not get caught adja- 3. Activate the display with a short press on the cent to and under the pedals. home button.

576 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

IMPORTANT Paint damage Touching up minor paintwork damage Paint is an important part of the car's rustproof- To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre ing and should therefore be checked regularly. should be rectified immediately. display must be free from sand and dirt. The most common types of paintwork damage Materials that may be needed are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the • Primer18 - a special adhesive primer in a edges of wings, doors and bumpers. IMPORTANT spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated When cleaning the centre display, only use Colour code bumpers. gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pres- The colour code label is located on the car's door • Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray sure can damage the screen. pillar and becomes visible when the right-hand cans or as touch-up pens/sticks19. rear door is opened. • Masking tape. IMPORTANT • fine sand paper18. Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals Related information directly on the centre display. Do not use window cleaning agent, other cleaning agents, • Repairing paint damage (p. 578) aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or • Type designations (p. 580) cleaning agent containing abrasive. • Rustproofing (p. 575) Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tis- sue paper, these can scratch the centre display.

Related information • Cleaning the interior (p. 575) Exterior colour code Overview of the centre display (p. 33) • Any secondary exterior colour code It is important that the correct colour is used.

18 If required. 19 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.

577 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Repairing paint damage 3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine When repairing paint damage, the car must be brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with clean, dry and have a temperature of over 15 °C. a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried. For scratches, proceed as described above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork. Touch-up pens and spray paints are available from Volvo dealers.

NOTE If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with base coat and clear coat as soon as the surface has been 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam- cleaned. aged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint. Related information If the damage is down to the metal, use of a • Paint damage (p. 577) primer is appropriate. In the event of damage • Cleaning the exterior (p. 572) to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly. 2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry.

578 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS

Type designations Type designation, vehicle identification number, etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be read on labels in the car. Label location

The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model. Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.

580 SPECIFICATIONS

Type designation, vehicle identification num- Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant Engine code and engine serial number. ber, permissible maximum weights and code des- R134a. ignation for exterior colour and type approval number. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.

Label for engine oil. Label for parking heater.

Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant R1234yf.

Gearbox type designation and serial number. }}

581 SPECIFICATIONS

Car's identification number (VIN Vehicle Iden- tification Number). Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

NOTE It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.

Related information • Air conditioning — specifications (p. 592)

582 SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table.

Dimensions mm Dimensions mm Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2984 F Load height 816 H Rear trackE 1675F B Length 4950 G Front trackE 1673F 1667G C Load length, floor, folded 2040 1665G Rear trackH 1679F seatA 1260B Front trackH 1676F 1671G D Load length, floor 761/898C 1668G I Load width, floor 1192 554D E Height 1776 }}

583 SPECIFICATIONS

|| Dimensions mm

J Width 1923I 1931J 1958K K Width including door mirrors 2140 L Width including folded-in 2008 door mirrors

A Does not apply to cars with 4 seats. B From second seat row. C Car with 4 seats. D Car with 7 seats. E Car without air suspension. F Applies to 20-, 21- and 22-inch wheels. G Applies to 19-inch wheels. H Car with air suspension. I Body width. J Width for car with 19-inch wheels. K Width for car with 20-, 21- and 22-inch wheels.

584 SPECIFICATIONS

Weights NOTE Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a The documented kerb weight applies to cars label in the car. in the standard version - i.e. a car without Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank extra equipment or accessories. This means 90% full and all fluids. that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly The weight of passengers and accessories, and by the weight of the accessory. towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb Examples of accessories that reduce load weight. capacity are the different equipment levels (e.g. Kinetic/Momentum/Summum), as well Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - as other accessories such as towbar, load Kerb weight. carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, visible when the right-hand rear door is opened. carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc. Max. gross vehicle weight

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- Max. train weight (car+trailer) taining the kerb weight of your own particular car. Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load WARNING Equipment level The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and Max. load: See registration document. how the load is distributed. Max. roof load: 100 kg. Related information • Type designations (p. 580) • Towing capacity and towball load (p. 586)

585 SPECIFICATIONS

Towing capacity and towball load Max. weight braked trailer Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables. NOTE The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing bracket is recommended for trailers heavier than 1800 kg.

Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg) T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 Automatic 2400 140 T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 Automatic 2250 225

A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.

IMPORTANT When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight (including towball load) by a maximum of 100 kg, provided that speed is limited to 100 km/h (62 mph). National legal requirements for the vehicle combination, such as speed, etc. must be observed.

Max. weight unbraked trailer Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg) 750 50

586 SPECIFICATIONS

Related information • Type designations (p. 580) • Weights (p. 585) • Driving with a trailer (p. 438) • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 440)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 587 SPECIFICATIONS

Engine specifications The T8 Twin Engine is driven both by a petrol Engine specifications (output etc.) for each engine and an electric drive motor (ERAD – respective engine alternative can be read in the Electric Rear Axle Drive). table.

Engine Engine codeA Output Output Torque No. of cylinders (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rpm) T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 235/5700 320/5700 400/2200-5400 4 T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 233/6000 318/6000 400/2200-5400 4

A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.

Electric drive motor Max. power output: 65 kW (88 hp). Torque: 240 Nm. Related information • Type designations (p. 580) • Engine oil — specifications (p. 589) • Coolant — specifications (p. 591)

588 SPECIFICATIONS

Engine oil — specifications Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Volvo recommends:

Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter (litres) T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.9 T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 approx. 5.9

A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.

Related information • Type designations (p. 580) • Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 590) • Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 542) • Engine oil (p. 541)

589 SPECIFICATIONS

Adverse driving conditions for IMPORTANT engine oil In order to fulfil the requirements for the Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- engine's service intervals all engines are filled mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil Below are some examples of adverse driving at the factory. The choice of oil has been conditions. made very carefully with regard to service life, Check the oil level more frequently for long jour- starting characteristics, fuel consumption and neys: environmental impact. • towing a caravan or trailer An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can in mountainous regions • be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil • at high speeds for both filling and oil change, otherwise there • in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hotter is a risk of the service life, starting characte- than +40 °C. ristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected. The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures. If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation driving conditions. It provides extra protection for disclaims any liability for any such damage. the engine. Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- Volvo recommends: ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information • Engine oil — specifications (p. 589) • Engine oil (p. 541)

590 SPECIFICATIONS

Coolant — specifications Transmission fluid — specifications Brake fluid — specifications Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by The prescribed transmission fluid for each The medium in a hydraulic brake system is Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packag- respective gearbox alternative can be read in the called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pres- ing. table. sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in Automatic gearbox turn act on a mechanical brake. Prescribed transmission fluid: AW1 Prescribed grade: Volvo Original brake fluid or equivalent. NOTE The gearbox oil does not need to be changed NOTE under normal driving conditions. It is recommended that brake fluid is changed or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop.

1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.

591 SPECIFICATIONS

Fuel tank — volume Air conditioning — specifications Symbol explanation R1234yf Fuel tank volume for each respective engine The car's climate control system uses a refriger- Symbol Meaning alternative can be read in the table. ant, either R1234yf or R134a depending on market. Information about which refrigerant the Caution Engine Volume (litres) car's climate control system uses is printed on a decal located on the inside of the bonnet. Petrol engine approx. 50 Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and Mobile air conditioning system Related information lubricants in the air conditioning system can be (MAC) • Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu- read in the tables below. elling (p. 429) A/C decal Lubricant type Decal for R134a

An authorised service technician is required in order to service the mobile air conditioning system (MAC) Flammable refrigerants

Decal for R1234yf

592 SPECIFICATIONS

Refrigerant Evaporator Cars with refrigerant R134a IMPORTANT Weight Prescribed grade The A/C system's evaporator must never be 1100 g R134a repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi- WARNING fied and labelled in accordance with SAE J2842. The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised Related information workshop. • Servicing the climate control system (p. 545) • Type designations (p. 580) Cars with refrigerant R1234yf Weight Prescribed grade 1000 g R1234yf

WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

Compressor oil Volume Prescribed grade 120 ml PAG SP-A2

593 SPECIFICATIONS

Fuel consumption and CO2 combined driving NOTE emissions If the consumption and emission data is miss- Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in Automatic gearbox ing then it is included in the enclosed supple- litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams ment. CO2 per km. car's possible range with electric operation (km) Explanation

gram CO2/km

litre/100 km

T8 Twin Engine (B4204T35) 49 2.1 43A

A Drive mode PURE

Fuel consumption and emission values in the weight may increase depending on equipment. There are several reasons for increased fuel con- table above are based on specific EU cycles2, This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, sumption compared with the table's values. that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic increases fuel consumption and carbon dioxide Examples of this are: version and without extra equipment. The car's emissions.

2 Official fuel consumption figures and the range for electric operation are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. Since the driving cycles are also used for quality control there are significant requirements for repeatability of the tests. For this reason the tests are carried out under close scrutiny and only with the car's basic functions (e.g. air conditioning, radio, etc. switched off). As a consequence of this the results from the official figures are not obviously representative of what the customer sees during actual usage. The regulations cover the driving cycles for "Urban driving" and "Extra-urban driving". - For the "Urban driving" driving cycle - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - For the "Extra-urban driving" driving cycle - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h (0-75 mph). The driving is simulated. - The official value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of the results from the "Urban driving" and "Extra-urban driving" driving cycles, in accordance with legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to extrapolate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.

594 SPECIFICATIONS

• If the car is not charged regularly from the NOTE mains power circuit. The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes The driver's driving style. • with age and use, which may result in • If the customer has specified wheels larger increased use of the internal combustion than those fitted as standard on the model's engine and, as a consequence, reduced fuel basic version, then rolling resistance increa- economy and reduced range during electric ses. operation. • High speed results in increased wind resistance. NOTE • Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car. Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- A combination of the above-mentioned examples tion with fuel quality are factors that could can result in significantly increased consumption. affect the car's fuel consumption. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to2. Related information Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in • Type designations (p. 580) a comparison with the EU driving cycles2 which Weights (p. 585) are used in the certification of the car and on • which the consumption figures in the table are • Driving economically (p. 432) based.

595 SPECIFICATIONS

Approved tyre pressures NOTE Approved tyre pressures for each engine alterna- All engines, tyres or combinations of these tive can be found in the table. are not always available in all markets.

Engine Tyre size Speed Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA (km/h) Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear (kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)

235/55 R19 0 - 160C 260 260 290 290 290 T8 Twin Engine (B4204T35) 275/45 R20 T8 Twin Engine (B4204T28) 275/40 R21 160+D 280 280 310 310 - 275/35 R22

A Economical driving. B In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. C 0 - 100 mph D 100+ mph

Related information • Type designations (p. 580) • Checking the tyre pressures (p. 510)

596 SPECIFICATIONS

Hybrid battery — specifications The hybrid battery (battery for drive motor) is used to power the electric motor when driving in electric mode.

Type: Lithium-ion Energy quantity: 9.2 kWh. Related information • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 444)

597

ALPHABETICAL INDEX ALPHABETICAL INDEX 1, 2, 3 ... radar sensor 332 Air recirculation 200 setting the time interval 300 Alarm 267 4WD 416 standby mode 301 automatic re-arming 268 temporary deactivation 301 deactivation 269 Additional heater (Auxiliary heater) 218 reduced alarm level 267 A Adjusting the steering wheel 139 Alcohol lock 398

A/C (Air conditioning) 193 Aerial Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 189 location 244 ABS All Wheel Drive, (AWD) 416 anti-lock brakes 416 Airbag 66 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 416 Activating/deactivating 69 ACC – Adaptive cruise control 296, 304 Apple CarPlay 478 driver's side 67 Accessories and extra equipment 23 passenger side 67, 69 Applications settings 183 Active bending lights 147 Airbag, see Airbag 66 Approach lighting 153 Active main beam 144 Air conditioning 193 Apps 462 Active Park Assist 388 Air conditioning, fluid download, update and uninstall 494 function 388 volume and grade 592 Limitations 393 Ashtray 228 Air conditioning system 186, 190 operation 390 repair 545 Audio and media 462 Symbols and messages 395 Air distribution 200 Audio settings 463, 488 Active Yaw Control 278 Air vents 200, 202 media 476 Adaptation of headlamp beam 147 change 201 phone 487 Adapting driving characteristics 278, 410 defrosting 198 play media 471 Text message 486 Adaptive Cruise Control 296, 304 Recirculation 200 change cruise control functionality 305 table of options 203 Auto climate control 192 fault tracing 305 Air quality 187, 189 Automatic brake 423 function 296 allergies and asthma 189 after collision 419 managing speed 299, 300 passenger compartment filter 188 Automatic car washes 572 overtaking 303

599 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Automatic gearbox 405 Bluetooth C trailer 440 connect 475 Automatic relocking 246 connect car to Internet 489 Camera sensor 351 phone 482 Automatic speed limiter 286 Car care 572 settings 488 Leather upholstery 575 AUX Bonnet, opening 539 jack for connecting media 476 Car functions Book service and repair 531 in centre display 47 Auxiliary heater 218 Brake assist Cargo area 230 AWD, All Wheel Drive 416 after collision 419 electrical socket 224 Brake fluid lighting 151 grade 591 mounting points 232 B protective net 235 Brake functions 416 Cargo cover 233 Backrest Brake light 148 front seat, adjusting 123, 124, 127 Cargo grille 237 Brake mode 405 rear seat, adjusting 134, 136 Car holiday 428 rear seat, lowering 135, 136, 137 Brakes 416 Anti-lock braking system, ABS 416 Car key battery low 261 Bag holder 232 automatic when stationary 423 Car modem Battery 402, 554 brake assist system, BAS 419 connect car to Internet 489 HYBRID 557 brake light 148 settings 493 jump starting 402 brake system 416 Car status 530 maintenance 554 emergency brake lights 418 Tyre pressure 513 overload 427 handbrake 419, 420, 422 start 554 Car upholstery 575 bulbs, specifications 550 symbols on the battery 557 Car washing 572 warning symbols 557 Catalytic converter BLIS 354, 356, 357 Recovery 442 CD player 474

600 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Centre display City Safety™ 344, 346, 347, 349, 350, Collision warning system change settings 45 351, 353 Pedestrian detection 347 cleaning 576 Cleaning Radar sensor 332 climate control 190 automatic car wash 572 Colour code, paint 577 messages 110 car washing 572 Compass 161 operation 36, 40 centre display 576 calibration 162 overview 33 Fabric upholstery 575 Condensation in headlamps 572 symbols in status bar 45 rims 573 Charge current 445 seatbelts 576 Controls lighting 141 Charging 452 upholstery 575 Control unit 451 finish charging 456 Clean Zone Interior Package 189 Control unit display 449 start charging 453 Climate control 186, 190 Coolant 591 Status 454 auto-regulation 192 Coolant, filling 543 Charging cable 446 centre display 190 Cooling system experienced temperature 187 Checking the engine oil level 542 overheating 426 fan control 196 Checking the level 414 Parking 208 Corner Traction Control 278 Child safety 74 rear seat 192 Cover Child safety locks 265 sensors 186 cargo area 233 Child seat 74 temperature control 194 Crash, see Collision 60 voice control 121 integrated booster cushion 88 Cruise control 289, 290 zones 186 i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 82 deactivate 292 lower mounting points 78 Clock, adjustment 103 managing speed 290 positioning/fitting 74 CO2 emissions 594 temporary deactivation 291 table for location 79 Collision 60, 62, 66, 72 CTA 357, 358, 359 table of i-Size 87 table of ISOFIX 83 Collision warning 344 Cyclist detection 347 Upper mounting points 77 CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 189 Cigarette lighter 228

601 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

D Drive-E E Environmental philosophy 25 DAB Radio 468 Drive modes Economical driving 432 Data In driver display 97 ECO pressure 510 recording 22 Driver Alert Control 366 Electrical socket 224 transfer between car and workshop 535 operation 367 Electrical system 554 Data link connector 23 Driver display Electric drive motor Daytime running lights 143 application menu 109 specifications 588 Hybrid-related information 97 Deadlock 250 Electric parking brake 419 messages 110 deactivation 250 low battery voltage 422 Driver performance 173 Defrosting 198 Emergency equipment Digital radio (DAB) 468 Driver profile 179, 180, 181, 182 first aid kit 527 edit 180 Dimensions 583 warning triangle 526 import/export from/to USB 182 Towing bracket 437 Emergency puncture repair 516, 521 select 180 dipped beam 143 action 517 Drive systems 409 inflating the tyres 521 Dipstick, electronic 542 Drivetrain rechecking 517 Direction indicator 149 Gearbox 404 Emergency puncture repair kit 517 Direction indicators 149 Driving location 516 direction of rotation 509 cooling system 426 overview 517 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 408 with a tailer 438 sealing fluid 516 Display lighting 141 Driving economy 432 Emissions of carbon dioxide 594 Distance Warning 293, 294 Driving in water 426 Engine Limitations 295 Driving mode 410 deactivate 401 overheating 426 Door mirrors 159 Driving with a trailer start 400 automatic dimming 160 towball load 586 resetting 159 towing capacity 586 Engine braking, automatic 425

602 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Engine compartment First aid 527 Fuel tank coolant 543 First aid kit 527 volume 592 Engine oil 541 Flooded road 426 Fuel vapour 430 overview 540 Fluids, capacities 553, 591, 592 Fuse box 558 Engine drag control 278 Fluids and oils 591, 592 Fuses Engine oil 541, 590 changing 559 Fog lamp adverse driving conditions 590 General 558 rear 148 filter 541 in cargo area 568 grade and volume 589 Foot brake 416, 418 in engine compartment 560 Engine oil, filling 542 Four-C 414 under glovebox 564 Engine specifications 588 Front seat Error messages Climate control 190 Adaptive Cruise Control 307 Fan 196 G see Messages and symbols 307, 330 heating 205 Temperature 194 Gearbox 404 Error messages in BLIS 361 Ventilation 206 automatic 405 Ethanol content Front seat, manual 123 Gear positions maximum 10 percent by volume 431 automatic gearbox 405 Front seat, power 124, 126 External dimensions 583 adjusting seat 124, 131 Gear selector inhibitor 408 massage 127 Gear shift indicator 407 F memory function 125 Glass multi-function control 126, 127 laminated/reinforced 32 simple entry and exit 130 Fan Glovebox 229 FSC, ecolabelling 32 Air distribution 201 Gracenote® 473 Air vents 202 Fuel 430, 431 Gross vehicle weight 585 Control 196 fuel consumption 594 Ground fault breaker 451 Fault tracing for the camera sensor 341 Fuelling GSI - Gear selector assistance 407 Ferry transport 414 filling 429

603 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

H Hill Descent Control 425 Instrument overview Hill start assist left-hand drive car 92 Handbrake 419, 420 Hill Start Assist (HSA) 422 right-hand drive car 93 Hazard warning flashers 149 Hill Start Assist 422 Instruments and controls 92, 93 HDC 425 HomeLink® 167 Integrated booster cushion 88 lowering 89 Headlamp beam Home safe light duration 153 adaptation 147 raising 88 Horn 138 height adjustment 141 IntelliSafe Hybrid battery 557 Headlamp control 139 Driver support 28 charging 444 Interior Air Quality System 189 Headlamp levelling of headlamps 141 specifications 597 Headlamp pattern, adjusting 147 Interior lighting 150 Headlamp pattern adjustment 147 Interior rearview mirror 160 automatic dimming 161 Headlamps I cover 548 Intermittent wiping 154 IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 189 head restraint 132 Internet, see Internet-connected car 488 IC (Inflatable Curtain) 72 Heated washer nozzles 156 Internet-connected car Ignition position 399 book service and repair 531 Heater 216 system updates 534 auxiliary heater 218 Immobiliser 265 parking heater 217 Indicator symbols 99 iPod®, connection 475 Heating Inflatable curtain 72 seats 205 Inflatable Curtain 72 steering wheel 207 J Information display 95 Windows 198 Infotainment system (Audio and media) 462 Jack 526 Height adjustment 414 Instrument lighting 141 Journey statistics 173 High engine temperature 426 Jump starting 402 Hill descent control 425

604 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

K controls lighting 141 Lockable wheel bolts 524 daytime running lights 143 Lock confirmation 247 Kerb weight 585 dipped beam 143 Locking/unlocking display lighting 141 Key 181, 240, 243, 247 tailgate 251, 253 headlamp levelling 141 Keyboard 49 home safe lighting 153 Long-term storage 457 Keypad in the steering wheel 138 instrument lighting 141 Low battery voltage in the passenger compartment 150 Battery 427 main beam 144 Lowering the rear section 231 L position lamps 142 Low speed control 424 rear fog lamp 148 Labels 580 Lighting, bulb replacement 545 Laminated glass 32 daytime running lights/position lamps M Lamps 545 front 549 dipped beam 547 Lane Keeping Aid - LKA 368, 370, 372 Main beam 144 direction indicators front 550 Lane keeping assistant main beam 549 Maintained climate comfort 208 operation 370 start/shut-off 213 LKA - Lane Keeping Aid 368, 370, 372 Leather upholstery, washing instructions 575 maintenance Loading Rustproofing 575 License agreement 495 cargo area 230 Lifting tool 526 General 230 Max. roof load 585 Lighting load retaining eyelets 232 Media player 470 active bending lights 147 long load 231 compatible file formats 481 approach lighting 153 Loading hooks 232 voice control 121 automatic lighting, passenger compart- Load retaining eyelets Messages and symbols ment 151 cargo area 232 Adaptive Cruise Control 307 Automatic main beam 144 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 353 Lock bulbs, specifications 550 locking 245, 248 Messages in BLIS 361 controls 139, 150 unlocking 245, 248

605 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Messages in displays 110 no or poor connection 492 Park Assist 377, 379, 381 manage 112 system updates 534 function 377, 379 saved 113 Output 588 Park assist camera 382, 384, 387 Metric, Imperial, US 102 electric motor 588 settings 386 Mileage 170 outside temperature gauge 102 Parking brake 419, 420, 422 Electric operation 433 Overheating 426, 440 Parking climate 208 Misting Owner's manual 19 Symbols and messages 215 condensation in headlamps 572 ecolabelling 32 Parking heater 217 Mobile phone, see Phone 483 in centre display 15, 16 Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch 69 Monitoring system Owner information 14 Passenger compartment filter 188 Tyre pressure 511 Owner’s Manual in mobile 18 Passenger compartment heater (Parking Mood lighting 152 heater) 217 Passenger compartment interior 222 P ashtray 228 N cigarette lighter 228 PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch) 69 electrical socket 224 Net Paddle on the steering wheel 138 Sun visor 230 cargo area 235 Paintwork tunnel console 223 colour code 577 Passenger compartment lighting O damage and touch-up 577, 578 automatic 151 Panorama roof Petrol grade 431 opening and closing 164 octane rating 431 Phone 482 pinch protection 167 Oil, see also Engine oil 589, 590 Calls 485 sun blind 163 connect 483 Oil level low 542 ventilation position 166 text message 486 Online car 488 PAP - Active Park Assist 388 voice control 120 book service and repair 531 connect car 489

606 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Pilot Assist 309, 312, 313, 314, 315, R Rearview and door mirrors 316, 318, 321, 323, 324, 325, 327, 328, 330 compass 161, 162 overtaking 303 Radar sensor 296 door 159 Pinch protection, panorama roof 167 Limitations 333 electrically retractable 160 heating 198 PIN code 493 Radio 464 change and search for radio station 464 interior 160 Pocket park assist - PAP 388 DAB 468 rear window Polishing 574 settings 469 heating 198 Position lamp 142 voice control 121 Washers 156 Power operated tailgate 257, 259 Rain sensor 154 Wiper 156 Power panorama roof 163 Raising the car 537 Recommendations during driving 428 Power save mode 427 Raising the rear section 231 Recovery 443 Power seat 124, 126 Range Red Key 243 Power windows 157 during electric operation 594 Refrigerant 545 resetting 158 Rear door Refuelling 429 Preconditioning 208 sun blind 158 Remote control, HomeLink® start/shut-off 209 Rear seat 131 programmable 167 Timer 211 adjusting longitudinally 133 Remote control immobiliser 265 adjusting the backrest rake 134 Protective grille 237 Remote control key 181, 240, 243, 247 Climate control 190, 192 Pump up tyre 521 battery replacement 261 entry/exit 136 connect to driver profile 181 Puncture 516 Fan 196 detachable key blade 254 head restraint 132 loss 240 heating 205 range 242 Q lowering the backrest 135, 137 Temperature 194 Remote control key system, type approval 270 Queue Assist 309, 318, 323, 330 Remote updates 534 Queue assistance 309, 318, 323, 330 Resetting, trip meter 172

607 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Resetting the door mirrors 159 seatbelt reminder 65 Side Impact Protection System 71, 72 Resetting the power windows 158 seatbelt tensioner 63 SIM card 493 Restore settings 184 Seatbelt, see Seatbelts 62 SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 71, 72 Retractable power door mirrors 160 Seatbelt reminder 65 Skidding 428, 429 Retractable towing bracket 435 Seatbelt tensioner 63 slippery driving conditions 429 Road run-off protection 374, 376 Seats spare wheel 524 heating 205 Road sign information 362 Speed camera 364 manual front seat 123 Limitations 366 memory function front seat 125 Speed limiter 282, 286 operation 362, 364, 365 power front seat 124, 126 deactivation 285 Roll Stability Control 282 rear seat 131 getting started 283, 284 Roof load, max. weight 585 Ventilation 206 temporary deactivation 284 RSC (Roll Stability Control) 282 whiplash protection 61 Speed ratings, tyres 528 Rustproofing 575 sensors Spin control 278 Air quality 189 Stabiliser Climate control 186 trailer 440 S Sensus Stability and traction control system 278, 280 connection and entertainment 29 operation 279 Safety 60 Service position 551 Stability system 278 pregnancy 60 Service programme 530 Stains 575 Safety mode 72 Set time interval 294 start/movement 73 Starting the engine 400 Settings 174 Sealing fluid 516 Start the car 400 Categories 176 State of charge Seat, see Seats 123 Resetting 178 car function 414 Seatbelt 62 settings view 174 buckle/unbuckle 64 system settings 177 Steering force, speed related 278 pregnancy 60 Side airbag 71 Steering force level, see Steering force 278

608 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Steering lock 402 System Trailer 440 Steering wheel 138, 139 updates 534 cable 438 heating 207 driving with a trailer 438, 440 keypad 138 snaking 440 paddle 138 T Trailer stability assist 279, 440 steering wheel adjustment 139 Transmission 404 Tailgate Steering wheel paddles 408 Locking/unlocking 251, 253 Transmission oil Stone chips and scratches 577, 578 power 257, 259 grade 591 Storage spaces 222 Temperature Tread 510 glovebox 229 Control 194 Tread depth 510, 525 tunnel console 223 experienced 187 Tread wear indicators 510 Sun blind Temporary spare Trip computer 170, 172, 173 panorama roof 163 spare wheel 524 Rear door 158 Trip meter 170 Tools 442, 525 Sun visor 230 Trip meter, resetting 172 Towbar Troubleshooting Support 19 foldable 435 Adaptive Cruise Control 305 Switching off the engine 401 Towing 442, 443 TSA - trailer stability assist 279, 440 Switch off engine 401 Towing bracket 434, 435 Tunnel console 223 Symbols specifications 437 Tunnel detection 143 indicator symbols 99 Towing capacity and towball load 586 TV 477, 478 Symbols and messages Towing eye 442 Adaptive Cruise Control 307 Twin Engine TPMS - Tyre Pressure Monitoring 511, centre display status field 45 General 54 513, 515 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 353 Symbols and messages 458 Traction control 278 hybrid related 458 Type approval parking climate 215 Traffic information 469 radar system 337 remote control key system 270

609 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Type designations 580 U VOL marking 508 Tyre dimension 521, 528 Volvo ID 23 Unit standard Tyre load index 528 Trip computer 172 Tyre monitoring 511 Unlocking W Tyre pressure label 510 from the outside 245 Tyre pressure monitoring with key blade 255 Warning lamp Calibrate 515 USB Adaptive Cruise Control 296 low tyre pressure 514 connect car to Internet 489 stability and traction control system 278 Tyres 508 jack for connecting media 476 Warning lamps direction of rotation 509 Airbags – SRS 101 installation 523 alternator not charging 101 pressure 510, 596 V Fault in brake system 101 puncture repair 516 Low oil pressure 101 removal 522 Vanity mirror Parking brake applied 101 specifications 596 lighting 151 seatbelt reminder 101 storage 508 Ventilation 200, 201, 202 starter battery not charging 101 tread depth 525 seats 206 Warning 101 tread wear indicators 510 Vibration damper 434 Warning sound tyre pressure monitoring 511 Parking brake 422 winter tyres 525 Video 475, 476 settings 471 Warning symbols 101 Safety 60 Voice control Climate control 121 Warning triangle 526 map navigation 122 Washer fluid 553 phone 120 Washer nozzles, heated 156 radio and media 121 settings 120 Voice recognition 118

610 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Washers Window rear window 156 sun blind 158 washer fluid, filling 553 Windows and glass 32 windscreen 155 Windscreen Waxing 574 heating 198 Weights projected image 115 kerb weight 585 Windscreen washing 155 Wheel bolts 524 Windscreen wiper 154 lockable 524 rain sensor 154 Wheel change 521 Winter driving 428 Wheel rim, dimensions 527 Winter tyres 525 Wheel rims Winter wheels 525 cleaning 573 Wiper blades Wheels changing 552 installation 523 Service position 551 removal 522 Wipers and washing 154 snow chains 525 Wheels and tyres tyre load index and speed rating 528 whiplash protection 61 Whiplash Protection System 61 WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 61 Wi-Fi connect car to Internet 489 delete network 492 share internet connection, hotspot 491 technology and security 493

611 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

612